Audi 2016 TT Coupe Owner Manual

Owner's 2016 Audi Manual TT Coupe Vorsprung durch Te ~~?~ (HO Foreword Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us. Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality equipment a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that you read your Owner's Manual thorough ly so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features . In addition to explaining how the different features work, we provide many useful tips and information concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle and how to mainta in your vehicle's value. We also give you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environmentally friendly manner . In addition to the operating guide, you will find a quick reference gu ide and a maintenance schedule in the owner's manual. We hope you enjoy driv ing your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motor ing. AUDIAG Table About of contents this Owner's Manual. ..... 5 Cockpit ........................... Cockpit overview ................. Controls at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 17 Driver information system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel plus Multifunction steering wheel . . . Tachometer . . . . ................ Odometer . . . . . . ..... . .......... On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . 19 19 20 22 23 23 23 Starting and driving ...... Opening and closing ...... Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . Power w indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage doo r opener (Home link) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . 25 25 25 30 32 33 .. .. .. .. .. .. 8 8 9 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . 36 36 38 39 41 42 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . 44 44 45 46 47 47 48 49 Warm and cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate contro l system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 52 Driving .. . . . . . . . ............ General informat ion .......... Steering . . . . . . .............. 56 56 Lights and Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I nterior lighting . . . . . . . . V1s1on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers . . . . . . Digital compass . . . . . . . . .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... Seats and storage ......... General information . . . . . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lig hter and socket . . . . Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . . . . . . ... . . ... . . . 58 61 63 Automatic transmission ......... S tronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 64 Driver assistance ......... Assist ............................. Electronic speed limiter . . . . . . . Speed warning system . . . . . . . . Cruise control system . . . . . . . . Audi active lane assist . . . . . . . . Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi drive select (drive settings) .. .. .. .. .. .. 72 72 72 72 72 74 76 79 .. .. .. .. 82 82 82 83 84 .. .. 86 86 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 87 87 89 90 91 91 92 6 Instruments and indicator lights Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Board Diagnostic system (OBD) . . . . . . .. . .. Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . Electromechanical parking brake . . . . . . . Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Parking systems General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the display and the wa rning tones.. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intelligent Technology ...... Electronic stabilization control (ESC) Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . All w heel drive (quattro) . . . . . . . . . . Rear spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information about data recorded by vehicle control modules . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... 94 Infotainment ............... Multi Media Interface ...... Traffic safety information . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the MMI on/off . . . . . . . Operating the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control knob with joyst ick function Letter and number spelle r . . . . . . . Menus and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . Free text search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... 95 95 95 95 95 95 97 98 99 101 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 102 Table Voice recogni t ion sy st em Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command overview information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone ............. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a telephone........ Using the telephone . . . . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening to voicema il . . . . . Emergency call f unctions . . Direct ory . . . . . . ............ Addit ional set t ings . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ...... ...... .. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. . 104 . 103 . 105 . 105 .... .... . .... .... .... .... .... .... . ... .... .... . 110 . 110 110 . 112 . 114 . 114 . 116 . 117 . 117 . 119 . 120 .. .. .. .. Audi connect ..................... Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration through myAudi . . . . Overview of Aud i connect services . W i-Fi Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configur ing the data connect ion . . . About Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshoot ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 131 . 13 1 . 13 2 . 136 . 136 . 13 7 . 137 . 13 7 . 139 . 142 . 142 . 144 .. .. .. .. .. .. . 145 . 145 . 145 . 146 . 147 . 147 . . N av,gatron .................... Opening navigat ion . . . . . . . Enter ing a dest inat ion . . . . . Cancel ing route guidance . . Creat ing a home address . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating directory contacts . Addit ional settings . . . . . . . Map. . . . . . . . . . . . ............ Onli ne map view. . . . . . . . . . Accessing traffic information Troubleshoot ing . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... ..... ...... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing t he radio . . . Radio functions . . . . . . Radio menu . . . . . . . . . Favorit es . . . . . . . . . . . . Addit ional set t ings . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 121 12 1 12 1 122 123 126 127 128 130 of contents Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . Introd uction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth aud io player . . . . . . . . . Wi -Fi audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online med ia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mult imed ia connections . . . . . . . . Support ed med ia and file formats Playing media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Troub leshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 166 166 166 167 168 169 169 170 170 ............................ 171 17 1 171 172 17S 17S 176 178 System set t ings ................ Setting the date and time . . . . . MMI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection manage r . . . . . . . . . System update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sound settings . . .................. Volume settings .................... Restarting the MMI (reset) ..... Notes on softwa re li censes Safety .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 149 149 149 150 152 153 154 155 157 159 162 164 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... Safe driving .................. Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct passenger seating positions . Drive r and passenger side foo twe ll . . Pedala rea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belt s . . . . . General notes . . . . . . Why saf ety belts? . . Safety belts . . . . . . . Safety belt tensioner . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 180 180 181 184 186 Airb a g sy stem . . .................. 188 Important informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Moni t oring the Advanced Airbag System . 199 Knee air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 3 Tabl e of content s Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Child safety ............... I mportant information . . . . . . . . Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . LATCHsystem (Lower anchorages tethers for children) . . . . . . . . . . Addit ional information . . . . . . . . .... .... .... .... and .... .... Ma i ntenance and Care ........... Ch e cking and Filling ........ Fuel ...... . . . . . ................ Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic converte r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eng ine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . Eng ine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W indshield washer system . . . . . . . Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . 212 212 218 223 . . . 226 . . . 230 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 231 231 23 1 232 235 236 239 242 244 245 248 249 Fuse s and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Electrica l fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28S Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Emergency situation s .... General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start ing by pushing or tow ing . . Start ing with j umper cables . . . Use of jumper cables . . . . . . . . . Towing with a tow truck . . . . . . Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . Care and cleaning ............... General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and care information ....... . Placing your veh icle out of service . . . . 270 270 270 27 1 274 275 275 275 275 275 Replacing whee ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Do It Yourself ......... Emergency as s istance General informa t ion . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . ............ Tire mob il ity kit . . . . . . . . . . 4 ........ ........ ........ . ... ........ .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... Consumer information and technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumer information .......... War ranty coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operat ing you r vehicle out side t he U.S.A. or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 288 288 288 289 290 292 294 294 294 294 Audi Service Repair Manuals and Literat ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Accessories and technical changes . . . . . . 296 Technical Wheels . . . . . . . . ............ . ... . . . 250 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Tire pressure monitoring system 267 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Vehicle identification Weights . . . . . . . . . . Dimens ions . . . . . . . . Capacities . . . . . . . . . Gasoli ne engines Index ....... .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... ... ... ... ... . . . ... . . . .......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... 298 298 299 299 300 . .. 301 A b out t hi s Owner This manual contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings for using your vehicle. Keep this manua l in yo ur vehicle at all times. This is especially important if you loan yo ur vehicle to others or sell it. This owner's manu al descr ibes the equipment rang e specified fo r th is mode l at the time of printing . Individua l equipment options described may on ly be availab le at a later date or may only be offered in certain countries. {® 's M a nual For the sake of the environment Text with this symbol contains information on protecting the env ironment . (D Tips Text with this symbol contains additional use ful information. Some sect ions in this manual do not apply to all vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of the section indicates the validity , for example "Applies to: vehicles with BiXenon headlights". Opt iona l or vehicle-specific equipment is also ident ified with an asterisk"*". The illust ration s are designed as a general guide and on your vehicle may look slight ly different than what is illustrated. There is a Table of Cont ents at the beginning of this owner's manual that lists a ll of the topics covered in this book in the order that they appear. There is also an a lphabetical Inde x at the end of this owner's manual. All direct ion s, such as "left", "right", "front" and "rear", are based on the vehicle's direction of travel. * ... Optiona l or vehicle -specific equipment The section cont inues on the next page. c::> .&. Cross reference to a "WARNING" w it hin a section. If a page numbe r is indicated, the WARNING is located outs ide of t he section. _& WARNING Text with this symbol contains information about safety and how to reduce the risk of se rious personal inj ury or death. (D - Note Text wit h th is symbo l conta ins info rmation about reduci ng the risk of damage to your vehicle. 5 Cockpit overview Cockpit Controls overview at a glance Fig. 1 Cockpit : left section Fig. 2 Cockpit: rig ht sect ion 6 Coc k pit o v e rv iew (!) Side assist display . .... ........ 76 @) Drives for @ Door handle ® Cent ral locking switch © ® Air vent with seat heating controls 29 Lever for: - Turn signals and high beams . . . - Active lane assist ® Multifunction ......... ... 37 74 steering wheel with : - Horn - Driver's airbag .. . ........ ... 192 - Shift paddles . . ... .. . . . ... . . Aud i vir t ual cockpit (instrument cluster) . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . @ W indshield washer system lever ® @ Front passenge r's airbag ...... . @ Rear window defogger button @ Depend ing o n equ ipment, buttons - drive select . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 79 - Elect ronic St abilization Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 87 - Eme rgency flashe rs ...... . - Multimedia compartment for cell phone ... . . . . . ............ . 155 - Aud i phone box . . . . .. ... . . . . 11 1 @ I nfot ain ment system o n/off but ton @ Infotainment system unit @ Depend ing o n equ ipment: 95 @) Depending on equipment, center console with : 68 8 41 - Ashtray @ @ @ @ Adjustab le st eering column ..... 58 - Cup holder Cruise control lever .. .. . . . ... . . 72 I nst rument il lum ination . . . . . . . . 39 Hood release . . ... . ........ ... 0 Light switch . . . ... . ........ ... ........ . .. . 38 91 60 system controls . . . .... 192 for : start ing the eng ine when t here is a mal f unct ion . . . .......... ..... @ Power exterior mirror adjustment @ Power windows . . ... .. . . . ... . . @ Air vent includ ing climate cont rol 150 CD, DVD, SIM/SD cards - Retractab le rear spoiler ...... - Controls for the virtual instrument cluster includ ing the driver information system, aud io/video, telephone, navigation and voice recogn ition system 0 @ Lockable glove compartment - Storage compartment 236 36 39 32 52 . . . . . . . . ........... . . . . . . . ......... @ Parking brake . . . . . . . . . .... @ ISTART ENGIN E STOP ! button @ Selector lever (S tronic) (D . 47 . 48 ... 61 ... 58 64 Tips Some the equipm ent li sted here is only installed in certa in models or is available as an option. 7 In s trumen ts and ind ica tor ligh ts Instruments and indicator Lights Instruments Audi virtual cockpit (instrument cluster) The instrument cluster is the central information center for the driver. Fig. 3 Instrume nt cluster overview (D Engine coolant temperature @ Driver information system ..... ® Fuel level . . . ... . .......... @ Trip odometer reset knob ...... 8 . 19 ... 8 . 23 Coolant temperature indicator The coolan t temperature display i=!>page 8, fig. 3 (D only functions when the ignition is switched on. To prevent engine damage, please observe the following notes about the temperature ranges. Cold rang e If o nly the LEDs in the left area of the ga uge turn on, the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accelerating and heavy engine loads . Normal range The engine has reached its operating temperature once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge turn on under norma l driving conditions . The LEDsfarther to the right may turn on if the engine is under heavy load or the outside temperature is high. This is no cause for concern as long 8 as the . indicator light in the Infotainment d isplay does not turn on. If the red LED in the rig ht s ide of the display and the . indicator light in the d isplay turn on, the coolant temperature is too high i=>page 12 . (D Note - Auxiliary headlights and ot her accessories in front of the cooling-air intake impa ir t he cooling effect of the coolant . This increases the risk of the engine overheating dur ing high outs ide temperatures and heavy engine load . - The f ront spoiler also helps to distribute cooling air correctly while driving. If the spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will be impaired and the risk of the eng ine overheating will increase . See an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Se rvice Facility for assistance. Fuel level The ind icator @ on ly func t ions when t he ignition is sw itched on. If the fuel level drops below 1.9 gal (7 L), the left LEDwill light up red and the ~ ... Instruments and ind icator indicator light w ill t urn on <=> page 16 . The bot tom LED blinks red when the fue l level is very low . Canada models: Brake syste m <=> page 11 The fuel tan k capaci ty of yo ur vehicle is list ed in page 299. the Technical Data section <=> USA models: Electromechanical <=> page 12 (D Note Never dr ive unti l t he t ank is com ple t ely e m pty. The irregu la r supp ly of fu el t hat resul t s from t hat can ca use en g ine misfi res. Uncom busted fuel will then ente r the exhaust sys tem . This can ca use overheating an d damage to the cata lytic converter. Indicator Lights Description The indic at or ligh t s in t he instr ument cluste r blink or t ur n on. They indica t e func t ions or ma lfunctions. parking brake Canada models: Elec t rome chanic al parking brake <=> page 12 Cooli ng sys t em <=> page 12 Engine oil press ur e <=> page 13 Alte rna t or <=> page 13 Engine stop while d riving <=> page 13 Front safety belt <=> page 13 W it h some indicator lights , m essages ma y appea r and war ning sig na ls m ay sound. The ind icator ligh t s a nd m essages in the d isplay can be cove red by othe r displays . To show them aga in, select the tab for t he indicator lights and messages using the mu ltifunction stee ring wheel <=> page 19. If there are several malfunct ions, you can d isplay them o ne at a time usi ng the thumbw heel. Electromechanical <=> page 90 Some ind icators lights in the display can turn on in several colo rs . USA models: Speed warning system* <=> page 72 Overview Some ind icator lights tu rn on briefly as a function check whe n you swi t ch the ig nit ion on . These syst ems are mark ed with a ./ in t he following tables . If one of t hese indica t or ligh t s does not t ur n on, the re is a m al func tion in t hat syst e m . lights steering ./ Steering lock <=>page13 Centra l ind icator light <=>page14 Engine sta rt system <=> page 14 Canada models: Speed warning system* <=>page72 Transmission ma lfunction <=> page 70 Rear spoiler <=>p age 91 Red indicator lights --------------USA models: Bra ke sys t em <=> page 11 Yellow indicator lights USA models: sa fety systems ./ <=> page 15 Canada models: safety systems ./ <=> page 15 9 Instruments and indicator Electronic Stabilization lights Control (ESC) Headlight range control system ¢ page 16 Control (ESC) Adaptive light* ¢ page 17 .f ¢ page 14 Electronic Stabilization .f ¢ page 14 Light/rain sensor* ¢ page 17 USA models: anti-lock b raking system (ABS)./ ¢ page 14 - Canada models: anti -lock braking Transmission ¢ page 70 system (ABS) ./ ¢page 14 Steering lock ¢ page 13 Brake pads ¢page 15 Engine start system ¢ page 14 Electromechanical ¢ page 12 Tire pressure monitoring system./ ¢ page268 Electromechanical ¢ page 90 Tire pressure monitoring system ¢page268 Damper control* <=:> page 17 Engine control ¢ page 15 Rear spoiler ¢ page 91 System indicator light (MIL) ¢ page 15 Speed warning system* <=:> page 72 Engine speed limitation ¢ page 15 Other indicator lights Engine oil level ¢ page 15 ~ Engine oil sensor ¢ page 16 ' steering./ ..llii1!Turn signals !!11!.i¢ page 17 USA models: cruise control system* c:>page 72 CRUISE Battery charge ¢ page 13 Canada models: cruise control system* c:>page 72 Tank system ¢ page 16 Active lane assist* c:>page 75 Washer fluid level ¢page 16 Convenience key <=:> page 60 Windshield wipers ¢ page 16 Electromechanical c:>page 12 Remote control key ¢ page 60 Active lane assist* ¢ page 75 Battery in remote control key ¢ page27 Audi side assist* <=:> page 79 Bulb failure indicator* ¢ page 16 10 Central indicator light ¢ page 14 parking brake • - Transmission c:>page70 parking brake Instruments Electr omechanical parking brake c::>page12 Rear safety belt ../ c::>page17 Rear safety belt ../ c::>page17 High beams c::> page 3 7 BRAKE/( (j)) Brake system If t his indicator lig ht tur ns on, there is a malfunc tion in t he brake system . 1111( USA models ) , • (Canada models ) Brakes: stop vehicle and check brak e fluid level St op the vehicle and check the brake f luid level. See an aut horized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Service Facility fo r assistance if necessary. 1111( USA models ) , • (Canada models) Warning! No brake booster and ind icator lights author ized Audi Service Facility . If you can release the parkin g brake and the message still appears, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili ty immediately to have the ma lfunction corrected. - If the ind icator light and message appear while driving , the hill start assist or emergency braking fu nction may be ma lfunctioning. It may not be possible to set the park ing brake or release it once it has been set. Do not park your vehicle on hills and see an autho rized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for assist ance. 1111 FiJ (USA mode ls): if t he and indicator ligh t s tur n on toget her, have t he brake system checked immedi ately by an aut hori zed Audi dealer or auth orized Audi Service Facili ty c::> page 15 . There is also a wa rning tone when the lights t urn on. _&.WARNING - Read and fo llow t he warning s in If brake assist (brake booster) is not work ing, you have to use m uch more force whe n braking the vehicle. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. 1111( USA models ) , • (Canada models ) Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle safely If the ABS indicato r light fJ]](USA mode ls) / ¢G»(Canada mode ls), the ESCindicato r light Jjl, and the brake system ind icator light (USA models), . (Canada mode ls) turn on and th is message appears, then the ABS, ESCand braking distr ibut ion are malfu nctioning c::>,&.. 1111 Drive to your autho rized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the malfunct ion corrected c::> ,&.. 1111(USA models ) , • (Canada models ) Park- ing brake: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. Please contact Service - If the indicator light and the message appear c::> page 23 6, Working in th e engine compartmen t befo re opening t he hood and checking the brake fluid level. - If the brake system indi cator lig ht does not tur n off or it turns on w hil e driving, the brake fl uid level in the reservoir is too low, and this increases the risk of an accident. Stop the vehicle and do not continue driving. See an autho rized Audi deale r or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. - If the brake system indicator lig ht t urns on together wit h the ABS and ESCindicato r lights , t he ABS/ ESC regu lating fu nct ion may be malfunct ion ing. Funct ions t hat stabilize the vehicle are no longer avail able. This could cause t he rear of t he vehicle to swerve, w hich increases t he risk t hat t he vehicle wi ll slid e. Drive caref ully to t he nearest author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility and have t he malf unction corrected. when the vehicle is stationary or after switching the ignition on, check if you can release the park ing brake. If you cannot release the parking brake, see your authorized Audi deale r or 11 Instruments and indicator lights PARK/( ®)/'~ Electromechanical parking brake I. If t he (USA models) (Cana da mo d els) ind icator light t ur ns on, the park ing bra ke was set. If t he indica t or ligh t blink s and t he message ap pears, there is not enoug h braking powe r to secu re the ve hicle . The brakes have ove rheate d. The vehicle could roll away even on a small incl ine. ll;1;11:);JJ3~ (USA models) / [(C)) <Canada models) Parking brake: applied (USA models) / . (Canada models) Parking brake: caution! Vehicle parked too steep If t he ind icator lig ht blinks and th e message ap pea rs, the re is not eno ugh br akin g power t o se cure t he vehicle. The bra kes have overhe at ed. The ve hicle co uld ro ll away eve n on a small incline . If t his me ssage appe ar s, pr ess t he bra ke ped al firs t and t hen rele ase the par king bra ke if nece ssa ry. (D For ad dit iona l informat ion on t he pa rking bra ke, refe r to ¢ page 61. (USA models) / . (Canada models) Please press brake pedal to release parking brake To re lease the park ing bra ke, press t he bra ke pedal and press th e~ button at t he same t ime, or st art d riving wit h hill start ass ist ¢page 62, Star t ing fr om a st op. l'IJParking brake: malfunction! See owner' s manual There is a malfunction in the park ing brake. Drive to a n author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Serv ice Facility immediately to have t he malfunction cor rec t ed. @ Parking brake: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. Please contact Service There is a malfunction in the parking bra ke. Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Serv ice Facility immediately to have the malfunction correc t ed . ll;l;l:t:l;JJ3~ (USA models ) / Ii] (Canada models) Please release parking brake. Re lease the par king brake if t his message appears. !l]jll:l;J;1:0 (USA models) I Ii] (Canada models) Parking brake auto release unavailable If t his message appears, press the bra ke pe dal fir st and the n release the par king br ak e. IZJ;l:t :);tJ3~ (USA models) 1 [(C)a (Canada models ) Parking brake: caution! Vehicle parked too steep 12 Tips -L Cooling system • Turn off engine and check coolant level The coo la nt level is t oo low. Do no t continue dr iving and switch the e ng ine off. Chec k t he coolant leve l ¢ page 242 . - If the coo lant level is too low, add coolant ¢ page 242. Only continue dr iving once the indicato r ligh t turns off. • Coolant temperature: too high . Let engine run with vehicle stationary Let the engine ru n at idle fo r a few mi nutes to cool off, until t he ind icator light t urns off. - If the indica tor ligh t doe s not tu rn off , do not cont inue d riving the veh icle . See a n au thorized Audi dea le r or a ut horized Audi Service Facility for assistance. .8_ WARNING - Never open the hood if you can see or hea r steam or coolant escaping from t he engine compa rtment. This increases the risk of burns. Wa it until you no lo ng er see o r hear st ea m or coo la nt escaping. - The engine compa rtment in any vehicle can be a dange rous a rea. Stop t he engine and allow it to coo l befo re wor king in the eng ine co mp art me nt . Always follow the info rm apag e 236, Working in t he tion found in r::!> engine compar t ment. .,.. Instruments (D and ind icator lights ~ Engine stop while driving Note Do not contin ue driving if the . ind icator light t ur ns o n - th is increases the ris k of engine damage. • Engine stopped : no power steering or brake servo possible The re is a ma lfunct ion in th e engine or in the fuel supply system. 't:::1: Engine oil pressure • Turn off engine. Oil pressure too low Stop the engine and do not continue driving. Chec k the engine oil leve l ¢ page 240 . - If t he engi ne oil leve l is too low, add engine oil ¢ page 240 . Only continue driv ing once the indicato r light turns off. More force is needed to steer and brake the moving vehicle whe n the engine is stopped . If the ve hicle is rolling, tr y to br ing it to a stop off to th e side from mov ing traffic. Se e an author ized Audi de aler or au t hor ized Audi Se rvice Facility for as sist anc e. A_ Tips The oi l pressure warning is not an oil level indicator . Always check the oil level reg ula rly. 0 Alternator/battery • Electric system: malfunction! Battery is not being charged There is a malfunction in the alternator hicle elect rical system. ~ Front safety belt The . indicator light st ays on un t il the dr iver's and front passenge r's* safety be lts are fas t ened . Above a cer tai n speed, th e re will a lso be a war ning tone. (D or the ve- Drive to an autho rized Aud i de al e r or a ut horized Audi Service Facility immediately. Turn off all unnecessary electr ica l equ ipment because it w ill d rain the batte ry. See your authorized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility if the battery charge level is too low. (•) Electrical system: low battery charge. Please turn on ignition The sta rting ability may be impaired. If t his message turns off afte r a litt le while , the battery ch ar ge d enoug h while d riving. If the message does not turn off, have and a uthor ized Audi dealer or au t hor ized Audi Se rvice Facility rep air t he malfunc t ion . - If the engine st o ps w hile dr iving, you will need to use more force to brake the vehicle. This increases t he risk of an accident. There will still be power stee ring if the ignition is switched on while the vehicle is ro lling and the re is suff icient battery charge. Ot herwise, you must use g reater force when st ee ring. - If t he engine oil leve l is co rrec t and t he ind icator light st ill blinks, turn the eng ine off and do not cont inue drivi ng. See an autho rized Aud i dealer or author ized Audi Se rvice Facility for ass istance. @ WARNING Tips For addi t ion al informat io n on sa fety belts, refer to ¢ page 180 . @- • Steering lock Steering : malfunction! Please stop vehicle The re is a ma lfunct ion in the el ectron ic st eer ing lock. You canno t tur n the ign ition on. Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be stee red . See an a uthorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Se rvice Facility for ass istance . l!'iltSteering lock: malfunction! Please contact Service The re is a ma lfunction in the e lectron ic steering lock. 13 ..,. Instruments and indicator lights II Drive t o an a utho rized Audi dea ler or a ut horized Aud i Service Facility immediately to have t he malfunct ion corrected . .&_WARNING If the ind icator light tu rns on, ESC sport button mode was switched on using the I~ OFFI ¢ page 88. You can turn the ESC on aga in by press the I~ OF FIbutton aga in . . Do not tow your veh icle when there is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock - this increases the risk of an accident . LhCentral indicator light D If the . or indicator light turns on, check the message in the inst rument cluste r. Stabilization control (ESC): off. Warning! Reduced stability II If t he ind icator lig ht turns o n, t he ESC was reIbu tt on stri cte d or sw itche d off using t he I~ OFF ¢ page 88. The message ESCOFFalso appea rs. You can turn the ESC o n again by press the I~ OFF Ibutton aga in. The syst em switc hes on when the ignit ion is indicator ligh t turns off swit ched on . The when the system is functioning fu lly. II ©- Engine start system • Engine start system: malfunction! Plea se contact Service Stabilization control (ESC): malfunction! See owner's manual Do not switch the ign it io n off because you may not be able to switc h it o n aga in . Stabilization control (ESC/ ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual Drive to an authorized Aud i dea ler or authori zed Aud i Serv ice Facility immediately to have t he malfunct io n corrected. ABS: malfunction! See owner 's manual 111:1 Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service There is a malfunction tem. in the engine start ing sys- Drive to an a ut horize d Aud i de al e r or a ut horized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunctio n corrected . ;J.! f). Electronic stabilization control (ESC) and (8 ) anti-lock braking system (ABS) If t he Ji) indicato r light blin ks w hile driving, t he ESC or ASR (Anti-S lip Reg ulation) is actively reg ulating. If the Ii) indicator light turns on, the system has sw itched the ESC off . In this case, you can switch the ign ition off and then on to switch the ESC on aga in. The indicator ligh t turns off when the system is func ti oning fully. Stabilization control (ESC) : sport . Warning! Reduced stability 14 DJ If the ind icator light and t he ABS indicato r light fJ] (USA mode ls)/ [iJ (Canada models) turn on and this message appears, there is a malfunct ion in the ABS system or electro nic different ia l lock. This also causes t he ESC to malfunction . The bra kes st ill fu nction with their normal power, but ABS is not active . Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Se rvice Facil ity immed iate ly to have t he malfunction cor rec t ed . .&_WARNING 11111 If t he (USA models) • (Canada mode ls) brak e syst em indica t or ligh t t urns on to ge t her with the ABS and ESC indi cator ligh t s, the ABS/ESC regula t ing func t ion may have failed . Fun ctions t hat stabilize the vehicle a re no longer ava ila ble . This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which increases the risk that the vehicle will slide. Drive ca refully to t he nearest aut horized Aud i dea ler or a uthorized Audi Service Facility and have t he malfunction cor rect e d. Instruments @ II If the indicator light turns on if there is a malfunction in the engine control. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the engine checked. BRAKEl <O} Brake pads 1111(USA models) / rlJ(Canada models) Brake pads! o If th e warning light turns on, immediately contact you r authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have all brake pads inspected . Both sets of brake pads on an axle must always be replaced at the same time . WARNING - Driving with bad brakes can cause a collision and serious personal injury. - If the warning light or the warning light l) with the message Brake pads! comes on in the instrument cluster display, immediately contact your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have all brake pads checked or replaced if necessary. 1111 rlJ System indicator light (MIL ) The system indicator light (MIL) is part of the On Board Diagnostic system (OBD II). ThP ¢.j c;ymbol turns on when the ignition is switched on and turns off again once the engine is started and running at a steady idle speed. This indicates that the MIL is functioning correctly. The indicator light turns on if there is a malfunction in the engine electronics. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected . For additional information, refer to ¢ page 17. !?\ Engine speed limitation Applies to vehicles w ith engine speed l imitation (Pl Maximum fflJ!J.:Safety systems m II The (USA models)/ (Canada models) indicator light monitors the safety systems. Safety system II m If the (USA models)/ (Canada models) indicator light turns on or blinks, there is a malfunction in a safety system. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. A ..... N a: co lights ~ Engine control Tips For additional information on ESCand ABS, refer to ¢ page 87. A and indicator WARNING - Have the safety systems inspected immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk that the systems may not activate during a collision, which increases the risk of serious injury or death . engine speed: XXXX rpm The engine speed is automatically limited to the speed displayed in the driver information system. This protects the engine from overheating. The engine speed limitation deactivates once the engine is no longer in the critical temperature range and you have released the accelerator pedal once. If the engine speed limitation was activated by an engine control malfunction, the indicator light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed does not go above the speed displayed, for example when downshifting. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. II ~ Engine oil level (min. ) Ill Please check oil level ..... <J:) Lil ..... :=: 1) - : USA model s only 15 Instruments and indicator lights You may contin ue driving for the time being . Check the engine oil level as soon as possib le ¢ pag e 239. · ,_ Washer fluid level - If t he engine oil level is too low, add engine oil ¢ page 240 . - If t he engine oil level is correc t and the indicator light st ill turns on, drive at low engine speed to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlight washer system* when the ignit ion is switched off ¢ page 248. ~°"'Engine mPlease add was her fluid '9 !Windshield wipers @ Windshield wipers : malfunction! Please conta ct Service oil sensor Ill Oil level system: malfunction! Please contact Service The senso r to check the engine oil level has fa iled . Drive to an autho rized Audi dea ler or aut hor ized Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have t he ma lfunction corrected. [IJ Tank system D Please refuel If the indicator light turns on for the first time and the message appears, there are about 1.9 ga l (7 L) of fue l left in the tank. D Please refuel immediately If t he indicator light t ur ns on the message appears, the fue l tank is almos t empty. Refuel the vehicle immediate ly. D Tank syste m: malfun ction! Please contact Service If the indicator light t urns on and th is message appears, there is a malfunc t ion in the tank system. Drive to an autho rized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunct ion corrected. @) For the sake of the environment Fuel should never enter the sewer system or come into contact with the ground. There is a ma lfunction with t he winds hield wipers . Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. -:q>.Bulb failure indicator II If the ind icator light turns on, a bulb has failed . The message indica t es t he location of the bulb. Replace the bulb immed iate ly. Vehicle light s : malfunction! Please contact Service There is a ma lfunction in the headlights or the light switch. Drive t o an author ized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected . &. WARNING - - Light bulbs are under pressure and can explode when bulbs are replaced, wh ich increases the risk of injury. - With gas-discharge lamps* (xenon headlights), the high-voltage component must be handled approp riately. Otherw ise, there is a risk of fatal injury. ~(D Headlight range control system II Headlight range control: malfunction! See owne r's manual (D Tips More informat ion on refueling is available on page ¢ page 232 . 16 There is a ma lfunction in the headlight range contro l system , which may cause glare for other drivers. .,.. Instruments Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. ~O Audi adaptive light Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light rJJ Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See owner's manual and indicator lights ¢ Q Turn signals B If the. or indicator light blinks , a turn signal is turned on. If both indicator lights are blinking, the emergency flashers are on. In an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual, then a turn signal bulb has failed. Replace the bulb immediately. There is a malfunction in the adaptive lights . The headlights still function. Applies to: vehicles wit h rear safety belt detection Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. The respective indicator light will turn on briefly when a safety belt on the rear seats is fastened or unfastened. /i.D Light / rain sensor II Automatic headlights: malfunction! See owner's manual II Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's manual The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning . The low beams remain switched on at all times for safety reasons when the light switch is in the AUTO position. You can continue to turn the lights on and off using the light switch. You can still control all wiper functions that are independent of the rain sensor. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. ; Damp er control Applies to: veh icles with Audi drive select R Suspension: malfunction! You may continue driving There is an adaptive damper malfunction. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. (di~ Rear safety belt f!I-If this indicator light turns on briefly, the safety belt on the rear seat is not fastened. II- If this indicator light turns on briefly, the safety belt on the rear seat was fastened . • - If this indicator light blinks, the safety belt was unfastened while driving . Above a certain speed, there will also be a warning tone. (D Tips For additional information on safety belts, refer to ~page 180. On-Board Diagnostic system (OBD) System indicator light (MIL ) II The system indicator light (MIL) in the instru ment cluster is part of the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II). The warning/indicator light turns on when the ignition is switched on and turns off once the en gine is started and is running in idle at a stable speed . This indicates that the MIL is functioning correctly. If the light does not turn off after starting the engine or turns on while driving, this may indicate there is a malfunction in the engine . If the indicator turns on, the catalytic converter may be damaged . ..,. 17 Instruments and indicator lights Drive with reduced engine performance (avoid high speeds for extended periods of time and/ or fast acceleration) and have the malfunction corrected. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. The indicator may turn on if the electronic speed lim iter is fau lty . For additional information, refer to c>page 72, Electronic speed limiter. On-Board Diagnostics ponent will be identified and the fault stored as a code in the contro l module memory. The MIL light may also illum inate if there is a leak in the on-boa rd fuel vapor recovery system. If the light illuminates after a refuelling, stop the vehicle and make sure the fue l filler cap is properly closed c>page 233 . In order to make an accurate diagnosis, the stored data can only be displayed using special d iagnostic equipment (generic scan tool for OBD). In order to connect the special diagnostic equipment, push the plug into the Data Link Connector (DLC). The DLCis located to the right of the hood release c>fig. 4. Your authorized Audi dealer or a qua lified se rvice station can interpret the code and perform the necessary repair . Fig. 4 Locat ion of Data Link Connector (DLC) On-Board Diagnostics monitors the components of your emission control system. Each monitored component in your engine system has been assigned a code . In case of a malfunction, the com- 18 ./1.WARNING Do not use the diagnostic connector for personal use. Incorrect usage can cause malfunctions, which can increase the risk of a collision! - Driver Driver information in fo rma t ion system system Overview Fig. S Driver information system diag ram : classic view Fig. 6 Driver information system diagram: expanded view The driver information system displays various items: @ Tachometer @ Left additional display (divided in two sections in the expanded view) @ Tab area @ Central area ® Status line (displayed on one or two lines) @ Right additional disp lay (divided in two sections in the expanded view) 0 .... N a: Tachometer A WARNING CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Do not assume the roads are free of ice based on the outside temperature display . Be aware that there may be ice on roads even when the outside temperature is around 41 °F (+S °C) and that ice can increase the risk of accidents. (D Tips - You can select the units used for temperature, speed and other measurements in the Infotainment system. - If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual temperature outside due to the heat radiating from the engine . - At temperatures below 41 °F (+S °C), a snowflake symbol appears in front of the temperature disp lay~ ,& . 19 Dri v er information Multifunction wheel plus system steering 5. Tab Navigat ion* ¢ page 131 Map* 6. Tabb> Sound ¢ page 166 Audi connect* ¢page 121 Settings ¢ page 166 Operating Apples to: vehicles with multifunctio n steerin g wheel plus The Multifunction steering wheel plus* hos 14 buttons. You con use them to operate the driver information system and the MMI functions, change the volume and switch the voice recognition system* on and off. a) This tab is only visible if at least one indicator light or message is shown or if the correspond ing system is switc hed on. bl The contents of the tab depend on the men u that was used last. ® button I I <11> - Switching tabs : press the I<Jt> Ibutton to the left/right (for example, radio) . @ !VIEWIbutton - Switching views: press the IVIEWIbutton to switch from the classic¢ page 19, fig. 5 to the expanded ¢ page 19, fig. 6 view. Fig. 7 Infotainment system display @ button l2J - Returning to functions at higher levels: press the ~ button. @ 12]and 0 control buttons - Opening the selection menu : press the left control button. - Opening the options menu: press the right control button. 0 Fig. 8 Multifunction steering whee l operat ion Requirement: the ign ition must be switched on . The driver information system contains multiple tabs (D that display various informat ion @ . The fo ll owing tabs are available, depending on vehicle equipment : 1. Tab Vehicle 2. Taba) Warnings 3. Tab Radio¢ page 145 Media~ page 149 4. Tab Telephone* ¢ page 110 20 Left thumbwheel - Selecting a function in a menu/list : turn the left thumbwheel to the desired function in a menu or list (such as selecting a station, Lap times*). - Confirming a selection: press the left thumbwheel (for example, confirm the station). - Zooming in/out on the map : when a map is displayed, turn the left thumbwheel up/down to zoom in/out on the map. Driver Control buttons App lies to: vehicles with multifu nction steering wheel plus in f orma t ion system Preset buttons Applies to: vehicles with mult ifunctio n steering wheel plus Fig. 10 Multi fun ctio n steerin g whee l, ri ght side CDbutton [a - Accepting a call : when there is an incoming call, press the Fig. 9 Opening th e select ion and opt ions menu 0 button . - Ending a call: press the [a button during an active phone call. - Opening the call list : if no phone call is in progress and there are no incoming calls, press the 0 button. @ button 5l Left control button - Opening the selection menu : press the left co ntro l bu t to n Ill~ fig . 9. You can now select and co nfirm a fu nction in the selec t ion menu using the left thumbwheel (for example, selecting a frequency band) . Right control button - Opening the options menu : press the right co ntro l but ton [g ~ fig . 9 . You can now adjus t any context-de pende nt func t ions an d settings using t he left t hu mbwheel (for example, sou nd settings) . - Switching the voice recognition system on: briefly press the ~ button. Say the desired command after the Beep. - Switching the voice recognition system off : hold down the ~ button. Or: say the command Cancel. For more info rmat ion abou t the voice recognition system, refe r to ~ page 104, Voice recognition system. @ Right thumbwheel You can adjus t the vol um e of an a udio source or a system message (for exa mple, fr om t he voice recognition system) when t he sou nd is playing. - Increasing or decreasing the volume : turn the .... righ t thumbw heel upward or downw ar d . - Muting or pausing: turn t he right t humbwhee l downward . Or: press the right th umbwheel. - Unmuting or resuming : turn the right thumbwheel upwa rd. Or: press t he righ t thumbwheel. .,,_ N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 21 Dri v er information © button system (D Operating the driver information system l1<1<1 I l1>1>1 I - Selecting the previous/next tr ack or station : press t he ll<l<i l or lt>1>1 I but t on. - Fast forwarding / rewinding audio file s: press 1I but ton un t il t he desired and ho ld the !1q<]Ior l1>1> location in the fi le is reached . @ button @ - Programmable steering wheel button - opening a function : press the@ bu tt on on t he mul- t ifunct ion st eer ing whee l. - Programmable steering wheel button - requesting a function : hold dow n the Ill button. - Programmable steering wheel button - changing a function : selec t the first tab > Vehicle settings > Steering whe el button assignment . The dr iver information system con ta ins mu lt iple tabs (!) t hat disp lay var ious information @ . The following t abs a re available, depe nding on vehicle eq uipment: l. Tab Vehicle 2. Taba) War nings 3. Tab Radio q page 145 Media ¢ page 149 4. Tabb) Sound ¢page 166 Settings <=.>p age 166 a) This tab is only visible if at least one indicator light or message is shown or if the correspo nding system is switc hed on. b) ® button 1~·"1 - Repeating the last voice guidance: press t he 1~""1 button w hen route g uidance is active . - Changing the voice guidance volume : when route g uidanc e is active, turn the right thumbwhee l upward or dow nward d uring voice guidan ce. Multifunction wheel steering Operating The multifunction steering wheel has four buttons. With this feature, you can operate the driver information syst em and the MMI functions and you can also change th e volume . The contents of the tab depe nd on the me nu that was used last . - IMODEI: press the I MODE i button until the de - sired tab is displayed. - Turning the left thumbw heel: turn the left thumbwhee l to the desired functio n. - Press ing the left t hu mbw heel: press the left thumbwhee l to confirm yo ur se lection. - Quickly turning t he left t hum bwhee l: quickly t urn the left thum bwhee l to scroll in the list . @ iVIEWI button - Swit ching views: pre ss the IVIEWI button to sw itc h from the cla ss ic q page 19, fig. 5 to the expande d q poge 19, fig. 6 view . @ Right thumbwheel The vol ume of an a udio source or a system message (such as traffic announcements) can be direct ly adju sted during t he au dio ou t pu t . - Increasing or decreasing the volume : turn the right thumbwheel upward or downwa rd . - Muting or pausing: turn the right thumbwhee l downward . Or: press the right thumbwheel. - Unmuting or resuming : turn the right thumbwheel upward. Or: press the right thumbw heel. Fig . 11 Standard multifun ct ion steering wheel Requ irement: the ign ition must be switched on . 22 Driver in fo rma t ion system Tachometer Left odometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). The left odometer shows the total number of miles or kilometers that the vehicle has driven. The beginning of the red zone in the tachometer indicates the maximum permissible engine speed for all gears once the engine has been broken in and when it is warm. Before reaching the red zone, you should shift into the next higher gear, choose the Dor S selector lever position , or remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Malfunction indicator @ If there is a malfunction in the instrument cluste r, DEF will appear in the trip odometer display. Have the malfunction repaired as soon as possible. On-board computer Note The needle in the tachometer may only be in the red area of the gauge for a short per iod of time or there is a risk of damaging the engine. The location where the red zone begins varies depending on the engine. @) For the sake of the environment Upshifting early helps you to save fuel and reduce operating noise. Odometer Fig. 13 Inst rument cluster: fuel consumpt ion display You can call up the following information in the on-board computer: -T ime and date ¢ page 166 - Average consumption - Short -t erm memory overview - Long-term memory overv iew Fig. 12 Instrument cluste r: odometer and reset button .... N a: CX) The display of distance driven is shown in miles "mi" or kilometers "km" . The units of measurement can be changed in the Infota inment system. Unlike the short-te rm memory, the long-term memo ry is not erased automatically. You can select the time period for evaluating trip information yourself. Right odometer Fuel consumption The trip odometer shows the distance driven since it was last reset. It can be used to measure short distances . The last digit shows distances of 100 meters or 1/10 of a mile. The current fuel consumption can be shown using a bar graph ¢ fig. 13. The average consumpt ion stored in the short-term memory is also d isplayed. If the bar is green, your veh icle is saving fu el through one of the following functions: ..,. .... The trip odometer can be reset to zero by press.... I.Cl . .... ing the reset button Efil I.Cl U"I The short-term memory collects driving information from the time the ignition is switched on unti l it is switched off. If you continue driving within two hours after switching the ignit ion off, the new values are included when calculating the current t rip information. 23 Dr iv er information sy stem - Recuperation : electrical energy can be stored in the battery when the vehicle is coasting or driving downh ill. The bar will move toward a . (D Tips - The date, time of day and time and date for mat can be set in the Infotainment system. - If the vehicle battery is disconnected, a ll memory values are erased. 24 Open in g and closing Opening Central and closing locking Description You can lock and un lock the veh icle centrally . You have the following options: - Remote control key <=> page 2 7, page 28, - Sensors in the door handles* <=> - Lock cylinder on the driver's door<=>page 30, or - Central locking switch inside<=>page 29. Auto Lock The Auto Lock funct ion locks all doors and the luggage compartment lid once the speed has exceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The vehicle can be unlocked if the opening function in the central locking system sw itch is used or one of the door handles is pulled. The Auto Lock function can be switched on and off in the Infota inment system <=>page29. Addit ionally, in the event of a crash with airbag deployment the doors are automatically unlocked to allow access to the vehicle. Selective unlocking mote control key or touching the locking sensor* on a door. - When locking using the ~ button in the central locking switch, the vehicle will not lock if a door page 29. is open <=> - On veh icles with a convenience key*, the luggage compartment lid unlocks again after closing if the most recently used key is in the luggage compartment. The emergency flashers blink four times . Do not lock your vehicle with the remote control key or convenience key* until all doors and the luggage compartment lid are closed . In this way you avoid locking yourself out accidenta lly. @ Tips - Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe! - The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when you lock the vehicle. If the LED lights up for approximately 30 seconds after locking, there is a malfunction in the central locking system . Have the problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Key set The doors and luggage compartment lid w ill lock when they close . You can set in the Infotainment sys t em whether only the d river's door or the entire vehicle should be unlocked when unlock ing <=> page 29. Turn signals When you unlock the vehicle, the turn signa ls f lash twice. When you lock the vehicle, the turn signals flash once. If the blinking continues, one of the doors or the luggage compartment lid is not closed or the ignit ion is sti ll switched on. Fig. 14 Your veh icle key set @ Remote control key with integrated mechanical key Unintentionally locking yourself out .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I In the followi ng cases there safeguards to prevent you locking your remote master key in the vehicle: - If the driver's door is open, the veh icle cannot be locked by pressing the ~ button on the re- You can unlock/loc k your vehicle with the remote contro l key . A mechanical key is integrated in the remote control key¢ page 26. @ Key fob with PIN Only applies to vehicles with Connectivity service*: open the key fob and rub the PIN until it is 25 .,. Opening and c lo s i n g visib le . You ca n activate the Connectivity service* on yo ur vehicle using this PIN code. Replacing a key If a key is lost, see an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility. Have this key de act ivat ed. It is impor t ant to br ing a ll keys w it h you . If a key is lost, you should report it to your insurance company. Numb er of keys You can check the number of keys ass igned to your veh icle in the Infotainmen t system. To do this, select : the IMENU Ibutton > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Vehicle informat ion. This way, you can make sure that you have all the keys when purchasing a used vehicle. Electron ic immobilizer The immob ilizer preven t s una uthorized use of the vehicle. The stored settings are automatica lly recalled when you unlock the vehicle, open the doors or turn on the ignition . _& WARNING - Always take the vehicle key with you when leav ing the veh icle, even for a short period of time. This applies particularly when ch ildren rema in in the vehicle . Otherwise the children could sta rt t he engine or operate e lectr ica l eq uipment su ch as power w indows . @ Tips The operation of the remote contro l key can be temporarily d isrupted by interfe rence from transmit te rs in the vicinity of t he veh icle wo rking in t he same frequency range (e.g. a cell phone, rad io equ ipment) . Always che ck if your vehi cle is locked! Removing the mechanical key Unde r ce rtain circumstances, the ve hicle may not be ab le t o start if the re is a key from a differe nt veh icle manufac t ure r on t he key chain. Data in the master key When driving, service and maintenance -relevant data is continuously stored on your remote control key. Your Audi serv ice adv iso r can read out this dat a and tell you abou t the wo rk your vehi cle needs. This applies a lso to vehicles wit h a conven ience key*. Fig. 1 5 Remote contro l master key: remov ing the mecha ni· cal key Personal comfort settings If two peop le use one vehicle, it is recomme nded that each person always uses "t heir own " master key. When t he ignition is turned off or when the veh icle is locked, persona l convenience sett ings for the following systems are stored and as signed to the remote master key . - Climate contro l system Parking aid* Active lane assist* Side assist* - Drive select 26 .,. Press the re lease buttons @ c>fig. 15 and re move the mechan ical key from the remote control key. Using the mechanical key, yo u can: - Lock/unlock t he g love comp a rtment . - Manu ally lock/unlo ck t he vehicle ¢ page 30. - Emergency lock the doors c::> page 30 . Open in g and closing LED and batteries in the remote control key @) For the sake of the environment Dead batteries must be d isposed of using methods that will not harm the environment. Do not d ispose of them in household trash. @ Tips The replacement battery must meet the same specificat ions as the origina l battery. Unlocking/locking by remote control Fig. 16 Remote control key: removing the battery holder Fig. 17 Remote contr ol key (back side): remov ing the battery holder LED in the remote control key The LED @ info rms you of the remote cont rol key function. • If you press a button quick ly, the LEDblinks once. • If you press a button longer (convenience opening/ closing), the LEDblinks seve ral times. • If the LEDdoes not blink, the remote control indicator light and key battery is dead . The the message Remote control key: change key battery appear. Replace the battery . Ill Replacing the remote control key battery .... N a: CX) .... I.Cl U"I ~ .... • Press the release buttons @ ¢ fig. 16 and remove the mechanical key. • Press the release buttons © ¢ fig . 17 on the battery holder and, at the same time, pull the battery holder out of the remote contro l key in the direction of the arrow . • Inse rt the new battery with the"+" facing down . • Push the battery holder carefully into the maste r key. • Install the mechanical key. Fig. 18 Remote contro l key: button programm ing • To unlock the vehicle, press the [mbutton ¢fig . 18. • To lock the vehicle, press the ~ button once. • To open the luggage compartment lid, press the [.£] button. • To trigger the alarm, press the red IPANIC ! button . The vehicle horn and emergency flashers turn on . • To switch off the alarm, press the red !PANIC I button again . If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors, the rear lid or hood are opened within 45 seconds, the veh icle locks again automatically. This feature prevents the veh icle from being accidentally left un locked over a long period of time . The sett ings in the Infota inment system determine if the entire veh icle or only the dr iver's door is un locked when un locking the vehicle ¢ page 29. A WARNING - No one, especia lly children, should stay in the vehicle when it is locked from the outside, because the windows are no longer able to open 27 Opening and cl os i n g from the inside 9 page 30 . Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to get into the vehicle, which puts lives at risk. (D Tips - Only use the remote control key when you are within view of the vehicle. - Do not use the remote contro l when you are inside the vehicle. Otherwise, you could unintent ionally lock the vehicle. If you then tried to start the eng ine or open a door, the alarm would be triggered. If this happens, press the unlock button@ . - The selector lever must be in the P position on veh icles with a convenience key*. Otherwise the vehicle will not be ab le to lock. - Only use the panic funct ion in an emergency. Locking and unlocking with the convenience key Appl ies t o: vehicles with convenience key The doors and luggage compartment lid can be unlocked/locked without using the remote control key. Fig. 19 Door handle: sensor Unlocking the vehicle ~ Grip the door handle. The door unlocks automatically. ~ Pullon the door handle to open the door. Locking the vehicle ~ Put the selector lever in the P position (automatic transmissions) . Otherwise, the vehicle will not be able to lock. 28 ~ To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch the sensor in the door handle once 9 fig. 19 . Do not hold the door handle wh ile doing this. You can unlock/ lock t he vehicle at every door. The remote control key cannot be more than approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) away from the door handle. It makes no difference whether the master key is in your jacket pocket or in your briefcase. If you grip the door handle while locking, this can adverse ly affect the locking function. The door cannot be opened fo r a brief per iod direct ly after locking it. This way you have the opportunity to check if the doors locked correct ly. The sett ings in the Infota inment system determine if the ent ire veh icle or only one of the doors is un locked when un locking the vehicle 9 page29. A WARNING Read and fo llow all WARNINGS9 & in Key set on page 26 (D Tips If your vehicle is left standing for a long period of t ime, note the following: - The proximity sensor switches off after a few days t o save energy. You then have to pull once on the door handle to unlock the vehicle and a second time to open it. - To prevent the battery from draining and to mainta in the ability of the vehicle to start for as long as poss ible, the energy management system gradually turns off unnecessary convenience functions . You may not be able to unlock your vehicle using the convenience key. - For an explanat ion on conform ity with the FCCregulations in the United States and the Indust ry Canada regulat ions, refer to 9 page 297. Open ing and closing Central locking switch Setting the central locking system In the Infotainment system , you con set which doors the central locking system will unlock . .,.Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! button> Vehicle > left control button >Vehicle setting s. Door unlocking -you can decide if All doors or only the Driver door shou ld unlock. The luggage compartment lid also unlocks when All is select Fig. 20 Driver' s door: cent ral locking sw itch .,.To lock the vehicle, press the@! button ¢ ,&.. .,.Press the !illbutton to unlock the vehicle. When locking the vehicle with the centra l locking switch, the following applies : - Opening the door and the luggage compartment lid from the outside is not possible (for sec urity such as when stopped at a light) . - The LEDin the central locking switch turns on when all doors are closed and locked. - You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the door ha ndle . - In the event of a crash with airbag dep loyment, the doors unlock automatically to allow access to the vehicle. A ed . If you se lect Driver in a vehicle wit h a convenience key*, only t he door whose handle you pull will unlock . If you se lect Driver , all the doors and luggage compartment lid will unlock if you press the @l button on the remote control key twice. Fold m irrors* - if you select On, the exterior rearview mirrors fold in automatically when you press the lrubutton on the remo t e contro l master key or touch t he sensor* in t he handle . Lock when dr iving l) - if you select On, the vehicle locks automatica lly when driving. All of the doors and the luggage compartment lid lock. WARNING - The power locking switch works with the ignition off and automatically locks the entire vehicle whe n the ~ button is pressed . - The centra l locking switch is inoperative when the vehicle is locked from the outside. - Locked doors make it more difficult for eme rgency workers to get into the vehicle, which puts lives at risk. Do not leave anyone behind in the vehicle, especially children . @ Your vehicle locks automat ically when it reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) (Auto Lock)q page 25 . You can unlock the vehicle again using the llilbutton in the central locking switch. .... N a: CX) .... .... "' .... Tips I.Cl U"I ll This fun ct ion is not availa ble in al l coun tri es . 29 Opening and closing Emergency unlocking and locking the doors - --- ® Once the front passenger's door is closed, it is no longer possible to open it from the outside. The door can be opened from the inside by pul ling the door handle. Anti-theft alarm system If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle Fig. 21 Driver's door : door lock cylinder break -in, audio and visual warn ing s ignals are triggered . The anti-theft alarm system is activated whe n the vehicle is locked as usual. It is switched off when un locking . Luggage compartment lid Opening/closing the luggage compartment lid -•• If the central locking system malfunct ions, you must unlock/lock the doors separately using the mechanical key. • Remove the mechan ical key ¢ page 26 . • To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the open position @ ¢ fig. 21. • To lock the dr iver's door, move the selector lever to th e P position (automat ic transmission) and turn the key once to the close position @ . Locking the front passenger's door with the mechanical key The emergency release is located on the edge of the front passenge r's door. It is only visible when the door is open . • Remove the mechan ica l key ¢ page 26. • Pull the cap out of the opening ~ fig. 22 . • Insert the key into the slot inside and turn it all the way to the right (right door) or to the left (left door*). 30 0 0 ~ m • Fig. 22 Front passe nge r's door: eme rgency release Unlocking/locking the driver's door with the mechanical key m ' Fig. 23 Opened luggage compart ment lid Opening the luggage compartment lid .. Press the lal button on the remote control key for at least several seconds to open the luggage compa rtm ent lid. Or .. Lift the luggage compa rtm ent lid. Closing the luggage compartment lid .. Pull down the luggage compartment it close using a gent le push ~ .&, . lid and let .&_WARNING - Due to the risk of injur y, a lways be aware of the rear passengers when closing the luggage compartment lid . - After closing the luggage compartment lid, make sure that it is latched. Otherwise the luggage compartment lid could suddenly )II> Op enin g an d cl os in g open when driving, which increases the risk of an accident. - Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyxiation. - Never leave your vehicle unattended when the luggage compartment lid is open. A child could climb into the vehicle through the luggage compartment. If the luggage compartment lid was then closed, the child would be trapped in the vehicle and unable to escape. To reduce the risk of inju ry, do not allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Always keep the luggage compartment lid and the doors closed when the vehicle is not in use. - Always make sure no one is in the luggage compartment lid's range of motion when it is closing, especially near the hinges. Fingers or hands could be pinched. @ Luggage compartment lid emergency release The luggage compartment lid can be released in an emergency from the inside. Fig. 24 The emerge ncy release is accessed on the left side of the luggage compa rtment underneath the rea r window. Tips - When the vehicle is locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately Ibutton on the remote by pressing the l""" control key. When the luggage compartment lid is closed aga in, it locks automat ically . - In case of an emergency or a faulty handle, the luggage compartment lid can be opened manua lly from the inside¢ page 31 . Fig. 25 Sect ion: inside of luggage compa rtment : eme rgen - cy release .. Tilt the left rear seat backrest forward. .,. Pry out the cover ¢ fig. 24 using the mechanical key 9 page 26 . .. Pull the plastic cord in the direction of the ar row ¢ fig . 25 . .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 31 Opening Power and closing windows - When locking the vehicle from outside, the veh icle must be unoccupied since the windows can no longe r be opened in an emerge ncy. Controls The driver can control all power windows. (D N N M 0 ::':, (X) m Tips - After turn ing the ig nit ion off you can st ill open and close the windows for approx imately 10 mi nutes. The power w indows are not sw itched off until the d river 's door or passenge r's door has been opened. - Whe n you open the doors , the windows automa t ically lower a pprox imately 10 mm . Fig. 26 Driver's doo r: powe r window controls Convenience opening/closing All power window sw itches have a two- stage function: All windows can be opened and closed at the same time . Opening the windows Convenience open feature "' Press the sw itch t o t he first level and hold it until t he window reaches t he des ired position. "'To open t he w indow comple t ely, pres s the swit ch all the way down t o t he second level briefly . "' Press the ~ button on the remote cont rol key until a ll windows reach the d es ire d position. Convenience close feature "' Press t he EDbutton on the remote con t rol key until a ll w indows are close d ~ &. or Closing the windows Convenience closing with the convenience key* "' Pull the swi t ch up to the first level and hold it unt il t he window reaches the des ired position. "'To close the window completely , pull the switc h up t o the second level brie fly. "' Touch th e senso r* on the door han dle long enough until a ll w indows are close d. Do not place your hand in t he door handle when doin g this . Power window switches (D Left front doo r @ Right front door A WARNING - Always ta ke the vehicle key with you when leaving the vehicle, even fo r a short period of time. This applies particularly when chi ldren rema in in the vehicle. Otherwise the childre n could start the engine or operate electrical eq uipment (e .g . power windows). The powe r windows a re func t ional unt il the dr iver's door or passenge r's door has been opened. - Pay ca refu l atte ntion w hen closi ng t he windows . It could cau se injury by pinching . 32 Setting convenience opening in the Infotainment system - "' Select in the Infotainment system : IMENU j button > Vehicle > left cont rol button >Vehicle settings . To enable the conven ience window open ing fu nction, the Long pressto open windows function must be sw itche d on. A WARNING - Never close the w indows carelessly or in an uncontrolled ma nner, because t his increases t he risk of injury. Open in g and closing - For security reasons, the windows can only be opened and closed with the remote control key at a maximum distance of approximately 6 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle. When pressing the Iii button, always watch the windows while they are closing so that no one is pinched in t he window. The closing process will stop imm ediately when the ~ button is released . A - WARNING @ Tips When operating or programming the garage door opener, make sure that no people or objects are in the area immediately surrounding the system . People can be injured or property can be damaged if struck when closing. - For security reasons, we recommend that you clear the programmed buttons before sell ing the vehicle. - For further information regarding HomeLink, refer to www.homelink.com . - For the Declaration of Conformity with the prov is ions from the FCCin the United States and Industry Canada, refer to ~ page 297. Correcting power window malfunctions After disconnecting the vehicle battery, the onetouch up and down feature must be activated again. ~ ~ Pull the power window switch until the window is comp lete ly ra ised. Release the switch and pull it again for at least one second. Operation Applies to: vehicles wit h garage door opener (Homelink) Garage door (Homelink) opener Description Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener (Homelink} .,. ........... ~ "-., Fig. 28 Control panel above the inter ior rearview mirror Fig. 27 Garage door opener: examples of usage for different systems .... With the garage door opener (Homel ink), you can activate systems such as the garage doors, security systems or house lights from inside your vehicle. Up to three remote control functions can be programmed to the three buttons that are integrated in the control unit above the rearview mirror . N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I To be able to operate systems using the garage door opener, the buttons in the control unit must first be programmed . Requirement: the button in the control panel must be programmed ~ page 34 and the vehicle must be located within range of the system , such as the garage door. ~ ~ Press the button to open the garage door . The green LED@ blinks or turns on . Press the button aga in to close the garage door. (D Tips To open or close the garage door , do not press the button longer than 20 seconds or the ga rage door opener will sw itch to programming mode. 33 Opening and closing Programming the transmitter Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener (Homelink) 9. If the garage door or other systems do not open with the Homelink buttons even if the programming was successfu l, the system may use a rolling code instead of a fixed code. You must also then perform rolling code programming c>page 35. The other two buttons in the control panel can be programmed us ing the instructions given above. Start with step 3. Deleting button programming Fig. 29 Distance between t he rad iator grille and the remote cont rol transmitter Programming the button : step 1 on the control panel Switch on the ignit ion. 2. Press both of the outside buttons on the control panel c>page 33, fig. 28 until the yellow LED@ turns off and the green LED@ blinks. This procedure clears the standard codes that were set at the factory and does not need to be repeated again to program the other buttons. 3. Briefly press the button in the control panel that you want to program . 4. Wa it until the yellow LED@ blinks. The programming mode is active for 5 minutes. 5. Go in front of the vehicle with the original remote control transmitter for the system that you are programming to the control panel button. 1. Programming the button: step 2 at the radiator grille 6. Hold the remote control transmitter at the vehicle radiator grille¢ fig. 29. 7 . Now press the remote control transmitter until the turn signals on your vehicle blink . This can take up to 30 seconds. 8. If the emergency flashers blink three times, the programming was successful. If the emergency flashers only b link one t ime, the 5 minute time limit for programming has expired or the programming was unsuccessful. Repeat the programming starting from the third step or change the distance to the radiator grille. 34 The programmed buttons cannot be deleted individually, they must be del eted a ll at once. Reprogram the buttons if necessary. .,..Switch on the ign ition. .,..Press both of the outside buttons on the control unit until the yellow LED@ turns off and the green LED@ blinks . Reprogramm ing buttons .,..Switch on the ignition . .,..To reprogram an individual button, press the desired button until the green LED@ turns off and the yellow LED@ starts to blink (after approximately 20 seconds). Release the button immediately. The programming mode is active for S minutes. .,..Continue with step 5. (D Tips - The d istance needed between the remote control transmitter and the Homelink module in the radiato r grille ¢fig. 29 depends on the system you are programming. - Depending on the system model, you may need to release the button on the rem ote control transmitter whi le it is programming and press it again . Hold every position you try when programming for at leas t 15 seconds before trying a new position. Keep an eye on the vehicle turn signals while doing this . Opening and closing Rolling code programming Appl ies to: vehicles with garage door opener (Homeli nk) On some systems, programming a rolling code is also necessary. Identifying a rolling code Press the button in the control unit that is already programmed again and hold it down. ~ Pay attention to the LED@ ¢ page 33, fig. 28. If the green LEDblinks quickly, the system (such as a garage door) has a rolling code. ~ Program the rolling code as follows: ~ Activating the system motor unit ~ ~ Locate the programming button on the system motor unit. The exact locat ion and color of the button may vary depend ing on the system manufacture r's brand . Press the programming button on the system motor unit (usually th is will act ivate a "display" on the motor unit). You now have approximately 30 seconds to program t he button in the contro l pane l. Programming the button in the control panel Press the previously programmed button in the contro l pane l for 2 seconds. ~ To complete rolling code programming, press the button again for 2 seconds. ~ On some systems, the button might need to be pressed a third time to end the programming procedure . ~ After programming, the system should recognize the signal and operate when the button in the control panel is pressed . Now you may program the other buttons as needed . (D Tips - The rolling code can be programmed more quickly and more easily with the help of a second person . - If any difficulties occur when programming the rolling code, it may be helpful to read the system operating manual. 35 Light s and Vision Lights and Vision Exterior lighting Switching lights on and off Automatic dynamic headlight range control system * Your vehicle is equipped with a headlight range contro l system so that the headlights do not blind oncoming traff ic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight range also adjusts automatically when brak ing and accelerating . Light function s Fig. 30 Instrument Light switch panel: light switch ·ti: Turn the switch to the corresponding position. When the lights are switched on, the ;oo:symbo l turns on . 0 - lights are off (in some markets, the daytime running lights* are switched on when the ignition is switched on.) - USA models: the dayt ime running lights switch on automatically when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the O or the AUTO position (only in daylight). The Dayt ime running lights can be switched on and off in . the MMI c:;,page37 c:;,..&. - Canada model s: the daytime running lights switch on automatically when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the 0 , ::oo:or the AUTO position (only in daylight) c:;,..&. . AUTO* - automatic headlights switch on and off depending on br ightness, for example in twilight, during rain or in tunnels. ;oo:- Parking light io - Low beam headlight l~"'I- All weat her lights * All-weather lights* In vehicles with all-weather lights, the front lights are adjusted automatically so that you are less likely to see glare from your own headlights, for example when dr iving on a wet road . 36 The following light functions are available depending on vehicle equipment and on ly function when the light switch is in the AUTO position. You can deactivate these functions in the Infota inment system under Audi adapti ve light c:;,page 3 7. Static cornering light* (vehicles with LED headlights) - the cornering light switches on automatically when the steer ing whee l is turned at acerta in angle at speeds up to approximate ly 44 mph (70 km/h) and when the turn signal is acti vated at speeds up to approximat ely 25 mph (40 km/ h). The area t o the side of the vehicle is ill um inated bette r when t urning. Highway light function* (vehicles with LED headlight s) - this function adapt s the lighting for highway driv ing based on vehicle speed. Speed dependent light distribution* (vehicles with LED headlights) - the speed dependent li ght dist ribution adapts the light in tow ns and on highways or expressways. Int ersections can also be ill uminated on vehicles wit h a navigation system *. A WARNING - Automatic headlights* are on ly intended to assist the driver. They do not relieve the driver of respons ibility to check the headlights and to t urn t hem on manua lly according to the current light and visib il ity conditions. For example, fog cannot be detected by the ligh t sensors. So always sw itch on the low beam under these weathe r cond itions and when drivin g in the darkiD . - If the batt ery is draining signific ant ly, the parking ligh t s will swit ch off auto mat ically to reduce the risk of the engine not st arting . .,. Lights Turn signals ¢ Always make sure your veh icle is parked and adequate ly lit accord ing to the laws. Avoid using the parking lights for severa l hours. Switch on the right or left parking light if poss ible . - Please observe legal regula tions when using the lighting systems described. (D (D - right tu rn signal @ - left turn signal The turn signa l blinks three times if you tap the lever (convenience turn signa l). - The light sensor for the automatic headlights* is in the rearview mirror mount. Therefore, do not place any stickers in this area on the windshield. - Some functions of the exterior lighting can be adjusted qpage 37. - If you turn off the ignition wh ile the exterior lights are on and open the door, you w ill hear a warning tone. - In some markets, the ta il lights will switch on when the dayt ime running lights sw itch on. - In cool or damp weather, the inside of the headlights, turn s ignals and tail lights can fog ove r due to the temperature difference between the inside and outs ide. They will clear shortly after switching them on. This does not affect the serv ice life of the light ing . High beams and headlight flasher ~D Move the lever to the corresponding @ - high beams off or headlight flasher II indicator light in the instrument cluster The turns on. A = @ Fig. 31 Turn signal and high beam lever .... N a: CX) .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .... U"I WARNING High beams can cause glare for other drivers, which increases the risk of an accident. For this reason, only use the high beams or the headlight flasher when they will not create g lare for other dr ivers. Adjusting the exterior lighting The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment system . .,.Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! button> Vehicle > left control button >Vehicle settings > Exterior lighting . The Leveroperates the turn signals, the high beams and the headlight flasher. t position: @ - high beams on Turn signal and high beam lever f 9 The tu rn signa ls act ivate when you move the lever into a turn signa l position when the ignition is switched on. Tips ® and V is ion "' 0 Automatic headlights a'.: a, You can adjust the following settings in the Automatic headlights menu: 0 Activation time - you can adjust if the headlights switch on Early, Medium or Late according to the sensit ivity of the light sensor. Audi adaptive light * -you can sw itch adaptive light On and Off . Daytime running lights* USA models: the dayt ime running lights can be switched on or off using t he MMI. Select On or Off. 37 Light s and Vision Canada models: this function cannot be switched off . They activate automatica lly each time the ignition is switched on . This menu item is shown with a "gray background". Com ing home , Leavi ng home The com ing home function illum ina t es the area outside the vehicle when you turn the ignition off and open the driver's door . To switch o n the func tion, select Entry/ exit lighting . The leav ing home illumin ates t he a rea out s ide the vehicle when you unlock the vehicle . To switch on the function, select Entry/ exit lighting. - You a re the last ca r in a t raffic ja m so that all other vehi cles approaching from behind can see you, or if - Your vehicle has br oken down or you a re having an emergency, or if - Your vehicle is bein g towed or if you are towing another vehicle. Interior lighting Interior lighting The com ing home and leaving home f unctions only operate when it is dark and the light switch is in the AUTO position. Emergency flasher Fig. 33 Head line r: inter ior lighting l!I- Door contact switch. The interior lighting is contro lled automatically. Fig. 32 Cente r conso le: emergency f las her button The emergency flashers makes other drivers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situ at ions . • Press the~ button to switc h the eme rgency flashers on or off. You can indicate a lane change or a tu rn when the em ergency fl a shers are sw itched on by us ing the tur n sig nal lever. The emergency flashers st op tempo rar ily. The emergency flashers also work when the ignition is tur ned off. (D Tips You s hou ld switch the emergency flashers on if: 38 A switch is no longer needed to switch the reading lights on. A swiping movement or a brief tap on the light is all that is needed to switch the light on or off. If you hold your finger on the read ing light when switching it on, this ca n dim the light dow n t o a certai n level. Interior light ing There are othe r inter ior light ing funct ions that are availab le. Several functions can be set in the Infotainment system . Select in the Infotai nment system: IMENU ! button > Vehicle > left contro l button >Vehicle settings > Interior lighting . Lights Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt function* Instrument illumination IO Fig. 34 Inst rument illum inatio n The brightness of the instrument cluster and the center console can be adjusted. ~ ~ ~ and V is ion Press the knob to release it . Turn the knob toward"·" or"+" to reduce or increase the brightness . Press the knob again to return it to its original posit ion. Vision Adjusting the exterior mirrors To help you see the curb when backing into a parking space, the surface of the mirror ti lts slight ly. For this to happen, the knob must be in the position for the front passenger's outside mirror . You can adjust the tilted mirror surface by turning the knob in the desired direction. When you move out of reverse and into another gear, the new mirror position is stored and assigned to the key you are using . The m irror goes back into its or iginal position once you drive forward faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) or turn the ignition off . A WARNING Curved m irror surfaces (convex) enlarge the field of vision. However, they make objects in the m irror appear smalle r and further away. Your may estimate incorrec t ly when you use these m irrors to gauge your distance from the vehicles behind you when changing lanes· accident risk! (D Note If t he mir ror housing was moved by outs ide Fig. 35 Driver's door: knob for the exter ior mirrors Turn the knob to the desired position: Q/P - adj ust ing the left/right exter ior mirror. Move the knob in the desired direction . fo rces (such as an impact when maneuver ing), you must use the power fo lding funct ion to fold the mirror all the way out . The mirror housing must not be moved back into place by hand because th is would impair the function of the mirror mechanism. (D Tips If the power adj usting function ma lfunctions, the glass in both m irrors can be adjusted by pressing on the edge of it by hand . 4lil- Heating the mirror glass depending on the outside temperat ure. .... N a: 8 • Folding exterior mirrors* . In the Infotainment system, you can select if the mirrors fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle 9 page 29. CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 39 Light s and Vision Dimming the mirrors ,... - fessiona ls . Seek medical attention immediately . 0 ~ID (D Note If the glass on an a utomat ic dimming mirro r breaks, electro lyte can leak out . This liquid damages plastic surfaces. Remove t he liquid as quickly as possible, for example us ing a wet sponge. Fig. 36 Automatic dimm ing rearview mir ror• Manual dimming rearview mirror .. Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back. Automatic dimm ing rearview mirror* .. Press t he button @ C)fig . 36. The ind icator light @ turns on. Interior and exter ior mir rors* will d im when the re is incom ing light (such as headlights from the rear) . A Tips - If the light reaching the rearview mirror is obstructed, the automatic d imm ing mirror will not function correctly, - The automatic dimming m irrors do not dim when the interior lighting is turned on or the reverse gear is se lected . Sun visors WARNING Electro lyte fluid can leak from automat ic dimm ing mir rors if the g lass is broken . Electrolyte f luid can irritate skin, eyes and airways. - Repeated or long-term exposure to elect rolyte fluid can lead to irritation of the a irways, especially in peop le wit h asthma or ot he r resp irato ry co ndit ions. Take deep breath s immed iate ly after leaving the veh icle or, if t his is not possible, o pen a ll of t he doors and windows as wide as possible . - If elec tr olyte f luid ente rs the eyes, flush t hem thor oughly wit h a la rge amoun t of clean wat er for at least 15 mi nutes an d t hen seek medical attention. - If e lectrolyte f luid comes into con t act with t he skin , flush the affected a rea with clean water for at least 15 minutes a nd the n clean with soap and water and seek medica l attention. Clean affected cloth ing and shoes thoroughly bef ore wearing again. - If the fluid was swallowe d and the person is conscious, fl ush the mouth with water for at least 15 m inutes. Do not induce vomiting unless this is recommended by me dica l pro- 40 @ Fig. 37 Sun shade The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets and tu rned toward the doors c>fig . 37 @ . The mirror light switches on when the cover over the vanity mir ror @ ope ns . Lights Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on Fig. 38 Windshie ld wiper lever Move the windshield wiper lever to the correspond ing position: @ - w indshield w ipers off @ - interval mode. To increase/decrease the wiper intervals, move the switch ® to the left/right. In vehicles with a rain sensor*, the wipers turn on in the rain once the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). The higher the sensitivity of the rain sensor* is set (switch ® to the right), the earlier the windsh ield wipers react to moisture on the windsh ield. You can deact ivate the rain sensor mode* in the Infotainment system, which switches the intermi ttent mode on. Select in t he Infotainment system: IMENU ! button> Vehicle > left control button >Driver assistance > Rain sensor > Off. @ - slow wiping @ - fast wip ing © - sing le w ipe If you hold the lever in th is position longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping to fast w iping. .... N a: ® - clean the windshield To eliminate water droplets, the windshield wiper performs one afterwipe after several seconds in temperatures above 39 °F (4 °C). You can switch this function off by moving the lever to position ® w ith in 10 seconds after the afterwipe . The afterwipe function is reactivated the next time you switch the ignition on. CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Cleaning the headlights* . The headlight washer system* only functions when the lights are and V is ion switched on. The headlights are automatically cleaned the first time and every fifth time the lever is moved to position ® · -A WARNING (D Note - The rain sensor* is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for manually switch ing the wipers on according to the visibility condit ions. - The windsh ield may not be treated w ith water-repelling w indshield coating agents. Unfavorable condit ions, such as wetness, darkness, and when the sun is low, can cause increased glare wh ich increases the risk of an accident. Wiper blade chatter is also possible. - Properly functioning windshield wiper blades are required for a clear view and safe driving <:::> page 42, Replacing windshield wiper blades . - - In the case of frost, check whether the w indshield wiper blades are frozen to the w indshield. Switching on the w indshield wipers can damage the w iper blades! - Prior to using a car wash, the w indshield w iper system must be switched off (lever in position 0). This prevents unintentiona l switching on and damage to the windsh ield wiper system . @ Tips - The windshie ld wipers switch off when the ignition is turned off . Activate the windshield wipers after the ignition is switched back on by moving the windshield wiper lever to any position. - Worn or dirty windshie ld wiper blades result in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor* function . Check your w indshield w iper blades regularly . - The washer fluid nozzles in the windsh ield washer system are heated* at low temperatures when the ign iti on is on. - When stopping temporar ily, such as at a traffic light, the speed of the windshield w ipers automatically reduces by one level. 41 Light s and Vision Installing the wiper blade Cleaning w indshield wiper blades Clean the w ipe r blades when you see wipe r st rea ks . Clean the wiper blades with a sof t towe l and g lass cleaner . • Place the windshield wiper arms in the service pos ition c,:,page 42. • Fold the windshield wipe r arms away from t he winds hield. A WARNING Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vision, which increases the risk of an accident. • Insert the new wipe r blade into the mount on t he wiper arm @ until you he ar it latch int o place . • Place the wiper arm back on the winds hield. • Turn the service pos ition off . A - a, ~ 9 a: 00 m Wiper service position/blade replacement posit ion • To bring the wipe rs into the service position, turn the ignition off and move the windshield wiper lever into position @ c,:,page 41, fig. 38. • To bring the w ipers into the starting pos it ion, turn the ignit ion on and move the windshield wiper lever into position @ for at least two sec onds ¢ page 41, fig. 38 . Note - The windshie ld w iper blades m ust only be folded away when in the service position! Ot herwise, yo u ris k damaging the paint on the hood or the win ds hield wiper motor. - You should not drive yo ur vehicle or press the windsh ield wiper leve r when the wipe r arms a re folded away from the windshie ld. The windshie ld w ipers would move back into t heir or igin a l pos ition and co uld da m age t he hoo d and w indshie ld. @ Fig. 39 Removing winds hield wiper blades - For safety reasons, the wi ndshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each yea r. (D Replacing windshield wiper blades WARNING Tips - You ca n also use t he se rvice pos it io n, for example, if you want t o pro t ect t he win ds hield from icing by using a cover. - You ca nnot act ivat e t he se rvice posi ti o n when the hood is ope n. Digital compass Switching the compass on and off Applies to : vehicles wit h digital com pass 0 N 0 0 Removing the wiper blade it a) • Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield. • Press the lock ing knob (D c,:,fig. 39 on the wiper blade . Hold the wiper blade firmly . • Remove t he wipe r blade in the direct ion of the arrow. Fig. 40 Rearview mirror: digita l compass is switched on 42 Lights "'To turn the compass on or off, press the button @ until the compass in the mirror appears or disappears. The digital compass only works when the ign ition is turned on. The directio ns are indicated with ab breviations : N (north) , NE (northeast), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west), NW (northwest). @ Tips To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do not bring any remote controls, e lectr ical devices or metallic objects near the mirror . Adjusting the magnetic zone Applies to: veh icles with digita l compass and V is ion Calibrating the compass Applies to: vehicles with digital compass If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the compass must be reca librat ed. "' Press and hold the button @ until a C appears in the rearview mirror . "' Drive in a circle at about 5 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed in the rearv iew mi rror. WARNING - To avoid endangering yourself and other drivers, calibrate the compass in an area where there is no traffic. - Always pay attention to the traffic and the area around your vehicle if you are reading the compass while driving . ® Fig. 41 Nort h Amer ica: magn etic zo ne map "' Press and hold the button @ ¢ page 42, fig. 40 until the number of the magnetic field zone appears in the rearview m irror . "' Press the button @ repeatedly to select the correct magnetic zone . The select ion mode turns off after a few seconds . .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 43 S e at s and s t o rage Seats General and storage information Why is your seat adjustment so important? The safety belts and the airbag system can only provide maximum protection if the front seats are correctly adjusted . There are various ways of adjusting the front seats to provide safe and comfortable support for the dr iver and the front passenger . Adjust your seat properly so that: - you can easily and quickly reach all the switches and controls in the instrument panel - your body is properly supported thus reducing physical stress and fatigue - the safety belts and a irbag system can offer maximum protection ¢ page 188. In the following sections, you will see exact ly how you can best adjust your seats. There are spec ial regulat ions and instr uctions for installing a child seat on the front passenger's seat. Always follow the information regarding child safety provided in ¢ page 212 , Child safety. _&.WARNING Incorrect seating position of the driver and all other passengers can result in serious personal injury. - Always keep your feet on the floor when the vehicle is in motion - never put your feet on top of the instr ument pane l, out of the window or on top of the seat cushion. This applies espec ially t o the passenge rs. If your seat ing pos ition is inco rrect, you increa se the risk of injury in the case of sudden braking or an accident . If the airbag inf lates and the seating position is incor rect, this could result in personal injury or even death. - It is important for bot h the driver and front passenge r to keep a d istance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between themselves and the stee ring wheel and/or instrument panel. If you' re sitting any closer t han th is, the airbag system cannot protect you properly . In 44 addition, the front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to your body height so that they can give you maximum protection. - Always try to keep as much distance as possible between yourself and the steer ing wheel or instrument panel. - Do not adjust the driver's or front passenger's seat while the veh icle is moving. Your seat may move unexpectedly, causing sudden loss of vehicle contro l and personal injury. If you adj ust your seat while the veh icle is moving, you a re out of pos ition. Driver's seat The correct seat position is important for safe and relaxed driving. We recommend that you adjust the dr iver's seat in the following manner: .,..Adjust the seat in fore and aft direction so that you can easi ly push the pedals to the floor while keeping your knees slightly bent ¢ .&. in Why is your seat adjustment so important? on page 44 . .,..Adjust the backrest so that when you sit with your back against the backrest, you can st ill grasp the top of t he stee ring wheel. _&.WARNING Neve r place any objects in the dr iver's foo twell. An object could get into the pedal a rea and inte rfere with pedal function . In case of sudden braking or an accident, you would not be ab le to brake or accelerate. - Front passenger's seat Always move the front passenger seat into the rearmost position. To avo id con t act wit h t he airbag while it is de ploying , do not sit any closer to the instrument panel than necessary and always wea r t he threepo int safety belt provided adj usted correctly . We recommend that you adjust the passenger's seat in the following manner: .,. Seats .. Bring the backrest up to an (almost) upright position. Do not ride with the seat reclined . .. Place your feet on the floor in front of the passenger's seat . Front seats Power seat adjustment Fig. 42 Front seat: powe r seat adjustment and storage - The front seat backrests must not be reclined too far back when driving, because this impairs the effectiveness of the safety belts and airbag system, which increases the risk of injury . - To reduce the risk of injury during sudden braking or in a collision, the driver and front passenger should not have their backrests in the reclined position whi le driving or riding. The safety belts and airbag system can provide the greatest protection possible when the backrests are in the upright position and the safety belts are worn correctly. The more a backrest is reclined, the greater the risk of injury due to an incorrect seating position and safety belt position. Multifunction button Applies to : veh icles with mult ifunct ion button @ - lumbar support or multifunction button* ¢ page 45 . To adjust the lumbar support, press the button in the applicable location . You can adjust the side bolsters using the multifunction button. @ - moving the seat up/down: press the button .. If you turn the multifunction button @ up/down . To adjust the front seat cushion, press the front button up/down . To adjust the rear seat cushion, press the rear button up/down . @ - moving the seat forward/back: press the button forward/back. © - adjusting the backrest angle: turn the adjusting wheel. @ - lengthening/shortening the upper thigh support*: lift the grip handle . page 45, fig. 42 to the left or right , the lateral support in the seat will increase/decrease using the side bolsters on the seat backrests. ¢ @ Tips The air in the side bolsters* is released as soon as the driver's door opens. This makes is possible to enter and exit the vehicle more comfortably. As soon as you start driving the vehicle, the side bolsters fill. .&._WARNING - Only adjust the front seat with when the vehicle is stationary . Otherwise, this increases the risk of an accident .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I - The power adjustment for the front seats also works with the ignition switched off or with the ignition key removed . For this reason, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle - they could be injured! - Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjustment can pinch fingers or hands causing injuries . 45 S ea ts and s tor a ge Easy seat entry Easy seat entry makes it easier to get into the back seats. down. Because of this, the armrest sho uld not be fo lded down during city driving. The armrest can slide forward and back. There is a storage compartment rest . Rear bench under the arm- seat Rear seat passengers must meet certain criteria. Fig. 4 3 Driver's seat: loop on the seat backrest ...To fo ld the front seat backrests forward, pull on the loop and fold the seat backrest . .&_WARNING Always make sure the front seats are upright and secure ly locked in place when driving. Fig. 4 5 Correct seated positio n on the rear bench seat .&_WARNING Front center armrest Applies to: vehicles with center armrest The center armrest con be adjusted to several levels. Fig. 44 Armrest between the driver's/front passenger's seats . ...To adjust the angle, raise the armrest Q fig. 44 notch by notch . ...To bring the armrest back down, raise it out of the top notch and fold it back down. Then lift the armrest to the desired pos ition, if necessary. Please note that the driver's ability to move his or arm may be restricted when the armrest is folded 46 - The rear bench seat may only carry persons w ith a height of up to 4 feet 9 inches (57 in/ 1.45 m). - At the same time, the m inimum d istance between the head and the rear w indow when sitting up right sho uld not be less than 1 inch (2.5 cm). Talle r people could s uffer severe injur ies when closing the luggage compartment lid or du ring a collision. Always pay attention to the rear passengers when closing the luggage compartment lid. - No heavy, hard objects may be placed on the luggage compartment cover. They endanger the vehicle passengers when opening the luggage compartment lid or when braking suddenly. Seats and storag e Ashtray Using the socket Applies to: veh icles with ashtray .,. Fold the center a rm rest up to reach the so cket, if necessary . .,. Remove the cigarette lighter, if necessary . .,.Insert the plug of the e lectr ica l device into the socket . The cigarette lighter has a standard 12 Volt socket that e lectrica l accessories can be connected to. The power consumption at the outlet must not exceed 100 watts . Fig. 46 Center armrest folded up: asht ray The ashtray is placed in the center console under the center armrest . Lift up the cover to open. Inse rt t he ash tr ay se curely back into t he ho lde r af ter eve ry removal (empty ing). A WARNING Never use the ashtray to hold paper, because this increases the risk of a fire. Cigarette socket lighter and A - WARNING (D Note Use care when us ing the cigarette lighter. Inattentive or unsupervised use of the cigarette lighte r can cause burns. - To reduce the risk of damage to the sockets, only use plugs that fit correctly. - The cigarette lighter socket should only be used as a power source for electrical accessories for a short period of time . The sockets* in t he vehicle should be used for longe r use of power supply . (D Tips - The vehicle battery drains whe n accessories are turned o n but the engine is off. - The ve hicle battery must not be charged using a commercially ava ilab le small charging device, wh ich is co nnected to the cigarette lighter or so cket. Fig. 4 7 Center armres t folded up: ci9aret te li9hter The cigarette lighter or socket on ly functions when the ignition is switched on . Using the cigarette lighter .... .,.Fold the center armrest up to reach t he cigarette lighte r, if necessa ry . .,.Press t he cigaret te lighter in . .,.Remove the cigaret t e lighter when it pops out . N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 47 S ea ts and s tor a ge Storage Beverage holders CDNote Make sure your beverage container has a lid. If not, your beverage could spi ll out and cause damage to the vehicle electronic or stain the seat covers. Additional storage compartments You will find a range of storage compartments and holders at d ifferent locat ions in the vehicle . Fig. 48 Cup holde r - Compartments in the doors - Storage area in the glove compartment . The glove compartment can be locked using the mechanical key ¢ page 26. - Storage compartment under the front center armrest" - Storage compartment on the rear side of the front seat*. The compartment can hold a maximum weight of 2.2 lbs (1 kg). - Coat hooks A ,_ Fig. 49 Center arm rest folded up : cup holder* Cup holder * under the center armre st .. Fold up the center armrest q page 46. .. Fold the plastic bracket toward the rear, if necessary ¢ fig. 49 . A WARNING Spilled hot liquid can increase the risk of accidents and injur ies. - Never dr ive with containers that conta in hot liquid such as coffee or tea . The hot liquid could spill and cause burns d uring a collision, sudden braking or other veh icle moveme nt. Spilled hot liquid can a lso increase the risk of accidents and injuries . - Only use soft containers in the cup ho lders . Hard cups and g lasses can increase the risk of injury during a collision . - Never use t he cup holder or the adapter as an ashtray - this is a fire hazard . WARNING - No heavy or hard objects may be placed on the storage compartment behind the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of injuring the veh icle passengers whe n braking suddenly . - Always leave the lid on the glove compartment cover closed while dr iving to reduce the risk of inj ury. - Only use the storage compa rtments in t he door trim panels to store small objects, t hat will not stick out of the compartment and impair the ra nge of t he side airbags. - Make sure that the view to the rear is not impaired by hanging garme nts. - Hang only lightweight clothing and be sure that there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the po cket s. - Do not use coat hangers to hang the clothing because this could impair the effec tiveness of the side air bags*. CDNote Objects on the rear shelf that rub against the rear window can damage the rear window heat ing wires. 48 Seats Roof rack The roof rack must only be secured in the positioning bolt area. Fig. SO Mounting locat ions for roof rack If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof, you must observe the following: - Your vehicle has aerodynamic rain channels molded into the roof . This is why conventional roof luggage racks cannot be used. We recommend using roof rails from the Audi original accessories program. - These roof rails are the basis for a complete roof rack system . For safety reasons, some ad ditional attachments are necessary to transport luggage, bicycles, surf boards, skis and small boats safely. All these components are available at your authorized Audi dealer . - The permitted roof load for your vehicle is 165 lbs (7 5 kg). The roof load is a combination of the weight of the carrier system and the cargo . - When using roof rack systems with a lower load capacity, you cannot use the maximum permissible roof load . In this case, the roof rack can only be loaded to the weight lim it given in the installation guide. Install at ion .... When installing the support feet, make sure they are only placed in the positioning bolt area between the side wall frame and the roof frame trim 9 fig. SO. The positioning bolt is visible as soon as you push the sealing lip back from the room frame trim using the designated tool. A - WARNING (D Note and storage - The cargo must be securely attached on the roof rack, otherwise you increase the risk of an accident . - You must under no circumstances exceed the permissible roof load, the permissible axle loads and the permissible overall weight of your veh icle because this increases the risk of an accident. - Please note that there is a higher risk of collision when transporting heavy objects or objects with a large surface on the roof rack, since the handling characte ristics change due to a shift in the center of gravity or the greater surface area exposed to the wind. So adapt your driving and speed to the actual conditions. If you use other roof luggage rack systems or do not install the racks as intended, any damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty. Carefully follow the assembly and installation instructions included with the roof rack carrier system. @ For the sake of the environment A roof rack is often left mounted out of convenience even if it is no longer used. Your vehicle will use more fuel due to the increased wind resistance. So remove the roof rack after us ing it . Luggage compartment General information A WARNING - Read and follow the important safety precautions in 9 page 176, Stowing luggage. N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 49 S ea ts and s tor a ge Luggage compartment cover The luggage compartment cover blocks the view into the luggage compartment. cupants dur ing sudden braking maneuvers or in a crash. (D Note The defogger and antenna wires in the rear window can be damaged by objects on the luggage compartment cover rubbing aga inst them . Increasing the size of the luggage compartment Fig. 51 Opene d rear lid wit h luggage compartment cover ,-. I To expand the luggage compartment, both sections of the backrest can be separated or can be folded forward together . ~ ir----- ---------- ~ - - 10 Fig. 52 Unlocked luggage compartment cover Fig. 53 Backres t release lever (left side) Removing th e luggag e compartment cover .. To unlock the luggage compartment cover, tu rn the twist lock to the horizontal position ¢ fig. 51 . .. Grip the s ide of the luggage compartment cover and pull the cover in the direction of the arrow¢ fig. 52. Installing the lugg age compartm e nt cov er .. Place the luggage compa rtment coverwith the retainers on the pins and slide the cover upward . .. Turn the twist lock with gentle pressure to the vertical position . A WARNING - To reduce the risk of accidents, never install the luggage compartment cover without securing it . - The luggage compartment cover is not a surface for sto ring objects . Objects placed on the cover cou ld endanger a ll vehicle oc50 Folding the backrest forward .. Push the release lever ¢ fig. 53 in the d irect ion of the a rrow . .. Fold the backrest forward . Folding the backrest back into the upright position .. Fold the backrest down until it latches securely ~&.- A WARNING - The backrest must be securely latched to ensure the safety belt is protecting the rear seat pos itions. - The backrest must be securely latched so objects cannot slide forward out of the luggage compartment during sudden brak ing . Seats (D and storag e Note Make sure the safety belt is not pinched in the backrest lock and damaged when the rear seat backrest if folded back. Lowering the cargo floor In exceptional situations, the cargo floor con be lowered. Fig. 54 Luggage compartme nt: cargo floor removed Fig. 5 5 Luggage compartme nt: spare tire removed "' Remove t he ca rgo floor <>page 275. "' Remove t he plastic floo r panel~ fig. 54. "'T urn the ha nd le coun ter-clockwise to remove and remove the foam piece . "' Remove the spare tire . "' Reinsert the foam piece and t urn the handle clockwise to tighten. "' Now reinsert the ca rgo floor. A .... WARNING Please note that you are no longer mob ile in the even t of a fla t tire. Please not e the lega l regulat ions befo re remov ing t he spa re ti re . N a: CX) .... "' .... .... "' U"I 51 Warm and c ol d Warm and cold Climate control system Description The climate control system warms, cools and adds humidity to the air in the veh icle inter ior . It functions most effect ively when the windows are closed. If there is a bui ld-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation can help to speed up th e cooling process. Pollut ant filt er The pol lutant filter removes pollutants such as dust and pollen from the a ir. Key recognit ion Certain settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key being used . .&_WARNING Poor visibility can lead to accidents. - For safer driving, keep all windows free of ice, snow and fog. - Become familiar as quickly as possible with the correct use and function of the climate contro l system, especially with the defrosting and defogging function. - When the temperature is below freez ing, only use the windsh ield washer system after the windsh ield has been warmed by the climate contro l system. The washer fluid cou ld freeze on the windshield and impair visibility . (D Note - If you suspect that the climate control system is damaged, switch the system off to 52 prevent further damage and have it checked by an authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. - Repairs to the Audi climate control system require special technical knowledge and special tools. See an authori zed Audi dea ler or authori zed Audi Service Facility. @) For the sake of the environment Reducing the amount of fuel used also reduces the amount of pollutants that enter the air . (D Tips - To prevent interference with the heating and cooling output and to prevent the windows from fogging over, the air intake in front of the windshield must be free of ice, snow or leaves . - Condensation from the cooling system can dr ip and form a puddle of water under the vehicle . This is normal and does not mean there is a leak . - The energy management system may switch the seat heating* or rear window defroster off temporarily . These systems are available aga in as soon as the energy balance has been restored. - The flows through the vents under the rea r window. Make su re the openings are not covered when plac ing clo t hing on the luggage compartment cover. Warm and cold Automatic climate control system controls Fig. 56 Automatic climate control syste m: controls You can control the functions through the dial, buttons in the dial and the buttons. Press the buttons to turn the functions on or off . The LED in a button will light up when the funct ion is switched on . We recommend pressing the IAUTOI button and setting the temperature to 7 2 ° F (22 °C). The automatic climate control system automatically maintains a temperature once it has been set . The temperat ure of the air from t he vent s, fan speed , and a ir dist ribution are also automatically adjusted . In a ll heating mode functions except defrost, the blowe r only switches to a higher speed once the engine coo lant has reached a cer tain temperature. ~ Adjusting the blow er The blower speed can be adjusted in small increments using the dia l (D. To prevent the windows from fogging over, the blower shou ld always run at a low speed . You can adjust the volume of air generated by the blower to your preference . To have the blower regulated automatically , press t he !AUTOI button . IA/C j Switching cooling mode on and off .... The cooling system is tur ned on and off w ith the N a: IA / Cl button. The air is not coo led and humidity is switches off automatically when the outside temperature is be low zero. The temperature trol @ . can be adjusted with the con - I• / • IAdjusting the temperature The t emperature can be adjus t ed in small increments using the d ial @ . IAU T O ISwitching automatic mode on and off The automatic mode is turned on using the IAU T O I button . AUTOmode switches off once a button in the climate cont rol system is pressed. Automat ic mode main t ains a cons t ant temperatu re inside the vehicle . Air temperature, a irf low and air distr ibut ion are controlled automatica lly. Adjusting the air distribution The air distr ibution ca n be adjust ed with the contro l @ . To have the air d istribut ion regulated automat ica lly, press the IAU TO I bu tt on. The rou nd a ir vents in the cockpit a re adjus t able ~ page 54. To keep the front side windows from fogg ing up in damp weather, we recommend open ing the side air vents and ti lting t hem t o the side . 1-1 Switching recirculation mode on and off CX) .... not removed when cooling mode is sw itched off. This can cause fog on the windows. Cooling mode .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I The rec ircul at ion mode can be turned on man ually or automatically* . ..,. 53 Warm and cold - Switching manual recirculation mode on and off: press ld<> I - Automatic* recirculation mode: auto recirculation needs to be activated in the Infotainment system. Select in the Infotainment system: I MENUI button> Vehicle> left control button >Vehicle settings> Air conditioning> Auto recirculation . The a ir quality sensor that is designed for diesel and gasoline exhaust auto matically switches the recirculation mode on or off depending on the level of pollutants in the outside air. A WARNING You should not use the recirculation mode for an extended period since no fresh air is drawn in. With the air-conditioning switched off, the windows can fog up, which increases the risk of an accident . Adjusting the air vents In recirculation mode , the air inside the vehicle is circulated and filtered . This prevents the unfiltered air outside the vehicle from entering the veh icle interior . We recommend switching rec irculation mode on when driving through a tunnel or when sitting in traffic c::>,&.. Recirculation mode is switched off by pressing the 1- 1button or I AUT O I or!w MAX !. I@MAXI Switching defrost on and off The windshield and side windows are defrosted or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible . The optimum amount of air flows mainly out of the vents under the windshield . Recirculation mode switches off. The temperature is controlled automatically. Fig. 57 Cockpit: adjust ing the air vent s To adjust the direction of air flow, turn the ridged outer adjustment wheel © c::>fig. 57 . To adjus t the amount of air flow, move the lever @ on the air vent. To stop t he air flow, move the lever all the way to the left. Seat heating The IAUTO I button switches the defroster off . IQ!ilREARI Switching the rear window defogger on and off If the rear window defogger is activated when the ignition is switched on, the battery management determines based on the battery charge if it is possible to turn on. Otherwise , the rear window defogger functions with the engine running and switches off automatically after approximately 10 - 20 minutes, depending on the outside temperature. To prevent the rear window defogger from switching off automatically, press and hold the lliillREARI button for more than 2 seconds. This remains stored up to approximat ely lS minut es after turning off the ignition. 54 Fig. 58 Air vents : seat heating The seat heating has three levels. The selected heat level is indicated by the LED. .,.To switch the seat heating on , press the ~ button once. .,.To switch to a lower level, press the ~ button again. .,.To switch the seat heating off, press the~ button repeatedly unti l the LEDturns off . .,._ Warm a nd c o ld The seat heating switches automatically from setting 3 to setting 2 after 10 minutes. When seat heating should not be switched on Do not turn the seat heating on under the following circumstances: - The The The The A seat seat seat seat is unocc upied. is covered w ith a seat cover. is covered with a child seat. is damp or wet. WARNING Individuals with reduced sensitiv ity to pain or temperature could develop burns when using the seat heating function. To reduce the risk of injury, these individuals should not use seat heat ing. {[) Note To avoid damage to the heat ing elements in the seats, do not kneel on the seats or place heavy loads on a sma ll area of the seat. @ Tips - The setting for the seat heating on the driver's side is ass igned to the key that is in use. - If the front passenger 's seat heat ing is turned on, it will not t urn on again automatically if more than 10 m inutes have passed between sw itching the ign ition off and switching it on again. 55 Dr iv ing Driving General · New tires information New engine The engine needs to be run-in during the first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) . For the first 600 mi (1,000 km): ...Do not use full throttle. ...Do not drive at engine speeds that are more than 2/3 of the maximum permitted RPM. ...Avoid high engine speeds. If your veh icle is runni ng on new tires, d rive part icul a rly careful for the first 350 m i (500 km) af te r fitting . _& WARNING - New tires tend to be slippe ry and must a lso be "broken-in". Be sure to remember this during the first 350 m i (500 km). Brake gently . Avoid following close ly be hind othe r vehicles or other situations that might req uire sudden, hard brak ing . From 600 to 1,000 mi ( 1,000 to 1,500 km): ...Speeds can gradually be increased to the maximum pe rm issib le road or engine speed. During and after break-in period .,.Do no t rev t he engine up to high speeds when it is cold. This applies whethe r the t ransmission is in N (Neutral) or in gear. After the break-in period ...Do not exceed maximum engine speed unde r any circums t ances . .,.Upshift into t he next higher gear before reach ing t he red area at t he end of t he tac hometer page 8 . sca le r=:> During t he first few hours of drivi ng, the eng ine's internal fric t ion is higher t han late r whe n al l t he mov ing parts have been broke n in . How well this break-in process is done depends to a considerab le extent on the way the vehicle is dr iven during the first 1,000 mi (1,500 km). @ Note Extremely high engine speeds a re automatically reduced. However, these rpm lim its are programmed for an engine well run -in, not a new engine. @ For the sake of the environment Do not drive with unnecessa rily high eng ine speeds - upshi fting early saves fuel, reduces noise and protects the environment. 56 Avoid damaging the vehicle When you a re dr iving on poor roads, or over curbs, steep ramps, et c., ma ke certa in tha t lowlying parts such as spoile rs and exh au st system parts do not botto m out and get dam aged. This is espec ially t rue for veh icles with low-slu ng chass is (sports chass is)* a nd fully loaded vehicles . Driving through water on roads Note the following to avo id vehicle damage when driving th rough water, for examp le on flooded roads : - The wat er must not be any highe r than the bot t om of the vehicle body. - Do not dr ive faster th an wal king speed . _& WARNING Aft e r driving thro ugh wa t er or mu d, the bra king eff ect can be re du ced du e to moistu re on the brake d iscs and bra ke pads . A few careful brake applicatio ns should dry off the brakes. (D Note Vehicle components su ch as t he engi ne, transmission, sus pension o r e lectr ical system can be severe ly damage d by driving throug h water . .,. Driving @ Tips - Determine the depth before driving through water. - Do not stop the vehicle, drive in reverse or switch the engine off when driving through water. - Keep in mind that oncoming vehicles may create waves that raise the water level and make it too deep for your vehicle to drive through safely. - Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion). Economical and environmentally-friendly driving The amount of fuel consumption, the environmental impact and the wear to the engine, brakes and tires depends mostly on your driving style. With an anticipatory and economic driving style, fuel consumption can be reduced by approximately 10-15%. The following tips will help you conserve the environment and your money at the same time. phase. Therefore, you should begin driving immediately after starting the engine. Avoid high RPMs while doing this. Service regularly By servicing your vehicle regularly, you can help to reduce fuel consumption before you even start to drive. The maintenance condition of your vehicle not only affects traffic safety and long-term value but also impacts fuel consumption. A poorly serviced engine can lead to fuel consumption that is 10% higher than normal. Also check the oil level when refueling . The oil consumption depends largely on the engine load and speed. It is normal for the oil consumption of a new engine to reach its lowest point only after a certain amount of use. Therefore, the oil consumption can only be properly judged after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km) have been driven. Avoid short trips Anticipatory driving The engine and exhaust cleaning system must reach their optimal operating temperature to effectively reduce consumption and emissions. A vehicle uses the most fuel when accelerating. When you drive with anticipation, you do not need to brake as often and thus accelerate less. When possible, let your vehicle coast with a gear engaged - for example, when you notice that the next traffic light is red. A cold engine consumes a disproportionately high amount of fuel. The engine is at operating temperature and consumption has normalized only after approximately four kilometers. Avoid full acceleration You should rarely travel at the maximum vehicle speed. High speeds cause a disproportionately high increase in fuel consumption, emissions and traffic noise. Slower driving saves fuel. Reduce idling time It pays off to stop the engine, for example when at railroad crossings or traffic lights with longer red lights. Stopping the engine for 30-40 seconds already saves more fuel than the amount of extra fuel needed to restart the engine. It takes a very long time in idle to warm the engine up to operating temperature. Wear and emissions are especially high in the warm-up (D Note Do not leave engine idling unattended after starting. If warning lights should come on to indicate improper operation, they would go unheeded. Extended idling also produces heat, which could result in overheating or other damage to the vehicle or other property. @ Note - Have your vehicle maintained properly and in accordance with the service recommendations in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet. Lack of proper maintenance as well as improper use of the vehicle will impair the function of the emission control system and could lead to damage. 57 .,. Driving - Do not alter or remove any component of the Emission Control System unless approved by the manufacturer. - Do not alter or remove any device, such as heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves, which are designed to protect your vehicle's Emission Control System and other important vehicle components. (D Tips The consumption estimates as published by ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTIONAGENCY (EPA) and Transport Canada may not correspond to your actual consumption on the road, which will vary depending upon vehicle load and speed, road and weather conditions, trip length, etc. Steering Adjusting the steering wheel position The steering wheel position is fully adjustable up and down and forward and back. - Adjust the driver's seat or steering wheel so that there is at least a 10 in (25 cm) distance between your chest and the steering wheel. If you do not maintain this distance, you will not be properly protected by the airbag system. - If your physical characteristics prevent you from sitting at least 10 in (25 cm) or more away from the steering wheel, see if your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can provide adapters that will help. - If your face is level with the steering wheel, the airbag does not provide as much protection during a collision. Always make sure that the steering wheel is level with your chest. - Always hold the steering wheel with your hands in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce the risk of injury if the airbag deploys. - Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o'clock position or with both hands on the rim or the center of the steering wheel. Holding the steering wheel incorrectly significantly increases the risk of injury to the hands, arms and head if the airbag deploys. Starting and stopping the engine Starting the engine Fig. 59 Lever on the steering column The IST ART ENGINE STOP Ibutton switches the ignition on and starts the engine. • Tilt the lever~ fig. 59 downward. ~ &. • Bring the steering wheel into the desired position. • Push the lever against the steering column until it latches. & WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment and an incorrect seating position can cause serious injuries. - Only adjust the steering column when the vehicle is stationary so that you do not lose control of the vehicle. 58 Fig. 60 Center conso le: START ENGINE STOPbutton Driving Switching the ignition on/off Stopping the engine "'To switch the ignition on/off, press the I START ENGINE ST OP ! button. Do not press the brake pedal while doing this. Starting the engine "'Press the brake pedal and move the selector lever into the P or N position ¢ ,&.. "'Press the I START ENGINE STOPI button ¢ fig. 60. The engine will start. Emergency off If the engine should not start immediately, the starting process is automatically stopped after a short time. Repeat the starting process. A = WARNING - - Never allow the engine to run in confined spaces - danger of asphyxiation. - Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. - The brake booster and power steering only work when the engine is running. If the engine is off, you have to use more force when steering or braking. Because you cannot steer and brake as you usually would, this could lead to crashes and serious injuries. (D Note Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and heavy engine load as long as the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. You could damage the engine. @) For the sake of the environment Do not let the engine run while parked to warm up. Begin driving immediately. This reduces unnecessary emissions. @ "' Bring the vehicle to a full stop. "' Move the selector lever into the P position. "'Press the I START ENGINE STOP ! button ¢ page 58, fig. 60. Tips - Some noise after starting the engine is normal and is no cause for concern. - If you leave the vehicle with the ignition switched on, the ignition will switch off after a certain amount of time. Make sure that electrical equipment such as the exterior lights are switched off. If it is necessary in unusual circumstances, the engine can be switched off while the vehicle is moving. Briefly press the ! START ENGINE STOPI button twice in a row or press and hold for longer than two seconds. A = WARNING - Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. - Please note that the brake booster and power steering only work when the engine is running. When the engine off, you must use more force to steer or brake the vehicle. Because the usual steering and braking capability is not available, the risk of accidents or injuries increases. - For safety reasons, always park the vehicle with the selector lever in the P position. Otherwise, there is the risk that the vehicle could roll. -After the engine has been switched off, the radiator fan can continue to run for up to 10 minutes - even with the ignition switched off. It can also switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises as the result of heat buildup or if the engine compartment is heated by the sun's rays and the engine is hot. (D Note If the engine has been under heavy load for an extended period of time, heat builds up in the engine compartment after the engine is switched off - there is a risk of damaging the engine. For this reason, let the engine run for at idle for approximately two minutes before shutting it off. 59 Driving Messages Turn off ignition before leaving vehicle . Battery is discharging This message appears and a war ning tone sounds if you open th e driver's door when t he ignition is swit ched on. Switc h t he ig nition off so t hat the batt ery will not dischar ge. Pressing start / stop button again will switch off engine. This message appears whe n you press t he I ST A RT ENGI N E ST OP I button while dr iving . Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service The engine automatic start system has a mal f unction. Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly t o have the ma lf unction corrected. To start the engine, press and hold the ISTA RT ENGINE STOPI button. II Remote control key: hold back of key against the designated area. See owner's man ual This message appears if there is no convenience key inside the vehicle or if the system does not recognize t he key. The convenience key may not be recognized, for examp le, if it is covered by an object that disrupts the signal (such as a briefcase), or if t he key batte ry is weak. El ect ronic devices such as cell phones can also interf ere w it h t he signal. This message appears if yo u do not press the brake pedal w hen starti ng the engine. Please select N or P This message appears w hen start ing or stoppi ng the engine if t he selecto r lever is not in the N or P posit ion. The engine will not st art /stop. Shift to P, otherwise vehicle can roll away. Doors can be locked only in P This message appears for safety reasons along with a war ning tone . It appears if t he selecto r lever f or t he automat ic tr ansmission is not in the P position whe n switch ing the ig nition off w ith th e I ST A RT ENGI N E ST OP I button. Shift theselector lever to the P posit ion. Otherwi se, t he vehicle could roll. You also cannot lock th e vehicl e using t he locking sensor on t he door handle or using t he convenience key. Starting the engine when there is a malfunction It m ay not be possible to start the engine unde r certain circumstances, for example if the battery in the vehicle key is drained, if interference is af fected the key or if there is a system malfunction. .. "N c;, ~ Cl) To still be able to sta rt or stop the engine, refe r to "Correct ing a mal f unct ion" c::> page 60 . Ill Remote control key: key not recognized . Is the key still in the vehicle? Ill The ind icator light turns on and this message appears if t he convenience key was removed from the vehicle whe n the engine was running. If t he convenience key is no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ig nition on or start t he engine once you stop it. I n add it ion, you cannot lock t he vehicl e from the out side. Please press brake pedal 60 Fig. 61 Stee ring column /remote control key: sta rting the en gine if there is a malfunct ion As long as t he message t>> ) Remote control key: hold back of key against the designated area. See owner's manual is displayed, you can emergency start your veh icle . &.in Starting .,.Press the brake pedal c::> the engine on page 59. ~-------- ...Press t he I START ENGINE STOP ! but to n. .,._ D rivi ng .. Hold the master key in the location indicated as shown in the illustrat ion y>l)¢ fig. 61. The engine will start . .. If the engine does not automatically start, press the ISTART ENGIN E STOP ! button again. @ Tips You can view the message again by pressing the ISTART ENGINE STOP ! button. When starting from rest - The integra l hill start assist helps you when driving by au toma t ically re leas ing the parking brake ¢ page 62 , Starting from a stop. - When start ing on inclines, t he hill star t assist prevents the veh icle from un intentionally rolling back . The braking force of the parking bra ke is not re leased unti l sufficient dr iving force has been bu ilt up at the whee ls. Emergency brake function Electromechanical parking brake Operating The electromechanical parking brake repla ces the hand brake. An emergency braking function ensures th at the vehicle can be slowed down even if the normal brakes fail ¢ page 62 , Emergency braking function . Indicator lights - If the par king bra ke is set when t he ignit ion is switched on, the . indicator ligh t s in the dis play and in the button tu rn on . - If the pa rking bra ke is set when the ignit io n is switched off , the . indicator ligh t s in the display and in the button tu rn on for approximately 20 seconds. A - Fig. 62 Center console: park ing brake I. .,. Pull the switch ¢ fig . 62 to set the parking brake . The (USA models) (Canada mode ls) indicator lights turn on in the button and in the Info t ainment system display. .. To release the parking brake, press t he brake or acce le rator peda l wh ile the ignition is switched on a nd press the button at the same t ime. The (USA mode ls) (Canada models) indicator lights turn on in the button and in the display . I. Your veh icle is equipped with an e lectromechani cal parking brake . The parking brake is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally and replaces the hand brake. In addition to the norma l functions of a tradi- .... tional hand brake, the electromechanica l parking N a: CX) brake provides various convenience and safety .... functions . I.Cl .... I.Cl .... WARNING - Do not press the acce lerator pedal inadvertently if the vehicle is stationary but the eng ine is ru nning and a gear is selected. Otherwise the vehicle will st art to move immediate ly and could result in a crash . - If the power supply fails, the released park ing brake can no longer engage . In t his case, par k t he vehicle on level ground and secure it by pla cing the sele cto r leve r in t he P posit ion. See an authori zed Audi dea le r o r author ized Audi Se rvice Facility for assis tance. © Tips - If the park ing brake is set w hile t he ign it ion indicator light in t he is swit ched off, th@[(@)J butto n and in the inst rumen t clu ster display (USA models) (Canada models) will turn off after a certain amo unt of time. I. U"I 61 Dr iv ing - If dr iver's door is opened while the ign ition is switched on, the parking brake sets automatically . This prevents unintended ro lling of the vehicle . · Starting from a stop The start assist function ensures that the parking brake is released automatically upon starting. - Occasional noises when the parking brake is applied and released are normal and are not a cause for concern. Stopping and applying parking brake - When the vehicle is parked, the parking brake goes thro ugh a self-test cycle at regular intervals. Any noises associated with this are normal. Starting and automat ically releasing the park ing brake ~ Pull the switch Requirement: the driver's door must be closed and the driver's safety belt must be fastened . - If the (USA models) / . (Canaind icator da models) indicator lights or light turn on, there could be a malfu nction in the park ing brake ¢page 11. - If there is a power fa il ure, the parking brake will not set if it is released, and it will not release if it is set¢ .&.. See an authorized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility for assistance. IIJ ~ ~ Press t he brake pedal to stop t he vehicle. ~ Pull the switch ~ to set the parking brake. ~ Place the selector lever in the P position. ~ Turn the engine off ¢ ,&. . ~ Turn the steering wheel when parking on incli nes so that the wheels will roll into the curb if the vehicle starts moving . WARNING - Always take the vehicl e key with you when leaving t he vehicle, even fo r a short period of time. This applies particularly when chi ldren remain in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could start the engine, release the parking brake or operate elect rical equipment (e.g. power windows). There is the risk of an accident. - When the vehicle is loc ked, no one - particularly not children should remain in the vehicle. Locked doors ma ke it more diff icult for emergency worke rs to get into t he vehicle, wh ich puts lives at risk. Starting on slopes When sta rting on inclines, the hill start assist prevents the vehicle from unintentionally rolling back. The braking force of t he parking brake is not released unt il sufficie nt dr iving force has been built up at t he wheels . - @ Tips For safety reasons, the park ing brake is released automatically only when the driver's safety belt is fastened and the driver's door is locked. Emergency braking function In the event that the conventional brake system fails or locks. ~ ~ 62 When you press the accelerato r pedal, the parking brake is automatica lly released and your vehicle begins to move. When stopping at a t raffic signa l or stopping in city traff ic, the parking brake can be applied. The vehicle does not have to be held with the brake pedal. The park ing brake elim inates the tendency to creep when a selector lever position is engaged. As soon as you press the accelerator pedal, the parking brake releases automat ically and the vehicle starts to move . Parking A [2Jto set the parking brake. To brake your vehicle in an emergency, pull the [2Jswitch and hold it pull ed. As soon as you release the button or accelerate, t he braking stops. ..,. D r iving Pulling and holding the switch while driving at a speed of about 2 mph (3 km/h) or higher initiates the emergency braking function. The vehicle is braked at all four whee ls by activating the hydraulic brake system . The brake performance is similar to heavy braking. c:>&. In order not to activate the emergency brak ing by mistake, an audib le warning tone (bu zzer) sounds when the switch is pulled. As soon as the switch is released, or the accelerator pedal is depressed, emergency brak ing stops . A WARNING Emergency brak ing should only be used in an emergency, when the normal bra ke pedal has fai led or the brake pedal is obstructed. During emergency braking, your vehicle will brake simi lar to heavy braking. ESCand the associated components (ABS, ASR, EDL) cannot overcome the laws of physics. In corners and when road or weather cond itions are bad, a full brake application can cause the vehicle to skid or the rear end to break away, wh ich in- creasesthe risk of an accident. Trailer towing General information Your Audi TT Coupe is not designed to tow a trailer . Towing a trailer with your Audi TT Coupe is not recommended and can cause damage to the car. Damaged caused by towing a trailer is not covered by you r Audi Warranty. 63 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission S tronic Introduction Your veh icle is equipped with an electronicallycontrolled DSG transmission called S tronic. Two independent clutches transfer the power between the engine and transmission . It allows the vehicle to accelerate without a noticeable interruption in traction. The transm ission upshifts or downshifts automatica lly. The driving style continuously influences the selection of the driving program. When a moderate driving style is used, the transmission selects the most economical driving mode. The transm ission upshifts at a lower RPM and downshifts at a higher RPM to improve fuel efficiency. The transm ission switches to a spo rt y mode after a kick-down or when the driver uses a sporty driving style characterized by quick accelerator pedal movements, heavy acceleration, frequent changes in speed and traveling at the maximum speed. If desired, the driver can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode). Selector lever positions P - Park The wheels are mechan ica lly locked in this posi tion. You can only shift into Park when the veh icle is stationary ¢ & . To sh ift in and out of the P selec t or lever position, press the interlock button in the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal. R- Reverse Only sh ift into reverse gear when the veh icle is stationary and the engine is running at idle speed¢ ,6 . To select the R selector lever position, press the interlock button while pressing the brake pedal. The back-up lights switch on in the R position if the ignit ion is switched on. N - Neutral The transmission is in idle in th is position . DIS - Normal position fo r driving forward In the D/S se lector lever position, the transmission can be operated either in the normal D mode or in the S sport mode. To select the S sport mode, pull the selector lever back briefly. Pulling the lever back aga in will select the normal D mode . The selected driving mode is shown in the Infotainment display . In the normal mode D, the transmission automatically selects the suitable gear ratio . It de pends on engine load, vehicle speed and driving style . Se lect the sport mode S for sporty driving. The vehicle makes full use of the engine's power. Shifting is may become noticeable when accelerat ing. Fig. 63 Instrument cluster: selector lever posit ions The Infotainment system d isplay shows the cur rent selector lever position and the engaged gear . 64 To move from selector lever position N to D, you must press the brake pedal and the ve hicle must be traveling less than 1 mph (2 km/h) or be stationary ¢ ,6 . A WARNING Read and fol low all WARNINGS. - The vehicle can roll even if the ignit ion is sw itched off. Aut o ma t ic tr a n s m iss ion - Never select R or P while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident. - Power is sti ll transmitted to the wheels when the engine is running at idle. To prevent the vehicle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brake in all selector lever positions (except P) when the engine is runn ing . Otherwise, th is increases the risk of an accident. - Do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped if a gear is engaged . Otherwise the vehicle w ill start to move immediately, even if the parking brake is set . This could result in a crash. - Do not press the accelerator pedal when changing the selector lever position while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. - Never leave your vehicle wi t h t he engine running wh ile in gear. If you must leave your vehicle when the engine is running, set the parking brake and move the selector lever to the P position. - Before opening the hood and working on a running engine, select the P position w ith the selector lever and activate the parking brake. Always read and follow the applicable warnings c>page 236, Working in the engine compartment. (D Note Never let the vehicle roll downhill with engine off and the selector lever in the N position, because this could damage the automatic transmission and cata lytic converte r. (D .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Tips - Drive select: sporty shifting character istics can be selected using the Dynamic driving mode . The Infota inment display shows Sas the selector lever posit ion instead of D. - If you accidentally select N while driv ing, take your foot off the accelerator pedal immediately and wa it for the engine to slow down to idle before select ing D or S. - If t here is a power fa il ure, the selector lever will not move out of the P posit ion. The emergency release can be used if this happens. Left-hand drive vehicles c>page 71. Selector lever lock The selector lever lock prevents you from selecting a gear accidentally, causing the vehicle to roll. N Fig. 64 Selecto r lever lock To release the selector lever lock: .. Switch on the ign ition. .. Press the brake pedal while pressing the interlock button . Automatic s hift lock (ASL) The selector lever is locked in the P and N positions when the ignition is switched on. You must press the brake pedal to select another position . You must also press the interlock button if you are moving from the P position . The f ollowing message appears in the display when the selector lever is in the P or N posit ion to rem ind the driver: To se lect a gear, please press brake pedal and press lock button on sele ctor lever The automatic shift lock only funct ions when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 1 mph (2 km/h) . At higher speeds, t he lock is automati cally deactivated in the N position . The selector lever is not locked when shifting quick ly throug h N, for example from R to D. This makes it possible to free the vehicle when it is stuck by "rocking" it . The selector lever lock engages if the lever stays in the N posit ion longer than approx imately 2 seconds when t he brake pedal is not pressed. ..,. 65 Automatic transmission Interlock button The interlock button in the selector lever handle prevents you from moving the selector lever inadvertently while in some se lector lever positions. The posit ions that requir e the lock butto n to be pressed are marked in color in the illustration c:>fig. 64. A WARNING Read and follow all WARNINGS. c:>,&. in Selector lever positions on page 64 . (D Tips - If the selector lever does not engage, there is a malfunction . The eng ine is disabled to prevent the vehicle from driving off unintentionally . To allow the selector lever to engage aga in, proceed as follows : - Briefly press the brake pedal. - If the vehicle does not move forward or in reverse even though a drive position is selected, proceed as follows: - >If the vehicle does not move in the desired direction, the system may not have engaged the drive position correctly . Press the brake pedal and select the drive posit ion again . - >If the veh icle st ill does not move in the des ired direction, there is a system malfunction. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance to have the system checked. Driving tips The transmission shifts up and down automatically when in the driving gears. The engine will on ly be able start when the selector lever is in the P or N positions. At low temperatures (below 14 °F (-10 °C)), the engine can only be started when the selector lever is in the P position. Starting from a stop .,. Press and hold the brake pedal. .,.Press and hold the interlock button in theselector lever handle, select the desired selector lever position such as D c:>page 64 and release the lock button . .,.Wait a moment until the transmission shifts. You will notice a slight movement when the gear engages. .,. Release the brake peda l and press the accelerator pedal c:>,& . Stopping temporarily .,. Keep the vehicle stationary using the braking pedal, for examp le at traffic lights. .,. Do not press the acce lerato r pedal when doing this . .,.To prevent the veh icle from rolling when you start driving, set the parking brake when stopping on steep inclines c:>,& . .,.The parking brake will release automatically and the vehicle will start moving once you press the accelerator pedal. Stopping/parking If the selector lever is not in the P position when you open the driver's door, the vehicle could roll. In vehicles with a convenience key*, the message: Shift to P, otherwise vehicle can roll away. Doors can be locked only in P appears . You will also hear a warning tone . .,.Press and hold the brake peda l c:>,& . .,.Set the park ing brake . .,.Select the P selector lever position. Stopping on an incline Fig. 65 Section of the cente r console: selecto r lever with interlock button 66 .,.Always press the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place and prevent it from "rolling back" c:>,&.. Do not try to prevent the vehicle from "rolling back" when a gear is engaged by increas ing the engine speed c:>(D . Automatic Starting on a hill "' Set the parking brake . "'With the driving gear selected, press the accelerator pedal carefully. The parking brake will release automatically if your safety belt is fastened . Under certain circumstances, such as driving in the mountains, it may be useful to switch temporarily to the manual shift program in order to manually adjust the gears to the driving conditions ¢ page 68. When parking on a level surface, simply place the selector lever in the P position. On inclines, activate the parking brake first and then move the selector lever to the P position ¢ page 61. This prevents the locking mechanism from being loaded too heavily and will make it easier to move the selector lever out of the P position . .8, WARNING - The vehicle can roll even when the engine is switched off . - Unintended vehicle movement can lead to serious injuries. - Never leave your vehicle with the engine running while in gear. If you must leave your vehicle when the engine is running, set the parking brake and move the selector lever to the P position. - Power is still transferred to the wheels when the engine is running at idle. To prevent the vehicle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brake when the engine is running and the selector lever is in the D, Sor R position or "tiptronic" mode is selected. - Do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise the vehicle will start to move immediately, even if the parking brake is set. This could result in a crash. - Do not press the accelerator pedal when changing the selector lever position while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running . transmission - Never engage the R or P selector level positions while driving. It could cause a crash. - Before driving down a steep slope, reduce your speed and shift into a lower gear with "ti ptronic". - Do not ride the brakes or press the brake pedal too often or too long when driving down a hill. Constant braking causes the brakes to overheat and substantially reduces braking performance, increases braking distance or causes complete failure of the brake system. - If you must stop on an incline, always hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake or parking brake to prevent it from rolling back. - Never hold the vehicle on an incline with a slipping clutch. The clutch opens automatically when it becomes too hot from the indicator light turns on overload. The and a message appears ¢ page 70 when the clutch is overloaded. - If the engine must run while you are working in the engine compartment with the hood open, make sure a gear is not engaged. The selector lever must be firmly in the P position and locked in place and the parking brake must be set ¢ page 236. Other wise, the vehicle could begin moving when increasing the engine speed, even with the parking brake set . mJ (!) Note - When stopping on an incline, do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing the accelerator pedal while a driving gear is selected. This can cause the automatic transmission to overheat and can damage it. Activate the parking brake or press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling. - Allowing the vehicle to roll when the engine is stopped and the selector lever is in the N position will damage the automatic transmission because it is not lubricated under those circumstances. 67 Automatic transmission - The transmission can overheat and be damaged under certain driving and traffic conditions such as frequent starts, creeping for a long time, or stop-and-go traffic. When the @]or . indicator light turns on, stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and let the transmission cool r=;,page 70 . - Allowing the vehicle to roll when the engine is stopped will damage the S tronic transmission because it is not lubricated r=;,page 290, Towing with a tow truck. @ Shifting manually (tiptronic mode) The tiptronic allow the driver to shi~ the gears manually. Tips For safety reasons, the parking brake is released automatically only when the driver's safety belt is engaged in the buckle. Fig. 66 Center conso le: ma nua l shifting with the selector lever Hill descent control The hill descent control system assists the driving when driving down declines. Hill descent control is activated when the selector lever is in the Dor S position and you press the brake pedal. The transmission automatically selects a gear that is suitable for the incline. Hill descent control tries to maintain the speed achieved at the time of braking, within physical and technical limitations. If may still be necessary to adjust the speed with the brakes. Because hill descent control cannot shift down farther than 3rd gear, it may be necessary to shift into tiptronic mode in very steep areas. In this case, shift into 1st or 2nd gear in tiptronic mode to use the engine's braking force to relieve the brakes . Hill descent control switches off once the decline levels out or you press the accelerator pedal. On vehicles with a cruise control system* r=;,page 72, hill descent control is also activated when the speed is set. A WARNING Hill descent control cannot overcome physical limitations, so it may not be able to maintain a constant speed under all conditions. Always be ready to apply the brakes. Fig. 67 Steering whee l: ma nual shifting with the shift paddles• Shifting with the selector lever You can shift into tiptronic mode while stationary and while driving. .,.To shift into tiptronic mode, push the selector lever from the D/S setting to the right in the tiptronic shift gate. Once the transmission has switched modes, the selector lever position M is shown in the Infotainment system display r=;, poge 64, fig. 63. For example M4 means the fourth gear is engaged. .,.To shift up a gear, tap the selector lever forward 0 ¢ fig. 66. .,.To shift down a gear, tap the selector lever to back 0 . Shifting with the shift paddles* You can operate the shift paddles in the D/S or M (tiptronic shift gate) selector lever positions. .,.To shift up one gear, tap the shift paddle r=;,fig.67 . 68 0 Automatic ~ To shift down one gear, tap the shift paddle 0- If the shift paddles are tapped while in the D/S selector lever position, automatic mode switches off briefly. To switch from manually shifting back to automatic shifting immediately, tap the shift paddle 0 ~ fig. 67 for 1 second. To keep shifting using the shift paddles, move the selector lever to the right out of the D/S position into the tiptronic shift gate. The transmission automatically shifts up or down before critical engine speed is reached. The transmission only allows manual shifting when the engine speed is within the permitted range. (D Tips - If you shift to the next lowest gear, the transmission will only shift if the engine will not be over-revved. - With kick-down, the transmission shifts to a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed and engine speed. - tiptronic does not work if the transmission is running in emergency mode. Kick-down Kick-down enables maximum acceleration. When you press the accelerator pedal down beyond the resistance point, the automatic transmission downshifts into a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed and engine RPM. It shifts up into the next higher gear once the maximum specified engine RPM is reached. A WARNING Please note that the wheels could spin on slick or slippery roads when kick-down is active. l) transmission Launch Control-Program The Launch Control Program enables maximum acceleration. Requirement: the engine must be at operating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned. ~ With the engine running, press the l1'0 FFI button briefly one t ime l) . ~ Pull the selector lever back out of the D/S position briefly to select the S position, or press it toward the right into the tiptronic position or select the Dynamic driving mode in drive select* ~ page 79. ~ Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and hold it all the way down for at least 1 second. ~ At the same time, press the gas pedal all the way down with your right foot until the engine reaches and stays at a high RPM level. ~ Remove your left foot from the brake. A WARNING -Always adapt your driving to the traffic flow. - Only use Launch Control when road and traffic conditions allow it and other drivers will not be endangered or impacted by your driving and the vehicle's acceleration. - Please note that the drive wheels can spin and the vehicle can break away when sport mode is switched on, especially when the road is slippery. - Once the vehicle has started moving, press OFFI button briefly to turn the sport the !.Pmode off. (D Tips - The transmission temperature may increase significantly after using the launch control program. If that happens, the program may not be available for a few minutes. It will be available again after a cool-down period. The ESC light turns on continuous ly and the me ssage Sta· bilization control (ESC): sport. Warning! Reduced stabil· ity appears te mp orarily to indicate in the Infota inm e nt system that the system was deact ivated. 69 ..,. Automatic transmi ss io n - When accelerating using the launch control program, all vehicle parts are subject to heavy loads . This can lead to increased wear. Drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the malfunction corrected. [O] Tran smission: malfunction! You may continue driving. No reverse gear Emergency mode In the event of a system malfunction, there is on emergency program. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have t he malfunction correct ed . mlTran smission: malfunction! If all of the selector lever positions are highlighted with a light background in the Infotainment disp lay, there is a system malfunction and the S t ron ic transmiss ion is running in the emergency program . The vehicle can still be driven in emergency mode, but only with reduced speed and not in all gears . In some cases, the vehicle can- mlTransmission: too hot . Please adapt driving not dri ve in reverse. style (D Continu e driving mod erate ly. When the indicator light turns off, you can cont inue driving norma lly. Note If the transmission runs in emergency mode, drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. Transmission malfunction • Transmi ssion : malfun ction! Please stop vehicle and shift to P There is a malfunction in the t ransmission. Park the vehicle securely and do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Service Facility for assistance . • Transmission : too hot . Please stop vehicle The transm ission is too hot and can become damaged . Stop and let the transm ission cool with the engine runn ing (at idle) in the P selector lever position. Then the indicato r light and the message tur n off, drive to an authorized Audi dea ler or aut hor ized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly t o have the ma lfunction corrected . If the indicator light and the driver message do not turn off, do not continue driving. See an authoriz ed Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance . [O] Transmi ssion: malfunction! You can continue dri ving. See owner 's manual 70 You may continue driving in D until engin e off Drive the vehicle away from moving traff ic and park . See an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. mlTran smission: plea se press brake pedal and select gear again If t he transm iss ion ma lfunct ions because the temperat ure is too high, a message appe ars when the transmission is cooled . Automatic Selector lever emergency release If the vehicle's power supply fails, the selector lever can be released in an emergency. transmission Selector lever emergency release .,. Press and hold the yellow release button with the screwdriver c:>fig. 69 . .,. Press the re lease button in the selector lever @ and move the lever into the N position . .,.Clip the shift cover back into the shift gate after using the emergency release. If the vehicle must be pushed or towe d due to a power failure (for example, the battery is dead), the selector lever must first be moved to the N position using the emergency release mechanism. Fig. 68 Selector lever: removing the cover A WARNING Only move the selector lever out of the P pos ition when the parking brake is set. If that does not work, secure the veh icle with t he brake pedal. Otherwise, the vehicle could start to move unintentiona lly when the selec tor lever is moved out of the P position. Fig. 69 Selector lever: us ing the eme rgency release to move out of the Park position This section describes using the selector lever emergency release in left-hand drive veh icles . The emergency release mechanism is located in the right area unde r the selector lever shift gate. Using the emergency release can be complicated. We recommend contact ing your authorized Audi dealer for assistance, if necessary . The screwd river from the vehicle tool kit located in the luggage compartment is needed to for the emergency release c:>page 2 75 . Use the flat side of the reversible screwdriver blade . Removing the selector lever cover A .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .,.Set the parking brake(®) c:> to sec ure your vehicle from rolling . .,.Inse rt the flat side of the screwdriver sideways in the slot near the shift cover and pry the shift cover up c:>fig. 68 . .,.Carefully pull the shift cover upward by hand and fold it over the sh ift er knob c:>fig. 69 . U"I 71 A ss is t Assist @ Electronic speed Limiter Your vehicle may be factory equipped with tires that are rated for a maximum speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). This is less than the maximum speed of your vehicle . To reduce the risk of sudden tire failure and loss of control if the vehicle is operated at excessive speeds, your vehicle also has an electronic speed limiter . The electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from going faster than the t ire speed rating. For mo re information qpage257. If the engine control unit receives faulty vehicle road speed s ignals, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)¢..ffi will illumina t e. If this occurs, cont act t he nearest aut horized Audi dealer for assistance. _& WARNING Always observe the posted speed limits and adjust you r speed to suit prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions. Never drive your vehicle faster than the maximum speed rating of the tires installed. Speed warning Regardless of the speed warning system, you should always mon itor your speed using the speedometer and make sure you are fo llowing the legal speed limit . Setting the threshold Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system You can set, change and delete the warning threshold in the Infotainment system. .,.Select in the Infotainment system : IMENU ! button > Vehicle > left control button >Driver assistance > Speed wa rning . You can set any thresho ld between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 150 mph (240 km/h) . Settings can each be adjusted in increments of 5 mph (10 km/h). - system Cruise system Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system The cruise control system makes it possible to drive at a constant speed starting at 1S mph (20km/h). 0 Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system The speed warning system helps you to stay under a specified maximum speed. The speed warning system warns you if you are exceeding the maximum speed that you have set . You will hear a warning tone when your speed exceeds t he stored value by app roximately 3 mph indica t or ligh t turns on at the (3 km/ h). The same time in the Infota inment display. The indicator light turns off when the speed decreas es below the stored maximum speed. Hll Setti ng a threshold is recommended if you would like to be reminded when you reach a certain maximum speed . Situations where you may want to do so include driving in a country wit h a gene ral speed limit or if there is a specified maximum speed for winter tires. 72 control Switching on Introduction 1•1 Tips f ~ 0 Fig. 70 Operat ing lever: cruise co ntro l syste m .,.To switch on the system, pull the lever into position (D q fig. 70. .. Drive at the speed to be controlled . .. To store the speed, press the button @ . (USAmodels) / The stored speed and the lt!jli)M~ (Canada models) indicator light are disp layed in the instrument cluster . l'I Assist The speed is kept constant by modifying engine power or through an active brake intervention . A ill Tips The brake lights illuminate as soon as the brakes apply automatically. Changing speed Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system ~ To increase or decrease the speed quickly, hold the lever in the 0 / 0 direction until the desired speed is reached. WARNING - Always pay attention to the traffic around you when the cruise control is in operation. You are always responsible for your speed and the distance between your vehicle and other vehicles. - For reasons of safety, cruise control should not be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on winding roads and when road conditions are poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain and hydroplaning) - you could have an accident. - Switch the cruise control off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, highway exits or in construction zones. - Please note that unconsciously "res ting" your foot on the accelerator pedal prevents the cruise control from braking. This is due to the control system being overridden by the driver's acceleration. - If a brake system malfunction such as overheating occurs when the cruise control system is switched on, the braking function in the system may be switched off. The rest of the cruise control system functions remain active as long as the til;(l)~14 (USA models) / (Canada models) indicator light is on. (D ~ To increase/decrease the speed in xx mph (1 km/h) increments, br iefly tap the lever up/ down in the 0 10 ¢ page 72, fig. 70 direction to the first level. ~ To increase/decrease the speed in xx mph (10 km/h) increments, briefly tap the lever up/ down in the 0 10 ¢ page 72, fig. 70 direction to the second level. Overriding the speed Applies to : vehicles wit h cruise cont rol syste m You can press the acce lerator pedal down to increase your speed, for example if you want to pass someone. The speed you saved earlier will resume as soon as you let off of the accelerator pedal. However, if you are exceeding the stored speed by a considerable amount for a long time, the cruise control system will temporarily switch off . The 19;(1 )~14 (USA mode ls) (Canada mode ls) indicator light in the instrument cluster turns off and the stored speed is ma intained. !Iii Preselecting the speed Applies to : vehicles with cruise control syste m You can pre-select your desired speed while the vehicle is not moving. ~ Switch on the ignition. ~ Pull the lever into pos ition @ ¢ page 72, fig. 70. ~ To increase or decrease the speed , tap the lever in the 0 10 direction. This function makes it possible , for example, to save the speed you want before driving on the highway. Once on the exp ressway, activate the cruise control by pulling the lever into position @. Switching off Applies to: vehicles wit h cruise cont rol syste m Temporary deactivation ~ Step on the brake pedal, or ~ Press the lever in direction @ (not locked into place) ¢ page 72, fig. 70. Switching off completely ~ ~ Press the lever into position @ (clicked into place), or switch the ignition off . 73 A ss is t The speed you saved will be retained if the cruise control has been switched off temporarily. To re sume the stored speed, re lease the brake or clutch pedal and pull the lever to posit ion (D. Switching the ign ition off will erase the stored speed . A WARNING You should only resume the saved speed if it is not too high for existing traffic cond it ions. Otherwise you risk an accident. Audi active lane assist Description Applies to: veh icles with Audi active lane assist Active lane ass ist de t ects lane marker lines within the limits of the system using a camera in the windshie ld . If you are app roaching a detected lane marker line and it appears likely t hat you will leave the lane, the system will warn you with correct ive steering . You can override t his steer ing at any time . If you pass over a line, the steer ing wheel will vibrate lightly . In order for this warn ing vibration to occur, it must first be sw itched on in the Infotainment system. Act ive la ne assist is operable when the lane mar ke r line is detected on at least one side of the vehicle. The system is designed fo r driving on expressways and highways and therefore only activates at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/ h) (depending on the market). Applies to vehicles w ith side assist* : if you act ivate a turn s ignal when active lane assist is ready a nd it classifies a lane change as crit ical because of vehicles traveling alongside you or approaching you, there w ill be not iceable correct ive steer ing short ly before you leave t he lane . This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the lane . Applies to vehicles w ithout side ass ist*: the sys tem does not warn w hen it is ready if you activa t e the turn signa l before crossing the lane marker l) 74 The correct ive stee ring fun ctio n is not ava ila ble in all mar ket s. line. In this case, it assumes that you are chang ing lanes intentiona lly. A WARNING - The system warns the driver that the vehicle is leaving the lane using cor rect ive steering. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle within the lane . - The system can help you keep the vehicle in the lane, but it does not drive by itse lf. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel. - Corrective stee ring may not occur in certain situations, such as during heavy braking . - There may be cases where the camera does not recognize all lane marker lines. Corrective stee ring can only take place on the side of the vehicle where lane marker lines are detec t ed . - Othe r road structures or objects could poss ibly be identified un intent ionally as lane marker lines. As a result, corrective steering may be u nexpec t ed or m ay not occ ur. - Thecamera viewcan be restricted, for example by vehicles driving ahe ad or by rai n, snow, heavy spray light shin ing into the camera or by dirt on the window. This can res ult in active lane assist not detecting the lane ma rker lines or detect ing them incorrectly. - In ce rtain s ituations whe re visibility is low, the vehicle may switch interna lly from "early" to "late" steering correct ion ll. - Under ce rtain cond it ions such as ruts in the road, an inclined roadway or crosswinds, the corrective steer ing alone may not be enough to keep the vehicle in the m iddle of the lane . - For safety reasons, act ive lane assist must not be used when there are poor road and/ or weather conditions such as slippery roads, fog, gravel, heavy rain, snow and the potential fo r hydrop la ning. Using active lane assis t under t hese con dit ions m ay increase the risk of a crash . A ss ist Switching on and off App lies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist - The driver 's hands are not on the steering wheel. (D Tips - Make sure t he camera's fie ld of view ¢ fig. 72 is not obstr ucted by stickers or anything else. For information on cleaning, refer tor:!;>page 270. - Market-specific: in certain countries: if the system is switched on, it will remain operable each time the ignition is switched on. Fig. 7 1 Turn signal lever: button for act ive lane assist Indicator in Infotainment display Applies to : vehicles with Audi act ive la ne ass ist Fig. 72 Windsh ield: camera window for active lane ass ist ...Press the c>fig. 71 button to switch the system on and off. The . or . ind icator light in the inst rument cluster turns on or off. Indicator light s • Ready: the indicator light turns on when the Green li ne(s) Active lane assist is act ivated and ready to provide warnings . • Red line(s) (left or right) Act ive lane assist warns you before leaving a lane r=>fig.73. In add it ion, the steering wheel vibrates lightly. Gray line(s) lane assist is activated, but not ready to give warning Not ready: the indicator light turns on if the - There is no lane boundary line . - The relevant lane marker lines are not detected (for example, markings in a construction zone or because they are obstructed by snow, dirt, water or lighting). .... a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I You can call up the active lane assist display using the buttons in the multifunction steering whee l r=>poge19 . system is ready for use. The system can now be operated . system is switched on but is inoperab le. This may be due to the following reasons: N Fig. 73 Instrument cluster: active lane ass ist is switc hed on and provid ing warn ings Mes s ages in Infotainment display - The vehicle speed is below the activation speed of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h) (the speed may vary depending on your country). If the active lane assist switches off automatically, the indicator light in the display turns off and one of the follow ing messages appears: - The lane is narrower than approximately 8 ft (2.5 m) or wider than approximately 18 ft (5.5 m) . Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable . Camera view restr icted . See owne r's manual - The curve is too narrow. This message appears if the camera is unable to detect the li nes. This could happen if: 75 .., A ss ist - The camera field of view ~ page 75, fig. 72 is dirty or covered in ice. Clean th is area on the windshield. - The camera field of view is fogged over . Wait until the fog has cleared before switching the active lane assist on again. - The system has been unable to detect the lanes for an extended period of tim e du e to road conditions. Switch the active lane ass ist back on when t he lines are more visible. Audi active lane assist : currently unavailabl e. See owne r's manual There is a temporary active lane assist ma lfunction . Try switching the act ive lane assist on aga in later . Audi active lane assist : malfunction! See owner's manual Drive to an authorized Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi Serv ice Facility immediately to have the malfunct io n corrected. Ste ering time 1> Early: in this setting, t he cor rect ive steering happens continuously to help keep the veh icle in the center of the lane. Late: in this setti ng, the system provides corrective st eer ing ju st before a veh icle wheel touches a detected lane marker line . Vibration warning You can switch the add it ional vibrating warning in the steer ing whee l on or off. (D Tips Market -specific: your settings are automatically stored and ass igned to the remote contro l key being used. Audi side assist Description Applies to : vehicles with Audi side assist Audi active lane assist: Please t ake over steering ! This message appears if you are not steering by yourse lf. If th is is the case, active lane assist does not switch off, but it is "not ready " to provide a warn ing . The system can he lp you keep the veh icle in the lane. However, you a re responsib le for driving the vehicle and must steer it yourself . Fig. 74 Sensor detect ion range Adjusting the steering time and vibration warning Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist You can adjust individual active lane assis t settings in the Infotainment system . Select in the Infotainment system : IMENU ! button> Vehicle > left control button >Driver assistan ce > Audi active lane assist Fig. 75 Display on the ext eri or mirro r Side assist helps you monitor your blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle . Within the limits of .,. 1l The correct ive st eering fu nctio n is not availabl e in all markets. 76 Assist the system, it warns you about vehicles that are coming closer or that are traveling with you within sensor range CD c::> fig . 74: if a lane change is classified as critical, the display @ in the exter ior mirror c::> fig . 75 turns on. The display in the left exterior mirror provides assistance when making a lane change to the left, while the display in the right exterior mirror provides assistance when making a lane change to the right. General information Applies to : vehicles wit h Aud i side assist ® @ Information stage As long as you do not activate the turn signal, side assist informs you about vehicles that are detected and classified as crit ical. The display in the m irror turns on, but is dim. The display remains dim in the information stage so that your view toward the front is not disturbed. Warning stage If you activate the turn signal, side assist warns you about vehicles that are detected and classified as critical. The display in the respective mirror blinks brightly . If this happens, check traffic by glancing in the rearview mirror and over your shoulder c::> .& in General information on page 78. @ Fig. 76 Driving situat ions Tips You can adjust the brightness on of the display on the rearview mirror r::;,page 79. Fig. 77 Rear of t he vehicle: positio n of the sensors (example) Side assist funct ions at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h). @ Vehicles that are approaching In certain cases, a vehicle wi ll be classified as critica l for a lane change even if it is still somewhat far away. The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner the display in the exterior m irror will turn on. .... N a: CX) .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .... U"I @ Vehicles traveling with you Vehicles traveling with yo u are indicated in the exterior mirror if they are classified as critica l for a lane change. All vehicles detected by side assist 77 lli>- A ss is t are indicated by the time they enter your "blind spot", at the latest . © Vehicles left behind If you slowly pass a vehicle that side assist has detected (t he difference in speed bet ween the vehicle and your vehicle is less than 9 mph or 15 km/h), the display in the exterior mirror turns on as soon as the vehicle enters your blind spot. The display will not tu rn on if you quick ly pass a vehicle that side assist has detected (the differ ence in speed between the vehicle and your vehi cle is greater than 9 mph or 15 km/h) . Functional limitations The radar sensors are designed to detect the left and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are the normal width. In some situations, the display in the exter ior mir ror may turn on even tho ugh there is no vehicle located in the area that is criti cal for a lane change. For example: - If the lanes are narrow or if your are driving on the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the system may have detected the vehicle in another lane that is not adj acent to your current lane. - If you are dr iving through a curve. Side assist may react to a vehicle that is one lane over from the adjacent lane. - If side assist reacts to other objects (such as high or displaced guard rails). - In poor weather conditions . The side assist funct ions are limited. Do not cover the radar sensors c::> fig. 77 w it h stic kers, deposits, bicycle wheels or othe r ob jects, because this will affect the function. For information on cleaning, see c::> page 270 . .&_WARNING - Always pay attention to traffic and to the area around your vehicle. Side assist cannot replace a dr iver's attention. The driver alo ne is always responsible for lane changes and similar driving maneuvers. - In some situat ions, the system may not function or its funct ion may be limited. For example: 78 - If vehicles are approaching or being left behind very quickly. The disp lay may not turn on in time. - In poor weather cond it ions such as heavy rain, snow or heavy mist. - On very wide lanes, in tight curves, or if the re is a rise in the road surface. Vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be detected because they are outside of the sensor range. - Audi side assist cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions, which can increase the risk of accidents. - Please note that side assist only displays approach ing vehicles or vehicles in your blind spot if your vehicle is traveling at least 19 mph (30 km/h). - In certain situations, t he syst em may not wo rk or its funct ion may be limited. For example: - The disp lay may not turn on at the right time if vehicles are approaching or passing very quickly. - In poor weather condit ions, such as heavy rain, snow or f og. - In very wide lanes, in tight curves or when the re are slopes in the roadway, vehicles in the neighboring lanes may not be detected because they are outside of the sensor range. (D Note The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. This can affect the system. Have an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facili ty check the ir f unct ion. (D Tips - If the w indow glass in the dr iver's door or front passenger's door has been tinted, the display in t he exterior mirro r may be misinte rpreted. - For an explanat ion on confo rm ity w ith the FCCregulations in the United States and the I ndust ry Canada regulat ions, refer to c::>page297. Assist Switching on and off Driver messages App lies to: vehicles with Audi side assist Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist The system can be switched on/off in the Infotainment system. If the side ass ist switches off automatically, a message appears in the Infotainment system dis play. "'Select in the Infotainment system: i M E NUI button > Vehicle > left control button >Driver assistance > Audi side assist An activated system will signal every time the ignition is switched on by turning the displays in the exterior mirrors on briefly. Adjusting the display brightness Applies to : vehicles with Audi side assist The display brightness can be adjusted in the Infotainment system. "'Select in the Infotainment system: i M E NUI button >Ve hicle > left control button >Driver assistance > Audi side assist @jAudi side assist: currently unavailable. Sensor vision restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual The radar sensors ' vision is affected. Do not cover the area in front of the sensors with bike whee ls, stickers, dirt or other objects. Clean the area in front of the sensors, if necessary q page 77, fig. 77. @jAudi side assist: currently unavailable. See owner's manual Side assist cannot be switched on temporarily because there is a malfunction (for example, the battery charge level may be too low) . @jAudi side assist: malfunction! The display brightness adjusts automatically to the brightness of the surroundings, both in the information and in the warning stage . In very dark or very bright surroundings, the display is already set to the minimum or maximum level by the automatic adjustment. In such cases, you may notice no change when adjusting the brightness, or the change may only be noticeable once the surroundings change . Adjust the brightness to a level where the display in the information stage will not disrupt your view forward. If you change the brightness, the disp lay in the exterior mirror will briefly show the brightness level in the information stage. The brightness of the warning stage is linked to the brightness in the information stage and is adjusted along with the information stage adjustment. - Side assist is not active whi le you are making the adjustment. - Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key being used. Please contact Service The system cannot guarantee that it will detect vehicles correctly and it is switched off . The sen sors have been displaced or are faulty. Have the system checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility soon. Audi drive settings) select (drive Introduction Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select Drive select makes it possible to experience different types of vehicle sett ings in one vehicle. The driver can select from three modes, Comfort, Auto and Dynamic, using the t.~;\,1 button in the center console or by using the Infotainment system. This allows you to switch between a sporty and a comfortable driving mode, for example. In the Individual mode, the settings can be adjusted to your personal preferences . This makes it poss ible to combine settings such as a sporty engine tuning with light steering . .,._ 79 Assist _& WARNING Using Audi drive select incorrectly can lead to collisions, other accidents and serious injuries. Selecting the driving mode Applies to : vehicles wit h Audi drive se lect You can select between efficiency*, comfort, auto, dynamic and individual. Description Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select The vehicle setup in each mode depends on the veh icle's features . However, the engine and steering are always affected. Engine and automatic transmission Depending on the mode, the engine and automatic transmission respond more qu ickly or in a more balanced manner to accelerator pedal movements . Fig. 78 Center conso le: drive se lect button Adaptive dampers (Audi magnetic ride)* The adaptive dampers use sensors to record information regarding steering movements, brak ing and accelerat ion operat ions by the driver, road surface, driving speed, and load. With dr ive select, you can adjust t he adaptive dampers to sporty (dynamic), comfortable (comfort) or ba lanced (auto). Steering The power steer ing adapts . Indirect steering that moves easily as in comfort mode is especially suited to long drives on a highway. The dynamic mode provides sporty, direct steering. Cruise control system* Fig. 79 Infotainment: dr ive select .. Press the button ¢ fig. 78 or .. Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but ton > Vehicle > left control button >Audi drive select. .. Select the desired setting by moving the cursor (red frame). Engine sound* You can change the driving mode when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. If traff ic permits, after changing modes, briefly take your foot off the accelerator pedal so that the recently selected mode is also activated for the engine . The engine sound is adapted to the applied mode and can be subtle to sporty. Comfort - results in a comfort-or iented vehicle calibration The acceleration performance is especially fuelefficient in efficiency* mode . (D Tips In some models, the maximum vehicle speed can only be reached in the auto and dynamic modes. Auto - provides an overall comfortable yet dynamic driving feel and is suited for everyday use. Dynamic - g ives the driver a sporty driving feel and is suited to a sporty driving style. Individual - ¢ page 81. 80 Assist & WARNING Pay attention to traffic when operating the drive select to prevent potential risk of an accident. - Adjusting the Individual mode Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi drive select You can adjust the vehicle settings to your personal preferences. "' Press the button ¢ page 80, fig. 78 > Individual> right control button, or "'S e lect in the Infota inment system: ! MENUI button >Vehicle> left control button>Audi drive select > Individual > right control button The equipment in you r vehicle will determine which settings you can adjust. The following table gives an overview of the characteristics. After you have closed the settings, you are automatically driving in the Individual* driving mode. Systems comfort auto dynamic Engine and Transmission comfortable balanced sporty Steering comfortable balanced sporty Damper control* comfortable balanced sporty Engine sound* subtle balanced sporty quattro* comfortable balanced sporty (D Tips Your Individual* mode settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key being used. 81 Parking systems Parking systems General information (D - Some objects are not detected or displayed by the system under certain circumstances: Appl ies to: vehicles with rear parking syst em/ parking system pl us - Objects such as barrier chains, trailer draw bars, vertical poles or fences - Objects above the sensors such as wall extensions - Objects with specific surfaces or struc tures such as chain link fences or powder snow - If you continue driving closer to a low-lying object, it may disappear from the sensor range. Note that you will no longer be warned about this obstacle. - Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid damage to the rims. Depending on your vehicle's equipment , various parking aids will help you when parking and maneuvering. The rear park ing system is an audible parking aid that warns you of obstacles behind the vehicle ~ page 82. The parking system plus assists you when park ing by audibly and visually indicating objects detected in front of and behind the veh icle ~ page 83. The rearview camera shows the area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment display . The lines in the rearview camera image help you to park or maneuver ~ page 84. The parking system plus functions are also available ~ page 83. A 82 (D Tips - The system may provide a warning even though there are no obstacles in the coverage area in some situations, such as: WARNING - Always look for traffic and check the area around your vehicle by looking at it directly as well. The parking system cannot replace the driver 's attention. The driver is always responsible when entering or leaving a parking space and during similar maneuvers. - Please note that some surfaces, such as clothing, are not detected by the system. - Sensors and cameras have blind spots in which people and objects cannot be detected . Be especially cautious of small children and animals . - The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel housing and the underbody . The parking system may become impaired as a result. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv ice Facility check their function. - Make sure the sensors are not obstructed by stickers, deposits o r other materials. If they are, the sensor function could be impaired. For additional information on cleaning, refer to ~ page 2 70. Note - - - certain road surfaces or for long grass. - external ultrasonic sources e.g. from cleaning vehicles . - heavy rain, snow, or thick vehicle exhaust. We recommend that you practice parking in a traffic-free location or parking lot to become familiar with the system . When doing this, there should be good light and weather conditions. You can change the volume of the signa ls. What appears in the display is slightly delayed. The sensors must be kept clean and free of snow and ice for the park ass ist to operate. Rear ' parking system Description Applies to : vehicles wit h rear park ing assist The rear parking system is an audibl e parking aid . Description There is a sensor in the rear bumper cover. If these detect an obstacle , audible signals warn you. Parking systems Make sure the sensors are not covered by stickers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impair the sensor function. For informat ion on cleaning, refer to c;,page 270. Make sure the sensors are not covered by stickers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impa ir the sensor function. For information on cleaning, referto r:;,page270. The range at wh ich t he sensors begin to measure is approximate ly: The display field begins approximately at: rear side 3 ft (0 .90 m) center 5.2 ft (1.60 m) The closer you get to the obsta cle, the sho rt er the interval between the audible signals . A continuous tone sounds when the obstacle is less than approximately 1 foot (0 .30 meters) away. Do not continue backing up c:;,.&.in General information on page 82, c:;,(D in General information on page 82! If the distance to an obstacle remains constant, the volume of the distance warning gradually drops after about four seconds (this is not apply in the continuous tone range). Activating The rear parking assist activates automatically when the reverse gear is engaged . You will hear a brief confirmation tone. Parking system @ 4 ft (1.20 m) ® © 3 ft (0.90 m) @ 3 ft (0.90 m) S.2 ft (1.60 m) The closer you get to the obstacle, the shorter the int erval between the audible signals. A continuous tone sounds when the obstacle is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 meters) away. Do not continue dr iving forward or in reverse c:;,.&.in General information on page 82, c:;,(D in General information on page 82! If the distance to an obstacle remains constant, the volume of the distance warn ing gradually drops after about four seconds (this is not apply in the continuous tone range). Switching on/off Applies to: vehicles wit h parking system plus plus Description Applies to: ve hicles with par king system plus The parking system plus provides audio and visual signals when parking. Fig. 81 Cente r console: park ing aid button Fig. 80 Ill ustrat ion: .... N a: CX) .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .... U"I Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers . If these detect an obstacle, audible and visual signals warn you. Fig. 82 optical distance display 83 Parking sy stem s Sw it ching on General information .. Shift into reverse, or button in the center console .. Press the P1JJA r=;,fig. 81. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LEDin the button turns on. Applies t o: vehicles wit h rearv iew camera -- ~ Sw itching off .. Drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), or .. Press the p,qAbutton, or .. switch the ignition off. Se g ments in the v isua l display The segments in front of and behind the vehicle (veh icles with park ing system plus*) r=;,fig. 82 he lp you to determine the d istance between your vehicle and an obstacle. The red lines mark the expected direction of travel according to the steering angle . A white segment indicates an identified obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's path. Red segments show ident ified obstacles that are in your vehicle's path. As your vehicle comes closer to the obstacle, the segments move closer to the vehicle. The collision area has been reached when the next to last segment is d isp layed. Obstacles in the collision area, includ ing those outside of the ve hicle's path, are s hown in red. Do not continue driving forward or in reverse r=;,&. in General information on page 82, r=;,0) in General information on page 82! Rearview camera Introduction Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera Fig. 84 Area covered @ and area not covered @ by the rearv iew camera. ~------- :.: · ,,., ~ -? -: ~ ,.,, -------g cm:» ~ In Fig. 85 Luggage compartment lid: locat ion of the rear - view camera The rearview camera is located above the rear license plate bracket . Make su re that the lens for the parking system r=;,fig. 85 is not covered by depos its or any othe r obstructions because th is can impa ir the function of the pa rking system. For informat ion on clean ing, refe r to r=;,poge 2 70. The rearview camera coverage area includes (D ¢ fig. 84 . Only this area is shown in the Infotainment display . Objects that are outside of this area @ are not disp layed. The acc uracy of the or ientation lines and the blue surfaces is reduced if the vehicle is ra ised or if the Dynamic mode is activated r=;,page 79 . .&_WARNING Fig. 83 Diagram: lines to a id in parking The rearview camera helps you to park or maneuver using the orientation lines . 84 - Always read and fol low the app licab le warnings r=;,& in General information on page 82. - If the position and the installation angle of the rearview camera was changed, for example, after a coll ision, do not continue to Parking - - - - use the syst e m for safety reasons . Have it checked by an author ized Audi dealer or au thorized Audi Service Facility. Only use the rearview camera to assist you if it shows a good, clear picture. For examp le, the imag e may be affected by the sun sh ining into the lens, dirt on the lens or if there is a defect. Use the rearview camera only if the luggage compartment lid is completely closed. Make sure any objects you may have mounted on th e luggage compartmen t lid do not blo ck the rea rview came ra. The camera lens enlarges and distorts the field of vis ion. The object appea rs both altered and inaccurate on the screen. In certa in situations, people or objects in the display appear close r or further away : - For objects that do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a parked vehicle, a tra iler hitch or the rear of a truck. Do not use the help lines in this case. - If driven from a level surface onto an incline, or a downward slope. - If driven toward protrud ing objects. - If the vehicle is carrying too much load in the rear . (D syst ems .,. Press the p,q! button in the cen t er conso le ~ pag e 83 , fig . 81 . A short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in the button turns on. Switching off .,. Drive faste r than 6 mp h (10 km/h), or .,. Press the p,q! button , or .,.switch the ignit ion off . (D Tips - The visua l display in t he left part of the dis play sho uld he lp you detect the critical veh icle a reas. - You ca n change the volume and disp lay for t he signals ¢ page 86 . Cross parking Applies to : vehicles with rearview camera This view may be used when parking in a garage or in a parking space . Note - Always read and follow the applicable warnings ¢ 0 in General information on Fig. 86 Infotai nm e nt : aiming at a par king space page 82. - The orange colo red orientation lines in the Infotainment display show the vehicle path depend ing on the steering wheel angle. The front of the vehicle front swings out more than the rear of the veh icle. Maintain p lenty of distance so that your outside mirror or a corner of your vehicle does not coll ide with any obstacles . Fig. 8 7 Infota inme nt : al igning t he vehicle Switching on/off Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera .... N a: Switching on .,.Shift into reve rse, or .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .... CX) U"I .,.Turn the Infotainment on and shift into reve rse gear . .,.The orange orientation lines @ show the direction of trave l of the ve hicle. Turn the steer ing wheel until the orange orientation lines appea r .,,_ 85 Parking s y s tems in the pa rking space ¢ fig. 86 . Use the mark ings @ to he lp you e stimate the distance from an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately 3 ft (1 m). The blue area represents an extension of the veh icle 's outline by approximately 16 ft (5 meters) to the rear . ...While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steering wheel ang le to fit the parking space using the orange orientation lines fo r ass istance ¢ ,& in General information on page 84, ¢ 0) in General information on page 85. @ displays the rear bumper . Stop t he vehicle , at the latest , when the red or ientation line @ borders an ob ject. Adjusting the display and the warning tones App lies to: vehicles with parking system plus The display and warning tones can be adjusted in the Infotainment. ... Select in the Infotainment system: IM E NU I but ton > Vehicle > left contro l bu t ton >Driver assistance > Parking aid. Warning tones Front volume - volume for the front area Rear volume - volume fo r the rear area Entertainment fader - when the par king system is tur ned on, the volume of the au dio/video source is lowered . The newly selected level is demonstrated by t he sou nd generator. @ briefly Tips The settings are automatically store d a nd assign ed to the remote control key tha t is in use. Error messages Applies to: vehicles with rear parking system/parking system plus Rear parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles not detected Front parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot be detected 86 Parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot be dete cted There is a system ma lfunction if t he LED in t he P111A but t on blinks when swi t ching on the system . If the error is not cor rected before you swit ch off the ignition, the LEDin t he P111A button will blink the next time you switch on the par king system by s hift ing into reverse. As long as the erro r is active, you can d isp lay the error messages in the second tab of the driver information system . Parking system plus* If a sensor or speak er is faulty, the 94 symbo l will appea r in front of/behind the vehicle in the Infotainment display. If a rear sensor is faulty, only obstacles that are in areas ® and ® are shown c:>page 83, fig. 80 . If a front sensor is faulty, only obstacles that are in areas © and @ a re shown. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the malfunction correc t ed. Intellig Intelligent Technology Electronic stabilization control (ESC) e nt Technology will swit ch on again automatically when condi tions have returned to normal. Steering recommendation The ESChelps t o st abili ze t he vehicle by changing the steer ing torque . Description The Electronic Stabilization Contro l (ESC)reinfor ces driver safety . It reduces the risk of slipping and improves driving stability. ESCdetects crit ical situations such as the vehicle overstee ring and understeering or the wheels are spinn ing. The vehicle is stabilized by applying the brakes or reducing eng ine torq ue. Once the ESCis activated, the indicato r light blinks in the instrument clust er. DJ The follow ing systems are integrated in the ESC: Anti-loc k braking system (ABS) ABS prevents the whee ls from locking whe n braking. The vehicle can still be steered even during hard brak ing. Apply steady pressure to the bra ke pedal. Do not pump the pedal. A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the system is act ing to stabilize t he vehicle . Brake assist system The brake assist system can decrease braking distance. It increases brak ing power when the driver presses the brake pedal quick ly in emergency situations . You must press and hold the brake pedal unti l the dangerous situ ati on is over. Anti-slip regulation (ASR) ASR red uces eng ine power when the drive wheels begin spinning and adapts the force to the road conditions . This makes it easier to start, accelerate and dr ive up inclines . Electronic differential lock (EDL) EDL applies the brakes to a wheel that starts spi nning and transfers the drive power to the other driving wheels. This function is not available at higher speeds. In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off to keep the brake on the braked wheel from overheat ing. The vehicle is still work ing correctly. EDL Selective wheel torque control Selective wheel torque control is used when driving on curves . The front whee l on the inside of t he curve or both wheels on t he inside of t he curve are braked selectively as needed. Thi s allows mo re precise dr iving in curves. The app licable system may not activate when driving in wet or snowy conditions. Automatic post-collision braking system The "Auto mat ic post-collis ion braking system " can help to reduce the risk of sliding and of othe r collisions aft er an accident . If t he airbag cont rol module det ects a collision above a certa in vehicle speed, the vehicle is braked by the ESC. The veh icle does not brake auto matically if: - the dr iver presses t he accelerator pedal, or - the braking force generated by the pressed brake pedal is greater than t he braking force t hat would be initiated by the system, or - the ESC, the brake system or the veh icle electrical system are not functioning . WARNING -A - The ESCand it s int egrated systems cannot overcome the lim its posed by natu ral physical laws. This is especiall y important on slippery or wet roads. If th e syst ems beg in acting to stabilize your veh icle, you should im mediately alter your speed to match the road and traffic condit ions . Do not let the increased saf ety provided tempt you into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision . - Please note the risk of a col lision increases when dr iving fast, especially t hrough curves and on slippery or wet roads, and when dr iving too close to objects ahead . The ESCand 87 ~ Intelligent Technology its integrated systems cannot always prevent collisions - there is still a risk of accidents! - Press the accelerator pedal carefully when accelerating on even, slippery surfaces such as ice and snow. The drive wheels can spin even when these control systems are installed and this can affect driving stability and increase the risk of a collision. @ Tips - ABS and ASR only function correctly when all four wheels are equipped with identical tires. Different tire sizes can lead to a reduct ion in engine power. - You may hear noises when the systems described are working. Switching on and off ESC turns on automatically when you start the engine . function of the ESC is limited or sw itched off. The amount of stabilization control will differ depending on the level. The following examp les are unusual situations where it may make sense to sw itch sport mode on in order to allow the wheels to spin: - Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck - Driving in deep snow or on loose ground - Driving with snow chains Fig. 88 Upper center console , ~ OFF button The ESC is designed to function in levels. Depending on the level that is selected, the stabilization Behavior Sport mode on ESC/ASR off The ESC and ASR stabilization funct ions are lim ited The stabilization funct ion is The full stabilization funcnot available ¢ & . ESC and tion of the ESC and ASR is ASR are switched off . avai lable again . ~& . I.$OFFI button Sport mode off or ESC/ASR on Press and hold the l.$OFFI button longer than 3 seconds. Press the aga in. I.$OFFI button II and lfil•U~* turn on. II turns off or II lfil•U~* turns on. Operation Press the briefly . Indicator lights II Driver messa ges Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control off. Warning! Reduced sta- (ESC): on sport. Warning! Reduced bility stability A turns on. WARNING You should only switch sport mode on or switch ESC/ASR off if your driving abilities and road conditions permit. 88 - and - The stab ilization function is limited when sport mode is switched on. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could swerve, especially on slick or slippery road surfaces. Intellig - There is no vehicle stabilization when ESC/ ASR are switched off. (D Tips - When the cruise contro l system is switched on, ESC/ASRcannot be switched off or sport mode cannot be switched on. - Malfunctions in the rear spoiler or the Audi magnetic ride may make it impossible to switch the ESC/ASR off or to switch sport mode on. Brakes New brake pads New brake pads do not achieve their full braking effect during the first 2SO mi (400 km) . They must be "broken in" f irst. However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking during the break-in per iod. Wear Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the vehicle is driven and on operat ing cond itions. This is especially true if you are driving frequently in the city and on curves or with a sporty driving style. e nt Technology interva ls and facilitates a better reaction t ime for the brakes in wet weather . The braking effect can also be reduced if you are driv ing on salted roads and you do not apply t he brakes for long per iods of time. The layer of salt on the brake rotors and pads must be worn off first when the brakes are applied. Corrosion Leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, low mileage and avoiding heavy braking can contribute to corrosion on the brake roto rs and dirty brake pads. If you usually avoid heavy bra king or if there is corrosion present, occasional heavy brak ing at high speeds is recommended to clean the brake rotors and pads ¢ ,& . Brake system malfunction if you noti ce that the brake pedal t ravel has suddenly gotten larger, then a brake circuit may have failed. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the problem corrected . On the way there, drive with reduced speed and keep in mind that a long braking distance and increased pressure on the brake pedal w ill be necessary. Low brake fluid level Operat ing noise Noises may occur when braking depending on the speed, braking force and outs ide cond itions such as temperature and humidity . When the brake fluid level is low, malfunctions in the brake system may occur. The brake fluid level is electronically monitored. Brake booster Effect of wat er and road salt I n certain situations, for example after driving through water, in heavy rain, after overnight condensation or after washing your car, the braking effect can be reduced by moisture or ice on the brake rotors and brake pads. The brakes must be "dr ied" first w ith a few careful brake applications . At higher speeds and with the windsh ield wipers turned on, the brake pads press against the brake rotors for a short amount of time. This action which is not felt by the driver happens at regular The brake booster ampli f ies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It on ly works when the engine is running . A WARNING - New brake pads do not achieve their full braking effect dur ing the first 250 m i (400 km). They must be "broken in" first. However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firm ly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking du ring t he break-in period. 89 ~ Intelligent Technology - Only apply the brakes for the purpose of cleaning the brake system when road and traffic conditions permit. You must not endanger other road users . This increases the risk of an accident . - On steep slopes, reduce the speed and select a lower gear or lower selector lever position. Drive as little as possible while pressing the brake pedal and avoid putting your left foot on the brake pedal while driving. This could cause the brakes to overheat and impair the efficiency of the brakes. pedal to compensate booster . (D 90 Note - Never let the brakes "rub" by pressing the pedal lightly when braking is not really necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and increases braking distance and causes wear . - Before driving a long distance on a steep slope, decrease your speed and select a lower driving gear. This makes use of the engine braking effect and relieves the brakes. If you need to brake additionally, brake in intervals and not continuously. - Do not let the brakes "grind" by always keeping your foot on the brake pedal. This can cause the brakes to overheat, increase wear and increase braking distance unnecessarily. - Certain weather and operating conditions such as driving through water, driving in heavy rain or driving after washing your vehicle can impair the effectiveness of the brakes. In the winter, ice may build up on the brake pads, rotors and drums. Check these components by braking carefully . Applying the brakes carefully several times dries the brakes and removes ice build-up. - The efficiency of the brakes can also be impaired by driving for long stretches on roads covered with salt without using the brakes . You can remove salt deposits from the brake rotors and pads by carefully applying the brakes several times. - If the front spoiler is damaged or you install another spoiler, make sure the front wheel brakes are ventilated properly. Otherwise, the brake system could overheat, which reduces their effectiveness . - Failure of a brake circuit impairs braking performance, which increases braking distance. Avoid driving the vehicle and have it towed it to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. - Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is stopped because this increases the risk of an accident . - If the brake booster is not working, you will have to press much harder on the brake for the lack of the @ Tips - If the brake booster is not working, you must press the brake pedal with much more force than normal. - If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil er wheel covers or similar items , make sure that the air flow to the front wheels is not interrupted. Otherwise the brake system can become too hot. I Electromechanical steering The electromechanical steering suppor ts the driver's steering movements . Power steering adapts electronically based on the vehicle speed. Indicator lights and messages • Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle If this indicator light turns on and stays on and this message appears, the power steering may have failed. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. f-r-ij Steering: malfunction! driving You may continue Intelligent If the indicator light turns on, the steering wheel may be more difficult to move or more sensitive than usual. The steering wheel may also be at an angle when driving straight. Drive s low ly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected. (D Tips If the . or ':r-ij indicator light only stays on for a short time, you may continue driving. ALL wheel drive (quattro) In all wheel drive, all four wheels ore powered. General information In all wheel drive, the driving power is divided between all four wheels . This happens automa t ically depending on your driving behavior as well as the current road conditions. c:>page 87, Electronic stabilization control (ESC). The all wheel drive concept is designed for high engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally powerful and has excellent driving characteristics both under normal driving conditions and on snow and ice. Always read and follow safety precautions c:>&.. Winter tires Technology Offroad vehicle? Your Audi is not an offroad vehicle - there is not enough ground clearance. For this reason, avoid difficult terrain . A WARNING - -Also, in vehicles with all wheel drive, adapt your driving style to the current road and traffic conditions. Do not let the increased safety provided tempt you into taking risks, because this increases the risk of an acc ident . - The braking ability of your vehicle is limited to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it is not different from a two wheel drive vehicle. Do not be tempted to accelerate to a high speed when the road is slippery this increases the risk of an accident. - Note that on wet streets, the front wheels can "hydrop lan e" if driving at speeds that are too high. Unlike front wheel drive veh icles, the engine does not rev higher sud denly when the vehicle begins hydroplaning . For this reason, pay attention to the road conditions reg a rd less of your speed. Rear spoiler The extendoble rear spoiler increases driving stability. By using all wheel dr ive, your vehicle has good forward motion with standard tires in winter conditions. However, in winter we recommend using winter or all season tires on all four wheels, because this will improve the broking effect. Snow chains If there are snow chain laws, snow chains must also be used on vehicles with all wheel drive c:>page 265, Snow chains. Fig. 89 Center console: button for the rear spoiler Replacing tires ..... N a: CX) For vehicles with all wheel drive, only wheels w ith the same rolling circumference should be used . Avoid wheels with different tread depths c:>page 257, New tires or wheels. The rear spoiler retracts and extends. It can be activated in various operating modes (manua l mode or automatic mode) . ..... I.Cl U"I ..... I.Cl ..... 91 Inte l ligent Technology Automatic mode (normal operation ) - Automat ic extens ion: t he rea r spo ile r will a utomatically extend when speeds exceed approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) - Automat ic ret ract ion : t he re ar spo ile r will au tomatically retract when speeds decrease to un der approximately SO mph (80 km/h). Manual mode - Ext ending manually: briefly tap the ~ fig. 89 button to fully ext end the rear spoiler. - Ret racting ma nua lly: when d riving at speeds below approximately 10 mph (20 km/h), press and hold the bu tt o n t o ret rac t the rear spoiler. When at speeds between 10 mph (20 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h), the rear spoiler will complete ly retract when you tap the button. Indicator lights I§!/ . Rear spoiler: malfun ction! The rear spoiler may not have extended due to a malfunct ion. This could change the vehicle's driving characte ristics at high speeds. Do not d rive faster tha n 85 mph (140 km/ h). Drive to an a uthor ized Audi dealer or au t hori zed Audi Servi ce Facility immediately to have the mal function cor rected . The color of the ind icator light depends on the vehicle speed. A WARNING Driving at higher speeds without the rear spoiler dep loyed can impa ir handling characteristics, mak ing t he vehicle harder to contr ol. - Always make sure that the spoiler is deployed when driving at speeds over 85 mph (140 km/ h). If the rear spoiler wa rning/ind icator lig ht in t he inst rument cluster comes o n, the rear spo ile r may not have deployed. - Never dr ive at speeds highe r than 85 mph (140 km/ h) if the spo ile r is not deployed. Have the spoiler inspec t ed as soon as possible by a n author ized Audi de a ler or qua lified wor kshop . - Always obey speed limits an d ot he r traffic laws . 92 A ,~ WARNING - Improper operation of the rear spoiler can cause crushi ng injuries. - Always make sure that nobody, especially children, is in the way when the rear spoiler is deployed or retracted. CI) Note - Never push on the veh icle on the rear spoiler. This could cause damage. - To prevent damage to the rea r spo ile r do not lean or place anything on it. - Only operate the rear spoi ler manually when the luggage compartment lid is close and the rear spoiler moving parts are not blocked. Otherw ise, damage cou ld occur. (D Tips Clean the rear spoiler compartment every 2 to 3 months. To function correctly, the rear spoi ler must be free of ice, snow and leaves. Energy management The starting ability is optimized The energy management system manages the elec trical energy distribution and optimize s the availability of electrical energy for starting the engine . When a vehicle with a conventiona l energy system is not d riven for a long t ime, the bat t ery is dra ined by eq uipment (for examp le t he immobil izer) . In certain circ umstances, there could may not be enough energy to sta rt the engine. Your vehicle is equipped with an inte lligen t e ner gy management system fo r dist ributing elec t ricity. This significantly improves the starting ability and increases the battery life. The ene rgy m an agement system Is made up of batte ry diagnosi s, idling current management and dynamic energy management. Battery diagnosis The battery diagnos is determines t he batte ry charge level. The sensors de t ermi ne the batte ry .,. Intellig voltage, the battery current, and the battery temperature. The current charge level and the performance of the battery are determ ined based on this. Idling current manag ement The idling current management decreases the energy used whi le parked . With the engine switched off, it manages the energy distribution to the different electrical components. Date from battery d iagnosis is taken into account for this. Depending on the battery charge level, e lectrica l eq uipment is switched off one item after the other, to prevent the battery from draining and to retain the starting ab ility. Dynamic energy management Whi le d riving, dynamic energy management distributes the appropriate amount of energy to the e lectrical equipment. It controls the battery charge level so that more energy is not used then is being generated in order to mainta in an optimal battery charge level. - Energy management cannot overcome the laws of physics . Note that the charge level and length of the battery life are limited. - When the start ing ability is jeopardized, the (•) indicator light turns on ¢page 13. What you should know Maintaining the starting ability is the highest priority. A lot of stress is placed on the battery when driving short distances, in traffic, and at cold times of the year. A lot of energy is used but little is generated. It is also critical when the engine is not runn ing but electrical equipment is switched on . In this case, ene rgy is used but none is generated . e nt Technology Long periods without use If you do no t d rive your vehicle for severa l days or weeks, electrical consume rs are gradually scaled back or switched off . This reduces energy use and ensures the vehicle will be ab le to start after long periods of time . Some conven ience functions such as opening with the remote control key may not be available . These convenience functions will be available again once you switch the ign it ion on and sta rt the eng ine . With the engine switched off The battery will dra in if you use Infotainment funct ions such as listening to the radio while the engine is switched off . The vehicle 's ab ility to start may be impa ired by the energy use, a message will appear in the Infota inment system display . The message indicates that the system will switch off automatical ly soon. If you wou ld like to continue using the funct ions, you must start the engine . With the engine running Alt hough e lectr ical energy is generated while driving, the battery can dra in. This can happen whe n little energy is generated, and much is used and the charge level of t he bat te ry is not optimal. To restore the balance of energy, components that require large amounts of energy are temporarily scaled back or sw itched off. Heat ing sys tems in particular requ ire a great dea l of energy. If you notice, for example, that the seat heating* or rear window defros t er is not wor king, the n it has been tempora rily reduced or sw itched off. These systems are avai lab le aga in as soon as the energy balance has been restored. In add it ion, you may not ice that the idle speed has slig ht ly increased. Tha t is normal and no cause for concern . Due to t he increased idling speed, the additional required energy will be generated and the battery will be charged. In s ituations like this, energy management will actively regulated the distribution of energy. 93 Intelligent Technology Information about recorded by vehicle control modules data Your vehicle is not equipped with a crash data recorder . This device is installed by some vehicle manufacturers to record data about crashes so that it can be analyzed later. Crash data recorders are also called "Event Data Recorders (EDR)". In some legal jurisdictions, it is not permitted to access or download data recorded by pre-insta lled crash data recorders in order to evaluate a crash without clear consent of the vehicle owner. Your vehicle is not equipped with a crash data recorder . However it does contain a variety of electronic control modules for various vehicle systems such as engine function, exhaust treatment or airbags and safety belts. These electronic control modules record vehicle data during normal driving for diagnosis and repair purposes. The recording capability of the electronic control modules is limited to data only • no sound is recorded.If the control modulede· tects a system malfunc t ion or other change in status, a very limited amount of data is recorded for an extremely small period of time. Data that is recorded in such a case may include vehicle speed, driving direction, the load on the brakes and head restraints and performance in the event of an accident or other change in status. The stored data can only be read or downloaded with special devices . 94 Multi Multi Media Interface When the system is switched on, the last menu that was selected is disp layed and the last audio source that was selected begins playing. Interface Traffic safety information - Switching off manually: press and hold the Audi recommends only performing certain Infotainment system functions, such as entering a destination, when the veh icle is stationary. Always be prepared to stop operat ing the Infotainment system in the interest of your safety and the safety of other road users. A Media WARNING Only use the Infot ainment system when traffic conditions permit and always in a way that allows you to maintain complete control over your vehicle. Introduction The Multi Media Interface , or MMI for short , combines various systems for communication, navigation* and entertainment in your Audi. You can operate the MMI using the MMI control panel, the multifunction steering wheel or the voice recognition system* . On/Off knob @ unti l the MMI switches off. If the MMI has been switched off manua lly, it does not switch on again automatically the next time the ignition is switched on. Additional On/Off knob functions: - Adjusting the volume: turn the On/Off knob @ ¢ page 95, fig. 90 . - Muting (mute) : briefly press the On/Off knob. - Selecting the previous/next function (for example, a radio station/track) : briefly press the On/Off knob toward the left l<l<lor rig ht !>!>I. - Fast forwarding/rewinding (for example, tracks): press the On/Off knob longer toward or left l<l<l. the rig ht !>!>I A WARNING - Adjust the volume of the audio system so that signals from outside the vehicle, such as police and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all times. {D Tips The MMI switches off automatically if the engine is not running and the battery is low. Operating the MMI Opening a menu Fig. 90 Control pane l with On/Off knob Switching off the MMI on/ The MMI can be manually switched on and off . - Switching on manually : press the On/Off knob @ briefly ¢ page 95, fig . 90. Or: press the .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I I MENU I button © or one of the buttons to directly open the menus (I) . Fig. 91 Main menu Opening the main menu .. Press the I MENUI button © ¢page 95, fig. 90. The MMI menus (such as Radio) are displayed ¢fig. 91 . liJl,, 95 Multi Med ia Interface Opening a menu dire ctly .. Press the a pplicable button (D c::>page 95, fig . 90 in the direction of the desired menu (such as IRADIO b. Opening / closing the selection menu Through the selection menu, you can open additional functions within a menu item (such as Radio) . Selecting and confirming a function Fig. 93 Centr al area with selectio n me nu symbol Fig. 92 Operat ing Selecting and confirming a function in a menu/ list .,.(D Selecting the function: turn the control knob to the desired function (such as se lecting a frequency). • @ Confirming the selection: press the control knob. Return ing to functions at higher levels .. Press the IBACK ! button @ c::>page 95, fig. 90 . Fig . 9 4 Opened select ion menu Requireme nt: the se lection menu symbol must be displayed on the left side of the Infotainment fig . 93 . system c::> Opening the selection menu • Press t he left con tr ol button 9 fig . 93. Closing the selection menu • Press the rig ht control button c::>page 9 7, fig . 95 to return to the function one level up . 96 Multi Opening/closing the options menu Using the options menu, you can select and confirm context-dependent functions as well as settings within a menu item (such as Radio). Media Interface Information on paths This guide shows you at a glance the paths for opening a desired menu and its settings and functions. Example of a path .,.Select: !RADIO Ibutton> left control knob> FM. Following the path .,. Press the IRADIO Ibutton . .,. Press the left control button . .,.Turn the control knob to the FMmenu item to select it . .,. Press the control knob to confirm the selected FMmenu item . .,.The selected and confirmed function is executed . In this example, the FMfrequency band is set. MMI touch The MMI touch control pad is on the surface with the control knob. Fig. 95 Central area w ith options menu symbol Fig. 97 Display w hen MMI touc h is act ive Fig. 96 Opened opt ions menu Requirement : the options menu symbol G must be disp layed on the right side of the Infotainment system c:>fig. 95. Opening the options menu .,.Press the right control button ¢fig. 95. Closing the options menu .... N .,.Press the left control button c:>page 96, fig. 93 to return to the function one level up. Fig. 98 Entering a navigatio n destination If an operation is possible using the MMI touch control pad, the symbol (D c:>fig. 97 will appear in the Infotainment system display. a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 97 ..,. Multi Media Interface Entering numbers , letters, and symbols - Zooming in on the map: press the contro l knob Requirement: it must be possible to enter text or numbers . to show the crosshairs. Touch the MMI touch control pad with two fingers and pull your fingers away from each other. - Zooming out on the map : press the control knob to show the crosshairs. Touch the MMI touch control pad with two fingers and pull your fingers toget her . - Write an individual lette r (also: upper case/ lower case) or numbers/characters on the MMI touch control pad using your finger. A character recognized by the system will appear in the Infotainment system display @ ¢ fig. 97 and it will confi rm with an audio signal, if necessary, and transfer the character to the input f ie ld. - Entering spaces: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad from left to right. - Deleting characters: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad from right to left . - Selecting the input suggestion: press the con trol knob. - Switching directly to the results list: turn the contro l knob to the right - Entering Cyrillic characters: press the right contro l button. Select and confirm Change to Cyrillic character set. Moving the crosshairs/map Requirement: a map must be disp layed ¢page 139, fig. 120. - Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the control knob to show the crosshairs . Press the I BACK I button @ ¢ page 95, fig. 90 to hide the crosshairs again. - Moving the crosshairs in a standard map : move the crossha irs shown in the desi red direction using your finger on the MMI touch cont rol pad. - Moving the standard map/online map: move the crossha irs shown in the desi red direction using two fingers on the MMI touch control pad Adjusting the sound focus Requirement: the Balance/Fader funct ion must be se lected ¢ page 169. - Moving the crosshairs for sound focus: move your finger in the desired direction on the MMI touch control pad. Using the DVD main menu Requirement: a DVDmust be playing ¢ page 159. - Selecting a menu item: move your finger up/ down or left/right on the MMI touch control pad. - Confirming a selection: press the control knob. @ Tips The volume of the voice gu idance prompts for the MMI touch can be adjusted separately c:;,page 170 . Control joystick knob with function The MMI control panel hos a control knob with joystick function , which con be used to move the crosshoirs on a mop or adjust the sound focus . ¢page 143 . - Moving the map quickly: pu ll two of your fingers in the desired direction quickly along the MMI touch contro l pad. The map will come to a stop after several seconds. Zooming in/out on the map Requirement: a map must be disp layed ¢ page 139, fig. 120. Fig. 99 Operating concept for the cont rol knob with joy· stick function 98 Multi Opening / closing a selection menu Push t he control knob toward the left to open the selection menu c::>page 96. Press the !BACKIbutton @ c::> page 95, fig. 90 to return to the function one level up. Or: pus h the control knob to the right to close the selection menu . Opening/closing the options menu Push the control knob to the right to open the options menu ¢ page 97 . Press the !BACKIbutton @ ¢ page 95, fig. 90 to return to the function one level up . Or: push the control knob to the left to close the options menu . Displaying the input field* Push the control knob up to reach the beginning of a list in the central area/input field. Media Interface - Displaying the input field : push the cont rol knob up - Displaying route guidance: when route guidance is active, you can also display the route guidance by pushing the control knob up c::> page 132 . - Zooming in/out on the map (zoom): turn the control knob to the right/left to zoom in/out on the map. Adjusting the sound focus* Requirement: the balance/fader be selected c::>page 169. fu nction must - Moving the sound focus crosshairs: press the control knob to show t he crosshairs. The crossha irs can now be moved horizontally. Press the control knob again to move the crosshairs ve rtically . Using the DVD main menu Requirement: a DVDmust be playing c::>page 159. Switching to speller input* When the input fie ld is already open, switch direct ly to the speller in the input fie ld by pushing the control knob up again c::> page 99 . On the map - Selecting a menu item: move the contro l knob w ith joyst ick function up or down or to the left or right. - Confirming a selection: press the contro l knob . Requirement: a map must be disp layed ¢page 139, fig. 120. Letter .... N a: and number speller Fig. 100 Spelle r CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I - Entering characters: turn the contro l knob to the desired character using the character se lection @ ¢ fig. 100. Press the control knob to confirm the character . Your input is displayed 99 IJJ,, Multi Med ia Interface in the inp ut fie ld @ . When you have ente red all of the characters, select and confirm ILISTI(I). Or: push the control knob down . - Deleting characters : turn the speller to <Rl@ and press and hold the control knob down. Or: press the right contro l button and select and confirm Clear input field . - Entering special characters: select and con firm l!&?I@ , laoul <z) orl 1231 @ . Se lect and confirm the desired spec ial character (for examp le, a hyphen or period) with the number speller . - Input assistance: in some cases such as in navigation, an input is suggested based o n logical Symbol/Description CD ILISTI @ Input fie ld ® Results list @ + deduction of possibi lities to complete your input. You can select t his suggestion by pushing the contro l knob up . - Results list: in some cases, such as in the direc tory, the system switches automatically to the res ults list based on logical deduction @ . Select and confirm a suggest ion from the list. Overview of symbols in the speller The symbols in the let ter/number plained in the fo llowing tab le: Explanation Switch to the results list. The current input is displayed. A list w ith suggestions based on the letters a lready entered is dis - played . Switches from lower case to upper case letters or from upper case to lower case letters. Open additional spe lle r options, such as Close speller , Clear input field or Change to Cyrillic character s et ® E ® 11&7 1 Character sets and specia l characters are displayed . 0 laoul Language -sp ecific specia l characters are displayed. ® l 123 I/IABCI Switches from letter to number input or from number to letter input . ® ........... A space is added in the input fie ld . @ ~ The cha racter to the left of the curso r is de leted. @ Character se lection 100 speller are ex- The se lected character is high lighted. Multi Menus Media Interface and symbols I~ :c '~ @) 1 Fig. 101 Menus and symbols Symbol/Description CD @ ® @ .... Selected text TMC 2G/3G/LTE* Data connect ion signa l strength bars* Explanation Selected function TMC/online traffic informat ion recept ion ¢page 142 Network coverage for the active data connection ¢ page 127 2G: GSM network 3G : UMTSnetwork LTE: LTE network When a data connection is establ ished, the symbol for an act ive da ta connection appea rs in the status line on the Infota inment system display ¢ page 12 7 Signal strength for the active data connect ion, or PIN: enter the PIN (SIM) PUK: enter the PUK SIM: insert the SIM card ~p age 121 ® ® Importing process (i) Check boxes ~ ® Arrow ® Roaming @ Importing process @ Bluetooth* Bluetooth device connected¢ @ Scroll bars Display of longer lists Additional functions fo r selection @ Input field Informat ion that can be changed usi ng the letter/number ~page 99 Battery Import/update the contacts in the directory or the call lists Batte ry charge level for the connected cell phone Activate and deactivate specific functions by pressing the control knob Access info rmation by pressing the control knob Leave the mobile network for the connected cell pho ne or the inserted SIM card Importing audio/video files to the Jukebox ¢ page 151 page 152 or ¢ page 110 N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... speller I.Cl U"I 101 Multi Med ia Interface Symbol/ Description ~ Cell phone signal st rengt h ba rs* @ Selection list Free text Explanation Cell phone network signal strength for a connected cell phone ¢ page 110 Setti ngs for the sele cte d fun cti on t ha t ar e a ccesse d by press ing t he cont rol knob search Using the free text search, you can select the order that the search terms are entered in the input field. Selecting the input suggestion Require me nt: an inpu t s ugge st ion must be displaye d . "' MMI touch input* : press t he contro l knob . "' Speller input : push the cont rol knob up. Selecting an entry from the results list "'MMI touch input* : t urn the contro l knob downwa rd . Select and confirm an ent ry from the list . "' Speller input : select and confirm ILI S T !. Or: push t he contro l knob down . Select and confi rm an en t ry from the list . Fig. 102 I nput suggest ion The free text search is available in the Vehicle, Media, Telephone, Navigation and Audi connect* menus . Opening free te xt search "' Select: IMENU Ibutton > desired menu item (such as Telep hone) . "' If necessary, pus h the contro l knob up to open thei nputfie ld @ ¢ fig.102. Free text search for an entry "' Ente r o ne or mo re search terms in any orde r into the input fie ld at t he same t ime. The indiv idual search terms must be separated by spaces when entering. Depending on the inpu t, an inp ut sugges t ion @ is displayed . Add itiona l entries that contain the ente red search term a re listed In the res ults list @. If t he des ired t erm is st ill not d isp layed, ente r add it iona l letters unt il it is disp laye d. It is often e noug h ju st to enter the first lette rs of t he sear ch t erm in or der for it to display in the resu lt s list. Writ e, for exam ple in t he Telephone menu, t he initia ls of the contact bein g searc hed sepa rat ed by a space. 102 Voice • Telephone • Audi connect • Navigation • Directory • Radio • Media • Sound • Help • Help Speech dialog system • Help Telephone • Help Audi connect • Help Navigat ion • Help Map • Help Radio • Help Media recognition • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Favorites Call (XY) Enter number Redial Read new text message Navigate to (XV) Enter address/destination Onhne destinations Cancel route guidance Map Line (XY) Next page/ previous page Cancel No, l meant ()(Y) Correction • • • • • Call list Redial Call mailbox Enter PIN/ delete PIN Telephone favorites system TELEPHONE · Enter number • Delete number/ correc t ion • Directory • Call (XY) · business/ private/ land line/ mobile NAVIG:ATI0N • Navigate to (XV) • Business address/ Private address • Start/ cancel route guidance · Directory • Last destinations • Navigation favorites • Drive home • Enter address • Enter country/ town/ street/ state • Exclude routt / Exclude route for (XY)km/ m • Exclude next route section / Exclude next street • Route list • Calculate alternative routes · Online destinations • Special destination • Map • Day map / Night map • 20 driving position map/ 20 north position map/ 30 map/ Destination map/ Overview map AllJC !H C0NNECf • Audi connect • Travel information/ • Fuel prices • Weather Parking Information • • • • RADIO • Radio presets • Last stations • FM • FM/ AM/ SIRIUS XM • Station (XY)/ Frequency (XY) • Traffic announcement on/ off Flight Information I Train Information City events Online news Facebook / Twltter MEDIA • • • · y Jukebox CO/ DVD SO card l / SD card 2 Audi music Interface/ !Pod/ USB/ Bluetooth / Wl·Fi / Medium (XV) • Media favorites/ Artists/ Albums/ Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Videos • Folder up · Random playback on / off Fig. 103 Command overview 103 Voice recognition Voice system recognition system Operating Applies to: vehicles with voice recogn ition system You con operate many Infotainment functions conveniently by speaking . For the system to under stand you: Speak clearly and distinc t ly at a norma l volume . Speak louder when driving fas t er. Emphasi ze the words in the comma nds evenly and do not leave long pauses . Do not speak a command when the voice recogni · tion system is making an announcement. Close the doors, the windows and the sunroof* to reduce background noise. Make sure that passengers are not speaking when you are giving a voice command . Only use the system from the driver's seat because the hands free microphone is directed t o· ward that seat . Fig. 10 4 Talk butt on an d right thumbw hee l on the mult i· funct ion steering whee l Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be page 95, there must be no phone switched on <=> call in progress and the parking system must not be active. .. Switching on : briefly press the 12!]<=> fig. 104 button on the multifunction steering wheel* and say the desired command after the Beep. .. Switching off : press and hold the~ button . Or: say the command Cancel. .. Pause: say the command Pause. To resume, press the 10,I button . .. Correcting : press the ~ button one time. Or: say the command Correct. Input assistance The system guides you through the input with visual and audio feedback . - Visual input assistance: after switching on voice recognit ion, a display with a selection of poss ible commands appears . The command display can be switched on/off under IMENU!> Setting s> left control button > MMI setting s> Speech dialog system . - Audio input assistance: to have the poss ible commands read, turn t he voice recognition system on and say Help . 104 Additiona l settings Additional settings such as individual speech tr aining to your voice, Command display or volume of spoken prompts can be adjusted under IMENUI> Setting s> left contro l button> MMI settings > Speech dialog system . A WARNING - Direct your full attention to driving. As the driver, you have complet e responsibility fo r safety in t raffic. Only use the functions in such a way t hat you always maintain complete contro l over your vehicle in all traffic situations . - Do not use the voice recognition system in emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. It may take longer to dial the number or the system may not be ab le to dial it at all. Dial t he emergency number manually. @ Tips - The dialog pauses when the re is an incoming phone call and will continue if you ignore the call. The dialog ends if you answer the call. - Navigation messages and traffic announcements* are not made during a dialog. - You can select an item in the list using either the voice recognition system or the control knob . Voice Command information recognition system Sequences of commands used to perfo rm an action are identified with a">", for example say : Enter address > (then) Enter country/ state. overview Applies to: vehicles with voice recog nit ion system The maj ority shown are ma in commands. This system a lso recognizes synonyms in certain cases . For examp le, for business address, you can also say business, work , office or job . The follow ing overviews describe the commands that can be used to operate the MMI using the voice recognition system. Alternat ive commands are separated using a"/", for example say: Telephone / (or) Navigation / (or) Radio. Commands Global commands Applies to: vehicles with voice recog nitio n system You can a lways use the global commands, rega rdless of the men u se lected. Function Say: Opening a menu Telephone / Directory/ Navigation / Radio / Media / Audi connect* / Car / Tone Having the possible commands read a loud Help / Help speech dialo g system / Help Telephone / Help Navigat ion / Help Map / Help Radio / Help Media / Help Audi connect* Telephone funct ions Call (XV) , for example Call "John Smith" / Enter number / Redial / Directory I Read t ext message Call (XV), for example Call "John Smith "/ Enter numbe r/ Redial / Directory Navigation funct ions Navigate to (XV), for examp le Navigate to "John Smith" / Enter address I Cancel route guidance / Map / Online destina tion s* I Online destinati on (XV)* Access ing favorites Favorites > follow the system prompts Selecting an e ntry from a list Line (XV) Scrolling through a list Next page I Previous page Corre ct t he command g iven Correct Switching the voice recogn it ion sys- Cancel tern off Telephone Applies to: vehicles with voice recognitio n system and telephone Requ irement: a cell phone must be connec t ed to the MMI r::!vpage110 a nd the Telephone menu must be open ¢ table on page 105. ~ 105 Voice recognition system Function Say : Calling a contact from the d irectory Call (XV), for example Call "John Smith" Selecting a specific contact numbe r Call (XV) at wo rk / Private / Landline / Cell phone , for exa mple, Call "John Smith" private Selecting a phone number w ith an address card open Call / Call work / Call private / Call land line / Call cell phone work Calling a contact from your favor ites list Teleph o ne favo rites > After being prompted, say the desired contact > Dial Displaying recent calls Call list Calling the last number dialed Redialing Dialing a phone number Enter number > After being prompted, say the telephone number in groups of individual numbers, fo r example. 888 555 1212 > Dial Correcting the phone number that was entered Correct I Delete number Showing contact information Directory > After being prompted, say the desired contact, such as John Smith Listen ing to messages Call voic e mail Entering the PIN (SIM) Ente r PIN > when prompted, say the PIN in individual numbers > Save Corre cti ng the PIN entry Correct I Dele te PIN Correct data input No, I meant (XV) Close the entire command list Clos ing {i) Tips - Contacts in the dire ctory can selected using the full name ("first name last name" a nd "las t name, first name") as well as with only the first or last name. This applies to cell phones that transmit names separated into first and last names. - For more informat ion on the suppo rted cell phones, visit www.a udiusa.com/bluetoo t h or your autho rized Aud i deale r. Audi connect Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Req uirement: the requirements fo r Audi connect page 121. services must be met <=> Function Say: Accessing Audi connect services Audi connect . Fo llow the system prompts. (D Tips Refer to the notes in the About Audi connect chapter<=>page 128. 106 Voice recognition system Navigation Appl ies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and navigation system Requ ireme nt: the Navigation menu must be ope n ~ table on page 105. Function You can say the followi ng commands to ent er a dest inat ion: Say: Opening t he list of previous naviga- Last destination s ti on dest inations Accessing favorites Navigation favorites Selecti ng t he home addr ess Home address or Drive home Entering an address with guida nce from the system Enter address > follow the system prompts Individua l comma nds for entering a Enter country / Enter state / Enter city / Enter ZIP code / Enter destination street / Ente r house number Making a correction wh il e enter ing a d est inat ion Correct Navigating to a contact Drive me to (XV) or Navigate to (XV), f or example Drive me to "John Smith" Navigat ing t o a specific address for a contac t Navigate to (XV) business / private , f or example, " Navigate t o John Smit h" Navigating t o favor ites Navigation favorites > Line (XV) / Line contents > Start route guidanc e when prompted Start ing route g uidance with an ad- Navigate / Navigate to private address / Navigate to business dress card open address Ente r a new dest inat ion/stopover w hen route gu idance is act ive Enter destination > enter the desired addres s when promp ted> confirm the new destina tion/stopover if prompted Start ing route g uidance after enter- Sta rt route guidance ing a dest ination Canceling cur rent route g uidance Cancel route guidance Calculat ing alterna ti ve routes Calculate alternative routes Entering a point of interest by selecting a search area with guidance from the system Point of interest > Change search area > category or subcategory when prompted, for example "restaurant" Desti nat ion input cat egor ies Audi Service / Train station / Airport / Hotel / Hospital / Parking facility / Rest area / Restaurant / Gas station etc. Search areas for entering points of interest Immediate v icinity / Along the route / Vicinity of destination / Vicinity of stopover / In new city / In new state or country Ente r ing an online dest ination* Online destination (XV), fo r example "Online destination "Lakeview Hotel" " Correct dat a input No, I meant (XV) Close the entire command list Close You can say the f oll owing commands for mo re sett ings in Navigat ion: 107 Voice recognition system Function Say: General map options Map / Day map / Night map / Automatically change map color Map type 2D driving position map / 2D north position map / 3D map / Destination map / Overview map / Stand ard map */ Traffic map */ Google Earth map* Showing the route list Route list Showing the remaining distance/ time when route guidance is active Destin ation information Speed limit prompt How fast can I drive here? Setting voice guidance for active route guidance Auto rerouting (t raffic) Manual rerouting I Auto rerouting / Rerout ing off Blocking a certain section on the route Block route (XV) mete rs/ kilomete rs/ yards/ miles / Block next rout e/ Block next section of route (D Tips - Destinations may have to be spelled when entered, depending on the country where you are located and wh ich menu language you have selected. - Refer to the notes in the About Audi connect chapter ¢page 128. Radio Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system Requirement: the Radio must be open already regardless of what menu you are currently in . Function Say: Selecting the reception band FM / SiriusXM* / AM Selecting a stat ion from t he st at ion Channel (XV) / !Frequency (XV) / Last station s list Selecting a station from favorites/ presets Radio presets > Line (XV) Setting the frequency Frequency (XV) Setting the frequency Frequency (XV) / Frequency (XV) HD 1 Correct data input No, I meant (XV) Close the ent ire command li st Closing Med ia Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system Requiremen t : a media source must be open already regardless of what menu yo u are current ly in. 108 Voice recognition system Function Say: Selecting a so urce directly Jukebox*/ CD / DVD/ SD card 1 / SD card 2 / Audi music interface*/ iPod.. / USB* / Bluetooth * / W i-Fi* / Medium (XV), for example "Jolhn's player" Selecting aud io /v ideo files* from the Jukebox* Media favorite s/ Artists / Album s / Genres / Tracks / Playlist s / Videos Selecti ng aud io files on an iPod (sou rce: Audi music interface*) Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Composers/ Podcasts / Audio books Navigating w ith in a folder struct u re/list Directory up / line (XV) Selecti ng shuffle Shuffl e on / Shuffle off Correct data input No, I meant (XV) Close the entire command list Closing External voice operation Requirement: The ignition and the MMI m use be sw itched on, there must be no active phone calls and the pa rking system and Audi speech dia log system must not be active . A cell phone m ust be connected to the MMI thro ugh the Handsfree profile¢ page 110 . The cell phone bei ng connected must have voice con t rol that can be controlled externally. ~ Switching on: hold down the~ ~ (D Tips - Navigation messages and traffic announcements * are not made duri ng a dia log. - This function depends on the cell phone used. You can obtain more information from your cell phone se rvice provider or from your cell phone user guide. - AUDI AG simply provides accessto control your cell phone with voice operation and does not ta ke any responsibility fo r the cont ents a nd commands within the external voice con t rol. button on the multifunction steering w heel* and say the desired command after the external speech d ia log begi ns. ~ Resuming dialog : if necessary, press the !"l•I button and say a new command . Or: select and confirm Resume speech dialog system on the MMI contro l panel. ~ Restarting dialog : the system remains ready to use for a short t ime after end ing the d ialog. You can start a new dialog during this time. Briefly press the~ button . Or: select and confirm Restart speech dialog syst em on the MMI contro l panel. ~ Switching off : press and ho ld t he~ button. Or: select and confirm Cancel o n t he MMI cont rol panel. a: co ...... <J:) Lil ...... ...... <J:) 109 Telephone Telephone - The demands of t raffic require your fu ll attention. Read and follow the guidelines provided inc>page 95, Traffic safety information . Introduction App lies to: vehicles with telep hone To make calls through the MMIsystem , you must connect your phone to the MMIwith Bluetooth . After connecting your phone to the MMwith Bluetooth, you can use the telephone functions convenient ly through the MMI. Hand sfr ee After you have connected your cell phone to the MMIvia Bluetooth, you can use the handsfree system and operate telephone functions through your MMI. Phone calls are transmitted through the antenna on your cell phone. A WARNING - Medical experts warn that cell phones can interfere with the funct ion of pacemake rs. Always mainta in a minimum dista nce of 20 cent imeters between the cell phone antenna and t he pacem aker. - Do not carry the cell phone in a pocket directly over the pacemaker when the phone is switched on. - Switch the cell phone off immediately if you suspect it may be interfering with the pacemaker . - Do not use the voice recognit ion system c>page 104 in emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situa t ions. It may t ake longe r to dial the number or t he system may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency numbe r manua lly. - Switch your cell phone off in areas whe re t here is a risk of an explosion . These locations are not always clea rly marked. This may include gas sta t ions, fuel and chemical storage facilities or transpo rt vehicles, or locations where fue l vapors (such as propane or gaso line vapo r in vehicles or buildings), chemicals or large quantities of dust parti cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may be present in the air. This also applies to all othe r locations where you would normally tu rn your vehicle engine off. 110 (1} Tips The Bluetooth connection range is limited to inside the vehicle. It can also be affected by local cond itions and interference wit h other devices. - Check with your cell phone service provider or the database for mobile devices at www.aud iusa.com/bluetooth to learn which Bluetooth connections and funct ions are supported on your cell phone. Connecting - a telephone Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth Applies to: vehicles wit h telepho ne Fig. 105 Displaying the PIN fo r en te ring in the cell phone Requirement The vehicle must be stationary and t he ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth funct ion and visibility of the MMI c>page 168 and cell phone must be switched on. The cell phone t o be connect ed must not be actively connected to any other Bluetoot h device. The MMI must not be connected to a cell phone. Pairing a cell phone .. Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone > Connect cell phone > Next. The available Bluetooth de vices are shown in t he Infotainment system display. Or : search for the MMI in your cell phone t hroug h the Bluet oot h device sea rch. ..,. Teleph .. Select and confirm the desired cell phone from the list of disp layed Bluetooth devices. .. The MMI generates a PIN for the connect ion setup ¢fig. 105. .. Se lect and confirm Yes. .. Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell phone. Or: whe n the PIN is displayed on your cell phone, confirm the PIN on your cel l phone and in the MMI. The time a llowed fo r entering the PIN is lim ited t o approximately 30 seconds. Pay attention to any additional system prompts d isplayed on your cell phone, for example if the sys t em should con nect automatica lly in the future. Depending on the cell phone, you m ay have to conf irm download ing the d irectory separate ly. After connecting successfully After connecting successfully, a sho rt message with informat ion about the connected profi les will appear. You can also cha nge the profile later by selec ti ng IMEN U I>Setting s> left contro l bu tton > MMI settings > Connection manager o ne - A Bluetoot h dev ice that is already paired with the MMI will be disconnected if another dev ice is paired. - When leaving the veh icle, the Bluetooth connect ion to the cell phone will automatically disconnect. - You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider or from yo ur cell phone user guide. For informat ion on us ing the te lephone, vis it www.aud iusa .com/bluetooth or your aut horized Aud i dea ler. Using the Audi phone box Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box Using the Audi phone box, you can call using the external vehicle antenna and charge your cell phone using a USB adapter . Using the external antenna helps when there is low signal strength and also provides better reception quality. ... I ¢page 168. In addition, the cell phone contacts are au tomatica lly loaded in the MMI directory. This process can take several minutes, depend ing on the num be r of contacts. @ Tips - Making phone calls throug h t he MMI is on ly possib le using a Bluetooth profile (Handsfree ) . - You can apply additional settings to connected cell phones us ing the connection manager c:;,page 167. - You only have to pair your dev ice one t ime. Bluetooth dev ices that are al ready pa ired automat ically connect to the MMI when they are within range and t he ignit ion is switched o n. - Authorizing the MMI connection in your cell phone will make automat ic connection poss ible. .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl - Seve ral cell phones can be paired to the MMI, but only one cell phone can be act ively con nected . Fig . 1 0 6 Using t he Audi phone box The Audi phone box is locat ed in the ce nter conso le in the storage compartment @) ¢ page 6, fig. 2 . Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected t hrough Blu etoo t h ¢ page 110. - Connecting to the external vehicle antenna : lay the cell phone o n the center of the cell pho ne symbo l in t he Audi phone box with th e d isp lay facing up. Make sure t here ar e no objec t s between the Audi phone box and t he cell phone . - Charging a cell phone wit h a USB adapter : connect your cell phone to the USB charging port (!) using a USB adapter cab le c:;,fig. 106. U"I 111 Tele p hone For ease of use, Aud i offers a specia l USB adapt er * r::!> page 155, fig. 132. The following USB adapters are availab le at this time: CDUSB adapter Using the telephone Accessing the telephone Applies to: vehicles with telephone for cell phones wit h a micro USB connection* @ USB adapter for cell phones with an Apple Lightn ing connection* ® USB adapter for cell phones with an Apple Dock connector* A WARNING Loose objects can be th rown around the veh icle inte rior dur ing sudden dr iving o r braki ng maneuvers . This can cause serious inju ries and loss of contro l of the vehicle. Always keep the center armrest closed wh ile driving. Fig. 10 7 Telep hone functions in select ion me nu Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected t o page 110 . the MMI r::!> .,.Select: ! M E N UI button> Telephone > left control button. The following functions are available - The Audi phone box is not availab le in all countr ies . Contact your author ized Audi dealer for add itiona l information. - If the ce ll phone is placed in a bag or protective sleeve inside the Audi phone box, t his can interfere with the connection to the external antenna . - Strong transmission quality can not be g uaranteed if mo re than one ce ll phone is inserted. - Audi recommends us ing origina l Audi accessories . Audi has established their reliability, safety and suitability. - You can purchase a USB adapter from an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility, or at specialty stores. - To prevent malfunctions, make s ure the ce ll phone is positioned correctly in the Audi phone box . - The Audi phone box is on ly availab le in the Canadian market. CDRecent calls r::!> page 113 @ Favor ites ¢ page 114 ® Directory ¢ page 117 @ Enter number ¢ page 113 ® Text message (cell phone)* r::!> page 114 Dialing a phone number Fig. 108 Dialing a ph on e nu mber from th e call list Fig . 10 9 Numbe r spelle r 112 r::!>fig . 107: Telephone ~ Select: IMENU Ibutton > Telephone > left con - t rol button . Call list Req uirement: a pho ne nu m ber m ust be stored in the call list. Select a nd conf irm t he desired telep hone numbe r from the rece nt calls list. Call list symbols c>fig. 108: @ Missed calls @ Dialed nu mbers ® Accepted calls Favorites Requirement: a phone number or contact must be sto red as a favo rite c>page 114. Sele ct an d confi rm a favor ite in the favo rit es list . Directory Selec t a nd confi rm a phone num ber fro m t he directory c>page 117. Enter number - Entering a phone number as a sequence of numbers : ente r a phone numbe r using t he number speller c>fig . 109. - Entering the phone number as a sequence of letters: select and confirm IABC Iabove t he numbe r speller. Ente r a se qu ence of le tte rs using t he letter speller, for examp le AUD/ SERVICE. - Dialing a phone number : se lect and co nfirm 4"" . Or: pu sh the contr ol knob dow n. Selec t and co nfir m OK. - Deleting individual characters : se lect and confirm~ - Deleting all characters entered at once : t ur n t he spe lle r to~ an d press a nd hold t he co ntro l knob . Or: press the righ t con tr ol button . Select and confirm Clear input field. Tone seq uences (DTMF) can be entered directly into the spe ller dur ing a phone call. Accepting/ending a call Applies to: vehicles with telep ho ne - Accepting a call : se lect and confi rm Accept call . - Ignoring a call : se lect and confi rm Ignore call . - Muting the active call : se lect and confirm Mute . - Ending a call/can celing the dialing : press the cont rol knob (End call ). Answering an additional call : if the re is an incoming call w hile another ca ll is active, you can select Accept call to put the exis t ing call on ho ld and answe r t he incom ing cal l. If you se lect Ignore call , the incom ing call will be ignored. Caller information : the name, phone number or Unknown appears in t he Infotai nment system display depend ing on if the calle r has been stored in the d irectory and if th e phone number has been tra nsmi t te d . A pictur e may also be d isplayed, depe ndi ng on whe t her you have ass igne d a picture to a con t act in your directory a nd if it was t ransfe rred to your MMI. You can find out if your cell phone supports t his fu nction from your cell phone network provider, your cell phone owner 's man ual or at www.audisua.com/bl uetooth . (!) Tips The ra d io or media playback is muted during a phone call. During a phone call Applies to: vehicles with te lephone Requirement: there m ust be a call in progress. ~ Press the right cont rol button. The following op ti ons ar e poss ible du ring a call depen d ing on the cell phone be ing used and the type of connect ion: - Making an additional call : sele ct: Find contact > Call list / Directory / Favorite s > Entry in list . - Accepting an incoming call when there is an active call and a call on hold : sele ct Replace . The active call is rep lace d wit h t he incomi ng call. 113 Telephone Add iti ona l functions includ e: Mute: if you se lect and co nfir m t h is func t ion, t he oth er pe rson o n t he phone can not he ar you. You can he ar the ot her pe rson. Hold call / Resume: yo u ca n p lace t he exis ti ng ca ll on hol d a nd resume it agai n. To resume the call, selec t a nd co nfi rm t he ca ll yo u would like t o resume. - You ca n ob t ain more info rm ation from your cell phone service provider or from yo ur ce ll phone user gui de . - The d is play of an incomin g p hone call in the Infota inment display may st ill be visible for a few seconds depen di ng on the cell phone in use. Using the Replace or Ignore func t ions may the n e nd the act ive phone ca ll. Transfer call to cell phone* : se lect and confi rm Favorites Transfer call to cell phone to tr a nsfer t he exis t - Applies to: vehicles wit h telepho ne ing ca ll fr om t he MMI to yo ur ce ll phone. Up to SO contacts, in addition to the voicemail number, can be stored in any order in the favorites list. Switch to hands-free mode*: select and confir m Switch to hands-free mode to t ransf e r t he call from yo ur ce ll phone back to the MMI. Toggle call : a lternate betwee n two phone ca lls while one of the ca lls is on hold. Select ing End call wi ll en d t he active pho ne call. A p ho ne call on hold can be resumed thro ugh th e righ t control bu tt on > Resume . Add to conference : a party on hol d and up t o five ac t ive parties (depe nding on t he netwo rk) ca n be add ed to a confe re nce call. To mak e an ad dit iona l call, pu t all partici pants in t he cur ren t confe rence call on hold using th e righ t con t rol bu t to n > Hold conference . Press t he left cont rol butto n. Se lect an d confi rm Call list / Directory/ Favorites > Entry in list. You can ad d called contacts to t he confe rence using the right cont rol button> Add to conference . Resume takes all parties off ho ld. 3-way conferencing : se lect the right control button > Telephone settings > Call options . When the function is sw itched on~ you can accept an addit io nal call using Accept call or ignore a ca ll using Ignore call. When the funct io n is switched off, yo u ca n Replace t he ca ll or Ignore call. Connection manager : ¢ page 167. Telephone settings : ¢ page 119. (D - Storing an existing phone number as a favorite : select a nd confi rm Call list / Contacts . Se- lect and confirm a contac t in the list . Se lect a phone number. Select the right con tr ol button > Store as favorite . Ente r a name for t he favorit e or se lect a suggestion. Sele ct and co nfirm w it h Save. - Renaming a stored favorite : selec t a nd confi rm Favorites > a favorite from the List. Sele ct t he right con t rol button > Rename favorite . - Moving a stored favorite : se lec t and con fir m Favorites > a f avorite from the list . Sele ct t he right con t rol button > Move favorite. Sele ct and confirm the location of the se lected favorite. - Deleting a stored favorite : select and con firm Favorites > a favorite from the list . Select the right control button > Delete favo rite > Delete this favo rite / Delete all favorites . Messages Text message Applies to: vehicles with Audi conne ct an d ce ll phone w it h Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP) Tips - To be notifie d of an incomi ng call dur ing a pho ne call , th e Call waiting fu ncti o n in you r ce ll phone mus t be swit ched on w hen using the hands-free profile (Handsfree ) . 114 .. Select: ! ME N UI button> Telephone > left cont rol button . Depending on the type of cell phone being used and the cell phone plan, you can receive and send text messages through the MMI. Requirement ..,. Telephone A cell phone with an active Bluetooth MAP (Message Access Profile) must be connected to the MMI ¢ page 110. .,.Select : I MENU I button > Telephone > left control button > Text message (cell phone) . Inbox All received text messages are displayed . Message options Applies to: vehicles with automatic phone function or cell phones with a Bluetooth Message Access Profile .,.Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone > left control button> Text message (cell phone) > Inbox/S ent text messages / Outbox > right control button . Sent text messages The following options may be available, depending on the selected menu . All sent text messages are displayed . Replying* Outbox A reply can be sent for the se lected message in the lnbox . All text messages to be sent are displayed. @ Forward Tips - Please note that you may have to activate the receiving and sending of t ext messages depend ing on the SIM card being used (for example, when using a Multi-SIM). You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider or from your cell phone user guide. - Formore informationon the supported cell phones, vis it www.aud iusa.com/bluetooth or your authorized Audi dealer. Writing a text message Applies to: vehicles with automatic pho ne function or cell phones with a Bluetooth Message Access Profile .,.Select : IM ENU I button > Telephone > left con trol button> Text message (cell phone) > In· box > right control button. Writing a text message Select and confirm the desired template from the list . Enter a recipient. Select and confirm Send . Replying* Select and confi rm the desired template from the list . Select and confirm Send. The selected text message can be forwarded to a different recipient. Send again* The selected text message can be resent. Delete this text message* The selected text message can be deleted. Connection manager See ¢ page 167, Connection manager . Telephone settings See ¢ page 119, Telephone settings. (D Tips Messages that are deleted in the MMI are also deleted in the cell phone automatically. E-mail* Applies to: cell phones with Blue tooth Message Access Profile Depending on the type of cell phone used, you con receive and send e-mails through the MMI. Requirement: message access (MAP - Message Access Prof ile) must be activated in the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone . You can find out in your cell phone owner's manual if your cell phone supports th is function . .,.Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone > left control button> E-mail (cell phone). 115 ..,_ Telephone Writing a new e -mail Resume last edited e-mail - Using a template : select and confi rm the desired t emp late from the list . - Ente r one or mo re recip ients. - Select and confirm Send . The las t ed ited e-mail can be resumed . Replying* A reply can be sent for the se lected e-ma il in the lnbo x. Inbo x All received e-ma ils are d isplayed. Reply to all* All sent e-ma ils are d isplayed. A reply can be sent for the se lected e-mai l in the Inbox and it will be sent to all of the entered recipients . Outbox Forward All e-mails to be sent are d isplayed . The sel ected e -mail can be forwarded to a different recipient . Se nt Draft s All e-mails that have not yet been sent and saved e-mail s are d ispl ayed . Delete this me s sage* The selected e -mail can be dele t ed. Connection manager - For more information on suppo rted cell phones, vis it www.aud iusa.com/bluetooth or contact your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv ice Facility . - To ensure that e-ma ils will be sent and rece ived, connect your cell phone to the Wi-Fi Hotspot* in the vehicle so that the e-mail app o n your cell phone maintains internet access . If you a re not receiving e-mai ls desp ite hav ing a suc cessful connection, con tact your e-mail service provide r or your cell phone service provider. See c:>page 167 . Telephone s ettings See c:>page 119. @ Tips Messages that are de leted in the MMI are also a utomatica lly deleted in the connected cell phone. Listening to voicemail Applies to: vehicles with telephone ~ Select: ! MENU I button> Telephone > left con - Message options Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message Access Profile ~ Se lect : IMENU Ibutton > Telephone > left con - trol button > E-mail (ce ll phone) > In box/ Sent/ Outbox > right contro l button. The fo llow ing options may be availab le, depend ing on th e se lected menu . Store as template Ten e-mail templates a re stored in the MMI. You can save up to te n addit ional templates. - Create an e-mail. - Se lect and confirm Store as t e mplate . 116 trol button. Se lect and confirm Call list / Directo ry/Favorites > Voicemail. - Entering the voicemail numbe r: enter the desired number. Se lect and confirm OK. - Dialing the voicemail number : se lect and confirm Voicemail. (D Tips - This serv ice must be se t up and activat ed in adva nce in t he ce ll phone networ k. You can obta in more information from your cell phone service provider. T e l e ph o n e - The voicemai l number depends on the cell phone service provider. Emergency call functions Applies to: veh icles with telephone .,.Select: IMENU I button > Telephone> left control button > Enter numbe r> Enter emergency coll number (for example, 911) > O K. .&_WARNING - Because your phone works with radio signals, a connection cannot be guaranteed under all circumstances . Do not rely on only your phone when it comes to essent ial commun ication (such as a medica l eme rgency). - Always follow the instructions given by the emergency personnel during an emergency call and only end the call when t hey inst ruct you to do so. (D Tips Emergency numbers are not the same everywhere. Find out which emergency number is used in your current locat ion. {!) Tips - Additiona l information on free text searching can be found under ~ page 102. - Check for a possib le request to synchronize on your cell phone. Requests to synchronize the directory must be confirmed so that your cell phone contacts can be loaded into the MMI. - The contact display in the MMI depends on the cell phone used . For more information on the supported cell phones, vis it www .aud iusa .com/bluetooth or your authorized Audi dealer . - The d irectory from the cell phone w ith the act ive connection will always be displayed . - The contacts from the cell phone may not be transferred in alphabetical order . If there are too many entries, contacts with d ifferent first letters may be miss ing in the MMI. - The public contacts in the local MMI memory are a lways visible and can be accessed by other users. Free text search for a contact Applies to: vehicles with telep ho ne Directory Opening the directory Applies to: vehicles with tele phone After connecting the cell phone , the contacts in it ore automatically imported into the MMI. .,.Select : IMENU I button > Telephone> left con t rol button > Directory. - Selecting a contact : se lect and confirm a contact from the directory. The phone numbers fo r your selected contact open. Select and confirm a phone number to start a call . - Free text search for a conta ct: refer to O?poge 102. Contacts are displayed in alphabetical order and can be so rted by first or last name ~ page 119 . .,.Select: ! MENU I button> Telephone > left con trol button > Directo ry. .,.To limit the search , enter the initials of the contact being searched with each initial separated by a space. Ente r addit ional letters if necessary . .,.Select and confirm a con t act from the d irectory. The phone numbers for your selected contact open . .,.To make the call, select and confirm a phone number. (D Tips - You can scroll through long lists quickly by t urning the cont rol knob quickly. - Add itional information on free text searching can be fo und under ~ page 102 . The directory can be opened through the Telephone* menu as well as through the Navigat ion* menu . 117 Telephone Displaying contact details Applies to: vehicles with telep hone Delete contact The sele cted contact can be deleted . 0) Tips - Contacts edited in the MMI d irector y cannot be automatically updated in the connected cell phone. Aud i recommends ed it ing cell phone contacts directly in the cell phone . - Only the contacts in th e MMI memory (privat e/p ublic ) can be edi t ed or deleted. Fig. 11 0 Directory Importing/exporting contacts Applies to: vehicles wit h telepho ne Contacts in vCard format (. vcf) can be imported into the directory or exported . Fig. 111 Showing co ntact details* • Select : I MENU I button > Telephone > left control button. Select and confirm Directory > a contact from the directory . • Select : right contro l button > Show contact details . - Calling: select and confirm the desired telephone number. - Navigating : to start navigation, select and confirm the des ired address. Select and confirm Start route guidance. Press the right control button to open additional options for the contact details . Read contact aloud The MMI automatically creates a name tag for each entry in the directory that can be read by the MMI. Store as favorite See r:::;, page 114, Favorites. Send text message* You can send a text message r=;, page 115 to the selected contact. 118 Requirement: an SD card must be inserted in one of the SD card readers r=vpage 150 or a USB storage device must be connected to t he Audi music interface* r:::;,page 155 or t he requirements for Audi connect services* must be met r:::;, page 121. • Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone > left con tro l button > Directory. • Sele ct : right con tr ol button> Directory settings. - Importing contacts from a storage device : se lect and confirm Import contacts > SD card 1/ SD card 2 or USB device 1 / USB device 2 > desired contacts> Start import. - Exporting contacts to a storage device : selec t and confirm Export contacts > SD card 1 / SD card 2 or USB device 1/ USB device 2 > desired contacts > Start export. - Selecting all contacts at once to import/export : select and confirm Import contacts/Export contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/ USB device 2 > All > Start import/Start export . Telephone - Importing contacts from your myAudi account 1l: select and confirm Import contacts > myAudi account Enter your myAudi user data. You must have a myAudi account in order to import contacts from the account. Entering your myAudi user data or your myAudi PIN is only required one t ime. You will rece ive the myAudi PIN in your myAudi account once you have registered a vehicle in the account. (D Tips - Read and follow to the notes about Audi connect c>page 128. - For additional information on the myAudi account, visit http:/ /my.audiusa.com. - The imported contacts are stored in the local memory of the directory. -A maximum of 1000 contacts can be imported. You can check the memory capacity for the directory at any time c>page 119. - Never save important data on memory cards or USBstorage devices. Audi is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media . - Contacts that were downloaded from a cell phone cannot be exported. Additional settings Telephone settings Applies to: vehicles with telep hone .,.Select: I MENU I button> Telephone > right cont rol button > Telephone settings . Call options* 3-way conferencing: can be switched on/ off . (D Tips - Several cell phones can be paired to the MMI, but only one cell phone can be actively connected . - To delete all paired Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth function can be reset to the factory default settings c>page 166. Directory settings Applies to: vehicles wit h telephone .,.Select : i MENUI button> Telephone > left control button > Directory. .,.Select: right control button > Directory settings. Memory capacity Shows the Memory capacity for the directory . You can manage up to 17,000 contacts with the directory. You can load up to 4,000 contacts from your cell phone into each directory . You can also import up to 1,000 contacts from a storage device. Sort order You can sort the contacts in your directory alphabetically according to Last name or First name . Import contacts See c>page 118, Importing/exporting contacts . Bluetooth settings See c>page 168, Bluetooth settings . Ringtone and volume settings ringtones are played using the Ringtone function . Press the contro l knob to save the selected ringtone . The Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted during a phone call using the contro l knob. For the Ringtone volume/Message volume sett ings, refer to c>page 169. 2) Export contacts See ¢ page 118, Importing/exporting contacts. Using the Mute telephone funct ion, you can switch the ringtone on your MMI on or off. The l) The requirement s for using Audi connect services• mus t be me t and you mus t have a myAudi account set up at http :/ /m y.audius a.com. You must have a vehicle sto red in your myAudi account and you must have contact s sto red. 2> Depends on th e connect ed cell pho ne. 119 .,,. Telephone Refresh directory Hide cont acts without phon e number To update the contacts in the MMI, you can manually download your cell phone contacts. Depending on the cell phone, the Bluetooth connec tion may need to be disconnected and reconnected to upd ate the contacts. When this function is swit ched on@°, contac t s that do not have any numbers assigned to them will be grayed out in the directory . Troubleshooting Appl ies to: vehicles with telep hone Problem Solution Connecting the cell phone to the Check if the requirements for connecting a cell phone have been met ¢ page 110 . Or: check if you accidentally decl ined the connection setup PIN on your cell phone . MMI failed . After pai ring, not all cont acts/ no Avoid using sped.al characters in names . contact s are loaded in the MMI. Avoid using contact groups on your cell phone . Certa in t elephone functions are grayed out o r not availab le. The te lephone fun ct ions depend on the cell phone service provider a nd the cell phone you are using. You can ob t ain more info rmation from your cell phone se rvice provider, in your cell phone user gu ide or in the database for mobi le devices at www .audi.com/ bluetooth . On corporate phones , some Bluetooth setti ngs may not be comSome telephone functions a re switched off or not availab le, even patib le or t he ce ll phone Bluetooth funct ion may be deactivated. tho ugh the cell phone is supportYou ca n obtain more informat ion from your system admi nistrator. ed. 120 Audi Audi connect c o nn e ct Using the SIM card reader Appli es to: vehicles w it h SIM card reader Introduction Applies to vehicles wit h Aud i connect W ith Audi conne ct services, on line information is transmitted and integrate d direct ly in the vehicle. A mob ile end dev ice can be used to access the Internet through a Wi- Fi hotspot, either when the vehicle is stationary or from the rear seat when the vehicle is in motion. _& WARNING - To reduce the risk of an accident, on ly use Audi connect serv ices when road and traffic condit ions perm it. Always read and follow the notes in c:!;>page 95, Traffic safety information. - To reduce the risk of an accident, use the Audi co nnect serv ices w ith a Wi-Fi hotspot only in the rea r seat when the veh icle is in mo t ion or on ly w hen the vehicle is sta t ionary. ([) - Note Aud i connect is designed fo r use only with the p rovided SIM card. Aud i AG is not liable for t he consequences of usi ng other SI M cards. (D Tips Read and follow the notes about Audi con128. nect befo re start ing it <:!;>page Setup Requirements for Audi connect Applies to vehicles with Audi connect An Internet connect ion is requ ired to use Audi connect. The following requ irements must be met to establish a connection: - The Audi connect SIM ca rd must be inserted into the SIM card reader for the MMI. ~ it co - A data connection must be configured for Audi connect serv ices. Fig. 1 12 Mini SIM card is pictured in actual size An Internet connection is required to use Aud i connect. Requirement The vehicle is stationary . The ign ition must be switched on. insert a SIM card .,. Press the !TELi button . .,. Slide the mini SIM card into the card reade r slot with the label facing up (contact surface fac ing down) <:!;> fig . 112. The ang led corner of the SIM card must be at the left front corner. Then push the SIM card into the slot until it clicks into place . .,. Enter the PIN for you r SIM card. .. Select and confirm OK. .,.To connect to the Inte rnet a utomat ica lly in the future, selec t and the n confirm Yes. .,.To es tablish an In t ernet connec t ion fo r Audi connect servi ces, confirm t he message that ap pears with Accept. .,. ,...., <J:) Lil ,...., ,...., <J:) 121 Audi conn e ct Aft er connect ing successfull y After connecting successfully, the signal strength is indicated in the Infotainment system disp lay stat us line with one or two symbo ls, depending on the connection type @ / @ ¢ page 101, fig. 101. You can now use Audi connect. "' Select : the IMENU ! button> Audi connect. "' Confirm the system prompt asking to connect to the Int ernet w it h Yes, always if required. Remov ing th e SIM card "' Press on the SIM card briefly . The card is released from the slot . Remove the SIM card. (D Note Audi connect is designed for use only with the prov ided SIM card. Aud i AG is not liable for the consequences of using other SIM cards. @ Tips - You can connect a cell phone with Bluetooth (handsfree) to make phone calls ~ page 110. - Audi does not provide support for other SIM cards . Audi recommends using on ly the provided SIM card. - You can specify when the MMI estab li shes an Internet connection . The Internet connection disconnects automatically once the requested Audi connect service no longer requires any data packets. - The data connection for Aud i connect services is preconfig ured at the factory. However, if you need to adjust the configuration, you can change the data connection at any time . Configuration myAudi Activating/configuring connect services through specific Audi Appli es to vehicles w it h Audi connect Some Audi connect services must be activated/ configured through your personal myAud i account before using them for the first time . - If you do not have a personal myAudi account yet, you can reg ister online at my .audiusa.com. - Add your vehicle to your myAudi account. -Activate/configu re the Audi connect services you would like for your vehicle in your myAudi account. - For some Audi connect services, you may also have to enter your myAudi user data or your myAudi PIN when accessing services in the MMI to connect your vehicle to myAudi . For detailed configuration information, see my.audiusa .com . Logginginto myAudi in the vehicle Appli es to vehicles w it h Audi connect To use some Audi connect services (such as Facebook*), you must first connect your vehicle with myAudi to transfer your personal settings from your myAudi account. "' Select: ! MENU I button> Audi connect > right control button > Log in. "' Enter your myAudi user data. Or: enter your 8dig it myAudi PIN. "' Confirm your entry w ith OK. Then you can open your personal settings from your myAudi account in your vehicle . (D Tips You can receive your myAudi PIN if you have set up a myAudi account. For additiona l information, see my.audiusa.com. 122 Audi Overview of Audi connect services connect Refresh The conten t s for t he selecte d Audi connec t se rvice a re refreshed . Basic functions Applies to vehicles with Audi connect Change search area The set sea rch area can be changed at any time . Additional informa t ion on searc h areas ca n be fo und under ¢ page 134. Close Audi connect service Regardless of what function is selected, you can close an Audi connect service at any time and retu rn to the Audi connect overview ¢ fig. 113 . Fig. 11 3 Audi connect home page w ith preview If available, the Audi connect men u disp lays functions specific to certain services in the selection menu¢ page 96 for that Audi connect service. Basic functions are found in the options menu ¢ page 97 for the corresponding Audi connect service . .. Select: the IMENU ! button > Audi connect > the desired Audi connect service > right contro l button. Depending on t he Audi connect service selected, the following functions are available: Save as preview You can display the preview in the ove rview of t he selec t ed Audi conn ect serv ices (D ¢ fig. 113. Show on map Weather Applies to vehicles with Audi connect Info rmation on current weather condit ions as well as weather forecasts for the selected search area (for examp le, In immediate vicinity). .. Select and confirm Weather . Flight information Applies to vehicles with Audi connect Information on flights and current arrival/departure times in the selected sea rch area. .. Select and confirm Flight information. You can sele ct t he desired info rma t ion using t he right cont rol bu tt on. City events Applies to vehicles with Audi connect You can show se lected contents on the map and use them for route guidance. Info rmation on even t s in vario us categor ies in the des ired searc h area . Read aloud You can allow the MMI to read out the selected contents. Navigate .... N a: CX) .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .... If a city was added to an entry (such as City events), you can use it as a navigation destina tion in the MMI. .,.Sele ct a nd confirm City events > left control but t on > category. Online news Applies to vehicles with Audi connect Check the mos t cur rent head lines of yo ur favorite publicat ions in the MMI. .,.Sele ct Online news > headline. U"I 123 Audi conn e ct Facebook Applies to vehicles with Audi connect You can access the most important functions in your Facebook account through your MMI. Requirement: You must have a Facebook account . You must have connected your myAudi account with Facebook . You must have connected your veh icle with myAudi ¢ page 122 . "' Select Facebook > left control button > desired function (for example, New s Feed) . The fo llowing categories can be selected in the Facebook menu: - News Feed: new posts (for examp le, by fr iends or groups) are displayed . - Timeline : your Facebook timeline is displayed. - Messages: messages you have rece ived are displayed. - Places nearby: places nearby are d isp layed that, for example, we re recommended by your friends. You can narrow the sea rch further by entering categories . - Events : events to which you were invited a re displayed. The fo llow ing funct ions are available , depend ing on the Facebook category yo u have se lected : - What's on your mind?: you can publish a new Facebook status using pre-made temp lates or using custom ized myAudi t emp lates. - Where are you?: you can specify your current location and make it visib le. (D Tips - You can find add itional information on con necting your myAudi account with Facebook in the Audi connect ( myAudi ) operat ing manua l at www.audi. com/myaudi. - You can o nly connect one Facebook account with you r myAudi account. - Other settings such as account and privacy settings cannot be changed in the MMI. 124 These changes must be made on the Face book website . - You can also create individual text templates online at my.audiusa .com . - Audi connect makes it possib le to access Facebook . Pe rmanen t ava ilability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on Face book . Twitter Appli es to vehicles w it h Audi connect You can access the most important functions in your Twitter account through your MMI. Requirement: You must have a Twitter acco unt . You must have connected your myAudi account with Twitter. You m ust have connected your veh icle wit h myAud i ¢ page 122 . "' Sele ct Tw itter > left con t rol button > desired function (for examp le, Trends). The following categories can be se lected in the Twitter men u: - My Tweets : News Feed and the Tweets yo u have posted a re listed. - Home : the Tweets for everyone you follow are disp layed. - Trends : top ics on Twitter that are currently popular with in a country . Different functions are ava ilable depending on the Twitter category you have selected : - New tweet : you can post a new tw eet using pre-made temp lates or using individ ua lized myAudi templates. - Refresh : the se lected Twitter funct ion is refreshed. - Set as fa vorite : set a Tweet as favorite to show you liked it. - Retweet : you can quote a Tweet to share it with others. ..,_ Audi @ Tips - You can find additiona l information on connecting your myAudi account w ith Twitter in the Audi connect (myAudi) operat ing manual at www.audi.com/myaud i. - Other settings such as account, language, Tweet security and location settings cannot be changed in the MMI. These changes must be made on the Twitter webs ite . - You can create individual text templates in your myAudi account . - You can only connect one Twitter account with your myAudi account. - Audi connect makes it possible to access Twitter. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on Twitter . Audi connect services in navigation Appl ies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi connect The follow ing Audi connect services are currently available: - Navigation with online map view and Str eet View ~ page 142 . - Point of Int erest ( POI) online search with voice recognition (such as restaurants): plan route guidance using the MMI control panel and the voice recogn ition system ¢ page 104. - Set up destinations in your MMI using your myAudi account or online map view . - Online traffic informat ion: receive up-to -theminute traff ic info rmation about accidents, road construction and other incidents ¢ page 143. - Map update s: import navigat ion map updates in you r MMI using an SD card. (D Tips - For the Map update Audi connect service using an SD card, check the current softwa re version in you r vehicle and compare it with my .audiusa.com to see if a new version is available. You can also have the new navigation data installed by an Audi dealer, which can be done for an additiona l charge. c o nn e ct - More information on map update s can be found in the Audi connect Operating Manual under my .audiusa.com. Audi connect services in the telephone Applies to vehicles with Audi connect The following Audi connect services are current ly available: - Storing contacts on your computer using your myAudi Account and loading the contacts into the MMI direc t ory ¢ page 118. Audi connect services in the Media menu Applies to: vehicles with Wi·Fi audio player and Audi connect - Wi-Fi audio player: you can access the med ia center through W i-Fi connected med ia players (such as smartphones) ¢ page 153. The Audi MMI connect app also offe rs access to Int ernet radio*. - Online media: offers access to different on line media services and operation throug h t he MM I using the Audi MMI connect app. (D Tips For more information on the Wi-Fi audio player and supported devices, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Additional options Appl ies to vehicles with Audi connect .,.Select: ! MENU I button> Audi connect > right control button . The following options are available in the Audi connect services overview: - Log in: ~ page 122, Logging into myAudi in the vehicle - Connection manage r: ¢ page 167, Connection manager 125 Audi conn e ct Wi-Fi Network search* Hotspot Applies to: vehicles with W i-Fi hotspot You con use the MMI as a Wi-Fi hotspot to connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices to the Internet. While driving, restricted use of non-secured, light, small wireless devices is only possible from the rear of the vehicle. Requirement: the ign ition must be switched on. ~ Se lect: IMENU Ibutton > Telephone> right contro l button > Wi -Fi settings . The fo llow ing settings can be modified in the W iFi setting s menu: Wi -Fi mode The MMI W i-Fi hotspot is deactivated at the facto ry. Switch the Wi-Fi hotspot to Hot spot before estab lishi ng a connection between yo ur vehicle and your W i-Fi device . - Hotspot : the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is active and visible to othe r devices. A connection can be es t a bl ished with new w ireless devices. - Hotspot and client : the MMI Wi- Fi hotspot is active. An internet connection to a pe rsonal W iFi hotspo t (such as a smartphone) can be established. Using Netw ork search ¢ page 126, you can search for yo ur personal hotspot and con nect to the MMI. - Off : the MMI Wi- Fi hotspot is deactivated. An Internet connection is not poss ible . Hotspot settings The Wi-Fi connection between your ve hicle and your W i-Fi dev ice (laptop, cell phone) is encrypted . To establish a connec t ion, you must enter the following va lues when setting up yo ur wireless device . You can change them if necessary. - Access point (SSID ): name of t he Wi-Fi net - work. - Password : a random password was set at the fact o ry fo r the MMI. The password can be changed . The WPA2 encryption method requires a password to be at least 8 characters long. Select a sec ure password. - Visible to other s: your W i-Fi network visibility can be switched on or off. 126 A list of avai lab le W i-Fi networks in yo ur area is displayed. A WARNING - As the driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident. - It is on ly safe to use laptops and similar mobile devices when the veh icle is stationary because, like a ll loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the veh icle in a crash and cause serious injur ies. Store these types of devices securely while d riving. - Do not use any wire less devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while dr iving . Also note the warnings in the "Airbag Syst em" chapte r under "Important Info rmation on t he Front Airbag System" ¢page 192, Front airbags. Q;) Note You are responsible for all precaut ions taken fo r data protection, anti-v irus protect ion and prot ection aga inst loss of data on mobi le de vices t hat ar e used to a ccess the In t ernet thro ugh the Wi-Fi hotspot . (D Tips - A separ ate, paid mob ile subscr ipt ion may be needed to use the Wi-Fi hotspot. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider. - Being able to rece ive the data pa cket from the internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot, may re sult in additional costs, espec ially when operating in foreign co untries, depend ing on your cellu lar phone plan: the use of a flat rate data plan is highly recommended! You can obta in more information from your cell phone serv ice provider. - Additional information ca n be found under www.aud iusa.com/aud iconnect Audi Configuring connection the data Appl ies to vehicles with Aud i con nect To use Audi connect services, a data connection must be configured. .,.Select : IMENU Ibutton> right control button> Connection manager . .. Select: right control button > Online settings> Data connection settings . Using the Data connection settings menu, you can set when an Internet connection should be made . The Internet connection disconnects automatically once the requested Audi connect service no longer requires any data packets . The following options can be selected: Connect - On request: a data connection is only established when confirmed. - Without request: a data connection is automatically established to use Audi connect services . - Never: a data connection is not established. Audi connect services cannot be accessed. When a data connection is established, the symbol for an active data connection and the signa l strength appear in the status line in the Infotainment system display @ / @ ¢ page 101, fig. 101. An active data connection can be ended manually by setting the Connection setup to Never. Data roaming Data roaming is sw itched off at the factory. To use a data connection outside of the country, Data roaming must be switched on(~). The setting is stored for the current SIM card or the cell phone that is currently connected. Audi connect (MMI) With this funct ion, you can Allow or Deny the use of Audi connect services if the connection is set to Without request or On request. connect Connection settings The connection is configured automat ica lly based on the SIM card being used. These values can be changed. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider. - APN: the access point depends on the cell phone service provider and is assigned automat ically . - User name : the user name for your on line profi le is assigned by the cell phone service provider. - Password: the password for your on line profile is assigned by the cell phone service provider. Storing changed connection settings: press the IBACKI button. Reset configuration An online profile is saved and configured automatically . The Connection settings that you changed manually are reset to the default sett ings. _& WARNING - As the driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident. - It is only safe to use laptops and similar mobile devices when the vehicle is stationary because, like a ll loose objects, they cou ld be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause ser ious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving. - Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while dr iving. Read and follow the safety precautions in the separate vehicle owner's manual under "Important information about the front airbag system" in the "Airbag System" chapter. (D Note You are responsible for all precaut ions taken for data protection, anti-virus protect ion and protection against loss of data on mobile devices t hat are used to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot. 127 Audi (D connect Tips - When traveling in a different country, the data connection may be ended to prevent unplanned roaming charges, depending on the factory settings. You can only use Audi connect services in another country once you have activated the Data roaming option. - For more information on roaming fees, contact Audi connect customer support at 877-505-AUDI (2834). - The speed of the data connection may vary depending on the vehicle location, the coverage area of your cell phone service provider and if the recommended provider is used or not. - A data connection cannot be established if incorrect data is entered in the connection settings. - For more information on roaming charges, contact your cell phone service provider . - The Wi-Fi hotspot reception quality depends on the signal strength and the availability of the mobile network. For more information, contact your current network provider. - For additional information, visit www.audiusa.com/help/audi-connect. About Audi connect Audi connect services Applies to vehicles with Audi connect {D) Tips - Audi connect services are only available with an existing or separate cell phone contract and only within the mobile network coverage area. There may be additional costs when connecting to the Internet using data packets, depending on your cell phone rates and particularly with international service. Based on the high data volume, having a flat rate data plan is highly recommended. - You can only use services supported by Audi connect if you have the optional MMI Navigation plus equipment with MMI touch and Audi connect . 128 - Use of the LTE* mobile network standard is not available in every country. Contact your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility or your cell phone service provider for additional information. - Using Audi connect services requires a SIM card with data options and, when using LTE*, it also requires LTE options. - Usage of Audi connect services depends on the availability of services through third party providers. - Also note the instructions in the chapter Qpage 110, Telephone. - Audi connect is designed for use only with the provided SIM card. Receiving data packets from the Internet will quickly increase the volume of data used. For more information, contact Audi connect customer support at 877-505-AUDI (2834). - The Audi connect services are available in the USA. Audi connect services are currently not available in Canada or in Mexico. -Availability, scope, providers, screen display and costs of services may vary depending on the country, model, model year, end device and rates. For additional information, visit www.audiusa.com/help/audi-connect. - An initial registration/activation on the myAudi platform at my.audiusa.com is necessary to use some services. Your authorized Audi dealer or Audi connect customer support at 877-505-AUDI (2834) will be happy to provide information on options for extending usage and any costs that may result. - It is only possible to use Audi connect services with a valid Audi connect SIM card. - To ensure all of the Audi connect features work correctly, Audi recommends setting up data service and Wi-Fi packages with your network provider. Your network service provider can be authorized by law , through a judicial order or other lawful instructions, to disclose the position of your vehicle. For additional information on your cell phone service provider's privacy policies can be found in their Terms of Use. .,._ Audi - The Audi connect services are a Wi-Fi/Internet-based system. If the system does not function correctly even though all of the requirements are met, please try again later or contact Audi connect customer support at 877-505-AUDI (2834). - For detailed information on Audi connect and the Terms of Use, refer to www.audiusa.com/audiconnect. Data protection Appl ies to vehicles with Aud i connect (D} Tips - You can find additional information in your MMI in the options menu~ page 97 for the selected Audi connect service and also on the Internet at www.audiusa.com/help/ au di-connect. - Your privacy is important to us. - AUDI AG collects, processes, shares and transmits your personal information in accordance with legal regulations in order to ensure proper function and availability of the individual Audi connect services. You can view the complete, current and valid Audi connect data protection policy in your MMI. The myAudi website is available for to you to activate additional Audi connect services and to transfer data with your vehicle, among other services. A one-time registration is required to establish a connection to your vehicle. For this purpose, AUDI AG collects, processes, transmits and uses your required personal information as required for you to use the services provided by AUDI AG. Your information is not distributed to connect third parties. Using your cell phone with the help of your myAudi platform, you can transfer information for Audi connect services functions to your vehicle and allow specific information to be transmitted from your vehicle . - By activating special information services that are part of your Audi connect portfolio, you can use these functions directly in your vehicle by entering data to confirm your identity (to use social networks, for example). To do this , the identification information you provided is forwarded with the request to the respective service provider. Then you can access your personal content using a secure connection. This content is displayed in the vehicle for your use. Your personal content is not stored within Audi AG. The necessary connection information is processed and used for providing services and the proper function of the services in accordance with applicable legal guidelines. - By providing Audi connect services, Audi of America is authorized to collect, process, transmit and transfer information about you and your vehicle. Additional information can also be found in your MMI in the options menu q page 97 for the selected Audi connect service. - Information on our data protection measures in conjunction with the mobile Audi connect application can be found in the application's privacy policy. For additional information about the my.audiusa.com website or other applications, websites or online services connected to Audi, visit www.audiusa.com/privacy . 129 Audi connect Troubleshooting Applies to vehicles with Audi connect Problem Solution Audi connect services: individ ual Some Audi conn,ect services must be act ivated/config ured through your personal myAudi account before using them fo r the f irst time. You can find detailed informat ion online at https:// my.audi .com . Audi connect services are grayed out or not available. Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possib le t o connect throug h W i-Fi. 130 Delete all existing W i-Fi connections on your mob ile device and resta rt it . Navigation Navigation Opening navigation Applies to: veh icles with navigation system The navigation system directs you to your destination, around traffic incidents and on alternative routes, if desired. Fig. 114 Example image: Enter destination menu • Select: INAV / MAPI button . After opening the Navigation menu, the Enter destination menu c;, fig. 114 appears in the Infotainment system display with the following informat ion: (!) Input field for free text search @ Home address<=;>page 133 ® Last destinat ions @ Stored favorites c;, page c;, page c;, page 132 132 133 If you have connected a cell phone with the MMI, your directory contacts will also be listed if they have navigation data assigned to t hem . Your favorites @) and directory contacts are only displayed in the Enter destin ation menu when you have entered one or more letters using the input field. Map preview - Select an entry from the list. .... N a: When se lecting an entry from the list , the correspond ing destination will always be show n to you as a map preview ® ~ fig. 114. CX) .... I.Cl .... I.Cl .... U"I Switching between the destination entry and the map - Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until the map is displayed . Or: select the left control button > Switch to map . _&.WARNING - - The demands of traffic require your fu ll attention . Read and follow the guide lines propage 95 . vided in <=;> - Obey all t raff ic laws when driving. - The route calculated by the navigation system is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obey traffic lights, stopp ing restrictions, one-way streets, lane change re strictions, etc. (D Note - If the driving directions conflict w ith tra ffic laws, obey the traffic laws. - Adjust the volume of t he navigation system so signals from outside the vehicle, such as police and fire sirens, can be heard clearly at all times . (D Tips - Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna or interference caused by t rees and large 131 Na v ig a t ion buildi ngs can impair satellite reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position. Several deact ivated or malfunct ion ing sate llites can also interrupt GPS reception and affect the system's ab ility to determ ine the veh icle position. - Because street names sometimes change, the names stored in the MMI may in rare cases differ from the act ual street name. (D Tips - The MMI input suggestions depen d on the last navigated destinat ions . - Up to SO entries can be stored in the last destinations list. - Additional information on free tex t sea rching can be fo und under¢ page 102. Loading last destination Entering a destination Free text search Appl ies t o: vehicles with navigat ion syst em You can quickly and easily search destinations using the free text search and transfer them to route guidance. Appli es to: vehicles wi th navigat ion syst em Your last destinations are automatically stored and can be directly loaded as a destination ogoin. " Press t he INAV/MAPI repeate dly un t il the Enter destination men u is displayed ¢ page 131, fig. 114 . Using t he MMI touch contro l pad, you can enter t he data fo r a naviga t ion dest inat ion in any order all at once (for exam ple, monument Washing ton). Likewise, you can search fo r points of interest, contacts, previous destinations or favorites to navigate to the des ired address. IN AV/MAPI repeatedly unt il t he Enter destination menu is displayed ¢ page 131, " Press the fig. 114. " Keep turning the contro l knob to the left unti l the input fie ld appears. Your last des ti nat ions will be listed d irectly in t he Enter destination me nu and a re mar ked wit h the symbol @ ¢page 131, fig. 114. - Sele ct and confirm a previous dest ina t ion. - Select and confirm Start route guidance. Delete last destinat ions - Select and confirm a previous dest ination from the list. - Select and confirm : right control button > Delete . - Write one or more search terms in the input field © ¢ page 131, fig. 114. A list of all resu lts found will appear in the Infotainment system display. - Se lect and confirm a destination from the resu lts list . - Se lect and confirm Start route guidan ce. The route is displayed as an overview in the ma p and the route guidance is already active. - Select and confirm Delete th is last destination or Delete all last destinations . The sele cted dest inat ion or all last d est inations is/are de leted and are no longe r displayed in the free text search . · Entering an address Appli es to: vehicles wit h navigat ion system " Press the INAV/MAPI Narrowing the search area repeated ly until the Enter destination menu is displayed¢ page 131, - Select: right contro l butto n > Country/ State fig. 114. selection. All countr ies/states are se lected at the factory for the free text search . Using the Country/State selection, you can dese lect the irre leva nt countr ies/states t o increase t he sea rch speed and narrow t he res ults list. 132 " Select: left control button > Enter address. - Select and confirm a line (such as Street , House number or Country/ State ) and e nter the desired informat ion. - Select and confirm Start route guidance. Na vi gation - Select and confirm Start route guidance. Setting a destination from the map App lies to: vehicles with navigation system Setting a favorite as the destination A point on the map can be used as the destination. .. Press the I NAV / MAPI button repeated ly until the map is d isplayed. - Adjusting the scale : t urn th e control knob to the left/right to move the crosshairs more quickly. - Moving the crosshairs: press the control knob. The crosshairs are shown on the map. Move the crosshairs to the des t ination using the MMI touch control pad ¢ page 98 . To hide the cross hairs aga in, press the I BACK I button . - Setting as desti nat ion: press the control knob when the crosshairs are shown . If necessary, select and confirm Add as stopover and then Start route guidance. - Enter one or more lette rs into the free text search input fie ld. The favo rites fo und a re dis played and marked with the symbol @ . - Select and confirm the des ired favorite. - Select and confirm Sta rt route guidance. (D Tips - Add itiona l information about the home address can be found under ¢ page 136. - Add itiona l information abo ut favorites can be found under ¢ page 137. Setting a destination from the directory Appli es to : vehicles with navigat ion system You can navigate directly to destinations in the directory. Additional information about the location of the crosshairs: if you select map content with crossha irs, the avai lab le information is d isp layed (such as the name of t he city or points of interest) @ . Setting a home address/favorite destination as the Fig . 11 5 Possible stored locati ons in the dir ect ory Applies to: vehicles with navigation system You can easily and quickly start route guidance to your home address using the home address function. Favorites allow easier access to other frequently used destinations. Requirement: a home address/favorite stored ¢ page 136 . must be .,.Press t he I NAV/MAPI repeatedly unt il t he Enter destination men u is displayed ¢ page 131, fig. 114. Setting a home address as the destination Your home address will be displayed directly in the Enter destination menu and can be ident ified with the symbo l @ . - Select and confirm the home address . - If necessary , select and confirm Create now and enter an address. Requirement: an address with navigation data or a destinat ion must already be assigned to a contact . .. Press the I NAV /MAP I repeated ly until the Enter destination menu is disp layed ¢ page 131, fig . 114 . .. Select: left control button > Directory > a contact . The directory/contacts are shown in a lphabetical order a nd are marked with symbols to indicate the storage locat io n: (D Business address @ Private add ress @ Bus iness destination © Private destination 133 Na v ig a t ion - Select and confirm an address or a destination. When you have se lected a destination, the route guidance can be started direct ly. - Check the address input again when selecting an address . - Then select and confirm Start route guidance . Along th e route : po ints of interest along the Addit ional d irecto ry funct ions in the navigation sys t em can be fo und under ¢ page 137 . the points of interest can likewise be selected from different categories in the vicinity of the dest ination or stopover. For example, you can search for a hotel or park ing lot at the dest ina t ion. @ Tips - Addresses that have been imported from your cell phone into the MMI can a lso be used as a dest ination. - If a contact is grayed out in the d irectory, th is contact has neither a destination nor an address assigned to them . Entering a point of interest Applies to: vehicles w ith navigation system Fig. 1 16 Ent erin g a point of inte rest .. Press the INAV/MAPI repea t edly unt il the Ent er destination menu is displayed ¢ page 131, fig. 114 . .. Se lect : left control button > Point s of inte rest. - Changing the search area: se lect and confirm Search area > a search area from the list . - Searching f or a point of interest in a specific category: select Select category. Select and confirm a category such as Restaurant s. The fo llow ing search catego ries are avai lab le: route can only be se lected during active route guidance. The points of interest are located directly along or in the immediate vicin ity of the calculated route. In vicinity of dest inat ion/V icinity of stopover: I n new city: enter the name of the desired city . Points of interest can be selected from various categories . This funct ion a llows you to search for po ints of interest in any city rega rdless of the active route guidance or the vehicle pos ition . (D Tips - Additional information on myAudi po ints of interest* can be found in the Audi connect operating manual under www.audi.com/ myaudi. - Distances to po ints of inte rest a re displayed as a stra ight-line d istance (open arrow) from you r cur rent location . The actu al d istan ce from your curren t locat ion to the point of interest is upda t ed automa t ically (so lid arrow) . The list of foun d points of interest is not resorted when this happens . - There may be entries in the list that cannot be displayed completely due to their length . If you select these list entries using the cont rol knob, detailed information about the selected list entry will be shown automat ically after several seconds. Point of interest online search Appli es to: vehicles with navigat ion system and Audi connect You con search for poin ts of interes t on the Internet. In imm ediat e vicinity: points of interest can be selected from different categories . The po ints of inte rest are listed starting from the immed iate vicin ity of the veh icle up to a rad ius of approxi mately 12S miles (200 km). Requi rement : the requirements for Audi connect services must be met ¢ page 121 . .. Press the I repeated ly until the Enter destination menu is displayed ¢ page 131, fig. 114. 134 INAV / MAP Navigation .. Select: left control button > Online search. The search area last set is shown in the input field. - Changing the search area: se lect a nd confirm Search area > o search area from the list . - Searching for online destinations in these lected search area: en t er a new city/st at e if necessary. Enter the search te rm, such as res ta urant. Select and confi rm an online destinat ion . Select and confirm Sta rt route guidance. - Searching for online destinations in a specific category : select Select category. Select and confirm a category s uch as Restaurants . Find which search areas a re available under ¢ page 134, Entering a point of interest . You can se ar ch fo r online dest inati ons using t he voice recogn ition syste m ¢ table on page 10 7. (D Tips - You on ly nee d t o e nter your myAudi user data one time . - You can re ce ive your myAudi PIN if you have set u p a myAud i acco unt . For mo re informa tion, go to www.audi.com/myaudi. -Add itiona l information can be foun d on t he Inte rnet at www .a udiusa .com/hel p/au diconnect . Entering a destinat ion using geocoordinates Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system .,. Press th e I NAV /MAP I repeate dly until the Enter destination menu is disp layed ¢ page 13 1, fig. 114 . .. Sele ct: left control but to n > Geo coordinates. @ Tips - Refer t o th e not es in th e About Audi connect cha pt e r ¢ page 12 8. - For ad dition al informat io n, visit www.au dius a .com/help/a udi-co nnect. Finding destinations from a myAudi account Applies to: vehicles with navigatio n system and Audi connect Import dest inations from your myAudi accoun t into the MMI. - Select a nd confirm eit her Latitude or Longitude . - Turn t he con t rol kno b to the left/ right to cha nge the lat itu d e/ long itude. - Press th e contro l knob to confirm your input . - Select and confirm Start route guidance. Entering a stopover Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system You can enter an additional stopover when route guidance is active. Requi rem ent : you must have a myAudi accou nt set up at htt p://my. audiu sa .com. You must have a vehicle stored in your myAudi accou nt and you must have a des t inat ion stored . .. Press t he I NAV/MAP I repeat edly unt il t he Enter destination me nu is displayed ~ page 131, fig. 114 . .. Se lect: left cont rol butt on > myAudi contacts . .. If necessary, e nter your myAudi user data or yo ur myAud i PIN. The contacts sto red in myAudi are displayed. Fig. 117 Current route guida nce with stopove r Requirement: a dest inat ion must be entered. .. Press the .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... - Se lect and confirm a contact. - Se lect and co nfir m a p rivat e or bus iness desti nat ion . - Select and co nfir m Start route guidance . I repeate dly until the Enter destination menu is disp layed¢ page 131, I NAV /MAP ~ rg . 114. I.Cl U"I 135 Navigation Entering a destination as a stopover - Enter a destination in the input line r=> page 132 . - Select and confirm a destination from the resu lts list. - Select and confirm Add as stopover . Deleting a stopover - Turn the control knob up until the active route guidance is shown . - Se lect and confirm Cancel route guidance unfig. 117 . Select and con der the stopover (D r=> firm the system prompt if necessary . The stopover is deleted. Online traffic data *: receiving online traffic infor - mation ¢ page 143 can be switched on or off . Country/State selection: select all countr ies/ states from the list(~) in the free text search ¢ that sho uld be included page 132. Store as favorite : ¢ page 13 7. (0 Tips Information on on line traffic data can also be found on the Internet at www.aud iusa.com/ help/aud i-connect. Canceling route guidance Appli es to: vehicles with navigat ion system Additional options when entering a destination Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system .,.Press the right contro l button . Depending on the se lected function , the following additional options may be available when enter ing a destination: Requirement: route gu idance must be active. .,. Push the control knob up. The active route page 135, fig. 117 . guidance is displayed r=> .,.Select and confirm the destinat ion that you wou ld like to delete . The dest inat ion is deleted . Or: select the right control button> Cancel route guidance. Cancel route guidance:¢ page 136. Creating Map settings: r=> page 141 . Appli es to: vehicles with navigat ion system Show location on map: Requirement: you must .,. Press the have selected a destination from the results list. The dest inat ion entered is displayed on the map. Parking at this location: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the results list. All parking options near the selected location are d isp layed in the Infota inment system . POis at this location: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the results list . All parking options near the selected location are d isp layed in the Infota inment system . Delete : the selected entry is deleted. You can delete individ ua l entries or all entries (for example, favorites or last destinations). a home address repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed ¢ page 131, fig. 114. I NAV/MAPI Storing a home address - Select and confirm Home address @ r=> page 131, fig. 114 . - Select and confirm Create now . Or: select and confirm a dest inat ion > right control button> Store as home address. A home address will be stored in the MMI regardless of the connected cell phone. This home ad dress is a lways available even if a cell phone is not connected to the MMI. Editing the home address Audi connect for this location : Requirement : you must have selected a destination from the re sults list . Allows you to search for items in the vicinity of the selected location, such as City events or Travel information . 136 - Select Home address @ r=> page 131, fig. 114. - Select: right control button > Edit home ad· dress. - Select and confirm a new destination as the home address. Na vi gation The selected destination is sto red as the new hom e address. Additional settings Navigation settings Favorites Applies to: vehicles with navigation system Appl ies to: vehicles with navigat ion system " Press the INAV /MAP I repeated Ly until the Enter destination menu is disp layed r:!vpage 131, " Press the INAV/MAPI repeatedly until t he Enter destination menu is displayed ~ page 131, fig . 114. - Storing an existing destination as a favorite : search for the desired destination using the input field . Or: select and confirm a destination from the list. Select: right control button > Store as favorite . - Renaming stored favorites: select: left control button > Favorites > a favorite from the list> right control button > Rename favorit e. - Moving sto red favorites : select: left contro l button > Favorites > a favorite from t he list > right control button> Move favorite . Select and confirm the desired posit ion. - Deleting stored favorites : select and conf irm a favor ite > right contro l button > Delete th is favorite I Delete all favorit es. Creating contacts directory Appl ies to: vehicles with navigation system Two addresses (private/business) con be assigned as destinations for each contact in the directory. " Press the INAV / MAPI repeatedly unt il t he Enter destination menu is displayed i::!>page 131, fig . 114. fig . 114. " Select: right control button > Navigation setting s. Depend ing on the selected function, the follow ing settings can be selected: Show alternative routes Up to three route suggest ions and their propert ies are d isplayed on the overv iew map when t his funct ion is switched on. See also r:!vpage 138 Gas station message When this funct ion is switched on, a message is displayed if the fuel gauge goes below the re serve marking . Confirming this message d isplays a list of gas stations in the a rea . When a gas stat ion is selected, route guida nce from the current vehicle position is calculated . Presentation mode The presentat ion mode helps you to plan and fol low a route without mov ing the vehicle . You can Select starting point whe n you would like to calculate a route starting from a location other tha n the vehicle position. St art presentat ion mode to simulate rou t e gu idance. Route criteria Applies to: vehicles with navigation system Storing a destination as a contact in the direct ory Requiremen t : a cell phone must be connected to the MMI. - Select a destinat io n > right contro l button > Add destination to contact. - Select and confirm Add business destination or Add private destinat ion. - Ente r a name. Or : select and confirm a d irectory cont act from the list. - Select and conf irm Save business card. JI Fig. 11 8 Possible route crite ri a 137 Navigation • Press the INAV / MAPI repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed c::> page 131, fig . 114. • Se lect : right control button > Route criteria. (D HOV lanes1) : with the Avoid function, HOV lanes are exclud e d when calculating routes. When Allow is selected, the MMI will route you through HOV lanes and show them on t he map. @ Highways/ @ Toll roads/ @ Ferries: if the navigation system should not include highways, toll roa ds or ferries - if poss ible - when calculating routes, you can select the Avoid function . imum: 20 km), if possible. The navigation system ca lculates an a lternative route . The route to be avoided that you have entered applies on ly t o the current route and m ust be reset, if necessary . The areas you have selected to avoid will appear with red and white shading on the map . Displaying alternative routes Applies to: vehicles with navigation system Voice guidance Applies to: vehicles with navigation system • Press the INAV / MAPI repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed c::> page 131, fig . 114 . • Select : right control button > Voice guidance. Voice guidance: voice guidance can be complete or shortened. With the Traffic funct ion, voice gu idance prompts are only given when there are traffic incid en t s on your route . When Off is select ed, no voice guidance is given . Voice guidance during phone call: voice guidance during a phone call can be switched on or off. Entertainment fader: c::> page 170 . Voice guidance volume: c::> page 170. Blocking a route App lies to: vehicles with navigation system Requirement: a destination must be entered and the route guidance must be started. • Press the INAV/MAPI repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed c::> page 131, fig. 114 . • Select : right control button > Block route . When route guidance is active, the calculated route will avoid the area you have specified (max- l) High occupan cy vehicle 138 Fig. 119 Altern ative rou te s displ ay Requirement: a destination must be entered and the route guid a nce must be started. • Press the INAV /MAP I repeated Ly until the Enter destination menu is displayed r=> page 131, fig. 114 . • Select: right control button > Show alternative routes . Up to three route suggestions and their properties are displayed on the map when this function is switched on <=:> fig. 119. If available, the following information will appear on the route suggestions : - Route type (fast (D, fast alternative @ , econom ic route @ ) - Distance to the destination and t he calculated arrival t ime - Traff ic congestion a long the route includ ing time delays The route t hat was calculated accord ing to the route criteria you selected is shown on the map . Additional route properties (such as ferry or cartrain connections) are d ispla yed @ r=> fig. 119 . .,.. Na v igat ion Additional information about individual route criter ia can be found in ¢ page 137. Using the contro l knob , you can se lect the possible routing for the alt ernative routes and show them on map Select and confirm the desired route that you wou ld like to use for route guidance. Map Operating the map Appl ies to: vehicles with navigation system W ild A cre s Rd • Escondido Fwy Escondido Fig. 12 0 Map wit h crosshairs tu rn ed on Fig. 121 Map wit h crosshai rs tu rn ed off ~ Press t he INAV/MAPI button repeated ly until the map is displayed ~ fig. 121 . Zooming in/ out on the map .... N a: CX) .... "' .... .... "' - Turn the control knob to the left or to the right . As an alternat ive, you can also zoom in/out on the map us ing the MMI touch* ¢ page 98 . Or: tu rn the left th umbwhee l on the multifun ction steering wheel* ~ page 20 . - Swit ching the crosshairs on: press t he contro l knob in the map view. - Swit ching the crosshairs off : press the ! BACKI button. Wh en the crosshairs are swit ched on: (D Orientat ion: the map is either displayed as a 2D north position map or in 2D - heading up direction . .,. U"I Turning the crosshairs on/ off 139 Na v ig a t ion @ Scale: turn the control knob to the left or right to decrease or increase the scale. @ When the Auto zoom function is switched on, an "A" for "Automatic" is displayed . @ Crosshairs: move the crosshairs in the desired direction using the MMI touch control pad and set a point on the map as the destination or have information about the focal point displayed. ® Map content (po ints of interest, favorites) : if there a re mu ltiple POis in t he immedia t e vicinity, they will be shown stacked on the map. @ Addit ional information on the crosshairs position: if you move the crosshairs to a location on the map, ava ilable information for the current crossha irs pos ition is displayed . Press the cont rol knob to open des t ination deta ils or to sta rt ro ute guidance. When the crossh air s a re tu rned off, the road being curren t ly driven on is shown . (J) Disp lay of an upcoming maneuver. If there is no upcoming maneuver, the distance and cal culated arrival time to t he destination/stopover is displayed in this location . ® If a turn a rrow is disp layed, a bar g raph t urns on. The fewer bars a re shown, the shorter the d istance is unti l the turn . When the cross hairs are switched off : ® Speed lim it disp lay 1>:display of the maximum permitted speed on the exp ressways and highways. @ Road currently being dr iven on. When the vehicle is stationary, here . "offroad" is d isplayed @ Vehicle location @ Disp lay of active traffic informat ion (online or TMC) @ Altitude display @ Route information: different information wi ll be d isp layed d uring active route guidance (for example, the upcoming maneuver including calculated d istance and street l) Only app lies to vehicles without camera-based speed l imit display. 140 names) . The d isp lay also provides traff ic information or points of interest on t he current route. (D Tips Depending on the rerouting that is selected ¢page 137, the traffic congestion along the route may a lready be included in the ro ute calculation. Map functions Applies to: vehicles with navigation system ... Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until the map is displayed . ... Select: left control button> desired function . Switch to destination input The Enter destin ation menu is disp layed ¢ page 131, fig. 114. Traffic mes sages Current traffic information is displayed in t he In fotainment system display. ¢ page 143 . Route list The route list can on ly be disp layed when rou t e guidance is active and conta ins informat ion re gard ing the ro ute, t he names of t he st reets and t he lengt h of the route sections . When traveling on highways, possible parking lots and rest areas are shown, w hich you can se lect as a stopover. Points of interest (POis) along the route Requireme nt: rou t e guidance must be active. Searching for poi nts of interest a long your current route ¢ page 134. Additional options on the map Applies to: vehicles with navigation system ... Press t he I NAV/MAPI butt on repeatedly unti l t he ma p is displayed. ... Press the right control but t on. Na vi gation Depending on the function selected, the follow ing options can a lso be se lected under the Map menu : Map view Standard ¢page 139, fig . 120. Google Earth ¢ page 142, fig . 122 Cancel rout e guidance: ¢ page 136 . Traffic ¢ page 142 Ma p settings : ¢ page 141 . Map orientation Route criteri a: ¢ page 137. Destination : the map indica t es the destination Voice guidance: ¢ page 138. and is or iented to the north. Navigation setting s: ¢ page 137. 2D - heading up/ 2D north position map : the Online traffic data *: ¢ page 142 . current veh icle posit ion is displ ayed. The map is oriented in t he d irection of trave l or t o t he north. Block rout e: ¢ page 138. Show alternati ve route s: ¢ page 138. Parking along the route : parking options near the veh icle are disp layed. POis along the route : points of interest near the 3D position map : w hen this func t ion is sw itched on, the cur rent vehicle posi t ion is show n on a t hree -d imensional map and or ien t ed in the direct ion of travel. At a sca le of 6 2 mi les (100 km) and la rger, the map is oriented to the north . ve hicle are d isplayed . Overview: t he ent ire route from the veh icle pos i- Save current position: you can save your current ve hicle position as a favor ite ¢ page 13 7 or save it as a contact in the d irecto ry ¢ page 137 . t ion t o the des t ina t ion or the next st opove r is di splayed on the map . The map scale depends on t he length of the route and adapts automatically . The map is oriented to the north . Audi connect for this location*: allowsyou to search for City event s or Weather at the entered locat ion. Country inform ation: you can disp lay the applicab le urban and rural speed limits for any country/state. This information w ill be automatically shown to you in the route information @ ¢ page 139, fig . 120 w hen the speed lim it is exceeded , if this funct ion is act ivated ¢ page 141. Map settings Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system "'P ress t he INAV/MAPI button repeated ly un t il the map is d isplayed . "' Se lect: right cont rol but t on > Map setting s. Depending on the se lected function , the following settings can be se lected: Day/ night map Day/ Night : the map is displayed with a light/ Route information The disp lay of route info rmatio n su ch as the cur rent road be ing d riven on, up coming mane uvers, traff ic information o r points of interest a long the route can be switched on/off. Auto zoom On: t he map sca le is adapted automa t ically de - pend ing on t he ty pe of roa d be ing traveled (expressway, highway, ot her road s) so that you always have an optimal overview of the road ahead . The scale is also automatically adapted when there are upcom ing maneuvers to provide a bette r detailed view. Off : the map sca le you have chosen is kep t . Map content Map content, such as traffic info rmation, favorites or restau ran t s, can be displayed or hidden (~). da rk backg round . ,...., ~ Automatic : when the lights sw itch on, the map :;;: ,...., colors switc h from day to nig ht. 141 Navigation Online map Activating street view : turn the control knob to a view Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi connect scale less than 30 m. With the online map view, you can display the map with satellite images. The following functions are then available : - Exploring an area step-by-step : press the con· trol knob when the symbol @ is displayed . - Zooming in or out on the current view in four stages: turn the control knob to the left or to the right @ . - Navigating in street view: move your finger on the MMI touch in the desired direction . Additional information Fig. 122 Online map view Showing additional information in the Infotainment system display ca n be switched on in the Map content menu ,::;. page 141 . To display any applicable additional information , move the crosshairs onto an item on the map and press the control knob . a) Fig. 123 Map view with on line Street View Requirement: the requirements must be met ¢ page 121. for Audi connect • Press the INAV /MAP Ibutton repeatedly until the map is displayed . • Select : right control button > Map settings > Map display> Google Earth . The map display is based on data packets re· ceived from the Internet in the form of satellite images, which are then combined with the roadways from the Standard map view. There are two gigabytes of memory space in the MMI memory that can be used to temporarily store the map or navigation data that was rec eived . This is roughly the amount required for the map/navigat ion data for a 2,500 mile (4,000 km) route. As long as t he satellite images loaded for route guidance are stored, you ca n use them without having an ac · tive data connection . Street View With Street View, you can explore many places in the world through the eyes of a pedestrian. Street View is available when the symbol © c:;.fig. 122 is displayed in the crosshairs mode . 142 Tips - The stored online map view data can be de· leted in Factory settings> Navigation and online memory ¢ page 166. - The on line map view is an Audi connect service and is regularly updated when the function is opened. The process may take several seconds. - When the online map view is switched on using the 3D map orientation, the MMI display automatically switches to the 2D map orientation when driving through tunnels. - For safety reasons, the Street View functions can only be used when the vehicle is stationary. - Refer to the notes in the About Audi connect chapter r::;.page 128. - Additional information can be found on the Internet at www.audiusa.com/help/audiconnect. Accessing information traffic Auto rerouting (traffic) Appl ies to: vehicles with navigat ion system When receiving traffic inform ation through TMC/ online · depending on availability· you can have Ill> Na vi gation the MMI navigate you around traffic incidents, if possible. Rerouting must be switched on for this ¢ page 137. Reception of t raffic information is indicated by the !T MCI or I ONLINE ! symbol on the map . Traffic information (TMC) Applies to: vehicles with navigation system ~ Press the I NAV / MAPI button repeated ly until the map is disp layed . ~ Se lect : left control button > Traffic messages. Reception of traffic information is indicated by the !T MCI symbo l on the map : Multip le t raffi c messages are summari zed in the overv iew under the corresponding street names or highway names. - Displaying all traffi c messages for a street/ highway: sele ct and confirm the [illsymbo l. A list of all the traffic messages for the se lected street/highway is displayed. - Opening a detailed view of traffic information : played. To hide the traffic informat ion, press the IBACK ! button or the contro l knob . - TMC traffic reports are not available in Canada. For more informat ion, please contact Sirius Canada . Better route Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system By receiving traffic information through TMC, your MMI calculates a better route - if available and the possible time saved for the current route guidance. You can decide yourself which route you would like to use. Requirement: the route guidance must be active, rero uting must be set to Manual q page 13 7 and the map must be d isplayed. If your MMI has calculated a better route than the current route g uidance, the message A bette r route is available . is displayed on the map along with the time that may be saved. Apply better route select and confirmthe traffic report from the - Press the control knob. Or: select the left con- list. - Displaying the selected traffi c information on the map: se lect and confirm the right control button > Show on map. The shaded line shows the street and the length of the traff ic jam. trol button > Traffic messages. The better route with the ca lculated arrival time is displayed. - Select and confirm the better route . - The better route will be used for the rest of the route guidance . - Displaying the next traffic message on the map : press the contro l knob . Traffic information display Colored warning symbols: traffi c incidents on your route are shown in the uppe r section of the list and a re sorted according to distance . Warning symbols with ~: avoided traffic incidents. Grayed out warning symbo ls: traffic incidents that are not on your rou t e . They are sorted accord ing to road type (exp ressway, highway, othe r road), country and name. {D) Tips Critical traffic info rmation, such as wa rni ngs about wrong-way drive rs, is automatically d is- Online traffic information Appl ies to: vehicles with navigat ion system and Audi connect The MMI can receive real-time traffic information about traffic congestion, accidents, road construction and other incidents from the Internet. Requirement: the requirements must be met ¢ page 121. for Aud i connec t ~ Press the I NAV / MAPI button repeatedly until t he map is displayed. - Switching online traffic information on: press the right cont rol button and switch Online traf IJi,fi c data on (~). 143 Navigation - Switching traffic map view on: for an optimal view of traffic information, select: INAV/MAPI button > right control button > Map settings > Map display > Traffic. You can also display the online traffic information in the on line map view ¢ page 142 or the standard map view ¢ page 139, fig. 120. Traffic information display @ Green: traffic is moving freely @ Red: congestion ® Orange: stop-and-go traffic Shaded markings indicate the length of the congestion. Colored warning symbols: there is a traffic inci- dent immediately ahead on the route. Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents that are not on your route. Red warning symbol: all warning symbols will be red when route guidance is not active . The display of colored markings, warning sym bols, etc . can be set in the Map content menu ¢ page 141 Traffic information is switched on at the factory. You can switch off the reception of online traffic information at any time. (D Tips - Online traffic information is not available in Canada. - Refer to the notes in the About Audi connect chapter ¢ page 128. - Every vehicle with the Online traffic data function switched on has the most accurate reports of traffic situations as well as traffic forecasting. Your vehicle transmits and processes its anonymous, encrypted position information at regular intervals to the traffic data provider . In case you do not want to use this, you can switch off the Online traffic information function at any time. - The online traffic information network is still currently not available in all countries, nor is the coverage nationwide. Additional information can be found on the Internet at www.audiusa.com/help/audi-connect. Troubleshooting App lies to: vehicles with navigation system Problem Solution Free text search: the desired des - The destination is possibly not entered in the navigation database . Or: check the spelling of the search term and whether the right country/state was selected using the Country/State selection ¢ page 132 for the free text search. ti nation cannot be found . 144 Radio Radio Accessing the The following information is d isplayed in the station lists: radio (D Favorites The radio supports the FM, AM and SiriusXM* (satellite radio) bands. Using the HO Radio receiver also allows you to receive radio stations on the FM and AM band in digital format. The station is stored as a favor ite . The symbol shows the stored location in the favorites list (fo r example, 21). @ Frequency @ Station name ® Channel number If there is a loss of radio s ignal (SiriusXM*), the follow ing system informat ion is displayed in the station list: Fig. 124 FM stat ion list (HO Radio FM) Radio: SiriusXM Q= ooo 120 001 & 002 RADIO 10 D Preview I fl . NoSignal Hits 1 The system information turns off when the radio stations are received again. (D 003 20 on 20 NoSignal =8 004 40s on 4 NoSignal Fig. 125 SiriusXM station list .. Press the IRADIO Ibutton . After opening the radio, the last opened station list is displayed. Selecting a station : select and conf irm a stat ion from the station list . FM/ AM stations that can be received by digital radio are marked with the HD radio symbol @ . If recept ion qual ity declines, the radio automatically switches to the analog FM/AM station depending on availability . Digital HD Radio stations * may contain multiple additional stations* . The available additional stations* are listed under the radio station. If you lose reception, the additional stations* are muted since they can no longer be received. Setting the frequency band: press the IRADIO .... NoSigna l: the tuner is currently not receiving a satellite signal @ c::>fig. 125. Tips - HD Radio reception is not availab le in Canada. - Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would like to receive satellite programming. - Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, other vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can affect reception. - Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and Hawaii. - iTunes tagging* is not supported by all radio stations. Radio functions Free text search I button repeatedly until the desired frequency band is set. N a: Updating the station list : station lists are updat - Fig. 126 Input fiel d and results list for free text search CX) .... ed automatically . .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 145 Radio - Opening the free text search: when in a station list, keep turning the contro l knob to the left until the free text search inp ut fie ld is displayed. - Using the free text search: ¢ page 102, Free text search . Information that accompanies the program (such as artist, composer, track) is displayed . - Browsing through radio text entries: tu rn t he control knob to t he left or right. View : additional station information Stations from in the results dicates which on the station the favorites list @ are dis played list CD¢ fig. 126. The symbol @ instat ion list you switched to based se lection. Additional options • Select: IRADIO I button> right contro l button. The fo llowing options are avai lable depending on the frequency band: Fig. 127 Radio view: additional stat ion informat ion - Store as favorite : q page 147, Favorites . Requirement: you m ust be t un ed to a radio station. The Additional station information option is sw itched on ~ page 147. - Delete all entries: all ent ries are de leted in the Last stations view. CD Radio text availability - Tag this song for iTunes*: connect your Apple Radio text is available for the selected station . See¢ page 146 . -Sound settings : qpage 169. device with the Audi music interface* on your MMI. Select and confi rm Tag this song for iTunes. The track that is currently playing is stored on your App le device. Synchronize your Apple device with iTunes . The tagged track will display the next time you open yo ur iTunes media center. If there is no Apple device connected, the tagged track are stored temporarily in the MMI (maximum of SO tracks). Once you connect your Apple device to the Audi music interface, the tags are stored on the device. - Manual station tuning : the frequency bars are displayed. Select and confirm the desired frequency . - Seek: the radio tunes to the prev ious or next receivable station . - Scan: a ll stations are played for several seconds each. - Radio settings : ¢ page 147 . @ iTunes tagging The Tag this song for iTunes option is available for the set station. See¢ page 146, Additional options. @ FM HD Radio The stat ion is received through FM HD Radio. Displaying a station list: t urn the control knob. Or: press the IBACKI button . Radio menu Radio text Fig. 128 Radio menu example • Select: IRADIO I button > left control button > a frequency band (for example, FM) > a station. • Select: right control button > Radio text . 146 • Select: !RADIO Ibutton> left control button . Radio Setting the frequency band: select and conf irm the desired frequency band in the radio menu c::> fig . 128. Or: press the IRADIO I button repeated ly until the desired frequency band is set. The station list is disp layed. (D Change to media The Media menu is displayed. See c::> page 159, Playing media . down the control knob for several seconds. Select and confirm the location of the selected favor ite. - Deleting a favorite : select a favorite from the list> right control button> Delete favorite > Delete this favorite or Delete all favorites . Additional settings Radio settings @ Favorites The favorites list is displayed . See c::> page 147, Favorites. @ Last stations " Select: IRADIO Ibutton > rig ht cont rol button > Radio settings. The following sett ings can be selected , depending on the ba nd that is selected : The last stations listened to from all frequency bands are shown in the list . Select and confirm a station for imm ediate playback. You can switch HD Radio reception on or off. © SiriusXM* Station sorting (SiriusXM*) The SiriusXM" station list is displayed. You can set the station sorting for SiriusXM sta tion lists* by: FM/AM HD Radio* @ FM The FM station list is displayed. Additional frequency bands Depending on availability, you can select additional frequency bands in the select ion menu . Favorites You can store your favorite stations from every frequency band in the favorites list. " Sele ct: the IRADIO I button > Favorites. Storing favorites: press the IRADIO Ibutton. - Se lect : an entry from the list> right control button > Store as favorite. Or: ho ld down the control knob for several seconds. - Or: select : left control button > Presets > a free memory space> a frequency band> an entry from the list. Requirement: the favorites list must be displayed. - Listening to a favorite : select and confirm a favorite from the list . - Move favorite : select a favorite from the list> right control button > Move favorite . Or: hold - Channel number : the stations are sorted in ascending order according to their station number. - Channel name : the stat ions are listed in alphabetical order . - First category, then channel number: the stations are sorted by their category and then by their channel numbers. - First the category, then the channel name: the stations are sorted by their category and then by their channe l names. Category filter (SiriusXM*) The stat ions shown in the station list can be filte red by your personal preferences and by program type. The program categories that you can select depend on what is offered by your provider. Select the All categories option to deactivate all fi lter options and display all available stations in the satellite station list. Additional station information When the function is~ switched on and st at io n or favorites lists are open, the display will switch after approximately five seconds to the Additionpage 146. al station information view c::> 147 liJJ, Radio Depending on availability , informat ion about t he set station (such as station name, art ist, slide show, stat ion logo) is displayed in this view. Preferred picture view You can set your preferred pict ure view for t he Additional station information dis play ~ page 14 6 . - Station logo: t he sta t ion logo is d is played , d epend ing on ava ilability . - Cover art : t he a lbum cover or genre cover is d isplayed, depe ndi ng on availability. When the~ function is sw itche d on, the a lbu m cover or genre cover for the song being played is loa ded from the Gracenote on line database, depending on availab ility. Subscription status (SiriusXM)* This opt io n is available w he n your subscr ipti on is abo ut t o expire or has already expired. The expi ration date of your license is disp layed . Call to SiriusXM*: the contac t information for your sate llite rad io provi d er is d isplaye d. To ca ll you r sate llit e rad io provi d er using the MMI, press Call to SiriusXM*. Gracenote online database* Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the In t ernet . The Cover art option mus t be se lect ed ~ page 148, Preferred picture view. Troubleshooting Problem Solution A sta t ion with poo r reception is no lo nger displ ayed in t he station list on ce you switc h to a diff e ren t sta t ion. Store the stat ion as a favo rite in advance. Access t he favorite t hroug h t he fa vorites list 9 page 147. 148 Media Media Introduction There are various media drives and connections avai lable in the MMI. You can play, for example, audio/video files from the Jukebox* or connect your mobile device to the Audi mus ic interface* and operate it through the MMI. Notes General information Media and format restrictions: the MMI (including the SD card reader and the USB storage device connection*) was tested with a variety of products and media on the market. However, there may be cases where individual devices or media and audio/video* files may not be recognized, may play only w ith restrictions or may not play at all. However, in some cases, the additional information may not be displayed. Restricted functionality : reset the Media settings t o the factory defau lt settings if functionality is restr icted <>page 166. Reset the Jukebox* to the factory default sett ings if functiona lity is rest ricted <>page 166. For information about the propert ies of supported media and file formats, refer to <>page 157. CD/DVD mode Digital Rights Management: please note that the audio/video* files are subject to copyright CD/ DVD and format restrictions : the functiona lity of individ ual storage media may be lim ited due to the va riety of blank CDs/DVDs available and the various capacities. Audio CDs or video DVDs with copy protection, CDs/DVDs that do not conform to the standard and multi session CDs may have limited playback or may not play at all. Audi recommends finaliz ing the recording process when creat ing mult isess ion CDs. Mult isess ion is not supported for DVDs. protection. UsingCDs/DVDs,the CD drive or the DVD drive: The media drives do not play fi les that are protected by ORM and that are ident ified with the symbol l'.D . to ensure correct, high-quality playback and to prevent damage to the dr ive or disc read ing errors, always store CDs/DVDs in a protective sleeve and do not expose them to direct sunlight. Do not use: Data security: never store important data on SD cards, the Jukebox*, CDs/DVDs or mobile devices . Audi AG is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media . Loading times : the more files/fo lders/play lists that are on a storage medium, the longer it will take to load the audio/video files* . Audi recommends using storage media that only contain audio/video files* . To decrease the t ime it takes to load audio/v ideo files*, create subfolders (for example, fo r the art ist or album). The loading time will also incr ease when im porting files. Additional information : when playing, aud io files are automatically displayed w ith any add itional information that is stored (such as the artist, track and album cover). If this info rmation is not available o n the sto rage med ium, the MMI will check the Grace note metadata database . - Damaged, dirty or scratched CDs/DVDs - Single CDs/DVDs (3 inch/8 cm diameter) - CD/DVDs that are not round - CDs/DVDs with labels - Protective rings - Clean ing CDs Thermal protection switch: CD/DVD playback may be temporari ly unavailable if outside temperatures are extremely hot or co ld. A thermal protect ion sw itch is insta lled t o protect the CD/ DVD and the laser. Laser devices: laser devices are divided into safety classes 1 to 4 in accordance with DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/VDE 0837. The optical readers that are insta lled conform to safety class 1. Lasers in this class are very weak and well sh ielded, so there is no danger if used correctly. 149 Media Media drives DVD drive Appli es to : vehicles wit h a DVD drive SD card reader Fig. 130 DVD drive Fig. 129 I nserting the SD card The SD card reader is located in the glove compartment @) c:>page 6, fig . 2 . - Inserting the SD card: the angled corner of the SD card must point toward the right front. The writing on the SD card faces up and the contact surface faces down . Slide the SD card into the card reader slot © until you feel the SD card click into place c:>fig . 129 . - Automatic playback: playback will start auto matically if the inserted SD card contains suppo rte d audio/v ideo files c:>page 15 7 . - Removing the SD card: press briefly on the SD card . The SO card reader is accessed and operated through the MMI @ c:>page 159, fig. 134. CDNote Only use one-piece SO cards. If adapter cards (SD cards with more than one piece) are used, the card could fall out of the adapter when driving because of vibrations . Ind ividual pieces could then become stuck in the drive and impair the functionality. @ Tips Always keep the SO card in a suitable case to protect it from dirt, dust part icles and other damage. 150 The DVD drive is located in the glove compartment @) c:>page 6, fig . 2 . - loading a CD/DVD: the CO/DVD is pulled in automatically. Slide the CO/DVD straight into the DVDslot @ with the label facing up c:>fig. 130. -Aut omatic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted CO/DVD contains supported aud io/video* files c:>page 15 7 . - Ejecting a CD/DVD : press the button @. The CD/DVD is pulled in again automatica lly if it is not removed from the DVD slot w ith in approx imately ten seconds after ejecting it. The DVD drive is accessed and operated through the MMI @ c:>page 159, fig.134 . CDNote - Never force a CD/DVD into the drive. The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically. - Do not insert CDs/DVDs with labels into the drive. Labe ls can come loose from the CO/ DVD and damage the drive. ¢j) Tips The CO/DVD playback is not ensured with audio fi les that have a high data rate. Media CD drive App lies to: vehicles wit h a CD drive Jukebox Applies to: vehicles w ith Jukebox Play your favorite music and video files from the Jukebox . The Jukebox memory capacity is approximately 10 CB. .,. Press the IMEDIA ! button. Press the left control button until the sources overv iew c>page 159 is displayed. Select and confirm Jukebox. Playing th e Jukebo x Fig. 131 CD dri ve Requirement: the Jukebox must contain aud io/ video files. The CD drive is located in the glove compartment @)c>page 6, fig. 2 . The Jukebox is accessed and operated through the MMI @ ¢ page 159, fig. 134 . - Loading a CD: the CD is pulled in automatically . Displaying Jukebox memor y capacity Slide the CD straight into the s lot @ w ith the label fac ing up c>fig. 131. - Autom atic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted CD conta ins supported audio files c>page 158, CD drive. - Ej ecting a CD: press the button @ . Th@CD is pulled in again automatically if it is not removed from the slot w it hin ten seconds of ejecting it . The CD d rive is accessed and operated thro ugh the MMI c>page 159 . (D Deleting track s from the Jukebox 1 l Requirement: the Jukebox m ust conta in aud io/ video files. - Delet ing an entry : select the ent ry from the Jukebox med ia center. Select : right control button > Delete from Jukebox > This entry or En· tir e list . Note - Neve r force a CD into the drive. The CD is pulled in automatically. - Do not inse rt CDs w ith labels into the drive. Labels can come loose from t he CD and damage the drive. (D Select the right control button > Jukebox memo ry capacity. Informa t ion abo ut the Jukebox memory capacity and the number of stored tracks is displayed. Tips CD playback ca nnot be guaranteed with audio files t hat have a hig h data rate. - The status of the delet ing process is shown in t he MMI. Jukebox playback stops dur ing the deletion process and starts again automatically once the de letion is complete . Adding to the Jukebox - Press the IMEDIA ! button. Press the left control button unti l the sources overv iew c>page 159 is displayed. Select one of t he following so urces t o copy to the Jukebox: SD card, CD-ROM, DVDROM*, USB storage device *. Requirement: the media center (for examp le, t racks, albums) m ust be open . - Selecting an ent ry : select an entry from the media center . Se lect : right contro l button > Copy to Jukebox> This entr y or Entire list . ..... N a: co ..... <J:) Lil ..... :=: l) Not in t he Now playing view. 151 Media Req uirement: the playlist must be open. See ¢ page 161. - Selecting a tra ck: select the track that is cur - re ntly playing . Select : rig ht control button > Copy to Jukebox > This t rack or Ent ire album Bluetooth audio player Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play music wirelessly from your Bluetooth-capable device (such as a cell phone) through the MMI. or This artist . Requirement: a video file must be play ing . - Se lect: right contro l but t on > Copy to Jukebox. The copy ing process begins . The status of the copying process is shown in the MMI. - Hiding th e importing process: select and confirm Continu e copying in background . Theimporting process is hidden . - Canceling th e importing process: select and confirm Cancel copying : Or: remove the so urce that is being impo rted . Files a lready cop ied remain. When importing, the audio files are automatically sorted into the med ia center categor ies based on the stored addit ional info rmation ¢ page 160. The copied video files a re stored in the media cente r under the Vid eos ca t egory. 0 Note Do not import aud io/video files when the engine is tu rned off because this will drain the veh icle battery. (D Tips - Tracks fro m aud io CDs cannot be impo rted to the Jukebox for legal reasons. - Files that have already been imported are a utomat ically recogn ized and cannot be copied to the Jukebox again. - It is not possib le to play audio/v ideo* files in the CD/DVD* drive while importi ng them. - The Jukebox does no t provide an export funct ion due to lega l reaso ns. - Files or tracks without stored add itiona l info rmation are listed as Unknown . Audi recomme nds adding additional information (such as 103 t ags) t o aud io files. - Reset t he Jukebox to the factory defau lt setti ngs when sell ing your vehicle ¢ page 166. 152 Requirement: the vehicle m ust be stationary and the Bluetooth function on your Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth aud io player ¢ page 168 in the MMI must both be sw itched on . - Connecting a Bluetooth device: press the !MEDIA ! button. Press the left control button until the sources overview is disp layed. Select and confirm Bluetooth audio player @ ¢ page 159, fig. 135 . - If necessary, select and confirm, Not connected > Connect Bluetooth audio player . The Blue tooth device search starts. Follow the instructions in the MMI. - Select and confirm the des ired Bluetooth de vice from the list . The MMI generates a PIN for t he connect ion. - Select and confirm Yes. - Enter the PINfor connectingon your Bluetooth dev ice. Or: if the PIN is already displayed on your Bluetoo t h device, confi rm it in the Bluetooth device and in the MMI. The time allowed for entering the PIN is lim ited to a pprox imately 30 seconds . The media is started and operated through t he mobile device or t he MMI, depending on the device be ing used. 0) Tips - Check fo r any con nection requests on you r Bluetooth device. - You only have to pair your device one t ime. Bluetooth devices that are already paired au t omatically connec t to the MMI when they are with in range. - Multiple Blue t ooth aud io players can be conne cted to the MMI, bu t on ly one mobile device can be active. - Bluetooth protocols AVRCP(1. 0/1.3/1. 4 ) and A2DP a re s upported. Media - Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth device. Audi recommends setting your mobile device to the maximum vo lume when us ing it as a Bluetooth audio player. - The supported media functions (such as shuffle) depend on the Bluetooth dev ice being used. - For more information on the supported devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact your author ized Audi dealer. Wi-Fi audio player Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi Using the Wi-Fi audio player media source on the MMI, you can connect and operate your Wi-Fi capable media player (such as a smartphone) to wirelessly play music from your media player library. The media player is connected to the MMI through the Wi-Fi hotspot. An UPnP Server opp or an integrated UPnPIDLNA server on your me dia player is required to access your media player library. The Audi MMI connect opp also offers access to Internet radio*. Requirement: the Wi-Fi function on your media player must be switched on. The Audi MMI connect app or an UPnP server app is installed on your media player or your media player has an integrated UPnP/DLNA server. - Connecting a media player: press the IMEDIA ! button. Press the left control button unti l the sources overview c::;, page 159 is d isplayed. Select and confirm Wi-F i audio player @ c::;, page 159, fig . 135. .... - If necessary, select and confirm W i- Fi turned off > Turn on W i-Fi to activate Wi-Fi in the MMI. Select Wi-Fi setting s, if necessary . Select the same settings on the wireless med ia player t hat are used for the Wi-Fi hotspot . - Start ing the Wi - Fi audio player: start the Audi MMI connect app or a UPnP serve r app, or set med ia pe rm iss ions on you r media p laye r. The first so ng in the media ce nte r on your media player will begin playing. - Operat ing the media player: the media player is operated throug h the MMI. - Start ing Online radio 1 >: press the left control button repeated ly until the Folders menu item appears. Se lect and confirm Folders > Online radio. Se lect and confirm a station from one of the folders shown. A - WARNING - As the driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to distract you from driv ing, as this cou ld increase the risk of an accident. - It is only safe to use laptops and similar mobile dev ices when the veh icle is stationary because, like a ll loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the veh icle in a crash and cause ser ious injuries. Sto re these types of devi ces securely while driving. - Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within ra nge of the airbags while dr iving . Also read and follow the warnings on c::;, page 192, Front airbags. CI) Note You are responsible for all precaut ions taken fo r da t a protection, anti-v irus protect io n and protection against loss of data on mobi le devices that are used to access the Internet through the Wi-F i hotspot . (I) Tips - The Wi-Fi aud io player only needs to be paired one time to the MMI using the Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the media player being used, a device that was already paired w ill connect automatically with the MMI WiFi hotspot when it is within range. - The W i-Fi connection is reconfigured when insert ing or removing the SIM card in the SIM card reader* . There may be a temporary interruption in audio playback, depending on the media player. - Also note the instructions in the chapter c::;,page 128, About Audi connect . N a: co .... .... <J:) Lil :=: l) Only available with t he Audi MMI connect ap p. 153 Media - Please note that a Wi-Fi connection does not automatically make it possible to use the Internet. For additional information, refer to ¢page 121. - To avoid interruptions during playback, deactivate the power saving function on the media player or connect it to a charger. - The loading times for the audio data depend on the media player used and the number of files that it contains. - A maximum of 2,000 entries per directory are displayed in the MMI. - Contact your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for additional information on the Wi-Fi audio player. Online media Applies to vehicles with Audi connect You can playback and operate different online media services using the MMI . .. Press: the IMEDIAi button. Press the left control button until the sources overview ¢ page 159, fig . 135 is displayed. Requirement: - The Audi MMI connect app must be installed and open on your mobile device. - You must be logged into your myAudi account in the Audi MMI connect app and you must have selected your vehicle. - The Wi-Fi function on the mobile device and on the MMI must be switched on. - A network connection in the MMI must be established ¢ page 127. - The Online media* source ® ¢ page 159, fig. 135 must be displayed in the MMI. - A supported on line media service must be available in your country. - You must have an account with a supported online media service. - Depending on the online media service, you must install and open an app on your mobile device . Starting online media: 154 Press: the IMEDIAi button. Press the left control button until the sources overview c:!;>page 159 is displayed. Select and confirm an online media service . Connect new device: Switch on the Wi-Fi function on your mobile device. Select in the connection manager ¢ page 167 MMI connect App> the desired mobile device. If the desired device is not displayed, select and confirm Connect new device in the connection manager. .&_WARNING - It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the vehicle is stationary because, like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving . - Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while driv- - ing. Alsoread and followthe warningson ¢page 192, Front airbags . (D Note Please note that there generally are additional costs when using an on line media service account, especially when it is used internationally . (D Tips - Mobile devices only need to be paired one time to the MMI using the Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the mobile device being used, a device that was already paired will connect automatically with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot when it is within range. - Depending on the Internet connection, a connection loss can occur during playback of online media services. - Online media usage depends on the service availability of the third party provider. - Audi AG simply makes the access to on line media services possible through the MMI .,. Media and does not t ak e any res ponsi bility for the contents of the online med ia services . - Also note the ins t ruc t ion s in the ch ap t er c:>page 128, About Audi connect . - Depend ing on th e mobile device being use d, inte rrupt ions in t he med ia playbac k can oc cur. To avoid interruptions when usin g a mobile device, do not lock the screen on your mobile device and keep the Audi MMI connect app in the foreground. - Contact yo ur a ut horized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility for additional informat ion about online media . Multimedia (D Note Hand le the USB adapter carefully . Do not allow it to be pinched . Audi music interface Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi music interface Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music interface to be able to operate it through the MMI and charge the battery. connections USB adapter for Audi music interface or USB charging port Depending on the vehicle equipment, you con connect your mobile devices (such as a smartphone or MP3 player) to the Audi music interface or a USB charging port using a special USB adapter. Fig. 13 3 Connecti ng mob ile devices The Aud i m us ic int erface is locate d in t he front storage compartmen t in t he ce nt er co nsole @ c:>page 6, fig. 2. - Connecting a mobile device using a USB adapter : connec t the applicab le USB adapter* @ c:>fig. 13 3 t o t he port o n the Audi m usic int erface @ and t hen co nne ct th e ad apt er t o the mob ile dev ice CD (s uch as an iPo d). - Charging a mobile device using a USB adapter : Fig. 13 2 Audi USB adapters CDUSB adapter for devices wit h a micro USB connection @ USB adapter for d evices wit h an Apple Light ning con nection @ USB ad apter for devi ces w it h an Apple Dock connec t or You can pur chase the USB adapter from an a uthor ized Audi dealer or at spec ialty stores. .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Use t he USB adapte r for the Audi music interface c:>page155- w hen yo u co nnec t a m ob ile dev ice t o the Audi m us ic interfa ce @ using th e applicable USB adapter* @ c:>fig. 133 , the batte ry will a uto matically charge . - Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi music interface : remove the USB adapter @ c:>fig. 133 from the Audi music interface. - Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple Dock connector* : remove the App le Dock co n- nector from the App le dev ice with the release tabs @ pressed in c:>page 155, fig. 132 . The media are started and operated through the mobile device or t he MMI, depending on t he device be ing used c:>page 159. Connecting two mobile devices: if two m obile devices (fo r example iPod an d smartphone) are 155 ..,. Media connected at the same time, then both devices can be used as playback sources. You can connect mobile devices using the analog AUX port . - Connecting a mobile device to the AUX input: connect the cable ® ¢ fig. 133 to the AUX input @ on the Audi music interface and then to the mobile device @ (such as an MP3 player or smartphone). - Disconnecting a mobil e device from th e AUX input : remove the cable ® ¢ fig. 133 from the Audi music inte rface. - Operat ion : select and confirm t he External audio player source @ ¢ page 159, fig. 135 . The med ia are started and ope rated through the mobile device @ ¢ fig. 133 . A WARNING Driving requires your complete and undivided attention . As the driver, you have complete respons ibility for safety in traffic . Never operate mobile devices while dr iving, because this increases the risk of an accident. (D Note - Remove the connector from the Audi m usic inte rface carefu lly so it is not damaged. - Use a USB ext ension cable to connect devices that have an integrated USB connector (such as a USB stick) to prevent damage to your USB device and the Audi music interface. - Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage mob ile devices and/or impair their performance. Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in extremely high or low temperatures. @ Tips - Do not use an additional adapter or USB extens ion cable to connect mob ile devices to 156 the Audi music interface that already have a cable or that must be connected with a USB adapter( ~ page 155). They may impair the functionality. - You can purchase the AUX connector cable from an authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores. - Functionality is not gua ranteed for mob ile devices that do not meet the USB 2.0 specification. - USB hubs are not supported. - Some iPod versions, such as the iPod shuffle, cannot be connected to the USB adapter for devices with Apple Dock connector *. Connect these devices using a AUX connector cable. - Video playback through the Aud i mus ic interface is only supported if the connected device is recognized as a USB storage device (for example a USB stick) . Apple devices and MTP devices (such as smartphones) are not recog nized as USB sto rage devices. - iPod/ iPhone/ iPad malfunctions also affect the operation of the M MI. Reset your i Pod/ iPhone/iPad if this happens. - For impo rtant info rmation on operating yo ur iPod/ iPhone/ iPad, refer to t he user guide for that device. Audi recommends updating the iPod/i Phone/i Pad software to the latest version . - For more inf ormat ion about the Audi music interface and suppo rted devices, check the Audi database for mobi le devices at www.aud iusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Media Supported media and file formats Overview The following audio/video files are supported by the DVD drive, Jukebox, SO card reader and the connection for USBstorage devices. Video file s• Audio files Suppo rte d media SD/S DHC/SDXC/ MM C memory cards: with a capacity up to 128 GB DVD drive : audio CDs (up to 80 min .) with CD text (artist, album, song)*, CD-ROMs with a capacity up to 700 MB; DVD±R/RW; DVD video; DVD audio w ith audio t racks that are compat ible with a DVD video player Audi mu sic interface : mob ile devices ~page 155 such as iPods and MTP players, USB storage devices in "USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" that conform to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-Play capable), externa l USBflash drives and hard drives Memory cards: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS USB storage devices: FAT, FAT32, NTFS USB storage device partitions : 2 per USB connect ion File system CD/ DVD file system s: 150 9660, Joliet, UDF Metad at a Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNGwith max. 800x800 px. The album cover from the med ium or from Gracenote is displayed, depending on availabili ty. Format MPEG-1/- Windows Media 2 Layer-3 Audio 9 and 10 MPEG-2/- FLAC 4 MPEG-1/- ISOMPEG4; 2 DivX4 and 5; Xvid File exten- .mp3 .m4a; .m4b; .aac .mpg; .mpeg sion Playlists Characte rist ics Number of file s .wma .flac .avi ISOWindows MPEG4 H. Media 264 Video 9 (MPEG4 AVC) .mp4; .m4v; .mov .wmv; .asf .M3U; .PLS; .W PL; .M3U8; .ASX up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz 48 kHz sampling frequencies sampling frequency up to maximum 2,000 kbit/s and 720x576 px. at maximum 25fps DVD drive* : max. 1,000 files per medium Jukebox*: approximately 10 GB memory capacity; max. 3,000 fi les can be imported USB sto rage devices and memo ry cards: max. 10000 files per med ium; max. 1000 files per playlist/directory - The media drives do not support the W indows Media Audio 9 Voice format. - For compressing MP3 files, Audi recommends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The display showing the remaining play t ime may differ for audio files with var iable bit rate. - Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag information) display differently depend ing on the system language and cannot always be guaranteed . 157 Media - The manufactu rer of the storage device can provide information about its "USB Device Subclass" . - Some MTP player functions are not supported, such as rating music tracks and video playback. CD drive Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive The following audio file properties are supported by the CDdrive: Audio files Suppo rted me dia Audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text (artist, alb um, track)*, CO-ROMs with a capacity of up to 700 MB File sys tem CD file syst em: 1509660, Joliet, UDF Metadat a Album cover: GIF, JPG,PNGwith max . 800x800 px. The album cover from the medium may be disp layed, depending on availability. Fo rmat MPEG-1/-2 Layer-3 Windows Media Au- MPEG-2/-4 dio 9 and 10 FLAC File exte ns ion .mp3 .wma .flac Playlist s Charact eristics Number of file s (D .m4a; .m4b; .aac .M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequenc ies Maximum 1,000 files per medium Tips - For compressing MP3 files, Audi recommends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The display showing the remaining play t ime may differ for audio files with variable bit rate . - Special characters (such as those in 103 tag informat ion) disp lay different ly depending on the system language and cannot always be guaranteed. 158 48 kHz sampling frequency Media Playing media - Selecting a source: se lect and confirm the desired source . Or: press the !MEDIA ! button re- Accessing media You can start and operate various media th rough the MMI control panel. peatedly until the des ired source is selected. - Change to radio: the Radio menu opens c::> page 145 . - Playing audio/ video files: select a so urce in the Media menu > Category (such as artists > album> track). - Moving one level up in the folder structure : press the !BACKIbutton. Or: se lect and confirm Folder up. - Selecting the previous or next track/ chapter 1\ Fig. 134 Possible sour ces in the Media menu move the On/Off knob on the MMI contro l panel to the left l<l<lor right t»l. - Rewinding/fast forwarding audio/ video files : move the On/Off knob on the MMI contro l panel to the left l<l<lor right t»l until the desired playback posit ion is reached. - Pausing or resuming playback: press the On/ Off knob briefly . (D Fig. 13 5 Possible sources in t he Media menu Requ irement: a media sou rce must contain audio/video* fi les c::>page 150. ~ Press t he IMEDIA i button. Press the left control bu tton until the so urces ove rview is disp layed. Depending on the vehicle eq uipme nt, the fo llowing sources may be disp layed in the Media menu: Tips - You can scroll thro ugh long lists of folders or t racks q uickly by turning the contro l knob quickly. The scro lling speed depends on the number of folders or tracks. - The video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. Only the sound from the video plays while d riving . @ Jukebox* c::> page 151 @ DVD drive* / CD drive* ¢ page 150 I c::> page 151 @ SD card reader ¢ page 150 @ Audi music interface * / External audio player c::> page 155 such as iPod, USB st ick @ Bluetooth audio player* c:>page 152 (i) Wi-Fi audio player* ¢ .... @ Online media * ¢ page page 153 154 N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 1l Depending on t he DVD, t his may not be possib le dur ing playback. 159 Medi a Media center Various categories for selecting audio/video* files ore available in the media center . @ Album s All avai lab le albums are displayed . Select and conf irm an a lbum and then a t rack. ® Genres All available genres are displayed . Select and confi rm a gen re (such as Pop) , an a rt ist, an album and t hen a song. @ Tracks All availab le songs are displayed . Select and confirm a track . Fig. 136 Example : USB st ick categories 0 Folder s The folder structure or track/chapter list is d isplayed. Se lect a folder , if necessary. Se lect and conf irm a track . @ Playlists Fig. 137 Example: USB st ick cat egories ~ Press : the IMEDIAi button . Press the left con - trol button until the sources overview is displayed . Se lect and confirm the desired source. (D Active source The active source is highlighted . Depe nd ing on the connected device or Online media service *, the active source symbo l (!) may change. As an examp le, a USB stick is shown ~ fig . 136 connected to the Audi music interface*. Depending on the active so urce, you can select audio/video* files from the following categories and add them to the playlist: All availab le playlists from the source and the smart playlists are displayed . Se lect and confirm a playlist and then a track . Sma rt playli sts: - Last played tracks : the last track played in the selected source is displayed. - Most played t racks: the most played tracks in the s elected source are disp layed. - S star s to 1 star : tracks from the selected source are disp layed according to their rating. - Unrated : all files from the selected source without rating information (for example, in the ID3 tag) are displayed. @ Videos* All availab le video files are displayed . Select and confirm a video file . @ Favorites The Favorites category appea rs if at least one entry is stored in the favor ites list. See ~ page 161, Favorites. @ Artists All available artists are d isplayed . Select and confirm an artist, an a lbum and then a track . 160 @ Tips - On ly the categories suppo rt ed by the medium are available . For example, CD/DVDROM tracks cannot be selected with catego ries such as Art ists, Albums or Genres. With an iPod (source: Audi music interface ~ page 155), the Podcasts, Audio books and Composers categories are also availa ble . Media - The video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. Only the sound from the video plays while driving . - When synchronizing a portable device with "Cloud" services, playlists may display incorrectly in the MMI. Use the media center in the device. Free text search You con search in the active source by tracks and video files*, for example Playlist Fig. 139 Playlist The track, artist, album and album cover, if applicable, will appear in the playlist . Options See ¢ page 162, Additional settings. Favorites You con store up to 50 entries for each source in the favorites list. Fig. 138 Inpu t field and results list for free text search Opening free text search Requirement: the playlist or media center must be open . - Select the desired entry from the playlist or media center . - Select: right control button > Store as favorite . Or: hold down the control knob for several seconds . .,.Keep turning the control knob to the left until the free text search input field (!) appears. Or: push the control knob up. When you store a track as a favorite, the associated album will appear in the favorites list as an entry . Using the free text search: ¢ page 102, Free text Requirement: at least one entry must be stored in the favorites list. You can open the free text search depending on the selected source. Requirement : the playlist ¢pa ge 161 or media center ¢ page 160 must be displayed . search . Entries that contain the entered search term are listed in the results list ® ~ fig. 138. You can search for artists @ ¢ fig. 138, albums @ or tracks @ , genres and videos. Q .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Tips - It will then search through the files in the active source. - If the free text search was opened in the Folders 0 category ¢ poge 160, fig. 13 7 or in the Composers, Podcasts and Audio books category, then it will only search through files in that folder . Displaying the favorites list: press the IMEDIAi button. Press the left control button until the sources overview¢ page 159 is displayed. Select the source that contains the categories ¢ page 160 (for example, SD card) . Select the Favorites category. Requirement: the favorites list must be displayed . - Listening to a favorite: select and confirm an entry from the favorites list . ..,. 161 Media - Move favorite : se lect the des ired entry from the favorites list. Select the right control button > Move favorite. Select and confirm the desired presets locat ion. - Deleting a favorite : se lect the desired entry from the favorites list. Select the right contro l button > Delete favorite > Delete this favorite or Delete all favorit es. Additional settings Options menu Context -specific functions and settings are ava ilab le depending on the se lected source. .,. Press the right contro l bu tton. Jukebox m emory capacity Info rm ation on the Jukebox memo ry capac ity and the number of stored tracks in the Jukebox is dis played . Change playing position Turn the cont rol knob to the left or to the right. Or: move you r finger ac ross t he MMI touch contro l pad from left to right . Shuffle 1> With the function switched on~' all files in the playlist are played and shown in random order . Repeat track 1> Sound settings When the funct ion is switched on~' track repeats. See <=) page 169 . Back to "Now play ing" Input level The options menu is closed. The track be ing currently played appears in the playlist . Requirement: a mobi le device must be connected to the AUXconnection cable* or to a USB adapter*. The volume of the mobile device is adapted to the MMI. Audi recommends adjusting the volume on the mobile device to 70% of the max imum volume output. Bluetooth settings See C) page 168. the current Play similar music* The t rack being played is qui ckly ana lyzed (such as a rt ists, genres, mood, beat) and a smart play list with similar tracks is shown. Play more .. . A smart playl ist is shown based on the t rack being played . You can select between a playlist with more t racks by this arti st , from thi s album or of thi s genre. Connection manager See ¢ page 167 . Add ition al tr ack inform ation When the function is switched on ~ and a playlist is open, various information about the current track (such as artist , album, album cover*) as well as the elapsed playing time and the re maining p laying time a re displayed . Gracenote online dat abase* Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet . Depend ing on avai lab ility, var ious information will load about the track being currently played whe n this function is switched on~Copy to jukebo x See ¢ page 151, Adding to the Jukebox. Favorites See ¢ page 161. l) The fun ction auto ma tically switches off whe n the source is chan ged . 162 Media Additional opt ions Picture format Requirement: the veh icle must be stationary and a video file* or a DVD* must be playing. Audi recommend s t he Automatic setting fo r the pictu re format . You can set the picture format depending on the act ive file or source (for exam ple Video fi le*, DVD*). Parental control* Playback of video DVDs can be rest ricted us ing pa rental contro l. Enter the password for parental control. Password set at the factory: 12 34 . You have the follow ing options: - Protection level: select and conf irm the protect ion level (for example, Level 5). Eight different protect ion levels can be set for parental control. If you set the parental control leve l at Level 5, a ll DVDs from level 1-5 can be played. Video DVDs with a higher leve l wi ll not play . Se lect No restriction to remove all of t he rest rict ions. - Change password: edit the cur re nt password. Picture for- Information mat autom atic The MMI detects the pict ur e for mat of the so urce and displays the image in the opt imum rat io. Black bars may appear on the sides of the d isplay, depending on the sou rce fo rmat and the Infotai nme nt system display that is insta lled. Zoom The image is en larged to fill the entire Infotainment system display . Switc h the function off if t he image is dis t ort ed . Cinemascope Use this setting for films in the cinema format 21:9. Black ba rs are shown in the upper and lower edges of the Infotainment system display . Original The image is d isp layed in the ratio of the so urce format . Select this opt ion if the image is distorted or a section of t he image is cut off when Auto is selected. 4 :3 The image is fixed in the 4 :3 pieture format . Black bars are shown on the sides of the Infotainment system display. 16:9 The image is f ixed in the 16:9 piet ur e format. Black ba rs are shown in the upper and lower edges of t he Infotainment system display. Switch to full screen The video image is displayed. Turn the control knob to display the playlist . Or: press the I BACKI button . Replay video When this function is sw itched on~. video w ill replay. the current Show DVD menu The DVD main menu is opened in the Info t ain ment system disp lay . To select a menu item, move your f inger on t he MMI touch control pad and press the control knob. Aud io track 1l You ca n manu al ly set t he audio trac k (language and audio format). The language and aud io for mat options depend on the video DVD. Subtitles 1l You can set subt it les for playback manu all y. The lang uages available depend on t he DVD. l) (D Tips - Not all video DVDs have parenta l contro l. Depending o n t he DVD, t his may not be possible dur ing playback . 163 Media - The security levels for the Parental control are based on the US standards from the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA). Note that the age levels for video DVDsin European countries may differ. - Password entry for Parental control will be locked for approximately one minute if you enter the incorrect password three t imes in a row. The password can on ly be reset by an authorized Audi dealer. Troubleshooting Problem Solution Audi music interface * / Bluetooth audio player*: mob ile device is Refer to the information on the Audi music interface * c::,;,page155/ Blue-tooth audio player* c::,;,page152 . You can learn about supported mobi le devices in the Audi database for mobile devices at www.audisua.com/bluetooth. not supported. Audi music interface* : the volume is too high/too low when starting playback through the AUXinput. Audi music interface* : the portable device is not recognized as a source. Audi music interface* : malfu nc- tions during audio playback through an iPod/iPhone/iPad. Adjust the volume of the mobile device to approximate ly 70% of the maximum output c>page 162, Input level. For many cell phones or mobile devices, playback is not possible when the battery level is too low (less than 5% of its capacity). The mobile device will on ly be recogn ized as a source in the MMI after connecting if the battery charge is sufficient. The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch t his function off c>page 168 when you are not using the Bluetooth audio player . AUX input: there is stat ic when When connecting and disconnecting, the External audio player connecting and disconnecting the source is already selected. Before connecting or disconnecting the AUXconnection cable. mobile device, eithe r mute the device (see q page 169) or switch to a different audio source (for example c>page 145, Accessing the radio). Bluetooth audio player* /W i-Fi audio player*: aud io playback in- Only one interface should be act ively used at a time to ensure problem-free playback . terference. Wi -Fi audio player* : audio playback interference . Jukebox*: tracks on the imported playlist are grayed out. Jukebox*: imported tracks cannot be played or found. 164 Audio playback interference can occur on some cell phones if the Internet connect ilon in the vehicle was not established through the SIM card reader* on the MMIcontrol panel and the mobile data option on the cell phone is switched on. Deactivate the mobile data option on your cell phone. When importing p laylists, all of the files themselves must be imported. If you cannot find imported tracks in the media center, they may not be suppo rt ed . Only copy supported files q page 15 7 to the Jukebox. Media Problem Solution Wi -Fi audio player*: multiple devices are connected to the Wi-Fi hotspot. A media player (such as a smartphone) appears as the source and cannot be changed. Close the Audi MMI connect app on the connected devices (for example, smartphones) that are not be ing used as the Wi-Fi audio player*. Likewise, close the UPnP server apps or the media perm issions on the integrated UPnP/DLNA server. Connect the desired dev ice as a Wi-Fi audio player* c::;,page153 . Wi-Fi audio player* : audio play back interference. Audio playback interference can occur on some cell phones if the Internet connect ion in the vehicle was not established through the SIM card reader* on the MMI control panel and the mob ile data option on the cell phone is switched on. Deactivate the mobile data option on your cell phone. Online media * : connection failed To establish a connection to the MMI, the MMI connection switch must be switched on in the Audi MMI connect status screen . between the MMI and the Audi MMI connect app. Wi -Fi audio player* / Online media*: a udio playback interference. Interfe rence can occur du ring audio playback if the Hot spot and client Wi-Fi mode sett ing c::;,page 126 was selected and yo ur personal hotspot is no t ava ilable. Fo r playbac k without interfere nce, Aud i recommends the Hot spot setting for Wi-Fi mode . Bluetooth audio player*: interference with track d isplay and audio playback. Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio player if a music player app from a th ird party prov ider is open. Aud i recommends using the integ rated media playe r on your Bluetooth dev ice (such as a smartphone). 165 System settings System settings Setting time the date Language and You con set the clock time manually or using the The display language as we ll as the language for Voice guidance* and the voice recogn ition system* can be changed. CPS. The number of languages available depends on the market. "' Select: IMENU Ibutton> Settings> left control button > MMI settings > Date & time . Units of measurement Automatic setting When this function is switched on~, and date are automatically adjusted. the time Time The Time can be set manually. The Automatic setting must be switched off to do this. The following units can be selected: - Speed (mph or km/h) - Distance (miles or kilometers) - Temperature (°For °C) - Fuel consumption (l/l00km, (UK) or km/l) mpg (US), mpg - Volume (liters, ga llons) Operating tips Date The Date can be set manually. The Automatic setting must be sw itched off to do this. Time zone When selecting the appropriate time zone, a sampling of countries in this zone will be listed . When the function is switched on~, your MMI shows you operating tips for input . The frequency of how often it d isplays decreases with time . You can switch off the operating tips at any time. Voice recognition* Automatic time zone* Command display: the display of possible commands during voice input can be switched on or off. When the automatic time zone function is switched on, the time will automatically adjust to the corresponding time zone. Short dialog: prompts in a shorter format can be switched on or off. Time format If you select 24h , the clock will display, for example, 13:00. If you se lect AM/PM, the clock will display, for examp le, 1:00 PM. Date format If you select DD.MM.YYYY, the date will disp lay, for example, 31.12.2015. If you select MM/DD/ YYYY, the date will display, for example, 12/31/2015. If you select YYYY-MM-DD, the date display will display, for example, 2015-12-31. Speech dialog system volume: you can adjust the volume of the announcements by turning the control knob. Individual speech training (only when the vehicle is stationary): you can adapt the voice recognition system to your voice or pronunciation in order to imp rove the system's ability to recognize your speech. Individual training is comprised of 20 speech entries that consist of commands and sequences of numbers. You can delete the programmed voice train ing with the Reset individual speech training function. Factory default settings MMI settings "' Se lect: IMENU Ibutton >S ettings > left contro l button > MMI settings. 166 The following functions can be reset to the factory default settings: - Sound settings .,,. System settings are a lready connected . Or: insert a m ini SIM card into the SIM ca rd rea d er ¢ page 121. - Radio - Media setting s -Jukebox* - Directory * MMI connect app - Telephone * Applies to vehicles with Audi connect - Bluetooth and Wi-Fi * - Navigation sett ings* - Navigation and online memo ry* Requirement: the Audi MMI connect app must be insta lled and ope n on your mobile device . - Voice recognition * - Connect new device: sea rch fo r and connect a - Message settings * mob ile dev ice (such as a smartphone). - List of devices already connected : se lect your mobi le device from the list of all the dev ices that a re al ready connected. -Apps * - Operating t ips - Aud i connect* You can se lect the desi red functions individu a lly or all at once with the Select all entries option . Select and confi rm Restore factory settings . Music Applies to vehicles with Bluetoo th or Wi-Fi audio player Audio player* (D Tips Make sure t ha t not only the se tt ings were de leted but also the sto red data, if a pplicable. Connection manager Introduction Requirement: the Bluetooth function and visibility on the MMI ¢page 168 and cell phone m ust be switched on. - Connect new device: press the cont rol knob. Select Bluetooth audio player . Search for an d connect a new device. - List of devices already connected : se lect a The connection manager gives you an overview of your connected devices and their network sta tus . .,.Se lect : IMENU Ibutton> Settings > left contro l button > MMI settings > Connection manager . If a mobile d evice was a lready connected, the name of the dev ice and the connection mode will d isp lay under the cor respond ing menu item. Using the telephone - Connect new device: search for and connect a Bluetooth device from the list of a ll the devices that a re already connected. Wi-Fi audio player* Requirement: the Wi-Fi hotspo t on the MMI ¢ page 12 6 an d the Wi-Fi on your cell phone must be sw itche d on. - Connect new device: press the cont rol knob. Searc h for a nd connec t a Wi-Fi cap abl e dev ice. - Disconnect Wi-Fi audio player : deactiv ate the Wi- Fi on you r Wi-Fi ca pa ble d evice . The device w ill be au t oma t ically removed from the list. cell phone . Directory Data connection Applies to vehicles with Audi connect - Connect new device: search for and connec t a mobile device (s uch as a sm artp ho ne). - List of devices already connected : sele ct your cell phone from t he list of all the devices th at Requirement: cell phones m ust not be connected to the MMI thro ugh the Bluetooth remote SIM access profile or through the Handsfree profile. - Connect new device: searc h fo r and connect a new cell phone. Or: insert a mini SIM car d into the SIM card reader ¢ page 121. II- 167 System settings - List of devices already connected : select your cell phone from the list of all the cell phones that are already connected . Wi-Fi settings* See¢ page 126, Wi-Fi Hotspot. SIM PIN settings* Additional options Depending on the selected function, you can use the right control button to access the available addit ional options in the connect ion manager . Bluetooth settings - Bluetooth : when the function is switched on - - - - ~, the Bluetooth symbol appears in the Infota inment system display. The MMIvisibility for Bluetooth devices can be turned on or off using the Visible / Invisible sett ings . However, it is still possible to establish a Bluetooth connection with pa ired devices when the visibility is switched off. Bluetooth should be switched to Invisible when the pairing process is complete so that the MMI is not visible to othe rs. Bluetooth can be switched off . Then a Bluetooth connection is not possible. Delete Bluetooth device : the selected cell phone/mobile device is disconnected from the MMI. Show Bluetooth profiles: you can individually Connect or Disconnect the Handsfree , Car phone and Directory/contacts profiles. Bluetooth audio player : switch this function on ~ to select the Bluetooth audio player as a source in the Media menu . Bluetooth name : the MMIBluetooth name (for example ,,AUDIMMI2613") is displayed and can be changed . - Automatic PIN entry : when this function is switched on~, the SIM PIN is automat ically saved in the MMIafter it is entered for the first time. The SIM PIN for four different SIM cards can be saved in the MMI.With the function switched off, the currently stored SIM PIN is de leted from the MMI.When the automatic PIN entry is switched on, there are no SIM PIN prompts. - Disable PIN query : when switched on, there are no SIM PIN queries. The automatic PIN entry is not used in this case. - Change PIN: you can change the PIN on your SIM card. First enter the current SIM PIN. The SIM PIN can only contain digits 0-9. The new SIM PIN must be entered twice for security and then it will be saved to the SIM card. Network settings* - Login: you can chose an automatic login to your cell phone service provider's network, or you can choose a manual login from the list of available networks. - Network selection : available networks in the present location can be selected under network select ion. This function is only available for the manual login setting . (D Tips Some SIM cards do not allow the SIM PIN queries to be switched off. Online settings* - Data connection settings : see ¢ page 12 7, Configuring the data connection - Data usage counter: the amount of data packets that are sent and received through the MMI is disp layed. You can reset the data usage information to zero using the Reset data counter option. - Network status: the mobile network provider for data service as well as the network status are displayed. 168 System update .,.Select: ! MENUI button> Settings > left control button > System maintenance . - System update : slide the storage device with the update data into the appropriate drive ¢ page 150. Select and confirm the drive> Start update . The durat ion of the process depends on the size of the update. .,. S ys tem - Reset driver inst allat ion: the se lected media driver package is reset to the settings at the t ime of delivery. - Version information : information on the MMI software version and the navigat ion database * software version is displayed. The Softwa re informat ion function a lso provides information on the software contained in the MMI and the licens ing agreement . Sound settings The sound distribution and volume of the MMI can be adjusted individually. The settings depend on vehicle equipment. Fig. 14 0 Adjusting the balance/fader ~ Select : IMENU Ibutton > Sound > left contro l button > Entertainm ent . settings Speed -depend ent volume You can adjust how much t he volume changes to compensa t e for noise inside the vehicle by t urning the control knob . Volume settings Adjusting the volume The volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system) can be adjusted directly while the sound is playing using the On/Off knob. - Increasing or decreasing the volume : turn the On/Off knob @ ¢ page 95, fig. 90 to the right or left . - Mut ing or pausing: press the On/Off knob briefly . Or : turn the On/Off knob to the left until the mute symbol appears. An active audio/ video so urce is stopped. - Unmuting or resuming : press the On/Off knob briefly . Or : turn the On/Off knob t o t he right. 0) Tips Volumes that a re too high or too low are automatically adjus ted to a set level when the MMI is switched on. Treble / Bass You can adjust the Treble and Bass settings by turn ing the control knob . The changed setti ngs only apply for the audio source that is act ive at the time. This allows you to adj ust the sound sett ings for each audio sou rce separately. Telephone Balance / Fader (sound focus) Mute telephone: messages and ringtones are set - Adjusting th e sound distribution to t he left or right : press the control knob. Turn the control knob to the left or right to the desired posi t ion . - Adj usting th e sound distribution to th e front or rear: press the control knob again. Turn the contro l knob to the left or right to t he desired pos itio n. .... N a: - Adjusting the sound dist ribution ratio with th e MMI tou ch: move your finger in the des ired direction on the MMI touch control pad. Adjusting the system volume ~ Select: IMEN u I button > Sound > left cont rol but t on . to mute. Ringtone : ¢ page 119, Ringtone and volume settings . Ringtone volume : you can adjust the volume of the selected ringtone by turning the cont rol knob. Message volume : the volume of the notification for an incoming text message can be adjusted by turning the control knob. IJI- CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 169 System settings Microphone sensitivity: t he volume of a phone call can be adjusted during the phone call using the contro l knob. Restarting (reset) the MMI Navigation Voice guidance: Q page 138, Voice guidance . Voice guidance during phone call: 9 page 138, Voice guidance. Voice guidance volume: the voice guidance volume can be adjusted during act ive route guidance by turning the control knob. Entertainment fader : the volume of audio playback can be temporarily lowered when the parking system or voice guidance is active. Fig. 141 Butt on combinat ion to restar t the system .. Briefly press the control knob and both rocker switches at the same time Q fig. 141 . Voice recognition Short dialog : prompts in a shorter format can be switched on or off. Speech dialog system volume: you can adjust the volume of the announcements by turning the control knob. Parking aid* You can adjust the signal tone volume by turning the control knob. - Adjusting the Front volume : select and confirm High, Medium or Low. - Adjusting the Rear volume : select and confirm High, Medium or Low. MMI touch The volume of the MMItouch voice prompts can be adjusted by turning the control knob. Audi Heartbeat You can adjust the Audi Heartbeat volume by turning the control knob. 170 Notes on software Licenses You can find information about the software conta ined in the MMI and the license agreement in your MMI.Select: IM E NU ! button >Se ttings > left contro l butto n > System maintenance > Version information . Or: on the Inte rnet at www.audi.com/softwareinfo . Safe Safe driving d r iv ing The following is a list of just a few of the sa fety features in yo ur Audi : Basics Safe driving habits Please remember - safety first! - sophisti cated safety be lts fo r dr ive r and all passenger seat ing pos itions, - safety belt pret ensioners, - safety belt force lim ite rs fo r the front seats, - front airbags, - knee airbags fo r the front seats* - side airbags in the front seats, This chapter contains important information, tips, instructions and warnings that you need to read and observe for your own safety, the safety of your passengers and others . We have summarized here what you need to know about safety be lts, airbags, child restraints as well as child safety. Your safety is for us priority number 1. Always observe the info rmation and warn ings in this section - for you r own safety as well as t hat of your passengers. - side curtain airbags with eject ion mit igation features, - specia l LATCH anchorages for child restraints, The information in this sect ion app lies to all model ve rsions of your vehicle. Some of the fea tures descr ibed in t his sec t ions may be standa rd equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others . If you are not sure, ask your authorized Audi dealer. Safety is everybody's res ponsibil ity! A WARNING - - Always make sure that you follow the instruct ions and heed the WARNINGS in th is Manual. It is in your interest and in the interest of your passengers . - Always keep the complete Owner's Literature in your Audi when you lend or sell your vehicle so that this important information will always be available to the d river and passenge rs. - Always keep the Owne r's literature handy so that you can find it easily if you have quest ions. Safety equipment The safety features are part of the occupant restraint system and work together to help reduce the risk of injury in a wide variety of accident situations. Your safety and the safety of yo ur passenge rs should not be left to chan ce. Advances in technology have made a var iety of features ava ilab le t o he lp reduce the risk of injury in an accident. - adju stab le steer ing colum n. These ind ividual safety features, can work together as a system to he lp protect you and your passengers in a w ide range of accidents. These fea t ures canno t wo rk as a system if they a re not always correc t ly adjusted and cor rect ly used. Important things to do before driving Safety is everybody'sjob! Vehicleand occupant safety always depends on the informed and careful driver. For your safety and the safety of your passen gers, before driving always : .. Make sure that a ll lights and s ignals are operating correct ly. .. Make sure that the tire pressure is correct . .. Make sure that all w indows are clean and afford good visibility to the outs ide . .,. Sec ure all luggage and othe r items ca refully ¢ page 176, ¢ page 48. .,. Make sure that not hing can interfere with the pedals . .. Adju st front seat and mirrors correctly for your he ight. .. Make sure to use the rig ht child restra int co rrectly to protect children ¢ page 212, Child safety . .. Sit properly in yo ur seat and make sure t hat your passengers do the same ¢ page 44, Seats and storage. .,. 171 Sa f e dri v ing • Fasten your safety be lt and wear it properly . Also instruct your passengers to fasten their safety be lts properly ¢ pag e 180. Correct seating passenger positions Proper seating position for the driver What impairs driving safety? Safe driving is directly related to the condition of the vehicle, the driver as well as the driver's ability to concentrate on the road without being distracted . The proper driver seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving. The driver is responsible for the safety of the vehicle and all of its occupants. If your ability to drive is impaired, safety risks for everybody in the veh icle increase and you also become a hazard to everyone else on the road ¢ .&, .Therefore : • Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers or by using a cellular telephone . • NEVERdrive when your driving ability is impaired (by medications, alcohol, drugs, etc.) . • Observe all traff ic laws, rules of the road and speed limits and plain common sense . • ALWAYSadj ust you r speed to road, traffic and weathe r cond itions. • Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive for more than two ho urs at a stretch . • Do NOT drive when you are tired, under pressure or when you are stressed . A WARNING Impaired dr iving safety increases the risk of ser ious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used . . Fig. 142 Correct seat ing pos ition For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an acc ident, we recommend that you adjust the driver's seat to the following pos ition: • Adjust the driver's seat so that you can easily push the pedals all the way to the floor while keeping your knee(s) slightly bent ¢ .&, . • Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position so that your back comes in full contact with it when you dr ive. • Adj ust the steering wheel so that there is a d istance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between the steering whee l and your breast bone ¢ fig. 142. If not possible, see your authorized Audi dealership about adaptive equipment. • Adjust the steering wheel so that the steering wheel and airbag cover points at your chest and not at your face. • Grasp the top of the steer ing wheel with your elbow(s) slightly bent. • Fasten and wear safety belts correctly ¢ page 184 . • Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you are in contro l of the vehicle at a ll times. For detailed information on how to adj ust the driver's seat, see ¢ page 44, Seats and storage. 172 ll> Safe A WARNING 1= Drivers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds . To help reduce the risk of serious persona l injury: - Always adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel so that there are at least 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the steering wheel. - Always adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel so that there a re at least 4 in (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. - Always hold the steer ing whee l on the outside of the steering wheel rim with your hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi tions to he lp reduce the risk of persona l injury if the driver's airbag inflates. - Never hold the steering whee l at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands at other pos itions inside the steering wheel rim or on the steering wheel hub. Hold ing the steering wheel the wrong way can cause serious injur ies to the hands, arms and head if the d river's airbag inflates - Pointing the steering wheel toward your face decreases the ability of the supplemental driver's a irbag to protect you in a collision. - Always sit in an upr ight position and never lean against or place any part of your body too close to the area where the airbags a re located. - Before dr iving, always adjust the front seats prope rly and make sure tha t a ll passengers are proper ly restrained. - Never adjust the seats while t he vehicle is moving. Your se at may move unexpe cte d ly and you could lose control of t he vehi cle . - Never drive wit h the backrest reclined or t ilted fa r back! The farther the backrests are t ilted back, the grea t er the risk of inju ry due to incorrect positioning of the safety belt and improper seating position. - Children mus t a lways ride in child seats <=:> page 212 . Special precautions apply d r iv ing when instal ling a child seat on the front passenger seat c::> page 188. - Proper seating position for the front passenger The proper front passenger seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving. For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the seat for the front passenger to the fo llowing pos ition: .. Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position and your back comes in full contact with it whenever the vehicle is moving. .. Keep both feet flat on the floor in front of the front passe nger seat . .. Fasten and wear safety belts correctly c::> page 184 . For detailed information on how to adjust the page 44 . front passenger's seat, see c::> .&, WARNING = Front seat pass enge rs who are unbe lted, o ut of position or too close to the airbag can be se riously injured or killed by t he airbag as it unfo lds . To help red uce the risk of serious personal injury: - Passengers mus t a lways s it in an upright position and never lean aga inst or place any pa rt of their body too close to the area where the airbags are located . - Passengers who are unbelted, out of posi tion o r too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye. - Always make sure that there are at least 10 in (25 cm) between the front passenger's breastbone and the instrument panel. - Always make sure that there are at least 4 in (10 cm) between the front passenger's knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. - Each passenger must always sit on a seat of their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belong ing to that seat. 173 ~ S a fe dri v ing - Before driving, always adjust the front passenger seat properly. - Always keep your feet on the floor in front of the seat. Never rest them on the seat, instrument panel, out of the window, etc. The airbag system and safety belt will not be able to protect you properly and can even increase the risk of injury in a cras h. - Never dr ive with the backrest reclined or t ilted far back! The farther the backrests are t ilted back, the grea t er the risk of inj ury due to incorrect posi t ioning of the safety belt and im proper se ating position. - Children must always ride in child seats ¢ page 212. Speci a l preca utions app ly when inst a lling a child seat on the front passenger seat ¢ page 188. Proper seating positions for passengers in rear seats Rear seat passengers must sit upright with both feet on the floor consistent with their physical size and be properly restrained whenever the vehicle is in use. To reduce the risk of injury caused by an incorrect seating position in the event of a sudden braking maneuver or an accident, your passengers on the rear bench seat must always observe the following: .,..Make s ure that the seatback is sec urely latched in the upright pos ition ¢ page 50 . .,..Keep both feet flat in the footwell in front of the rear seat . .,..Fasten and wear safety be lts properly ¢ page 184 . .,..Make s ure t hat children a re always properly restrained in a child restr aint t hat is approp riate for t heir size and age ¢ page 212. A - WARNING Passenge rs who are improper ly seated on t he rear seat can be seriously injured in a crash . - Each passenger m ust always sit on a seat of their own and prope rly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat . 174 - Safety belts only offer maximum protect ion when the seatback is securely latched in the upright pos ition and the safety belts are properly posit io ned on the body . By not sitting uprigh t , a rear seat passenger increases the risk of personal injury from imprope rly posi t ioned safety belts! · Examples of improper seating positions The occupant restraint system can only reduce the risk of injury if vehicle occupants are properly seated . Imprope r seating positions can cause ser ious injury or death . Safety be lts ca n only work when t hey a re prope rly positioned on the body. Imprope r seat ing positions red uce t he effec t iveness of safety be lt s and will even increase the risk of injury and death by moving the safety belt to critical areas of the body. Improper seating posi t ions a lso increase the ris k of se rious inju ry and death when an airbag dep loys and strikes an occ upant who is not in the proper seating posit ion. A dr iver is responsiblefor the safety of all vehicle occu· pants and espec ially for children . Therefore : .,..Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect seating position when the vehicle is being used ¢ .&._ . The following bulletins list on ly some samp le pos itions that will increase the risk of serious injury and death . Our hope is that these examples w ill make yo u more aware of seating positions that are dangerous . Therefore , whenever the vehicle is m oving: - neve r stand up in the vehicle never sta nd on the seats neve r kneel on t he seats neve r ride w it h the seatba ck reclined neve r lie down on the rea r seat neve r lean up against the instrument panel neve r s it on the edge of the seat neve r sit sideways neve r lean out the window neve r put your feet out t he window neve r put your feet on the instr ument panel Safe - never of the - never - never A rest your feet on the seat cush ion or back seat ride in the footwe ll ride in the ca rgo a rea WARNING Improper sea t ing posit ions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used . - Always make sure that a ll vehicle occupants stay in a proper seat ing position and are properly restrained whenever the vehicle is being used. Driver and passenger side footwell Important safety instructions A WARNING Always make sure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference . Objects between yourself and t he airbag can increase the risk of injury in an acc ident by inte rfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed int o you as the airbag deploys. - No persons (children) or anima ls sho uld ride in t he foo t we ll in front of the passenge r sea t. If the airbag dep loys, th is can resul t in serious o r fatal inj uries. - No objec t s of any kind sho uld be car ried in the footwe ll area in front of the driver 's or passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can hampe r or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrown through the vehicle if the a irbag deploys and injure you or your passenge rs. Pedal d r iv ing area Pedals The pedals must always be free to move and must never be interfered with by a floor mat or any other object. Make sure that all pedals move free ly without interference and that nothing prevents them from returning to their or ig inal positions . Only use f loor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be secured with floor mat fasteners . If a brake circuit fails, increased brake pedal travel is req uired to bring the vehicle to a fu ll stop. A WARNING -Pedals that cannot move freely can cause lossof vehicle contro l and increase the risk of serious injury. - Never place any objects in the drive r's footwell. An object could get into the pedal area and interfere with pedal funct io n. In case of sudden braking or an acc ident, you would not be able to brake or acce le rate ! - Always make sure that nothing can fall or move into the d river's footwell. Floor mats on the driver side Always use floor mats that can be securely attached to the floor mat fasteners and do not interfere with the free movement of the pedals. .,. Make sure that the f loor mats are properly secured and cannot move and interfere w it h the pedals~ & Use only floor mats that leave the peda l area unobstructed a nd that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of posi t ion . You can obtain su itable floor mats from your author ized Audi Dealer. Floor mat fasteners are installed in your Audi. Floor mats used in you r vehicle must be attached to these fasteners . Properly securing the floor 175 Ill> Safe driving mats will prevent them from sliding into positions that could interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. A WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can result in a loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. - Always make sure that floor mats are properly secured . - Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured in place to prevent them from slipping and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. - Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. - Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been taken out for cleaning. -Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. Stowing .,. Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment. .,.Always place and properly secure heavy items in the luggage compartment as far forward as possible c>fig . 143 . .,.Secure luggage using the tie-downs provided <=> page 177 . .,. Make sure that the rear seatback is securely latched in place. A A Loading the luggage compartment All luggage and other objects must be properly stowed and secured in the luggage compartment. "' "' 0 0 it m far forward as poss ible . 176 WARNING Improperly stored luggage or other items can fly through the vehicle causing serious personal injury in the event of hard braking or an accident. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: - Always put objects, for example, luggage or other heavy items in the luggage compartment. -Always secure objects in the luggage compartment using the tie-down hooks and suitable straps . Luggage Fig. 143 Safe load positioning: heavy cargo posi tioned as Loose items in the luggage compartment can shift suddenly, changing vehicle handling characteristics. Loose items can also increase the risk of serious personal injury in a sudden vehicle maneuver or in a collision. WARNING Heavy loads will influence the way your vehicle handles . To help reduce the risk of a loss of control leading to serious personal injury: -Always keep in mind when transporting heavy objects, that a change in the center of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling: - Always distribute the load as evenly as possible. - Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible . - Never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating or the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified on the safety compliance sticker on the left door jamb. Exceeding permissible weight standards can cause the vehicle to slide and handle differently . Ill>- Saf e d r ivi n g - Please observe information on safe driving Q page 171. A WARNING To help prevent poisonous exhaust gas from being drawn into t he vehicle, always keep the rear lid closed wh ile driving . - Never transport objects larger than those fitting completely into the luggage area because th e rear lid cannot be fully closed . - If you absolutely must drive with the rear lid open, observe the follow ing notes to reduce the risk of poisoning: - Close all windows, - Open a ll air outlets in the instr ume nt panel, - Switch off the a ir recirculation, - Set the fresh a ir fan to the highest speed . A ..... N a: CX) ..... I.Cl U"I Tie-downs The luggage compar tment is equipped with four tie-downs to se cure luggage and other items. WARNING Always make sure that the doors, all windows and the rea r lid are secu rely closed and locked to redu ce the risk of injury when t he vehi cle is not being used. - After closing the rear lid, a lways make s ure that it is p roperly closed and locked. - Never leave yo ur vehicle unattended especially with the rea r lid left open. A child cou ld crawl into t he vehicle through the luggage compartment and close the rear lid becoming trapped and unable to get out. Being trapped in a vehicle can lead to serious persona l injury. - Never let children play in or aro und the vehicle . - Never let passengers ride in the luggage compartment. Vehicle occupants must always be properly restra ined in one of the vehicle's seating positions. @ - The tire pressure m ust correspond to the load. The tire pressure is shown on the tire pressu re label. The t ire pressure label is located on the dr iver's side B-pillar . The tire pressure label lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle at its maximum capac ity weight and the tires that we re on your vehicle at the time it was manufac t ured. For re commended ti re pressu res for normal load condi t ions, please see chapt er r:!) page 261. Tips - Air circulation helps to reduce window fogging. Sta le air escapes to the outside through vents in the trim panel, on the left side of the luggage compartment . Be sure to keep these slots free and open. Fig. 144 Locat ion of t he tie-downs in t he luggage compart me nt Use t he t ie-downs to sec ure you r cargo prope rly Q page 176, Loading the luggage compar tment. In a collision, the laws of physics mean that even smaller it ems that are loose in the veh icle will become heavy m issiles t hat can cause serio us injury. Items in the vehicle possess energy which vary with vehicle speed and the weight of the item . Vehicle speed is the most sign ificant factor . For example, in a fron t al collision at a speed of 30 mp h (48 km/h), t he fo rces acting on a 10 lbs (4 .5 kg) object are about 20 times the normal weight of the item . This means that the we ight of the item would sudden ly be about 200 lbs (90 kg). You can imagine the injuries that a 200 lbs (90 kg) item fly ing free ly throug h the passenger compartment could cause in a collis ion like th is. ..... I.Cl ..... 177 Safe A driving WARNING Weak, damaged or improper straps used to secure items to tie -downs can fail during hard braking or in a collision and cause serious personal injury. -Always use suitable mounting straps and properly secure items to the tie-downs in the luggage compartment to help prevent items from shifting or flying forward as dangerous missiles . - When the rear seat backrest is folded down , always use suitable mounting straps and properly secure items to the tie-downs in the luggage compartment to help prevent items from flying forward as dangerous missiles into the passenger compartment. - Never attach a child safety seat tether strap to a tie-down. Reporting Safety Defects Applicable to U.S.A. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying Audi of America, Inc. If NHTSAreceives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defects exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problems between you, 178 your dealer, or Audi of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline tollfree at: Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or 1-800-424-9393 or you may write to: Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: http:/ /www .safercar.gov Applicable to Canada If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash, injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls. You should also notify Volkswagen Group Canada, Inc. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to .,. Safe driving Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may either call Transport Canada toll-free at: Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa region and from other countries) TTYfor hearing impaired : Tel.: 1-888-67 5-6863 or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z OAl For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at: http:/ /www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ roadsafety/menu. htm 179 S a fety belt s Safety General belts notes Always wear safety belts! Wearing safety belts correctly saves lives! This chapter explains why safety be lts are necessary, how they work and how to adjust and wear them correctly. .. Read all the information that follows and heed all of the instructions and WARNINGS. &_ WARNING Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. - Safety belts are the s ingle most effective means ava ilable to reduce the risk of serious injury and death in automobile acc idents. For your protect ion and that of your passe ngers, always corre ctly wea r safety be lts when the vehicle is moving. - Pregnant wome n, injured, o r physically impaired persons mus t a lso use safety be lt s. Like all vehicle occ upants, they are mo re likely t o be serio us ly injured if they do not wea r safety be lts. The best way to protect a fetus is to protect the mother - throughout the ent ire pregnancy. - Never strap more than one person, including sma ll children, into any belt. It is especially dangerous to place a safety be lt over a child sitting on your lap . - Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are safety be lts available. - Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is proper ly restrained with a separate safety be lt o r ch ild restraint . - Persons taller than 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) as well as children in booster seats who are too close to the rea r window and roof ca n suffer severe head and neck injuries when the rea r lid is closed or in a crash. - The minimum clearance between the passenger's heads and the rear window must neve r - un de r any circumstances - be less tha t li n (2.5 cm) when t he passe ngers sit fu lly upright. - Always make sure that rea r seat passengers cannot be str uck when the rear lid is closed. 4 Safety belt warning light Your vehicle has a warning system for the driver and front seat passenger to remind you about the importance of buckling up. Number of seats Your Aud i TT Coupe has two seating positions in the front and two height-limited seating positions in the rear . Each seating position has a safe ty belt. The rear seat a rea in your Audi TT Coupe does not have enough room fo r passengers of all sizes. For reasons of safety, no perso n taller than 4 ft 9 in (S 7 in/1.45 m) should ever ride in the rear seat area. &_ WARNING Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serio us personal injury and death. 180 Fig. 14 5 Safety belt warn ing lig ht in t he instru ment cluster - enlarged Before driving off , always: .. Fasten you r safety belt and make sure you wear it properly. .,. Make sure tha t you r passengers a lso buckle up and properly wea r t he ir safety belts. .,. Protect chi ld ren with a child rest raint system appropr iate for the size and age. Safety The warning light . in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on as a reminder to fasten the safety belts . In addition, you will hear a warning tone for a certain period of time. Fasten your safety belt and make sure that your passengers also properly put on their safety belts. A WARNING - Safety belts are the single most effective means ava ilable to reduce the risk of serious injury and death in automobi le accidents . For your protect ion and that of your passengers, always correctly wea r safety be lts when the vehicle is moving . - Failure to pay attention to the warn ing light that comes on could lead to personal injury. Why safety belts? Frontal collisions and the law of physics Frontal crashes create very strong forces for people riding in vehicles. belts The physical principles are simple. Both the vehi cle and the passengers possess energy which varies with vehicle speed and body weight . Engineers call this energy "kinetic energy." The higher the speed of the vehicle and the greater the vehicle's weight, the more energy that has to be "absorbed" in the cras h. Vehicle speed is t he most sign ifican t factor. If the speed doubles from 15 to 30 mph (25 to 50 km/h), the energy increases 4 times! Because the passengers of t his vehicle ar e not usfig . 146, they will keep moving ing safe ty belts r=> at t he same speed the vehicle was moving just before the crash, until something stops them here, the wall r=> fig. 147 . The same principles apply to people sitting in a vehicle that is involved in a fronta l collision. Even at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to 50 km/h), the forces acting on the body can reach one ton (2,000 lbs, or 1,000 kg) or more. At higher speeds, these forces are even greater. People who do not use safety belts are a lso not attached to the ir vehicle. In a frontal coll is ion they will also keep moving forward at the speed their vehicle was travelling just before the crash . Of course, the laws of physics don't just apply to frontal collisions , they determine wha t happens in all kinds of accidents and collisions . Fig. 146 Unbelted occupants in a veh icle head ing for a wall .... N a: Fig. 147 The vehicle crashes into the wa ll CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl u, 181 Sa f e ty belts What happens to occupants not wearing safety belts? In crashes unbelted occupants cannot stop themselves from flying forward and being injured or killed. Always wear your safety bel ts! Remember too, that a irbags will dep loy only once and that your safety be lts are always there to offer protection in those acc idents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed. Unbe lted occupants can also be thrown out of the vehicle where even more severe or fata l injuries can occur. It is also important for the rear passengers to wear safety be lts correctly. Unbelted passengers in the rear seats endanger not only themselves but also the driver and other passengers ¢ fig . 149 . In a fronta l col lision they will be th rown forward vio lently, whe re they can hit and injure t he dr iver and/or front seat passenger. Fig. 148 A dr iver not wear ing a safety belt is violently thrown forwa rd Safety belts protect People think it's possible to use the hands to brace the body in a minor collision. It's simply not true! Fig. 149 A rear passenger not wearing a safety belt will f ly fo rward and strike t he d river Unbe lted occupants are not able to resist the tremendous fo rces of impact by holding t igh t or b racing themselves. Wit ho ut t he benefit of safety restraint systems, the unrestrained occupant will slam violently into the steering whee l, instrument panel, windsh ield, or whatever else is in the way ¢ fig. 148. This impact with the veh icle interior has all the energy they had just before the crash . Never rely on airbags alone for protection. Even when they deploy, airbags provide only additional protection. Airbags are not supposed to dep loy in all kinds of accidents . Although your Audi is equ ipped with airbags, all vehicle occupants , including the dr iver, must wear safety belts correctly in o rder to minimize the risk of severe injury or deat h in a crash. 182 Fig. 1 50 Driver is correctly restrained in a sudden braking maneuver. Safety be lts used properly can make a big difference. Safety be lt s help to keep passe ngers in their seats, g radually reduce energy leve ls ap plied to the body in an accident, and help prevent the uncontrolled movement that can cause serious injuries. In addition, safety belts reduce the danger of be ing thrown out of t he vehicle. Safety be lts attach passengers to the car and g ive them the benefit of be ing slowed down more gently or "soft ly" through the "give" in the safety belts, crush zones and other safety features engineered into today 's vehicles. By "absorbing" the kinet ic energy over a longer period of t ime, the safe ty belts make the fo rces on the body more "tole rab le" and less likely to ca use injury. ..,_ S a fet y b e lts Although these examples are based on a fronta l collision, safety belts can also substantially reduce the risk of injury in other kinds of crashes. So, whether you're on a long trip or just going to the corner store, always buckle up and make sure others do, too . Accident statistics show that vehicle occupants properly wearing safety belts have a lower risk of being injured and a much better chance of surviving an accident. Prope rly using safety be lts also greatly increases the ability of the supplemental airbags to do the ir job in a collision. For t his reason, wearing a safety belt is lega lly required in most countr ies including much of the United States and Canada. Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, you still have to wear the safety belts provided. Front airbags, for examp le, are activated only in some frontal collisions. The front airbags are not activated in all frontal collisions, in side and rear collisions, in roll overs or in cases where there is not enough deceleration through impact to the front of the vehicle. The same goes for the other airbag systems in your Audi. So, always wear your safety belt and make sure everybody in your vehicle is properly restrained! - Never strap more than one person, including small children, into any belt. - Never place a safety belt over a child sitting on your lap. - Always keep feet in the footwe ll in front of the seat while the vehicle is being driven. - Never let any person ride with their feet on the instrument panel or sticking out the window or on the seat. - Never remove a safety belt while the vehicle is moving. Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed. - Never wear belts twisted . - Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eye glasses, pens, keys, etc ., as these may cause inj ury. - Never allow safety belts to become damaged by being caught in door or seat hardware. - Do not wear the shoulder part of the belt under your arm or otherwise out of position. - Several layers of heavy clothing may interfe re with correct position ing of belts and re· - Important safety instructions about safety belts Safety belts must always be correctly positioned across the strongest bones of your body. .,.Always wea r safety belts as illust rated and described in this chapter. .,.Make sure that your safety belts are always ready for use and are not damaged . A - - WARNING Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death . Safety belts can work only when used correctly. - Always fasten your safety belts correctly before driving off and make sure all passengers are correctly restrained. - For maximum protection, safety belts must always be posit ioned properly on the body. - - duce the overall effectiveness of the system. Always keep be lt buckles free of anything that may prevent the buckle from latching securely. Never use comfort clips or devices that create slack in the shoulder belt. However, special clips may be required for the proper use of some child restraint systems . Torn or frayed safety be lts can tear and damaged belt hardware can break in an accident. Inspect belts regularly. If webb ing, bindings, buckles, or retractors are damaged, have belts rep laced by an authorized Audi deale r or qualified workshop. Safety belts t hat have been worn and loaded in an accident must be replaced with the correct replacement safe ty belt by an authori zed Audi dealer. Replacemen t may be necessary even if damage cannot be clearly seen . Anchorages that were loaded must also be inspected . Never remove, mod ify, disassemble, or try to repair the safety belts yourse lf. 183 Sa f e ty belts - Always keep the belts clean. Dirty belts may not work properly and can impa ir the funct ion of the inertia reel c::>table Internal cleaning on page 272 . Safety belts Safety belt preten s ioners The safety belts on the front seats are equipped with a belt pretensioner that he lps to tighten the safety be lt and remove s lack when the pretensioner is activated. The function of the pretensioner is monitored by a warning light c::>page 15. Convertible locking retractor Fastening safety belts Seat first - everybody buckle up! ., Every safety belt except the one on the driver seat is equipped with a convertib le locking retractor that must be used when the safety be lt is used to attach a child seat. Be sure to read the important information about this feature c::> page223. _&.WARNING Fig. 151 Bel t buckl e and tongue on t he dr iver's seat To provide maximum protection, safety belts must always be posit ioned correctly on the wearer 's body . ...Adjust the front seat properly c::>page 44, Seats and storage. ... Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in an upright position and securely latched in place before using the belt c::>,& . ... Hold the be lt by the tongue and pull it even ly across the chest and pe lvis c::>.&_. ... Inser t the tongue into the correct buckle of you r seat until you hea r it latch secure ly c::> fig . 151. ...Pull on the be lt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buck le . Automatic safety belt retractors Every safety be lt is equipped with an automatic belt retractor on the shoulder belt . This feature locks the belt when the belt is pul led out fast, du ring hard braking and in a n accident . The belt may also lock when you drive up or down a steep hill or through a sharp curve . During norma l driving the belt lets you move freely . 184 Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious injury in an accident c::>page185, Safety belt position. - Safety belts offer optimum protection only when the seatback is up right and belts are properly positioned on the body . - Always make sure that the rear seat backrest to which the center rear safety belt* is at ta ched is securely latched whenever the rear center safety belt is being used. If the backrest is not se curely latched, the passen ger will move forward with the back rest during sudden braking, in a sudden maneuver and especia lly in a crash . - Always make sure that the rear seat backrest is securely latched whenever the rear safety belt is being used . If the backrest is not securely latched, the passenger will move forward with the backrest during sudden braking, in a sudden maneuver and espec ia lly in a crash. - Never attach the safety belt to the buckle for another seat . Attach ing the belt to the wrong buckle will reduce safety be lt effectiveness and can cause serio us pe rsonal injury. - A passenge r who is not prope rly rest rained can be seriously injured by the safe t y belt itself when it moves from the st ronger parts of the body into critica l areas like t he abdo men. Safet y bel ts Pregnant women must also be correctly restrained - Always lock the convertible locking retractor when you are secur ing a child seat in the vehicle ¢ page 225. @ The best way to protect the fetus is to make sure that expectant mothers always wear safety belts correctly - throughout the pregnancy. Tips For information on safety be lt pretensioners, refer to ¢ page 186. Safety belt position Correct belt position is the key to getting maximum protection from safety belts. -...."' 9 I "' a, Fig. 1 53 Safety belt position during pregnancy To provide maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned correctly on the wearer's body ¢ page 185 . ...Adjust the front seat properly ¢ page 44, Seats Fig. 152 Safety be lt positio n Use the height adjustment to change the pos ition of the shou lder belt of the front safety be lts. _& WARNING .... Improperly posit ioned safety be lts ca n cause ser ious personal inju ry in an accident. - The shoulder be lt should lie as close to the center of the colla r bone as possible and sho uld fit we ll on t he body. Hold t he belt above t he latch tong ue and pu ll it evenly across the chest so that it sits as low as pos sible on the pelvis and there is no press ure on the abdomen . The belt shou ld always fit snugly ¢ fig. 152. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary . - A loose-fitting safety be lt can cause ser ious injuries by shifting its pos ition on your body from the strong bones to more vulnerable, soft tissue and cause ser ious injury . - Always read and heed all WARNINGS and other important information ¢ page 183 . and s torage. .,. Hold the belt by the tongue and pull it evenly across the chest and pelvis ¢ fig. 153 ¢ ,&.. .. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of your seat unt il you hear it latch secu rely ¢ page 184, fig. 151 . .,. Pull on the belt to make sure that it is sec urely latched in t he buckle. A WARNING Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal injury in an accident. - Expecta nt mothers must always wear the lap portion of the safety belt as low as possible across the pe lvis and below the rounding of the abdomen. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS and other important informat ion c>.&.in Fasten- ing safety belts on page 184. N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 185 Sa f e ty belts A Unfastening safety belts Unbuckle the safety belt with the red release button only after the vehicle has stopped . a \ ~ .. 0 \ :i: 0J WARNING Improperly worn safety belts increase the risk of ser ious personal injury and death whenever a veh icle is being used . - Always make sure that all veh icle occupants are cor rectly restrained and stay in a correct seated posit ion wheneve r the vehicle is being used. - Always read and follow a ll WARNINGS and other impo rtant informat ion Q page 183 . Safety Fig. 154 Releas ing the tongue fro m the buck le .. Push the red release button on the buckle Q fig. 154 . The belt tongue will spring out of the buckle Q ,& . .. Let the belt wind up on the retractor as you guide the belt tongue to its stowed position. A WARNING Never unfasten safety belt while the vehicle is moving . Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed. Improperly worn safety belts Incorrectly positioned safety belts can cause severe injuries. Wearing safety belts improperly can cause serious injury or death. Safety belts can only work when they are correctly positioned on the body . Imp roper seating positions reduce the effect iveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and death by mov ing the safety bel t to crit ica l areas of the body. Imp roper seating positions a lso increase the risk of se rious injury and death when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant who is not in the correct seating pos ition. A driver is responsible for the safety of all veh icle occupants and especially for children. Therefore: .. Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect seated position in the vehicle while traveling QA . 186 belt tensioner How safety belt pretensioners work In front, side and rear-end collisions above a particular severity and in a rollover, safety belts are tensioned automatically . Pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners The safety belts for t he fro nt seat ing pos it io ns are equipped with safety belt pretensioners. The system is act ivat ed by se nsors in front, side and rear- end collisions of grea t seve rity and in a ro llover. This tightens the be lt and takes up belt s lack ~ .& in Service and disposal of safety belt pretensioner on page 187. Taking up the s lack helps to reduce forward occupant movement during a collis ion. A WARNING - It is poss ible for the pretensioners to deploy incorrect ly. - The pyrotechnic system can only provide protection fo r one collision. If t he pyrotechnic pretens ioners deploy, the pretensioning syst em must be replaced. (D Tips The pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners can o nly dep loy once . - The safety belt pretensioners do not deploy in minor frontal, side and rear-end coll isions . - A fine dust is re leased when the pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners dep loy. This is no rma l and is not caused by a fire in the veh icle. S a fet y b e lts - The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. A qualified dealersh ip is familiar with these regu lations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you . - Be sure to observe all safety, environmental and other regulations if the veh icle or individual parts of the system, particularly the safety belt or airbag, are to be disposed . We recommend you have your author ized Audi dealer perform this serv ice for you. Service and disposal of safety belt pretensioner (®} For the sake of the environment Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners might be classif ied as Perchlorate Material -special handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate . When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modules safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regu lations mus t be obse rved. Your au t horized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you . The safety belt pretensioners are parts of the safety belts on your Audi. Installing, removing, servic ing or repa iring of belt pretensioners can damage the safety belt system and prevent it from work ing correctly in a collision . There are some important things you have to know to make sure that the effectiveness of the system will not be impaired and that discarded components do not cause injury or pollute the environment. A WARNING Improper care, serv icing and repa ir procedures can increase the ris k of personal injury and death by preventing a safety be lt pretensioner from activating when needed or acti vating it unexpectedly: - The be lt pretensioner system can be act ivat ed only once. If belt pretensioners have been activated, the system must be replaced. - Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the safety be lt system. - Safety belt systems including safety belt pretensioners cannot be repaired. Special procedures are required for removal, installat ion and disposa l of this system . - For any work on the safety belt system, we strongly recommend that you see your authorized Audi dealer or qualified technician who has an Audi approved repair manual, train ing and spec ial equipment necessary . 187 Airb a g syste m Airbag system Important information Importance of wearing safety belts and sitting properly Airbags are only supplemental restraints . For airbags to do their job, occupants must always properly wear their safety belts and be in a prop er seating position. For your safety and the safety of your passenge rs, before driving off, always : "' Adjust the dr iver's seat and steering wheel properly ¢ page 172, "' Adjust the front passenge r's seat properly ¢ page 44 , "' Wear safety belts properly ¢ page 183 , "' Always prope rly use the proper child restraint to protect children ¢ page 212 . In a coll isio n airbags must inflate wit hin the blink of an eye and with cons iderable force . The supplemental airbags can cause injuries if the driver or the front seat passenger is not seated proper · Ly. Therefore in order to help the airbag to do its job, it is important, both as a dr iver and as a passenger to sit properly at all t imes . By keeping room between your body and the steering whee l and the front of the passenger compartment, the a irbag can inflate fully and completely and provide supplemental protect ion in certain frontal collisions ¢ page 172, Correct passenger seating positions . For details on the operation of the seat adjustment con t rols ¢ page 45. It's especially important that children are proper ly restra ined ¢ page 212 . There is a lot that the driver and the passengers can and must do to help the ind ividual safety features installed in your Audi work together as a system . Proper seating posit ion is important so that the front airbag on the drive r side can do its job. If you have a physical impairment or cond ition that prevents you from sitting properly on the driver seat with the safety be lt properly fastened and 188 reaching the peda ls, or if you have concerns with regard to the function or operation of the Advanced Airbag System, please contact your a uthori zed Audi dea ler or qua lified workshop, or call Audi Customer Relations at 1-800-822-2834 for poss ible modifications to your vehicle . When the airbag system dep loys, a gas generator will fill the airbags, break open the padded covers, and infla t e between t he steering wheel and the driver and between the instrument panel and t he front passenger . The a irbags will deflate immed iate ly after deployment so that the front occupants can see t hrough the windsh ie ld again without interruption. All of th is takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even rea lize that the a irbags have deployed. The airbags a lso infla t e with a g reat deal of force and nothing should be in the ir way when they deploy. Front airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow down and limit the occupant 's forward movement . Together they he lp to prevent the driver and front seat passenger from hitting parts of the ins ide the veh icle wh ile reducing the forces acting on the occupant dur ing the cras h. In th is way they help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and uppe r body in the crash . Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower pa rts of the body. Both front airbags will not inflate in all frontal collisions . The t riggering of the a irbag system depends on the veh icle decelerat ion rate caused by t he coll isio n a nd regis t ered by t he ele ctroni c contro l unit . If t his rat e is be low t he refe rence value programmed int o t he contro l unit, the airbags will not be trigge red, even tho ugh the car may be badly damaged as a resu lt of the collision. Vehicle damage, rep a ir costs or even the lack of vehicle damage is not necessarily an indication of whether an a irbag should inflate or not . Since the circumstances will vary cons iderab ly between one collision and another, it is not possible to define a range of veh icle speeds that will cover every poss ible kind and angle of impact that w ill always t rigger the a irbags . Important factors include, for examp le, the nat ure (hard or soft) of the object which the ca r hits, the angle of imp act , vehicle speed , etc. The front airbags will .,. Airb a g sys tem also not inflate in side or rear coll isions, or in roll-overs. - Always sit as fa r as possible from the steering wheel or the instrument panel Always remember: Airbags will deploy only o nce, and on ly in certain kinds of coll isions. Your safety be lts are always there to offer protection in those situations in which airbags are not supposed to deploy, or when they have a lready deployed; for examp le, when your vehicle str ikes or is struck by another vehicle after the first collis ion. This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is a supp lementary restraint and is not a substitute for a safety belt. The airbag system works most effect ively when used with the safety belts. Therefore, always properly wear your safety belts r:::;,page180 . A WARNING Sitting too close to the steer ing whee l or inst rument panel will decrease the effect iveness of the airbags and will increase t he risk of persona l injury in a collision. - Never sit closer than 10 in (25 cm) to the steering wheel or instrument pane l. - If you cannot sit mo re than 10 in (25 cm) from the steering wheel, investiga t e whether adaptive equ ipment may be avai lab le to held you reach the pedals and increase you r seating distance from the steering wheel. - If you are unrestrained, leaning forwa rd, sit ting s ideways or out of pos ition in any way, your risk of injury is much higher. - You will also receive serious injuries and cou ld even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inf lates even with an Advanced Airbag. - To reduce the risk of inj ury when an airbag inflates, a lways wear safety belts properly r:::; page 184, Safety belts. - Always make certain that ch ildren age 12 or yo unger always ride in the rear seat. If children are not properly restra ined, they may be severe ly injured or killed when an airbag inflates. - Never let children ride unrestrained or improperly restrained in the veh icle. Adjust the front seats properly. - Never ride with the backrest reclined. - r:::;,page172. - Always sit upright w ith your back against the backrest of your seat . - Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat to help prevent ser ious injuries to the legs and hips if the airbag inflates. - Never recl ine the front passenger's seat to transport objects . Items can also move into the area of the s ide a irbag or the front airbag du ring braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects ne ar the airbags can become project iles and cause injury when an airbag inflates . A WARNING - Airbags tha t have deployed in a crash m ust be replaced. - Use only orig inal equipment airbags approved by Audi and insta lled by a trained technicianwho has the necessarytools and d iagnostic equipment to properly replace any airbag in your vehicle and assu re system effect iveness in a crash. - Never permit salvaged or recycled airbags to be installed in your vehicle. Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know "' Be su re to read the importan t informat io n and head the WARNINGS fo r important deta ils about child ren and Advan ced Airbags r:::; page 212 . Even thoug h your veh icle is equipped wit h an Advan ced Airbag System, ma ke certa in that a ll children, especi ally those 12 year s and younger, always ride in t he back seat properly res t rained for their age and size. The ai rbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child seat. It can be a very dangerous place for an infant or a child in a rearward -fac ing seat. .,. 189 Airb a g syste m The Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle has been certified to comply with the Requirements of United States Federa l Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 as applicab le at the time your vehicle was manufactured . The Standard requires the front airbag on the passenger side to be turned off ("suppressed") if a child up to about one year of age restrained in one of the rear-facing or forward-facing infant restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was cert ified has been installed on the front passenge r seat. For a listing of the ch ild rest raints that we re used to ce rtify compliance with the US Safety Standard <=> page 214. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light in the overhead console tells you when the front Advan ced Airbag on the passenger side has been t urned off by the electronic control unit . Each t ime you turn on the igni t ion, the PASSEN· GER AIR BAG OFF light will come on fo r a few seconds and: - will stay on if the front passenger seat is not occupied, - will stay on if the electrical capac itance measured by the capac itive passenger detection system fo r t he fron t passenger seat equals the combined capaci t ance of an infant up to about one year of age and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing chi ld restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle was certif ied. For a listing of the child restraints that were used to cert ify your vehicle's compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard <=> page 214. - will stay on if there is a small ch ild or child restraint on the front passenger seat, - will go off if the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult as reg istered by the capacitive passenger detection system <=> page 199, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on when electrical capacitance registe red on the front passenger seat is equa l to or less than the 190 combined capacitance of a typical 1 year -old infant and one of the rearward-facing or forwardfacing child restraints listed in Federa l Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 w ith which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified . If the total e lectr ica l capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is more than that of a typ ical 1 year-old chi ld but less than the weight of a small adult, the front airbag on the passen ger side can deploy (the PASSEN GER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on) . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on, the front airbag on the passenger side has not been turned off by the electronic cont rol unit and can dep loy if the control unit senses an impact that meets the cond itions stored in its memo ry. For example, the airbag may deploy if : - a small ch ild that is heav ier than a typical 1 year-old child is on the front passenger seat (regard less of whether the child is in one of the child safety seats listed r=!>page 214), or - a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenge r seat . If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the PASSEN GER AIR BAG OFF ligh t comes on in the overhead console and stays on. If the front passenger airbag dep loys, the Federal Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" dep loyment criteria to reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag . "Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decele rations as defined in page 200, PASSENthe e lectronic contro l unit r=> GER AIR BAG OFF light. Always remember, a ch ild seat or infant carrier installed on the front seat may be st ruck and knocked out of posit io n by the rapidly inflating passenger 's airbag in a frontal collision. The a irbag cou ld great ly reduce the effectiveness of the child restraint and even ser iously injure the child during inflation . Airbag For this reason, and because the back seat is the safest place for children - when properly restrained according to their age and size - we strongly recommend that children always sit in the back seat ¢ page 212, Child safety. A WARNING A child in a rearward -facing child seat instal led on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. - Always install rear-facing child seats on the rear seat. - If you must install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. - Forward-facing child seats installed on the front passenger's seat may interfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause se rious personal injury to the child . A WARNING If, in exceptional circumstances, you must install a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat: -Always make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. - Never put the forward-facing child restraint up against or very near the instrument panel. - Always move the passenger seat into its rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible before installing the for- system ward-facing child restraint. The backrest must be adjusted to an upright position . - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. A - WARNING - To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light will be displayed whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on . - If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not stay on, perform the checks described page 199, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System. ¢ - Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not stay on. - Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer immediately. - Always carefully follow instructions from child restraint manufacturers when installing child restraints. A ,.___ WARNING - If, in exceptional circumstances, you must install a forward or rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat: - Improper installation of child restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection. - An improperly installed child restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child seat or carrier. - Always make sure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when it is 191 Airbag syste m not, or to signal that it is occupied by someone who is heav ier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of additional objects could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should be off, or could cause the airbag to work in a way that is different from the way it would have worked witho ut the object on the seat. Front airbags Description of front airbags The airbag system con provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occupants. The front safety belts also have load limiters to help reduce the forces applied to the body in a crash. The airbag for the driver is in the stee ring wheel hub c:>fig. 155 and the airbag for the front passenger is in the instrument panel c:>fig. 156. The general location of the a irbags is marked "AIRBAG". There is a lot you need to know about the airbags in your vehicle . We urge you to read the detai led information about airbags, safety be lts and child safety in this and the other chapters that make up the owner's literature. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers, especially infants and small children . .&_WARNING - Fig. 155 Locatron of dri ver airbag: in steeri ng wheel Fig. 156 Location of front passenger's airbag : in the in· strument panel Your vehicle is equipped with an "Advanced Airbag System" in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured . The safety belts for the front seats have "pretensioners" that help to take slack out of the be lt system. The pretensioners a re also act ivated by the electronic control unit for the airbag system. 192 Never rely on airbags alone for protection. - Even when they deploy, airbags provide only supp lemental protection. - Airbag work most effectively when used with properly worn safety be lts . - Therefore, always wear your safety belts and make sure that everybody in your veh icle is properly restrained . - Always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the steer ing whee l rim at the 9:00 o'clock and 3:00 o'clock positions to help reduce the risk of personal injury if the driver's airbag inflates. - Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands anywhere inside the steering wheel or on the steering whee l hub. Holding the steering wheel the wrong way increases the risk of severe injury to the arms, hands, and head if the driver airbag deploys. .&_WARNING - Objects between you and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash by interfering with the way the airbag unfolds and/or by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates. - Always make sure nothing is in the front airbag deployment zone that could be struck by the airbag when it inflates. ..,. Airbag - Objects in the zone of a deploying airbag can become projectiles when the airbag deploys and cause serious personal injury. - Never hold things in your hands or on your lap when the vehicle is in use . - Never place accessories or other objects (such as cup holders, telephone brackets, note pads, navigation systems, or things that are large, heavy, or bulky) on the doors; never attach then to the doors or the windshield; never place them over or near or attach them to the area marked ,.AIRBAG" on the steering wheel, instrument panel or the seat backrests; never place them between these areas and you or any other person in the vehicle. - Never attach objects to the windshield above the passenger front airbag, such as accessory GPS navigation units or music players. Such objects could cause serious injury in a collision, especially when the airbags inflate . - Never recline the front passenger seat to transport objects. Items can also move into the deployment area of the side airbags or the front airbag during breaking or in a sudden maneuver . Objects near the airbags can fly dangerously through the passenger compartment and cause injury, particularly when the seat is reclined and the airbags inflate. A WARNING A person on the front passenger seat, especially infants and small children, will receive serious injuries and can even be killed by being too close to the airbag when it inflates. - Although the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag if an infant or a small child is on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment un der these special conditions is impossible in all conceivable situations that may happen during the useful life of your vehicle. - The Advanced Airbag System can deploy in accordance with the "low risk" option under system the U.S. Federal Standard if a child that is heavier than the typical one-year old child is on the front passenger seat and the other conditions for airbag deployment are met . - Accident statistics have shown that children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seating position . - For their own safety, all children, especially 12 years and younger, should always ride in the back properly restrained for their age and size. Advanced front airbag system Your vehicle is equipped with a front Advanced Airbag System in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 asapplicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured. The front Advanced Airbag System supplements the safety belts to provide additional protection for the driver's and front passenger's heads and upper bodies in frontal crashes. The airbags inflate only in frontal impacts when the vehicl e deceleration is high enough . The front Advanced Airbag System for the front seat occupants is not a substitute for your safety belts. Rather, it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle . Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you, if you are sitting upright, wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is why you and your passengers must always be properly restrained, not just because the law requires you to be . The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low risk" requirements for 3 and 6 year-old children on the passenger side and very small adults on the driver side. The low risk deployment criteria are intended to help reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the front airbag that can occur, for exampl e, by being too close to the steering wh eel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates. In addition, the system has been certified to comply with the "suppression" requirements of 193 ..,. Airb a g syste m the Safety Standard, to tu rn off the front airbag for infants 12 months old and younger who are restrained on the front passenger seat in child restra ints that are listed in the Standard ¢ page 214, Child restraints and Advanced front airbag system. "Suppression" requires the front a irbag on the passenger side to be turned off if: - a chi ld up to about one year of age is restrained on the front passenger seat in one of the rearfacing or forward-facing infant restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified. For a listing of the ch ild restra ints that were used to certify your veh icle's compl iance with the US Safety Standard ¢ page 214, - When a person is detected on the front passenger seat , weigh ing more than the total weight of a child that is abo ut 1 year old rest rained in one of t he rea r-facing or forward-facing infant restraints (listed in Federa l Motor Vehicle Safe ty Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified), the front airbag on the passenger side may or may not dep loy. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on when the e lectronic control unit detects a total electrical capacitance on the front passenger seat that requires the front airbag to be turned off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on, the front airbag on the passenger side has not been turned off by the control unit and can dep loy if the control unit senses an impact that meets the conditions stored in its memory. If the total electrical capac itance registered on the front passenge r seat is more than that of a typical 1 year-old, but less t han the weight of a sma ll adu lt, the front airbag on the passenger side may deploy (t he PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on) . For example, the airbag may deploy if : - a small child that is heavier than a typical 1 year -old child is on the front passenger seat (rega rdless of whether the ch ild is in one of the child seats listed ¢ page 214), 194 - a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenger seat. If t he front passenger a irbag is tu rned off, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ligh t in the overhead console will come on and stay on. If the front passenger a irbag deploys, the Federal St andard requ ires the a irbag to meet t he "low risk" dep loyment criteria to he lp reduce the risk of injury t hrough interaction with the airbag . "Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decelerations as defined in the electronic contro l unit ¢ page 199. Alwa ys remember : Even tho ugh your vehicle is equipped with Advanced Airbags, the safest place for children is prope rly restra ined on the back seat. Please be sure to read the important information in the sections that fo llow and be sure to heed all of the WARNINGS. .&_WARNING To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag inflates, always wea r safety belts prope rly. - If you are un restrained, leaning forward, sit· t ing sideways or out of position in any way, your risk of injury is much highe r. - You will a lso receive ser ious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag ¢page 188. .&_WARNING A child in a rearward-facing child seat ins t alled on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front air bag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - Although the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle is designed to turn off the front airbag when a rearward-fac ing ch ild restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment is impossib le in all conceivab le situat ions that may happen du ring the useful life of your vehicle. - The inflating airbag will hit the ch ild seat or infant carrier with great force and will . ~ Airb a g sys tem smash the child seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door, or roof. - Always install rearward-facing child restraints on the rear seat. - If you must install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. A WARNING If, in except ional circumstances, you must install a forward-fac ing child restraint on t he front passenger's seat: - Always ma ke sure t he forward-fac ing seat has been designed and cert ified by its manufact urer fo r use on a fron t seat with a pas senger front and side airbag . - Never put the forward -facing child res t raint up against or very near the instrument panel. - Always move the passenger seat into its rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possib le, before insta lling the forward-facing child restra int. The backrest must be adjusted to an upright posit ion. -Always make sure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacit ive passenger detection system in the seat to signa l to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when it is not, or to signa l that it is occupied by someone who is heavier t han the person actua lly sitting on the seat . The presence of additiona l objects could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it shou ld be off, or could cause the airbag to work in a way that is different from the way it would have worked without the object on the seat . - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. Advanced Airbag System components The front passenge r seat in your vehicle has a lot of very important parts of the Advanced Airbag System in it. These parts include the capacitive passenger detection system , wiring, brackets, and more . The control unit monitors the system on the front passenger seat when the ignition is switched on and turns the airbag indicator light on when a malfunction in the one of the system components is detected c::>page 200. Because the front passenger seat contai ns important parts of the Advanced Airbag System, you must ta ke care to prevent it from being damaged. Damage to the se at may prevent t he Advanced Airbag System for the front passenger seat from doing its job in a crash . The front Advanced Airbag System consists of the following: - Crash senso rs in the front of the vehicle tha t measure vehicle acceleration/dece leration to provide information to the Advanced Airbag System about the sever ity of the crash. - An electronic contro l unit, with integrated crash sensors for front and side impacts . The control unit "decides" whether to f ire the front airbags based on the information rece ived from the crash sensors . The control unit also "decides" whether the safety belt pretensioners should be activated . - An Advanced Airbag with gas generato r for the driver ins ide the steering whee l hub . - An Advanced Airbag with gas generator inside the instrumen t panel for the front passenger . - A capacit ive passenger detection system underneath the front passenger seat cover. This system meas ures the electr ical capacitance of the person in the seat . The information registered is sent cont inuous ly to the elect ronic contro l unit to reg ulate dep loyment of t he front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side. - An airbag monitor ing system and indicator poge 199 . light in t he inst rument clust er c::> - A senso r in each front seat registe rs t he dist ance betwee n the respective sea t and the steer ing whee l or inst rument panel. The informat ion registered is sent continuous ly to the .,_ 195 Airb a g syste m electronic con t rol un it t o regula t e deployment of the front Adva need Airbags. - The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFFlight comes on and stays on in the overhead console ¢ page 200, fig. 158 and tells you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off. - A sensor in the safety belt latch for the driver and for the front seat passenger that senses whether that safety belt is latched or not and transmits this information to the electronic control unit. A WARNING Damage to the front passenger seat can prevent the front airbag from working p roperly. - Improper repa ir or disassembly of the front passenge r and drive r seat will prevent the Advanced Airbag System from functioning prope rly. - Repairs to the front passenger seat must be perfo rmed by qua lified and properly trained workshop personnel. - Never remove the front passenger or dr iver seat from the vehicle. - Never remove the upho lstery from the front passenger seat. - Never disassemble or remove parts from the seat or disconnect wires from it. - Never carry sharp objects in your pockets or put them on the seat. The capacitive passenger detection mat in the front passenger seat will not function properly if it is punctured. - Never carry things on your lap or carry objects on the front passenger seat. Such objects can influence the capacitance regis tered by the capacitive passenger detection system, so that incorrect information is provided to the airbag control unit. - Never store items under the front passenger seat. Parts of the Advanced Airbag System under the passenger seat could be damaged, preventing them and the airbag system from working properly. - Never place seat covers or rep lacement upholstery that have not been spec ifically approved by Audi on the front seats. 196 - Seat covers can prevent the Advanced Airbag System from recognizing child restraints or occupants on the front passenger seat and prevent the side airbag in the seat backrest from deploying prope rly. - If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restra int system on this seat. - Never use cushions, pillows , blankets, or sim ilar items o n the front passenge r seat. The additional laye rs prevent the capacit ive passenger detection syst em from accurately measuring the capacitan ce of the child safety seat and/or the person on the seat and thus keep the Advanced Airbag System from wo rking properly. - Never place or use any e lectrica l device (such as a laptop, CD player, e lectronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. Such dev ices can influence the capac itance registe red by the capacitive passenger detection system, so that incorrect informat ion is provided to the airbag cont rol unit. - If you must use a child restra int on t he fron t passenger sea t a nd the child restrain t manufacturer's instructions requ ire the use of a towel, foam cushion or something else to properly position the child restraint, ma ke certa in that the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on whenever the child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat . - If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not come on and stay on, immediately install child restraint in a rea r seat ing pos ition and have the airbag system inspected by your Aud i dea le r. A WARNING If the front passenger seat gets wet, dry it immediately. .,,. Airb a g sys tem - If liquid soaks into the front passenger seat, this can keep the a irbag system from working properly and may, for instance, deactivate the passenger frontal airbag . If this happens, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on together with the a irbag indicator light in the inst rument cluster. - If liquid is poo led on the seat, but has not soaked in, this may also keep the airbag system from working properly and cause the passenger frontal airbag to be enabled (tu rned on), even though there is a properly installed child restraint system on the seat. Wet towe ls or other wet things on the seat cushion can have the same effect . If the front passenger frontal airbag is turned on, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light light will go out. fl tern under Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on to tell you when the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger side has been turned off c::;,page 200 . A - WARNING To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag inflates, always wear safety belts properly. - If you are unrestra ined, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, your risk of injury is much hig he r. - You will also receive ser ious injuries and could even be killed if you a re up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag ¢page 188. More important things to know about front airbags How the Advanced Airbag System components work together The front Advanced Airbag System and the side airbags supplement the protection offered by the front three-point safety belts with pretensioners and load limiters to he lp reduce the risk of injury in a wide range of accident and crash situations . Be sure to read the important information about safety and heed the WARNINGS in th is chapter . Deployment of the Advanced Airbag System and the act ivation of the safety belt pretensioners depend on the deceleration measured by the crash se nsors and registered by the electronic control un it. Crash severity depends on speed and deceleration as we ll as the mass and stiffness of the ve hicle or objec t involved in the crash. .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I On the passenger s ide, regardless of safety belt use, the front passenger frontal a irbag will be turned off if the elect rical capac itance measu red by t he capacit ive passenger detection system on the front passenger seat is less t han the amount programmed in the electronic control unit . The front passenger frontal airbag will also be turned off if the capacitance measured by the system for the front passenger seat equals that of an infant of about one year of age in one of the child seats that was used to certify the Advanced Airbag Sys- Fig. 1 5 7 Inflated fro nt airbags Safety be lts are important to help keep fron t seat occupants in the prope r seated position so that airbags can unfo ld properly and provide supplementa l protection in a fronta l collision. The front airbags are designed to provide additiona l protection fo r the chest and face of the driver and the fron t seat passenger when: - safety belts are worn properly, - the seats have been positioned so that the occupant is properly seated as far as possib le from the a irbag . Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye with great force, things you have on your lap or have placed on the seat could become dangero us project iles, and be pushed into you if the a irbag inflates. .,. 197 Airb a g syste m When an a irbag deploys, fine dust is re leased. This is normal and is not caused by a fire in the veh icle. This dust is made up mostly of a powder used to lubricate the airbags as they deploy. It could irritate skin. It is important to remember that while the supplemental a irbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for example swelling, bruising and minor abrasions, can also happen when airbags inflate. Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower parts of the body. Front airbags supplement the three poi nt safety belts only in some fronta l col lisions in which the veh icle decelerat ion is high enough to deploy the airbags. Front airbag s will not d eplo y : - if the ignit ion is switched off when a crash occurs, - in s ide collisions, - in rear-end collisions, - in rollovers, - when the crash deceleration measured by the airbag system is less than the minimum thresho ld needed for airbag deployment as registered by the electronic control unit. The front passenger airbag w ill als o not deplo y : - when the front passenger seat is not occupied, - when the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat indicates that the passenger side frontal airbag must be switched off by the electronic control unit (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light ~ page 200 and how they work comes on and stays on). _& WARNING Sitting in the wrong pos ition can increase the risk of serious injury in crashes. - To reduce the risk of inju ry when the airbags inflate, the d river and passengers must always sit in an upright position, must not lean against or place any part of their body too close to the area where the airbags are located. 198 - Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye ~ page 189. _& WARNING A child in a rearward-facing child seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - The inflating airbag will hit the ch ild seat o r infant carrier with great force and will smash the child seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof . - Always install rear-fac ing ch ild seats on the rear seat. - If you must install a rea rwa rd facing child seat on the front passenge r seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediate ly install the rearfacing chi ld seat in a rear seating posit ion and have the airbag system inspected by your Aud i dea ler. _& WARNING Objects between you and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash by interfering with the way the airbag unfolds or by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates. - Never hold things in your hands or on your lap when the veh icle is in use. - Never transport items on or in the area of the front passenger seat . Objects could move into the area of the front airbags during braking or othe r s udden maneuver and become dangerous projectiles that can cause serious persona l injury if the airbags inflate . - Never place or attach accessories o r othe r objects (such as cup holders, telephone brackets, large, heavy or bulky objects) on the doors, over or near the area marked "AIRBAG"on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seat backrests or between - Airb a g sys tem - - - - those areas and yourself. These objects could cause injury in a crash, especially when the airbags inflate. Never recline the front passenger's seat to transport objects. Items can also move into the area of the side airbag or the front a irbag dur ing braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can become projectiles and cause inj ury, particularly when the seat is reclined. Never place or transport objects on the front passenge r seat. Objects on the front passenge r seat could cause the capac itive sensor in the seat to signal to airbag system that the seat is occup ied by a person when it in fact is not, or that the person on the seat is heavier than he or she actually is. The change in electric capac itance because of such objects can cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it shou ld be off, or can cause the a irbag to work in a way that is diffe rent from the way it would have wor ked witho ut objects on the seat. Always make sure that the re is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capa cit ive passenger detection system in the seat to sign al t o t he Airbag Syst em t ha t the seat is occupied by a person when it is not, or to signa l that it is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of an object could cause the passenger front a irbag to be turned on when it should be off, or cou ld cause the airbag to work in a way that is d ifferent from the way it wou ld have wor ked witho ut the obj ect on the seat. Never tilt the front passenger seat backrest forward when the vehicle is moving. An inflating airbag will force the backrest backwa rd and can injure rear sea t occupants. _& WARNING The fine dust cre ated when air bags deploy can cause breathing problems for peop le with a history of asthma or other breathing conditions . - To reduce the ris k of breathing problems, those with asthma or other respiratory conditions should get fresh a ir right away by getting out of the vehicle or open ing windows or doors . - If you are in a collision in wh ich airbags deploy, wash your hands and face with m ild soap and water before eating . - Be carefu l not to get the dust into your eyes, or into any cuts or scratches. - If the residue should get into your eyes, f lush them with water . Monitoring Advanced fl~Airbag the Airbag System monitoring indicator light Two separate indicators monitor the function of the Advanced Airbag System: the airbag monitoring indicator light and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light. The Advanced Airbag System as well as the side airbags and side curtain airbagswith ejection mitigation features (including the electronic con trol unit, sensors and system wiring) are all monitored continuously to make sure that they are functioning properly whenever the ignition is on . Every time you tu rn on the ign ition, the a irwill come on fo r a bag system indica to r light few seconds (fu nct ion check). II The system mu st be inspected when the indicator light II: - does not come on when the ignition is sw itched on, - does not go out a few seconds afte r you have sw itched on the igni t ion, or - comes on while driving . If an airbag system malfunction is detected, the indicator light will first start flashing to catch the drive r's attention and then stay on continuously to serve as a constant rem inder to have the system inspected immediately. If a malfunction occurs that turns the front airbag on the passenger side off, the PASSENGER ..,. 199 Airbag system AIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on wheneve r the ignit ion is on . A WARNING An airbag system that is not funct io ning prop er ly cannot provide supplemental protection in a frontal crash. page 15 - If the airbag indicato r light c::> comes when the vehicle is be ing use d, have t he system inspect ed immediate ly by your aut horized Audi dealer . It is po ssible t hat t he air bag will inflate when it is not s upposed t o, o r will not infl at e whe n it shoul d . - t he capacit ive passenger detec t ion system, which switches the front seat passenger's fron tal Advanced Airbag on an d off, detects a change in the status of the front passenger seat. As soon as the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light stops blinking, always ma ke sure that the airbag status (on or off) as shown by the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light is proper for the age, size and electr ical capacitance of the perso n occupying t he fron t passe nger seat . Always make su re t hat the safety belt fo r the front passe nger seat is prope rly faste ned . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will show PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight the status of the front seat passenger's frontal Advanced Airbag a few seconds after the igni tion is switched on and the airbag indicator light goe s off . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light : Fig. 158 PASSENG ER AIR BAGOFF light The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFlight is located in the over head console c::>fig . 158 . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on to tell you when t he front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been tu rned off by t he electronic con t rol unit. If the bulb fo r t he PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light bu rns out, t he will co me o n to sig nal a airbag indicator light mal func tio n in t he Advan ced Airbag System. Alt hough t he bu rned-out bulb will not cha nge th e way the front passenger's fron t al air bag works, it will no longer be poss ible to use the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light to make s ure that the airbag on/off status is correct for the occupant on the front passenger seat. Have the a irbag system inspected immediately by you r a uthorized Audi dea le r. fB The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will blink for about S seconds when : - the ignition is switched on and 200 - will stay on if the fron t passeng e r seat is not occup ied; - will stay on if the e lectr ical capaci t ance meas ured by t he capaci t ive passenger detection syst em for t he fron t passenge r sea t equa ls t he comb ined cap acitanc e of an infan t up to abo ut one year of age and one of the rea rward -facing or forwar d -fac ing child rest raints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi cle was cert ified; For a listing of the ch ild restrai nts t hat we re used to certify your vehicle 's complia nce with t he U.S. Safety St andard c::> poge 2 14 . - will go out if the front pass e nge r seat is occu pied by an adu lt as registe red by t he ca pac it ive pass en ger det ect io n syst em. - The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light must com e on and stay on if the igniti o n is on a nd ... - a car bed has been installed on the front pas senge r sea t , or - a rea rwa rd-facing child restraint has been installed on t he front passenger seat, or - a forward-fac ing child restraint has been insta lled on the fro nt passenger seat, - and if the electrical capacitance registered on the front passenge r seat is equal to or less t han ll>- Airb a g sys tem the combined capacitance of a typical 1 yearo ld infant and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing ch ild restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 w ith which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified. If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front a irbag w ill not deploy, and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will stay on. Never install a rearward -fac ing child restraint on the front pas senger seat, the safest place for a child in any kind of child restraint is at one of the seating positions on the rea r seat ~ page 189, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know and ~ page 212, Child safety . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG light comes on ... If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on when one of the condit ions listed above is met, be sure to check the light regularly to make certain that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light stays on cont inuous ly whenever the ignition is on. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not appear on and does not stay on all the time, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and - reactivate the system by t urning the ignition off for more than 4 seconds and then turning it on again; - remove and reinstall the child restraint. Make sure that the child restraint is properly installed and that the safety belt for the front passenger seat has been correctly routed through the child restraint as descr ibed in t he child restraint manufacturer's instr uctions; - make sure that the convertible locking retractor on the safety be lt for the front passenger seat has bee n activa t ed and that the safety belt has been pulled tight. - make sure that no elect rical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, powe r inverter or seat hea t er for child seats) is placed or used on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-vo lt socket or the cigarette lighter socket; - make sure t hat no seat hea t er has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passen,...., :=: ger seat ; - make sure that noth ing can interfere with the safety belt buckles and that they are not obstructed; - make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towe l) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG light still does not come on ... If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light sti ll does not come on and does not stay on continuously (when the ignition is swit ched on), - take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it proper ly at one of the rear seat pos itions. Have the airbag system inspect ed by your Audi dealer immed iately. - move the child to a rear seat position and make sure that the chi ld is properly restrained in a child restra int that is appropr iate for its s ize and age . The PASSENGER AIR BAG light should NOT come on ... The PASSENGER AI R BAG OFF light should NOT come on when the ign it io n is on and an adult is s itting in a proper seat ing pos ition on the front passenger seat . If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on or flashes for about 5 seconds whi le dr iving, under these circumstances, ma ke sure that : - t he adult on the front passenger seat is properly seated on the cente r of the sea t cushion w ith his or her back up agains t the backrest and the backrest is not reclined, - the adult is not taking we ight off the seat by holding on to the passenger assist handle above t he front passenger door or support ing their weight on the armrest, - t he safety belt is being properly worn an d t hat t here is not a lot of s lack in the safety belt webbing, - there are no afterm a rket seat cove rs or cush ions o r othe r things (such as blankets) on the front passenger seat that might cause the capacitive passenger detection system to miscalculate electr ical capacitance. 201 Airb a g syste m Important safety instructions on monitoring the Advanced Airbag System A WARNING - If the status of the Advanced Airbag System has changed while the vehicle is moving, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light blinks for about 5 seconds to catch the driver's attent ion. If this happens, a lways stop as soon as it is safe to do so and check the steps described above. - If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light does not go off when an adult who is not very small is sitt ing on the front passenger seat after taking the steps described above, make sure the adult is properly seated and restrained at one of the rear seating posit ions. Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Aud i dealer before transporting anyone on the front passenger seat . A WARNING An airbag system that is not funct ion ing properly cannot providesupplemental protection in a frontal crash. - If the airbag indicator light r:::;,page 1 S comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediate ly by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible t hat the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should . A WARNING If the front airbag inflates, a child without a child restraint, or in a rearward-facing child safety seat, or in a forward-facing child restraint that has not been properly installed will be seriously injured and can be killed. - Even though your veh icle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag System, make certain that all ch ildren, especially 12 years and younger, always ride on the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. -Always install forward or rear-facing ch ild seats on the rear seat - even with an Advanced Airbag System. 202 - If you must install a rearwa rd-facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of except ional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not appear and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child seat in a rea r seat ing pos ition and have the airbag system inspe cted by your Audi dea le r. - If, in excep t ional circumstances, you must install a forward-facing child res t raint on the front passenge r seat, always move the seat into it s rearmost position in the seat 's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible . The back rest must be adjusted to an upr ight position. Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time wheneve r the ignit ion is switched on. A WARNING - If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not go out when an adult is sitting on the front passenger seat afte r ta king the steps described above, make sure the adult is properly sea t ed and restra ined at one of the rear seating posit ions . - Have the airbag system inspected by your Aud i dea ler before transpo rt ing anyone on the front passenger seat . (D Tips If the capac itive passenger detection system determ ines that the front passenger seat is empty, the frontal airbag on the passenger side will be turned off, and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will stay on. Repair, care and disposal of the airbags Parts of the airbag system are insta lled at many different places on your Audi. Installing, removing, servicing or repair ing a part in an area of the vehicle can damage a part of an airbag system and prevent that system from wor king properly in a collis ion. There are some important things you have to know to make sure tha t the effectiveness of the .,. Airbag system will not be impaired and that discarded components do not cause injury or pollute the environment. A WARNING - Improper care, servicing and repair procedures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing an airbag from de ploying when needed or deploying an airbag unexpectedly: - Never cover, obstruct, or change the steer ing wheel horn pad or airbag cover or the instrument panel or modify them in any way. - Never attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units. - For cleaning the horn pad or instrument panel, use only a soft, dry cloth or one moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could damage the airbag cover or change the stiffness or strength of the material so that the airbag cannot deploy and protect properly. - Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the airbag system. - All work on the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seats or electrical system (including the installation of audio equipment, cellular telephones and CB radios, etc.) must be performed by a qualified technician who has the training and special equipment necessary . - For any work on the airbag system, we strongly recommend that you see your au thorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. - Never modify the front bumper or parts of the vehicle body . - Always make sure that the side airbag can inflate without interference: - Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that have not been specifically approved by Audi. - Never use additional seat cushions that cover the areas where the side airbags inflate. system - Damage to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer . - The airbag system can deploy only once. After an airbag has been deployed, it must be replaced with new replacement parts designed and approved especially for your Audi model version. Replacement of complete airbag systems or airbag components must be performed by qualified workshops only. Make sure that any airbag service action is entered in your Audi Warranty & Maintenance booklet under AIRBAG REPLACEMENTRECORD. - For safety reasons in severe accidents, the alternator and starter are separated from the vehicle battery with a pyrotechnic circuit interrupter. - Work on the pyrotechnic circuit interrupter must only be performed by a qualified technicians who have the experience , information and special tools necessary to perform the work safely. - If the vehicle or the circuit interrupter is scrapped, all applicable safety precautions must be followed. @ For the sake of the environment Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners might be classified as Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modules and safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regulations must be observed . Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you. Other things that can affect Advanced Airbag performance Changing the vehicle 's suspension system can change the way that the Advanced Airbag System performs in a crash . For example, using tire -rim ..,. 203 Airb a g syste m combinations not approved by Audi, lowering the vehicle, changing the stiffness of the suspension, including the spr ings, suspension struts , shock absorbers etc. can change the forces that are measured by the airbag sensors and sent to the electronic control unit . Some suspens ion changes can, for example, increase the force levels measured by the sensors and make the airbag system deploy in crashes in wh ich it would not deploy if the changes had not been made. Other kinds of changes may reduce the force levels measured by the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploying when it should. A WARNING Changing the vehicle's suspension including use of unapproved tire-rim combinations can change Advanced Airbag performance and increase the risk of serious personal injury in a crash. - Never install suspension components that do not have the same performance characteristics as the components or iginally insta lled o n your veh icle. - Never use tire-rim comb inations that have not been approved by Audi. Knee airbags Description of knee airbags The knee airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occupants. . height in the instrument panel underneath the glove compartment. The knee airbag offers add itional protection to the d river's and passenge r's knees and upper and lower thigh areas and supp lements the protection provided by the safety belts . If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also deploy in frontal collis ions when the deployment threshold stored in the cont rol unit is met ¢ page 19 7, More important things to know about front airbags. In addition to their normal safety funct ion, safety belts help keep the driver or front passenge r in position in a frontal collision so that the airbags can provide supplemental protection. The airbag system is not a substit ute for your safety belt . Rather, it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle . Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wear ing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is why you should always wear your safety be lt, not just because the law requires you to do so ¢ page 180, Gener- al notes . Remember too, airbags will deploy only once and on ly in certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are a lways there to offer protection in those accidents in which a irbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already dep loyed, for example when your veh icle strikes or is st ruck by another after the first collision . This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the safety be lt . The airbag system wo rks most effectively w hen used with the safety belts. Therefo re, always wear your safety belts correctly . Fig. 159 Driver's knee air bag The driver knee a irbag is in the instrument panel underneath the steering wheel ¢ fig. 159, the a irbag for the passenger is at about the same 204 It is impor t ant to remembe r that whi le the supplemental knee airbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries , other injuries, for example, swelling, bruising and minor abrasions and friction burns can also occur when an a irbag inflates. The knee airbag system basically consists of: - The e lectron ic cont rol mod ule IJ> Airb a g sys tem - Two inflatab le airbags (airbag and gas generator), one for the driver and one for the front passenger - The airbag indicator light in the overhead conso le The knee airbag system will not deploy: - when the ign ition is switched off - in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is too low - in side collisions - in rear-end collisions - in rollovers - in the event of a system malfunction (warning/ indicator light is on) c;;.page 15. A WARNING - Safety belts and the a irbag system can only provide protection when occupants are in the proper seating position c:>page 197. - If the airbag indicator light c:;;.page 15 comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immed iately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the a irbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not infla t e when it shou ld. How knee airbags work The risk of injury to the leg area can be reduced by fully inflated knee airbags. If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also deploy in frontal collisions when the deployment threshold stored in the control un it is met. When the system deploys, t he a irbags fill with a propellant gas, and inflate between the lower part of the instrument panel and the driver and the lower part of the instrument panel and the front passenger c;;. page 197, fig. 157. Although they are not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower extrem ities. All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags a lso inflate with a great deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in their way when they deploy. Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow down and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce the risk of injury . Important safety instructions on the knee airbag system Airbags are only supplemental restraints . Always wear safety belts correctly and ride in a proper seating position. The re is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags to provide supp lemental protect ion. A Fig. 160 Inflated airbags protect ing in a fronta l collision .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I The knee airbag system has been designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger deploy in certa in but not all frontal collisions. WARNING An inflat ing knee a irbag can cause se rious injur y. Wear ing safety be lts inco rrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious pe rsonal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. - The knee airbag system cannot protect yo u properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting their seat positions, it is important that both the driver and the front passenger keep their upper bodies and knees at the fo llow ing minimum safe d istances : 205 Airbag syste m - at least 10 in (25 cm) between the chest and the steering wheel/instrument panel. - at least 4 in (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. - The risk of personal injury increases if you lean forward or to the s ide, or if the seat is improperly positioned and you are not wearing your safety belt. The risk increases even more should the a irbag deploy. - Always make sure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference . Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an acciden t by interfer ing with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys. - Never let anybody, especially chi ldren or an imals ride in the footwell in front of the passenger seat . If the a irbag deploys, this can result in serious or fatal injuries. - Never carry objects of any kind in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat . Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can interfere with or prevent prope r deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrown t hrough the ve hicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers. - Make s ure there are no cracks, deep scratches or other damage in the area of the instru ment panel where the knee a irbags are located . - If children are incorrect ly seated, their risk of injury increases in a collision ¢ page 212, Child safety. Side airbags Description of side airbags The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occupants. Fig. 161 Side air bag locatio n in t he dr iver's seat The side airbags are located in the sides of the front seat backrests Q fig. 161 facing the doors. They are identified by the word "AIRBAG". The side airbags installed for the front seating positions have been designed and certified to help reduce the risk of injury that can be caused by a irbags when they inflate, particularly when the occupant sitting next to it is not seated properly . The side airbag for the front passenger seat can be used with properly installed ch ild restraints. Please be sure to read the important informat io n and warn ings whenever using a ch ild restraint in a vehicle: Safety bel t s ¢ page 180, Airbag system ¢ page 188, Child safe ty ¢ page 212. The side airbag system basically consists of: - the electronic control module and external side impact sensors - the two side airbags located in the sides of the front backrests - the airbag warning light in the overhead console. The airbag system is mon itored electron ically to make certain that it is functioning proper ly at a ll times. Each time you turn on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics) . 206 IJ,, Airb a g sys tem The side airbag system supplements the safety be lts and can help to reduce the risk of injury to the dr iver's and front passenger's upper torso on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a side collision . The airbag deploys in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough . If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control u nit, the side a irbags will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a resu lt of the collision. It is not possible to define an a irbag triggering range that will cover every possi ble ang le of impact, since the circumstances will vary considerably between one coll ision and an other. Important factors include , for example , the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the ang le of impact, vehicle speed, etc . c::,page 208, Important safety instructions on the side airbag system . Aside from their normal safety function, safety be lts work to he lp keep the driver or front passenger in pos it ion in the event of a side collision so that the s ide a irbags can provide protection . The airbag system is no t a substitute for your safety belt . Rather, it is part of the overall occu pant restraint system in your veh icle . Always remember that the side airbag system can only he lp to protect yo u if you a re wea ring your safety be lt and wea ring it properly. This is another reason why you shou ld always wear your safety be lts, not just because the law requires you to do page 180, General notes. so c::> you r safety belts are always there to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed . The side airbag system w ill not deploy : - when the ignit io n is switched off - in side collisions whe n the acceleration measured by the sensor is too low - in front-end coll isio ns - in rear-end collisions - in rollovers . In some types of accidents the front airbags, side curtain airbags and side airbags may be triggered together . A WARNING - - Safety belts and the airbag system will only prov ide protect ion when occupants are in the proper seat ing pos ition c::>page 208. - If the airbag ind icator light c::> page 15 comes when the veh icle is being used, have the system inspected immedia t ely by your author ized Audi dealer. It is possib le t hat the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or w ill not inf late w hen it should. How supplemental side airbags work Side airbags deploy ins tantly and can help reduce the risk of upper torso injuries for occupants who ore properly restrained. It is important t o remember that while the s upplemental side ai rbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injur ies, other injuries, for example, swelling, bruising, friction burns and minor abrasions can a lso be associated with deployed side a irbags. Remember too , side airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of acc idents - your safety belts are always there to offer protection . .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage are not necessarily an indication of over-sensitive or failed airbag activation . In some coll is ions, both front and s ide a irbags may inflate. Remember too, that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of coll is ions - Fig. 162 Inflated side airba gs on left side of vehicle When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam in the seat s urface area marked "AIRBAG". It expands between the side trim panel a nd the .,. 207 Airb a g syste m passenger. In order to he lp provide this add itional protection, the side airbag must inflate within a fraction of a second at very high speed and w ith great force. The supplemental side airbag could injure you if your seating position is not proper or upright or if items are located in the area where the supplemental side airbag expands . This applies especially to children q page 212, Child safety. Supplemental side ai rbags inf late be tween the occ upan t and the door pane l on the side of the vehicle that is struck in certa in side collision qfig . 162. Although they are not a sof t pillow, they ca n "cushion" the impact and in t his way they can he lp to reduce the risk of injury to the upper part of the body . A fine dust may deve lop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle. Important safety instructions on the side airbag system Airbags ore only supplemental restraints . Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position. There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and act accord ingly to help the safety be lts and airbags do the ir job to provide supplemental protection. A WARNING An inflating side airbag can cause serious or fatal injury. Improperly wearing safety belts and improper seating positions increase the risk of se rious personal injury and death w henever a vehicle is being used. - In order to reduce the risk of injury when the supplemental side airbag inflates: - Always sit in an upright position and never lean aga inst the area where the s upplemental side airbag is located. - Never let a chi ld or anyone else rest their head against the side trim panel in the area where the supp lemental s ide airbag inflates. 208 - Always make sure that safety belts are worn correctly, - Do not let anyone sitting in the front seat put their hand or any other parts of their body out of the window. - Always make sure that the side airbag can inflate w ithout interference. - Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery ove r the front seatbacks that have not been specifica lly approved by Audi. - Never use addi t ional seat cus hions that cover the areas where the side airbags deploy . - Damage to the orig inal se at cove rs or to the seam in the area of t he side airbag module must a lways be repaired immedi ate ly by an authorized Audi dealer. - Objects be tween you and t he airbag can increase the ris k of injury in an acc ident by interfering with the way the airbag unfolds or by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates. - Never place or attach accessor ies or other obje cts (s uch as cup ho lde rs, telephone bracke t s, or even la rge, bu lky objec t s) on the doors, over or near the area marked "AIRBAG" on the seat backrests . - Such objec t s and accessories can be come dange rous projecti les and cause injury when the supplemental side airbag deploys. - Never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags or allow children or other passengers to trave l in this position. - Always use the built-in coat hooks only fo r lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that may inte rfere with s ide a irbag deployment a nd can cause personal injury in an accident . - Always prevent the side airbags from being damaged by heavy objects knocking against or hitting the sides of the seatbacks. - The a irbag system can only be triggered once . If the airbag has been triggered, the system must be replaced by an autho rized Audi dea le rship. ~ Airb a g sys tem - Damage (cracks, deep scratches etc.) to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side a irbag module must always be repaired immed iately by an authorized Audi dealer. - If children are seated improperly, their risk of injury increases in the case of an acc ident ¢ page 212, Child safety . - Never attempt to modify any components of the a irbag system in any way. - In a side collision, s ide airbags will not function properly if sensors cannot correctly measure increasing air pressure inside the doo rs when air escapes through larger, unclosed open ings in the door panel. - Never drive with interior door trim pane ls removed. - Never drive when parts have been removed from the inside door panel and the openings they leave have not been properly closed. - Never drive when loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the speaker ho les have been properly closed. - Always make certain that openings are covered or filled if additiona l speakers or other equ ipment is installed in the inside door panels. - Always have work on the doors done by an author ized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Side curtain airbags Description of side curtain airbags The side curtain airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants. Fig. 1 63 Side curta in airbags, dr iver's side: side curtain airbag locat ion The side curtain airbags are located on both sides of the inter ior above the front and rear side windows ~ fig. 163. They a re identified by the word "AIRBAG"on the windshie ld frame and the cente r roo f pilla r. The side curtain airbags contain features that provide ejection mitigation to help prevent veh icle occupants or parts of their bodies from be ing complete ly or part ially ejected from the veh icle interior in certain side impacts and vehicle roll overs. The side curtain airbag system supplements the safety belts and can help to reduce the risk of injury for occupants' heads and upper torso. The side curtain airbag inflates in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough. If this rate is below the reference va lue programmed into the control unit, the side curtain airbag will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a resu lt of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag t rigge ring range that will cover every poss ible angle of impact, since the circumstan ces will vary considerably be twee n one collis ion and another. Important factors include, for examp le, the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. ~ page 210, How side curtain airbags work . 209 Airbag syste m Aside from their normal safety function, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front passenger in posit ion in the event of a collision so that the side curtain airbags can provide protection . A WARNING - Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide protect ion when occupants are in the proper seating position ¢ page 44, Seats and storage. The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather , it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wear ing it properly . This is another reason why you should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so ¢ page 180, General notes . It is important to remember that while the s ide curtain airbag system is des igned to help reduce the likel ihood of serious injuries , other injuries, for example, swel ling , bruising, fr iction burns and minor abrasions can also be associated with these airbags upon deployment . Remember too, these airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of acc idents - your safety belts are always there to offer protection. - If the airbag ind icator light ¢ page 15 comes when the veh icle is being used, have the system inspected imm edia t ely by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible t hat the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inf late when it should. How side curtain airbags work Side curtain airbags can work together with side airbags to help reduce the risk of head and upper torso injuries for occupants who are properly restrained. The side curtain airbag system basically consists of: - The electronic control module and external side impact sensors - The side curtain airbags above the front and rear side windows with ejection mitigation features - The airbag indicator light in the instrument panel The airbag system is monitored electronically to make certain it is functioning properly at all times. Each time you switch on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics). The side curtain airbag is not activated: - if the ignition is switched off, - in s ide collisions when the acceleration measured by the sensor is too low, - in rear-end collisions. Fig. 164 Illustratio n of principle: Inflated s ide curta in airbags on t he left side The side curtain airbags inflate between the occupant and the w indows on the side of the veh icle that is struck in a side collision ¢ fig. 164 . When the system is tr iggered, the side curta in airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam above the front and rear side windows identified by the AIRBAGlabel. In order to help provide this additional protection, the side curtain airbag must inflate within the blink of an eye at very high speed and with great force . The side curtain airbag could injure you if your seat ing position is not proper or upright or if items a re located in the area where the supplemental side cu rt ain airbag inflates. This applies especially to chi ldren¢ page 212. Although they are not a soft pillow, side curtain airbags can "cush ion" the impact and in this way .,. 210 Airbag they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is quite normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle. Important safety instructions on the side curtain airbag system Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position. There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to provide supplemental protection. A WARNING Improperly wearing safety belts and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used . - Never let occupants place any parts of their bodies in the area from which the side curtain airbag inflate. -Always make sure that the side curtain airbags can inflate without interference. - Use the built-in coat hooks only for lightweight clothing . Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that may interfere with airbag deployment and can cause personal injury in a collision. - Never use hangers to hang clothes on the hooks. - Only use factory-installed sun shades or, if shades installed after the vehicle leaves the factory, use only genuine Audi sun shades. - Never swing the sun visors over to the side windows if things such as pens, garage door openers, hands-free speakers, etc. are attached to the sun visors. They could come loose and cause serious injury if the side curtain airbag inflates. -A deploying airbag inflates in a fraction of a second and with great force. - Never attach objects to the cover or in the deployment zone of a side curtain airbag. system - The airbag deployment zones must be kept clear at all times. Make sure there are no objects, pets, or other persons in the space between any vehicle occupant and any airbag at any time. - Do not attach any accessories to the doors. A .....__ WARNING - The airbag system can deploy only once. If the airbag has been triggered, the system must be replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. - Always have work involving the side curtain airbag system, removal and installation of the airbag components, or other repairs performed by a qualified dealership. Otherwise the airbag system may not work correctly. - Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way. 211 Child safety Child safety Important information Introduction The rear seat is generally the safest place in a collision. The physical principles of what happens when your vehicle is in a crash apply also to children page 182, What happens to occupants not wearing safety belts? . But unlike adults and ¢ teenagers, their muscles and bones are not fully developed. In many respects children are at greater risk of serious injury in crashes than adults . Because children's bodies are not fully developed, they require restraint systems especially designed for their size, weight, and body structure. Many countries and all states of the United States and provinces of Canada have laws requiring the use of approved child restraint systems for infants and small children . In a frontal crash at a speed of 20-35 mph (30-56 km/h) the forces acting on a 13 lbs (6 kg) infant will be more than 20 times the weight of the child. This means the weight of the child would suddenly be more than 260 lbs (120 kg). Under these conditions, only an appropriate child restraint properly used can reduce the risk of se rious injury . Child restraints, like adult safety belts, must be used properly to be effective . Used improperly, they can increase the risk of serious injury in an accident. Consult the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions in order to be sure the seat is right for your child's size ¢ page 215, Important safety instructions for using child safety seats . Please be sure to read and heed all of the important information and WARNINGS about child safety, Advanced Airbags, and the installation of child restraints in this chapter. There is a lot you need to know about the Advanced Airbags in your vehicle and how they work when infants and children in child restraints are on the front passenger seat . Because of the large amount of important information, we cannot re- 212 peat it all here. We urge you to read the detailed information in this owner's manual about airbags and the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle and the very important information about transporting children on the front passenger seat. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers, especially infants and small children. .&_WARNING - Accident statistics have shown that children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seating position. Always restrain any child age 12 and under in the rear. - All vehicle occupants and especially children must be restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact . An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag. -A suitable child restraint properly installed and used at one of the rear seating positions provides the highest degree of protection for infants and small children in most accident situations. .&_WARNING Children on the front seat of any car even with Advanced Airbags can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates. - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest , center armrest, or door. -Always install rear-facing child safety seats on the rear seat . - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat in Ch ild safety exceptional circumstances and the PASS ENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immed iately install the rear-fac ing child safety seat in a rear seating pos it ion and have the airbag system inspected immediately by your Audi dealer . A - WARNING - Forward-fac ing child seats installed on the front passenge r seat may inte rfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serious persona l injury to the child . - If except ional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat , the child's safety and well-being require the following special precautions to be taken: - Always make sure that the forward -facing seat has been designed and cert ified by its manufacture r fo r use on a front passenger seat with a front and s ide airbag. - Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child seat or infant carrier. - Never install a child restraint without a properly attached top tether st rap if the child restrain t manufacturer's instructions require the top tether strap to be used . - Never put the forward-facing child restra int up against or very near the instru ment panel. - Always move the passenger seat into its rearmost position in the sea t 's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible before insta lling the child restraint. The backrest must be adjusted to an upr ight position . - Always make sure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from be ing moved to the rearmost posit ion in its fore and aft adjustment range . - Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, powe r inverter or seat heater for child seats) . These may influence the electr ical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenge r detection system and can - - - - - - also fly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury. Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket . If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherw ise added to the front passenger seat, never insta ll any child restraint system on this seat. Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towe l) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cush ion. Always make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the forward -facing child seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer. Always buckle the child seat firmly in place even if a child is not s itting in it. A loose child seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in a collision . Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restraint in a vehicle ¢ page 180, Safety belts, ¢ page 188, Airbag system and ~ page 212, Impor- tant information . (D Tips Always replace child restraints that were installed in a vehicle during a crash . Damage to a child restraint that is not vis ible could cause it to fai l in another collision situat ion. Advanced front airbag system and children Your vehicle is equ ipped with a front "Advanced Airbag Syst em" in compl iance wit h United St ates Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) ..,. 21 3 Child safety 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured . The Advanced Airbag system in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low-risk" requirements for 3- and 6-year old children on the passenger side and small adults on the driver side. The low risk deployment criteria are intended to reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag that can occur, for example, by being too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates. In addition, the system has been certified to comply with the "suppression " requirements of the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag for infants up to 12 months who are restrained on the front passenger seat in child restraints that are listed in the Standard . Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children , especially those 12 years and younger, should always ride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward -facing child safety seat . It can be a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat. The vehicle's Advanced Airbag System has a capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat cushion that can detect the presence of a baby or a child in a child restraint system on this seat. The capacitive passenger detection system regis ters the changes that result in an electrical field when a child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket are on the front passenger seat. The change in the measured capacitance due to the presence of a child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket on the front passenger seat is related to the child restraint system resting on the seat. The measured capacitance of a child restraint system varies depending on the type of system and specific make and model. The electrical capacitance of the various types , makes, and models of child restraints specified by the U.S.National Highway Traffic Safety Ad- 214 ministration (NHTSA) in the relevant safety standard are stored in the Advanced Airbag System control unit together with the capacitances typical of infants and a 1-year old child. When a child restraint is used on the front passenger seat with a typical 1 year -old infant, the Advanced Airbag System compares the capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system with the data stored in the electronic control unit . Child restraints and Advanced front airbag system Regardless of the child restraint that you use, make sure that it has been certified to meet United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and has been certified by its manufacturer for use with an airbag . Always be sure that the child restraint is properly insta lied at one of the rear seating positions . If in exceptional circumstances you must use it on the front passenger seat, carefully read all of the information on child safety and Advanced Airbags and heed all of the applicable WARNINGS. Makecertain that the child and child restraint are correctly recognized by the capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat, that the front passenger airbag is turned off, and that the airbag status is always correctly signaled by the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light. Many types and models of child restraints have been available over the years, new models are introduced regularly incorporating new and improved designs and older models are taken out of production. Child restraints are not standardized. Child restraints of the same type typically have different weights and sizes and different "footprints", the size and shape of the bottom of the child restraint that sits on th e seat, when they are installed on a vehicle seat. These differences make it virtually impossible to certify compliance with the requirements for advanced airbags with each and every child restraint that has ever been sold in the past or will be sold over the course of the useful life of your vehicle. For this reason, the United States National High way Traffic Safety Administration has published a .,. Ch ild safety list of specific type, makes and models of child restraints that must be used to certify compliance of the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle with the suppression requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. These child restraints are: Subpart A - Car bed child restr aint s Model Manufactured on or after Ange l Guard Angel Ride AA2403FOF September 25, 2007 Subpart B - Rear-f acing child restr aint s Model Manufactured on or after Century SmartFit 4S43 December 1, 1999 Cosco Arriva 22-013PAW and base 22-999WHO September 2S, 2007 Evenflo Discovery Adjust Right 212 December 1, 1999 Evenflo First Choice 204 December 1, 1999 Graco Infant 84S7 December 1, 1999 Graco Snugride September 2S, 2007 Peg Perego Primo Viag- September 2S, 2007 gio SIP IMUNOOUS Subpart C - Forward-facing and convertibl e child rest raint s Model Manufactured on or after Britax Roundabout E9L02xx September 2S, 2007 Cosco Touriva 02S 19 December 1, 1999 Cosco Summ it Deluxe High Back Booster 22-262 September 2S, 2007 Cosco High Back Booster 22-209 September 25, 2007 Evenflo Tribute V 379xxxx September 2S, 2007 Evenflo Medallion 254 December 1, 1999 Model Manufactured on or after Evenflo Generat ions 352xxxx September 25, 2007 Graco ComfortSport September 25, 2007 Graco Toddler Safety Seat Step 2 September 25, 2007 Graco Platinum Cargo September 25, 2007 A WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and stays on whenever a child restra int is installed on the front passenger seat and the ign it ion is switched on. - Take the child restra int off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light does not stay on. - Have the airbag system inspected by your author ized Audi dealer immed iate ly. (D Tips The child seats listed in categor ies A to C have been statically tested by Audi only for the Advanced Airbag function. Important safety instructions for using child safety seats Correct use of child safety seats substantially reduces the risk of injury in an accident! As the dr iver, you are responsib le for the safety of eve rybody in the vehicle, especia lly children: .. Always use the right child safety seat for each child and always use it properly ¢ page 218. .. Always carefully follow the chi ld safety seat manufact urer 's instructions on how to route the safety belt properly th rough the ch ild safe ty seat. .. When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you must first activate the convertib le locking retractor on the safety belt to prevent the child safety seat from moving ¢page 223. ..,. 215 Child safety "' Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward and sideways more than 1 in (2.5 cm). "'Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat c>page 217 . Always remember: Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should always ride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size . _& WARNING Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperly installing a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. - All vehicle occupants and especially children must be restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle . An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag . - Commercially available child safety seats are required to comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 213 (in Canada CMVSS213). - When buying a child restraint, select one that fits your child and the vehicle. - Only use child restraint systems that fully contact the flat portion of the seat cushion. The child restraint must not tip or lean to either side. Audi does not recommend using child safety seats that rest on legs or tube-like frames. They do not provide adequate contact with the seat . - Always heed all legal requirements pertaining to the installation and use of child safety seats and carefully follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the seat you are using . - Never allow children under 4 ft 9 in (57 in/ 1.45 m) to wear a normal safety belt. However, the rear seat in the TT Coupe is de- 216 signed to permit children who are between 4 ft 3 in (1.3 m) and 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) tall to use the available three-point lap and shoulder safety belts . - Never let more than one child occupy a child safety seat. - Never let babies or older children ride in a vehicle while sitting on the lap of another passenger . - Holding a child in your arms is never a substitute for a child restraint system . - The strongest person could not hold the child with the forces that exist in an accident. The child will strike the interior of the vehicle and can also be struck by the passenger. - The child and the passenger can also injure each other in an accident. - Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag Sys- tem. - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. - Always install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat . - Forward-facing child safety seats installed on the front passenger's seat can interfere with the airbag when it inflates and cause serious injury to the child. Always install forward-facing child safety seats on the rear seat . - If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-being require that the following special precautions be taken: - Make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. .,,_ Child safety .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I - Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier. - Always move the front passenger seat into the rearmost position of the passenger seat's fore and aft adjustment range, and as far away from the airbag as possible before installing the child restraint. - Always make sure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmost position in its fore and aft adjustment range. - Always make sure that the backrest is in the upright position. - Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. - If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat . - Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion. - Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can also fly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury. - Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in a collision. - Always read and heed all WARNINGSwhenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used¢ page 180, Safety belts, ¢ page 188, Airbag system and ¢ page 212, Child safety. A - WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight comes on and stays on whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on. - Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on. - Have the airbag system inspected by your author ized Audi dealer immediately. Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat Fig. 16S Schematic overview: keep unused safety belts away from children in child safety seats. - outer rear safety belt, If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench, especially with LATCHuniversal lower anchorages, the unused safety belts must be secured so that the child in the child restraint cannot reach them~ .&.- Fasten the unused safety belt behind the child seat and let the belt retractor wind up the safety belt webbing. A WARNING A child in a child safety seat installed with the LATCHlower anchorages or with the standard safety belt or a child in a booster seat on the rear seat could play with unused rear seat safety belts and become entangled. This could cause the child serious personal injury and even death. - Always secure unused rear seat safety belts out of reach of children in child seats such 217 Child safety as by fastening the unused safety belt behind the ch ild seat and letting the belt retractor wind up the webb ing. Child seats Infant seats Babies and infants up to about one year old and 20 lbs or 9 kg need special rearward-facing child restraints that support the back, neck and head in a crash. dangerous place for an infant or a larger chi ld in a rearward-facing seat. A WARNING Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong chi ld safety seat or improperly installing a chi ld restraint increases the risk of ser ious personal injury and death in a crash. - Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat - even with an Advanced Airbag System . A child will be serious ly injured and can be killed whe n the inflating ai rbag hits the child safe ty seat or infant car rier with g reat force and smashes the child safe ty seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof¢ page 189, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know. Fig. 166 Schemat ic overview: rea rward-facing infant seat, properly installed on the rear seat • When using the vehicle safety be lt to install a child safety seat, you must first activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety be lt to prevent the child safety seat from moving ¢ page 223 . • Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety be lt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward and sideways more than 1 in (2.5 cm). • Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat ¢ page 217. Infants up to about one year (20 lbs or 9 kg) are best protected in spec ia l infant carriers a nd child safety seats des igned for their age group. Many experts believe t ha t infants and small children should ride only in spec ial restraints in which the child faces the back of the veh icle. These infant seats support the baby's back, neck and head in a crash ¢ fig. 166. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front sea t is not the safest place for a chi ld in a forward -facing child seat. It is a very 218 - Always install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat. - Never install a rear-facing ch ild restraint in the forward-facing direction. Such restraints are designed for the special needs of infants and very small children and cannot protect them properly if the seat is forward-facing. - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances a nd the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear -facing child safety seat in a rear seating posi t ion and have t he airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer . - Never place or use any e lectr ical dev ice (such as a lap t op, CD playe r, e lectron ic games device, power inver ter or seat heater for chi ld seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. - If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restra int system on this seat. - Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cush ion. Ill> Child safety - Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can also fly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury. -Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used r:'.> page 180, Safety belts, r:'.>page188, Airbag system and r:'.>page212, Important information. Convertible child safety seats Properly used convertible child safety seats con help protect toddlers and children over age one who weigh between 20 and 40 lbs (9 and 18 kg) in a crash. r:'.> page 223 or install the seat using the LATCH attachments. .. Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than 1 in (2 .5 cm) r:'.> page 223 . "' If the child safety seat is equipped with a tether strap, attach it to the tether anchors r:'.> page 228. "'Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat r:'.> poge 217. A toddler or child is usually too large for an infant restraint if it is more than one year old and weighs more than 20 lbs (9 kg). Toddler s and children who are older than one year up to about 4 years old and weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) up to 40 lbs (18 kg) must always be properly restrained in a child safety seat certified for their size and weight r:'.>fig. 167 and ¢ fig. 168. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. It is a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat. _& WARNING Fig. 167 Schematic overview: installation of the attach - ments applicable to a LATCHseat Fig. 168 Schematic overview: insta llat ion of th e seat using the vehicle's safety belt system .. When using the vehicle safety belt to install a .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I child safety seat, you must first activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to prevent the child safety seat from moving -Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperly installing a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision or other emergency situation. - Children on the front seat of any car, even with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System . - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center arm rest, door or roof. 219 Ch ild s afet y - Always install rear -facing child safety seats on the rear seat. - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not come on and stay on, immed iate ly install the rear-fac ing ch ild safety seat in a rear seat ing pos ition and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. - The rear side of the child safety seat should be pos itioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat. - Always read and heed all WARNINGSwhenever using a child restrained in a veh icle is being used ~ page 180, Safety belts, ~ page 188, Airbag system and ~ page 212, Important information. A - - - WARNING If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well -being require that the follow ing spec ial precaut ions be taken: - Make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and cert ified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. - Always follow the manufacturer's instruct ions prov ided with the ch ild safety seat or infant carrier. - Always move the front passenger seat into the rearmost position of the passenger seat's fore and aft adjustment range, and as far away from the airbag as possible before install ing the child restra int. - Always make sure that nothing prevents the front passenge r's sea t from being moved to the rearmost posi t ion in its fore and aft adjustment range . - Always make sure the backrest is in an upright posit ion. - Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, elect ronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat 220 - - - if the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restra int system on this seat. Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cush ion . Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electron ic games device, power inverter or seat heater for ch ild seats) . These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detect ion syst em and can also fly aro und in an accident and cause se rious personal injury . Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and stays on a ll the time wheneve r the ignit ion is swit ched on . If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not come on and stay on, immediately install the forward -facing child seat at a seating position on the rear seat and have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer. Take the child restra int off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on . Child safety Booster seats and safety belts Properly used booster seats can help protect children weighing between about 40 lbs and 80 lbs (18 kg and 36 kg) who are less than 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) tall. Fig. 169 Rear seat; child proper ly restrained in a booster seat The vehicle's safety belts alone will not fit most children until they are at least 4 ft 9 in (57 in/ 1.45 m) tall and weigh about 80 lbs (36 kg). Booster seats ra ise t hese children up so that the safety belt will pass properly over the stronger parts of their bodies and the safety belt can help protect them in a crash. .,.Do not use the convertible locking retractor when using the vehicle's safety belt to restrain a child on a booster seat. .. The shoulder belt must lie as close to the center of the child's collar bone as possible and must lie flat and snug on the upper body. It must never lie across the throat or neck . The lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen . Make sure the belt lies flat and snug. Pull on t he belt to tighten if necessary . .,.Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat ~page 217. .... N a: Children up to at least 8 years old (over 40 lbs or 18 kg) are best protected in ch ild safety sea ts designed for their age and weight. Experts say that the skeleta l structure, particularly the pelvis, of these children is not fully developed, and they must not use the vehicle safety belts without a suitable child restraint. It is usually best to put these children in appropriate booster seats. Be sure the booster seat meets a ll applicab le safety standards . Booster sea t s raise the seating posi t ion of the child and reposition both the lap and shou lder parts of the safety belt so that they pass across the child's body in the right places. The routing of the belt over the child's body is very important for the child's protection, whether or not a booster seat is used . Children age 12 and under m ust always ride in the rear seat. Never use the lap belt port ion of the vehicle's safety belt alone to restrain any child, regardless of how big the child is. Always remember that children do not have the pronounced pe lvic structure required for the proper funct ion of lap belt portion of the vehicle's t hree point lap and shoulder belts. The child's safety absolutely requires that a lap belt portion of the safety be lt be fastened snugly and as low as possible around the pelvis. Never let the lap belt portion of the safety belt pass over the child's stomach or abdomen. In a crash, airbags must inflate within a blink of an eye and with considerab le force. In order to do its job, the airbag needs room to inflate so that it will be there to protect the occupant as the occupant moves forward into the airbag . A vehicle occupant who is out of position and too close to the a irbag gets in the way of an inflating airbag. When an occupant is too close, he or she will be struck violently and will receive serious or possibly even fata l injury. In order for the airbag to offer protect ion, it is important that all vehicle occupants, especially any ch ildren , who must be in the front seat because of exceptiona l circumstances, be properly restrained and as far away from t he airbag as poss ible. By keeping room between the child's body and the front of the passenger compartment, the airbag can inflate comp letely and provide supplementa l protection in certain frontal collisions . CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 221 Child safety A Not using a booster seat, using the booster seat improperly, incorrectly installing a booster seat or using the vehicle safety belt improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision or other emergency situation. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury and/or death: - The shoulder belt must lie as close to the center of the child's collar bone as possible and must lie flat and snug on the upper body. It must never lie across the throat or neck. The lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen . Make sure that the belt lies flat and snug. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. - Failure to properly route safety belts over a child's body will cause severe injuries in an accident or other emergency situation ¢ page 180. - The rear side of the child safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat . - Children on the front seat of any car, even with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. - Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat, for example the front seat . - Never let a child ride in the cargo area of your vehicle. - Always remember that a child leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way during an accident can be struck by a deploying airbag. This will result in serious personal injury or death. - If you must install a booster seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light must come on and stay on, whenever the ignition is switched on. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described ¢ page 199, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System. - Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR 222 BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever WARNING the ignition is switched on. - Always read and heed all WARNINGSwhenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used¢ page 180, Safety belts, ¢ page 188, Airbag system and ¢ page 212, Important information. ' Booster seats on the rear seat Children who are about 7 years and older, who weigh more than 55 lbs (25 kg) and are not taller than 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) are best protected when properly restrained on the rear seat. Due to limited rear seat head clearance children 4 ft 3 in (51 in/1.30 m) and taller must not use booster seats on the rear seat of your Audi TT Coupe. The rear seat of your Audi TT Coupe has been specially designed to permit children who are between 4 ft 3 in (51 in/1.30 m) and 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) tall (about 7 to 12 years old) to use the available three -point lap and shoulder safety belts . A WARNING - - The rear seat area is too small to safely transport passengers taller than 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m). - Persons taller than 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) as well as children in booster seats who are too close to the rear window and roof can suffer severe head and neck injuries when the rear lid is closed or in a crash. - The minimum clearance between the passengers' heads and the rear window must never - under any circumstances - be less than lin(2.5 cm.) when the passengers sits fully upright. - Always make sure that the rear seat passengers cannot be struck when the rear lid is closed. Booster seats on the front seat Children aged about 7 years and older and weighing more than 55 lbs (25 kg) who are between 4 ft 3 in (51 in/1.30 m) and 4 ft 9 in (57 in/ 1.45 m) tall may in exceptional circumstances ..,. Ch ild safety ride on the front passenger's seat . Children less than 4 ft 9 in (57 in/1.45 m) tall must sit on a cert ified booster seat and properly wear the veh icle's three-point lap and shoulder safety belt. Always securely latch the passenger seat at the very rear of its fore and aft adjustment range. The backrest must be adjusted to an upright position . A WARNING If you must install a booster seat child restraint on the front passenger seat: - Make sure the booster seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. - Always follow the manufacturer's instruct ions prov ided with the booster seat. - Always move the passenger seat to the very rear of its fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible . - Always make sure that the passenger seat is securely latched in place before installing the booster seat. The backrest must be adjusted to an uprig ht posit ion. - If the passenger seat cannot be securely latched in the very rear of its fore and aft adjustment range, then the passenger front airbag must be turned off with the ON/ OFF switch. Securing child seats Securing a child safety seat using a safety belt Safety belts for the rear seats and the front passenger can be locked with the convertible locking retractor to properly secure child safety seats. The safety belts emergency locking retractors for the rear seats safety belts and for the front passenger's seat safety belt have a convertible locking retracto r for child restraints . The safety belt must be locked so that belt webbing can not unreel. The retractor can be activated to lock the safety be lt and prevent the safety belt webbing from loosening up during normal driving. A child safety seat can only be properly installed when the safety be lt is locked so that the chi ld and child safety seat will stay in place . Always remembe r: Even though your veh icle is equipped wit h an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especia lly those 12 years and younger, shou ld a lways ride in the back seat proper ly restrained for their age and size . A WARNING Improperly installed child safety seats increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision. - Always make sure that the safety be lt retractor is locked whe n installing a child safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor cannot hold the ch ild safety seat in place du ring normal d riving or in a crash. - Always buckle the ch ild safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitt ing in it. A loose child safety seat can fly a round dur ing a sudden stop or in a collision. - Always make sure that the rear seat backrest is secu rely latched whenever the rear safety belt is being usedto securea child restra int . - If the backrest is not se curely latched, the chi ld and t he child rest raint will be thrown forward together wit h the backrest and will strike parts of the vehicle interior. The child can be seriously injured or killed. - Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat. A child w ill be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger a irbag inf lates. - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carr ier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child aga inst the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. - Always install rear-fac ing child safety seats or infant car riers on the rear seat . - Forward-facing child safety seats or infant carriers installed on the front passenger's seat may interfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serio us injur y to the child. 223 Child safety - It is safer to install a forward-facing child safety seat on the rear seat. - Always read and heed all WARNINGSwhenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used ¢ page 212 . Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat ¢ page 189, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know . A A - Always move the passenger seat into its rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible before installing the forward-facing child restraint. The backrest must be adjusted to an upright position . - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. 224 Forward-facing child restraints: - Always make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag . - Never put the forward-facing child restraint up, against or very near the instrument panel. WARNING Always take special precautions if you must install a forward or rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat in exceptional situations: - Whenever a forward or rearward-facing child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light must come on and stay on whenever the ignition is switched on . - If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described ¢ page 199, Monitoring the AdvancedAirbag System. - Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on . - Improper installation of child restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection . - An improperly installed child restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child . - Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier. -After checking to make sure that the child restraint is properly installed, make certain that the child restraint is correctly recognized by the capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat and that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light signals the correct front passenger frontal airbag status. WARNING - A WARNING Rearward-facing child restraints: - A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. -Always be especially careful if you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances . - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. - If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. Ch ild safety Activating the convertible locking retractor Use the convertible locking retractor to secure a child restraint. Always heed the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions when installing a child restraint in your veh icle. To act ivate the convertible locking retractor: "' Place the child restraint on a seat, preferably on the rear seat. "' Slowly pull the belt all the way out . "' Route it around or through the child restraint belt path c::> "' Push the child safety seat dow n with your fu ll weight t o get the safety be lt rea lly t ight. "' Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that seating position. "' Guide the safety belt back into the retractor un ti l the belt lies flat and snug on the child safety seat. "' You should hear a "clicking" no ise as the belt winds back into the inertia reel. Test the convertib le locking retractor by pul ling on the belt . You should no longer be able to pull the belt out of the ret ractor. The convertible locking ret racto r is now activated . "' Make sure that the red release button is facing away from the child restraint so that it can be unbuckled quick ly. "' Pull on the be lt to make sure the safety belt is properly tight and fastened so that the seat cannot move forward and s ideways more than 1 in (2.5 cm) . .&.- A WARNING Using the wrong child restraint or an improperly installed child rest raint can cause ser ious personal injury o r death in a cras h. - Always ma ke sure that the safety belt ret racto r is loc ked when install ing a child safety seat . An unloc ked safety belt retractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during norma l driving or in a crash. - Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in a crash. - Always make sure the seat backrest to which the child restraint is installed is in an upright position and securely latched into place and cannot fold forward. Otherw ise, the seatback with the child safety seat attached to it could fly forward in the event of an accident or othe r emergency s ituation. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS wheneve r us ing a child restrained in a vehicle is be ing used c::>page 212. Special precautions apply when install ing a child safety seat on page 189, Child the front passenger seat c::> restraints on the front seat - some important things to know . Deactivating the convertible locking retractor The convertible locking retractor for child restraints will be dea ctivated automatically when the belt is wound all the way back into the retractor . "' Press the red button on the safety belt buckle. The belt tongue will pop out of th e buckle. "' Guide the safety belt all the way back into its stowed posit ion . Always let the safety belt retract completely into its stowed posit ion. The safety be lt can now be used as an ord inary safety belt without the convertib le locking retractor for child restraints . If the convertible locking retractor should be act ivated inadvertently, the safety belt must be unfastened and guided completely back into its stowed position to deactivate th is feature . If the convertible locking retractor is not deactivated, the safety belt will g radually become t ighter and uncomfortab le to wear. A WARNING Improperly installed child safety seats increase the risk of serious persona l injury and death in a collision. - Never unfasten the safety belt to deactivate the convertible locking ret ractor fo r child restraints wh ile the vehicle is moving. You 225 .,. Child safety would not be restrained and cou ld be seriously injured in an accident . - Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used ¢ page 212 . Special precaut ions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat c>page 189, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know . LATCH system (Lower anchorages and tethers for children) Child Restraint System anchors and how are they related to child safety To provide a simpler and more practicable way to attach the child restraint on the vehicle seat, Federa l regulations require special lower anchorages in vehicles and devices on new child restraints to attach to the vehicle anchorages . The combination of the tether anchorages and the lower anchorages is now generally called the LATCH system for "Lower Anchorages and Tethers for Ch ildren." In Canada, the terms "top tether" with "lower universal anchorages" (or "lower universal anchorage bars") are used to describe the system . Forward-facing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These new performance requirements make a tether necessary on most new child seats. In addition to the LATCHlower anchorages, these child restraint systems usually require the use of tether straps to help keep the child restra int firmly in place. A WARNING Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury and death in a crash . - Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the ch ild restraint you inte nd to install in your vehicle . - Never install a child restraint without a properly attached top tether strap if the child restra int manufacture r's instructions require the t op tether st rap to be used. - Improper use of child restraint LATCHlower anchorage points can lead to injury in a collision. The LATCH lower anchorage points are designed to withst and only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints . - Never mo unt t wo child rest raint systems on one LATCH lowe r an chorage point. - Never secure or atta ch any luggage o r othe r item to the LATCH lowe r an chorages. (D Tips - In Canada, the terms "t op tether" with "lower universal anchorages" (or "lower universa l anchorage bars") a re used to describe the system. - In other countries, the term "ISOFIX" is used to descr ibe the lower anc horages. Location Instal ling a child restraint that requ ires a top tether without one can serious ly impair the performance of the child restraint and its ability to protect the chi ld in a collision. Install ing a child restraint that requires a top tether without the top tether may be a violation of state law. Child restraint manufacturers offer LATCHlower anchorages on their ch ild seats with hook-on or push-on connectors attached to adjustable straps . 226 Fig. 1 70 Schemat ic overview : LATCH ancho rage point loca· t ions 1111- Ch ild sa f ety The illustration shows th e seating locations in your vehicle wh ich are equ ipped with the lower un iversal anchorages system. Description The lower anchorage positions are marked for quick locating. All child restra ints manufactured after Septem ber 1, 2002, must have lower anchorage attachments for the LATCHsystem. Please remembe r that the lower anchorage points are on ly intended for insta llation and attachment of child restraints specifica lly cert ified for use with LATCH lower anchorages. Child restraints tha t are not equipped w ith the lower anchorage att a chments can still be installed in compliance with the chi ld restraint manufactur er's instructions on usi ng vehicle safety belts. A Fig. 171 Lowe r ancho rage s, covers marked WARNING - Imp roper use of LATCHlower a ncho rages can cause ser ious perso nal injury in an accident. - Always carefully follow the ch ild rest raints manufacture r's instructions for proper installat ion of the child restraint and proper use of the lowe r an cho rages or safety belts in your vehicle. - Never secure or atta ch any luggage o r other items to the LATCHlowe r an chorages . - Always read and heed the important info rmat ion about ch ild res tr aints in th is chapter a nd WARNI NGS 9 page 212, Child safety. Fig. 172 Rear seats: lower anc horage bracket locatio ns Low er anchorages The circular markings on the rear seat help you to ident ify the locat ion of lower anchorages for the two outboard seating pos itions 9 fig . 171 . The LATCH lower universal anchorage attachment points are between the rear seatback and rear seat cus hion . Installing a child restraint with LATCH lower anchorages Whenever you install a child restraint always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instruc tions . Remove the covers 9 fig . 171 to access the lower anchorage attachment po ints. The lower anchorage attachment ble 9 fig. 172 . .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I points are visi- Lower anchorages secure the child restraint in t he seat without using the vehicle's safe ty belts . Anchorages provide a secure and easy -to -use at tachment and m inim ize the possibility of imprope r ch ild restraint insta llation . Fig . 1 73 Lower a nchorages: proper mou nt ing Mounting ., Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in the upright pos ition and secure ly latched in place . 227 Ii" Child safety • Attach both hook-on connectors with the spring catch re lease on the chi ld safety seat onto the LATCHlower anchorage so that the connectors lock into place c>fig. 173. • Pull on the connector attachments to make sure they are properly attached to the LATCH lower anchorage . • Pull straps tight following the child restra int manufacturer's instr uctions . Tether anchors and tether straps Releasing • Loosen the tension on the straps following the child restraint manufactu rer 's instructions. • Depress the spring catches to release the anchorage hooks from the lower anchorages. Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the child restraint firmly in place . A WARNING Improper use of the LATCHsystem can increase the risk of serio us pe rsonal injury and death in an accident. - These anchors were deve loped only for child safety seats using the "LATCH" system. - Never attach other child safety seats, belts or othe r objects to these anchors . - Always make sure that you hear a click when latch ing the seat in place. If you do not hear a click the seat is not secure and could fly forward and hit the inte rior of the vehicle, or be ejected from the vehicle . A WARNING Improper installation of ch ild restraints will increase the risk of injury in an accident. - Always follow the child restra int system manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint system and proper use of tether straps as well as the lower anchorages or safety belts in your vehicle. -Always read and heed the important information and WARNINGS about child safety and the installation of child restraint systems c>page 212, Child safety. 228 Fig. 174 Tether an chors : attachment hook location s behind t he rear seatbac ks The tether anchors for t he rear seat ing positions are located on the backside of the rear seat backs . A tether is a straight or V-shaped strap that attaches the top par t of a chi ld restrain t to special an chorage points in the vehicle . The purpose of the tether is t o reduce the forward movement of the child restrain t in a crash, in order to help reduce the risk of head injury that cou ld be caused by striking the vehicle interior. Forward facing child restra ints manufac t ured afte r September 1, 1999 , are requi red by U.S. federa l reg ulations to comply with new child head movement performance req uirements . These new performance requ irements make a tether necessary on most new child safety seats. A WARNING Improper installation of child restra ints w ill increase the risk of injury and death in a crash . - Always follow t he instructions provided by the manufacturer of the ch ild restraint you intend to install in your Audi. - Improper use of chi ld restraint anchors (including tether anchors) can lead to injury in a collision . The anchors are designed to wit hstand only those loads imposed by corre ctly fitted ch ild restraints. - Never mo unt two child rest raint systems on one LATCH lowe r anchor point. Ill- Ch ild sa f ety - Never attach two child restraint systems to one tether strap or tether anchorage. - Never attach a tether strap to a tie-down hook in the luggage compartment. - Never use child restraint tether anchorages to secure safety belts or other kinds of occupant restraints. - Never secure or attach any luggage or other items to the LATCHlower anchorages or to the tether anchors. - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptiona l circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immed iately install the rear-fac ing ch ild safety seat in a rear sea t ing posit ion and have the airbag system inspected by you r Audi dealer. Installing the upper tether strap on the anchorage .,.Guide the upper tether strap into the rear cargo area ~ fig. 176 . "' Slide the tether strap hook over the anchor bracket. "' Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring catch of the hook engages. "' Tighten t he tether strap firm ly following the child restra int manufacturer's instructions . Releas ing the tether strap "' Loosen the tension follow ing the child restraint manufacturer's instructions . "' Depress the spr ing catch on the hook and release it from the anchorage . (D Note If you leave the child restra int with the tether strap firmly installed for several days, this could leave a mark on the upholstery on the seat cushion and bac krest in the area where the te t her strap was inst alled . The uphols t ery would a lso be permane ntly stretc hed around the tether st rap . This applies especia lly to leather seats . Using tether straps on rearward-facing child restraints Fig . 175 Tether strap: proper rout ing and mount ing Currently, few rear-facing child restraint systems come with a tether . Please read and heed the child restr aint system manufacturer's instr uct ions caref ully t o dete rmine how to properly install the tether. A Fig. 176 Tether strap: proper rout i ng and mount ing .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Installing the tether strap "' Release or deploy the tether strap on the child restra int according to the child restra int manufactu rer's inst ruct ions. WARNING A child in a rearward -facing child safety seat insta lled on the front passe nger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - The inflating airbag will hit the ch ild safety seat o r infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, or door . - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the 229 Child safety PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immed iate ly install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seat ing position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer . Additional information Sources of information about child restraints and their use There are a number of sources of addit ional information about child restra int selection, installation and use: NHTSA advises that the best child safety seat is the one that fits your child and fits in your vehicle, and that you will use correctly and consistently. Try before you buy! U.S National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9 15 3) www.nhtsa.gov National SAFE KIDS Campaign Tel. : (202) 662-0600 www .safekids.org Safety BeltSafe U.S.A Tel.: (800) 745-SAFE (English) Tel. : (800) 747-SANO (Spanish) www .carseat .org Transport Canada Information Centre Tel.: 1-800-333-0371 or call 1-6 13-9 98-8616 if you are in the Ottawa area http://www.tc.gc .ca/ eng/roadsafety/menu.htm Audi Customer Relations Tel.: (800) 822-2834 230 Checking Checking and Filling {!) Fuel and Filling Tips The vehicle can be filled wit h fue l that has a higher octane rating than w hat is requ ired by the eng ine . Gasoline grade The correct gasoline grade is stated on the inside of the fuel filler door . Blended gasoline The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converte r and must only be d riven w it h unleaded gasoline. Use of gasoline containing alcohol or MTBE (methyl tertiary butyl ether) Aud i recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Additiona l information on TOP TIER Deter gent Gasoline can be found on the offic ial website (www .topt iergas.com). You may use unleaded gasoline blended with alcohol or MTBE (commonly referre d to as oxygenat es) if the blende d m ixt ure m eets the fo llow ing crit eria : The individ ua l gasoline grades a re differentiated by octane ratings . Th is value is given with (R+M)/ 2 equating to AKI or in RON. Blend of gasoline methanol (wood alcohol or methyl alcohol) The fo llow ing headings ma t ch t he correspon d ing sticker in the fue l filler door . UNLEADED FUEL ONLY MIN. (R+M)/2 Regula r / MIN. RON 91 Regular 87 Use reg ula r gaso line wit h minim um 8 7 AKI / 91 RON~ 0 - Anti-knock index must be 87 AKI or higher. - Blend must contain no more than 3% methanol. - Blend must contain more than 2% co-solvents. . The m aximum engine power is only reache d if prem ium gaso lin e 91 AKI/ 95 RON is used . UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN . (R +M )/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95 Using prem ium gaso line wit h minim um 91 AKI/ 9 5 RON is recommende d . If premium gasoline is not availab le, yo u can also use reg ular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. Howeve r this does reduce t he engine powe r slight ly. CDNote - Filling the tank just one t ime with lead ed fuel or ot her meta llic additives will cause perm anen t de t er io rat ion to the ca t alyti c conve rt er fu nct ion . - W hen gas oline wit h an octa ne rat ing th at is t oo low is used, high speed s or he avy eng ine load can lea d t o eng ine da m age. Blend of gasoline and ethanol (grain alcohol or ethyl alcohol) - Ant i-kno ck ind ex mus t be 87 AKI or hig her. - Blend must not co nta in mo re than 15% ethanol. Blend of gasoline and MTBE - Anti-knoc k index must be 87 AKI or higher . - Blend mus t contain no t mo re t han 15% MTBE. Seasonally adjusted gasoline Many gasoline grades are blended to pe rform especially well for w inter or summer dr iving . Dur ing seasonal cha nge-ove r, we sugges t that yo u fill up at busy gas stat ions where the seasonal adjus t me nt is mo re like ly to be m ade in t ime . CDNote - Met ha nol fuels which do not meet these requireme nts may cause cor rosion and damage to p last ic and rubbe r co m pon en t s in t he fue l sys t e m . - Do not use f ue ls t ha t fa il to m ee t the specifie d cr ite ria in thi s chapte r. 231 .,.. Checking and Filling - If you a re unable to determine whether or not a particular fuel blend meets the specifications, ask your service station or its fuel supplier. - Do not use fuel for which the contents cannot be identified. - Fuel system damage and performance problems resulting from the use of fuels different from those specified are not the responsibility of Audi and are not covered under the New Vehicle or the Emission Control System Warranties. - If you experience a loss of fuel economy or driveability and performance problems due to the use of one of these fuel blends, we recommend that you switch to unblended fuel. Gasoline additives A major concern among many auto manufacturers is carbon deposit build-up caused by the type of gasoline you use. Although gasoline grades differ from one manufacturer to another, they have certain things in common. All gasoline grades contain substances that can cause deposits to collect on vital engine parts, such as fuel injectors and intake valves. Although most gasoline brands include additives to keep engine and fuel systems clean, they are not equally effective . Audi recommends using TOPTIERDetergent Gasoline. For more information on TOPTIERDetergent Gasoline, please go to the official website (www.toptiergas .com). After an extended period of using inadequate fuels, carbon deposit build-ups can rob your engine of peak performance. (D Note Damage or malfunction due to poor fuel quality is not covered by the Audi New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 232 Refueling ' Fuel filler neck The fuel filler neck is located on the right rear side panel behind the fuel filler flap . If the power locking system should fail, you can still open the flap manually - for detailed instructions see ~ page 235. You can find the fuel tank capacity of your vehicle in ~ page 299. The label on the inside of the fuel filler flap tells you the correct fuel for your vehicle. For more information about fuel specifications, see ~ page 231. Your vehicle fuel tank has an on board refuelling vapor recovery system. This feature helps to prevent fuel vapors from escaping from the tank and polluting the environment while you refuel your vehicle. In order to fill the tank properly while protecting the environment, please follow this refueling procedure carefully. .8, WARNING Under normal operating conditions, never carry additional fuel containers in your car. Gas canisters and other containers used to transport fuel can be dangerous. Such containers, full or empty, may leak and could cause a fire in a collision. If you must transport fuel to use for your lawn mower, snow blower, etc ., be very careful and always observe local and state laws regarding the use, transportation and storage of such fuel containers. Make certain the container meets industry standards (ANSI/ASTMF852 - 86). CI) Note Never drive your vehicle until the fuel tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring. Gasoline could enter the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter. Checking Fueling procedure Fig. 177 Right rear vehicle side: opening the fue l filler door Fig. 178 Engaged fue l pump nozz le The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the central locking system . .. Press on the fuel filler door to open -arrowQ fig. 177. Your vehicle comes with a new tank system without a cap. .. Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the tank filler neck ~ fig. 178. Make sure it is cor rectly locked in place . .. Begin fueling. Once the pump no zzle switches off, the fuel tank is "full" . Do not fill the t ank more . Otherwise the expansion space in the tank will be filled . .. Pull the pump nozz le out of the tank filler neck five seconds after it has switched off, so that the rest of the fuel can flow out of the pump nozzle into the filler neck. .. Close fuel filler door until it latches. .... N a: CX) The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be found on a label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. For additional information on fuel re' fer to ¢ page 231. .... The fuel tank capacity of your vehicle is listed in .... the Technical Data section ¢ page 299 . I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I and Filling .&_WARNING Not paying attention when fueling or handling fuel incorrectly can lead to fires, explo sions or serious injur ies. - Fuel ign ites easily and can cause serious burns and other injuries . - If you do not switch the engine off when fueling and/or do not insert the fuel nozzle completely into the tank opening, fuel can leak out or run over . Leaked fuel can ignite and start a fire. - Do not use the telephone while fueling . The electromagnetic rays can cause sparks, which can ignite fuel vapors and start a fire. - Do not sit in your vehicle wh ile fueling. If you must make an exception and enter your veh icle aga in while fueling, close the door and touch metal to d ischarge static electricity before touching the fuel nozzle . Static electricity can create sparks, which can ignite vapors when fueling. - Do not smoke or have an open f lame in the area when fueling your vehicle or filling a fuel container because this increases the risk of an explosion. - For your safety, carrying fuel containers in your vehicle is not recommended. Whether full or empty, the container can leak and cause a fire in the event of an acc ident . - If you must make an exception and transport a fuel container, note the following : - Never fill the fuel container with fuel while it is in or on the vehicle . Static e lectricity is discharged when filling which can cause the fuel vapors to ignite and increases the risk of an exp losion . -Always place a fue l container on the ground before fill ing . - Always hold the fuel nozzle completely in the fuel container when filling . - If the fuel container is made of metal, the fuel nozzle must always be in contact with the container when filling it with fuel. This prevents static electricity from discharging . - Never spill fuel in the vehicle or the luggage compartment. Evaporated fuel is 233 Che ck ing and Filling explosive and increases the risk of serious injury or death. - Follow legal requirements when usi ng, storing and transporting fuel containers. - Make sure the fue l container conforms to industry standards (ANSI/ASTM F852-86). (D Note - Remove any overflow ing fuel from the vehicle paint immediately. - Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty. The irregular supp ly of fuel that resu lts from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel will enter the exhaust system and increase the risk of damage to the catalytic converter. @ Fueling with reserve canister (emergency fueling) For the sake of the environment If the fue l nozzle is used correct ly, it will indicate that the tank is full the first time it sw itches off automatica lly. Do not try to add more fuel, because it can spill over. Also, the expansion space in the tank will f ill, which can res ult in fuel sp illing out when it becomes wa rm and po lluting the environment. (D case, try turning the nozzle before inserting it in the fuel filler neck, use a different fuel pump or see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. - The misfueling guard does not open when adding fuel from a fuel container. When refueling with a reserve canister, you must use the fu nnel stored in the luggage compartment c::>page 234, fig. 179. Fig. 179 Luggage compa rtment: funnel Tips If adverse weather conditions cause the fuel filler door to freeze shut, press on the center of the fi ller doo r with the hee l of you r hand and then t ry opening it again. (D Tips - If the engine is run ning while fueling, vapors can escape or the fuel can spill ove r. Because of th is, the fuel nozzle swit ches off before t he tank is full. - Do not fue l t he vehicle when t he ignition is swi t ched on. Otherwise, the fuel ga uge may not show t he cor rect level aft er fueli ng the vehicle . - Your vehicle is equipped wit h a misfueling g uard . It allows the veh icle t o be fueled only with the correct fuel pump nozzle. - A wo rn or dam aged nozzle or a noz zle t hat is too sma ll may not be ab le to open the diesel misfueling protector. If this is the 234 Fig. 180 Fuel tank filler neck with the mounted funnel Read and follow the impo rt ant safety precautions c::> _& in Fueling procedure on page 233. .,..Press on the fuel filler door to open -arrowc::,page 233, fig . 177. .,..Remove the cargo floo r c::> page 2 75. .,..Remove the plastic floor pane l c::>page 51, fig. 54. .,..Remove the funnel from the luggage compart ment . .,..Insert the funnel into the tank filler neck all the way until it stops c::>fig. 180. Make sure that the ring on the funnel goes into the fuel tank filler neck. ..,.. Checking .. Guide the reserve canister filler tube into the funnel and start the emergency fueling. .. Remove the funnel after refueling and close the fuel filler door so that it latches shut. CDNote Remove any overflowing fuel from the vehicle paint immediately. Fuel filler door emergency release If the fuel filler door lock is faulty, the fuel filler door con be unlocked manually. "' 0 "' 0 ~ IIl and Filling The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critically important for the life of the catalytic converter and proper funct ion ing of the eng ine. -A WARNING - The temperature of the exhaust system is high, both when driving and after stopping the eng ine. - Never touch the exhaust tail pipes once they have become hot . This could result in burns. - Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot exhaust system may come in contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or other material which can cause a fire . - Do not apply additional undercoating or rustproofing on or near the exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or heat shields. During driving, the substance used for undercoat ing could overheat and cause a fire. CDNote Fig. 181 Luggage compa rtment: cover in the right side trim pa nel .. Open the luggage compartment lid. .. Lift the cargo floor. .. Loosen the strap from its holder and pull on it carefully Qfig . 181. Catalytic converter It is very important that your emission control system (catalytic converter) is functioning properly to ensure that your vehicle is running in on environmentally sound manner. .. Always use lead-free gasoline Q page 231, Gas- oline grade . .. Never run the tank down all the way to empty. .. Never put too much motor oil in your engine Q page 240, Adding engine oil "t::r.. .. Never try to push- or tow-start your vehicle. .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I The catalytic converter is an efficient "clean-up" device built into the exhaust system of the vehicle. The catalytic converter burns many of the pollutants in the exhaust gas before they are released into the atmosphere . - Be aware that just one tank filling with leaded fuel will already seriously degrade the performance of the catalyti c converter . - Do not exceed the correct engine oil level Qpage240 . - Do not drive until the fuel tank becomes completely empty. The engine could misfire. Unburned fuel could also get into the exhaust system and this could cause the catalytic converter to overheat. - Do not switch off the ignition wh ile the vehi cle is moving. - Do not continue to operate your vehicle under these conditions, as otherwise fuel can reach the catalytic converter. This could result in overheating of the converter, requiring its replacement . - To assure efficient operation of the Emission Control System: - Have your vehicle maintained properly and in accordance with the serv ice recommendations in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet. - Lack of proper maintenance as well as improper use of the vehicle will impair the 235 IJJ, Ch e ck ing and Filling function of the emission control system and could lead to damage . @ For the sake of the environment Even when the Emission Cont rol System is operating properly, the exhaust gas can have a sulfur-like exhaust gas smell under some operat ing states. This depends on the su lfu r content of the fuel be ing used. Using a different brand of fue l may he lp, or filling the tank with lead -free super grade gasoline . Engine compartment Working in the engine compartment Special care is required if you are working in the engine compartment For work in th e engine compartment such as checking and filling fluid s, ther e is a risk of injury, scalding , accidents, and burns. For this reason, follow all the following listed warnin gs and gene ral safety precaution s. The engine compartment is a dangerous area . ¢ &.. A - - - WARNING Turn the engine off. switch the ignition off. Set t he parking brake . Pla ce the selector leve r in the P pos it ion. Let the engine coo l down. Never open the hood when you see that steam o r coolant d rips from the eng ine compartmen t- there is a dange r of bu rns ! Wait unt il no steam or coolant flows out. Keep childre n away from the engine compartment. Never spill f luids on a hot engine . These fl uids (such as the freeze protection contained in the coolant) can catch fire. Avoid sho rt circu its in the electrical system, especially the battery. When working in the engine compartmen t , remem ber that the rad iator fan ca n sw itch on even if the ign ition is swit ched off , which increases t he risk of pe rsonal injury. 236 - Never open the cap on the coolant expansion tank when t he engine is warm . The cooling system is under pressure. - To protect your face, hands, and a rms from hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a large cloth when opening. - Do not remove the engine cover under any circumstances. This increases the risk of burns . - If tests need to be perfo rmed with the engine running, there is add itiona l danger due to mov ing components (such as the ribbed be lt, alternator and rad iator fan) and from the high voltage igni t ion system. - Do not unde r any circums t ances g ive gas inadver t ently (for example, by hand from the engine compartment) if the vehicle is station ary but the engine is runni ng a nd a gear is engaged. Othe rwise the ve hicle will st a rt to move imme d iately an d could result in a cras h. - Pay at tent io n to the following warnings list ed when work on the fue l system o r on the electrical equipment is required . - Always disconnect the vehicle battery from t he vehicle electrical system . - Do not smoke. - Never work near open flames. - Always have a working fire extinguisher nearby - To reduce the ris k of e lectr ic shock an d injury, never touch the follow ing components when the engine is running or is being started: - Ig nition cable - Other compone nts in the elec t ronic high voltage ignition system - If you must chec k or per form wo rk on the engine whi le it is ru nning: - Set the parking brake and place the selector lever in the P (park) pos ition first . - Always proceed with extreme caution so that clothing, jewelry or long hair do not become ca ught in the rad iator fan, fan belt or other moving components or do not come into contact with hot components . Tie back long hair befo re begin ning ~ Checking work and do not wear clothing that can hang down into the engine. - Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemicals to as short a time as possible <=> &,.. A Filling Opening the hood The hood is released from the interior . WARNING California Proposition 65 Warning: - Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm . In addition, certain fluids contained in veh icles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduct ive harm. - Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harms. Wash hands after handling . (y and Fig. 182 Driver footwell: relea se lever Fig. 183 Unlocked hood: lever Note When filling fluids, be sure not to mix the fluids up . Otherwise severe ma lfunctions and engine damage will occur. @JFor the sake of the environment You should regularly check the ground u nd er your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly . If there are visible spots from oil or other f luids, bring your vehicle to an author ized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility to be checked . Make s ure the wiper arms are not raised up from the windshie ld. Otherwise the paint could be damaged . .,.With the driver's door open, pull the lever below the instrument panel in the direction of the arrow <=> fig. 182 . .,. Raise the hood slightly ¢ A . .,. Press the leve r¢ fig. 183 in the d irection of the arrow. This releases the hooks. .,.Open the hood . A - WARNING Never open the hood when you see that steam or coolant drips from the engine compartment- there is a danger of burns! Wait until no steam or coolant flows out . Closing the hood .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I .,. Push the hood down until you overcome the force of the struts. .,. Let the hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not press it in. ¢ A . 237 ...,. Che ck ing and Filling _& WARNING If the hood is not latched completely , it could fly up while you are driving and obstruct your vision . - For safety reasons, the hood must always be closed secure ly wh ile driving. Because of this, always check the hood after closing it to make sure it is latched correct ly. The hood is latched if the front corners cannot be lifted. - If you notice that the hood is not latched while you are driving, stop immed iately and close it, because this increases the risk of an accident . Engine compartment overview The mos t important check points. Fig. 184 Typical layout of t he reservo ir and t he engine oil f iller open ing (D Coolant expansion tank (-t) ..... 242 cated in different places depending on the engine @ Engine oil dipstick ............ . 240 design. @ Engine oi l filler opening (9::::r.) . . . 240 244 @ Brake fluid reservoir ® ((0)) ....... Jumpstart point(+) unde r a cover, (-) body ground point .. ..... . . . 289 @ Fuse housing ... . ... .. . . . . . . . . 285 0 248 Washer fluid reservoir (W) . .. . . . The engine oil dipst ick and the engine oil f illing fig. 184 (items @ and @ ) may be loopen ing <=> 238 _& WARNING Read and fo ll ow all WARNINGS before checking anything in the eng ine compartment ~ page 236 . Checking Engine oil Engine oil specifications The engine oil used must conform to exact specifications. The service interval display in the instrument cluster of your vehicle will inform you when it is time for an oil change. We recommend that you have your oil changed by an authorized Aud i Service Advisor. If you have to top off the oil between oil changes, use the Audi oil quality standard specified in the table . Audi oil quality standard Gasoline engine VW 502 00 or vw 50400 Using the proper engine oil is important for the functionality and service life of the eng ine . Your engine was factory-filled with a high-quality oil which can usually be used throughout the entire year. (D Note Your Limited New Vehicle Warranty does not cover damage or malfunctions due to failure to follow recommended maintenance and use requirements as set forth in the Aud i Owner's Manual and Warranty & Maintenance booklet. - Use only a high quality eng ine oil that expressly complies with the Audi oil quality standard specified for your vehicle's engine . Using any other oil can cause serious engine damage. - Do not mix any lubricants or other additives into the engine oil. Doing so can cause engine damage. If you need to add oil and there is none available that meets the Audi oil quality standard your eng ine requires, you may add a total of no more than 0.5 qt/l of a high-quality "synthetic"oil that meets the follow ing spec ifications. and Filling - ACEAA3 or AP! SM with a viscosity grade of SAE OW-30, SAE SW-30 or SAE SW-40. - For more information about engine oil that has been approved for yo ur vehicle, please contact either your authorized Audi dealer or Audi Customer Relations at 1 (800) 822-2834 or visit our web site at www.audiusa.com or www.audicanada.ca. Engine oil consumption The engine in your vehicle depends on an adequate amount of oil to lubricate and cool all of its moving parts . In order to provide effective lubrication and cooling of internal engine components, all internal combustion engines consume a certain amount of oil. Oil consumption varies from eng ine to engine and may change significantly over the life of the engine. Typically, engines w ith a specified brea k-in period (see~ page 56) consume more oil dur ing the break-in per iod than they consume after oil consumption has stabilized. Under normal cond itions, the rate of oil consumption depends on the quality and viscos ity of the oil, the RPM (revolutions per minute) at which the engine is operated, the ambient temperature and road conditions . Further factors are the amount of oil di lution from water condensation or fuel residue and the oxidation level of the oil. As any engine is subject to wear as mileage builds up, the oil consumption may increase over time until replacement of worn components may become necessary. With all these variables coming into play, no standard rate of oil consumption can be established or spec ified. There is no alternative to regular and frequent checking of the oi l level, see Note . Ill If the yellow engine oil level warning symbo l in the instrument cluster lights up, you should check the oil level as soon as possible ~ page 240. Top off the oil at your ea rliest convenience~ page 240. 239 IJ>- Che ck ing and Filling _& WARNING Befor e you check anything in the engi ne compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS q page 236 . (D .,. Remove the oil dipstick. Wipe off the oil dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it all the way in aga in . .,. Remove the dipstick again and then read the oil level q fig. 185. Add eng ine oi l if necessary ¢ page 240 . Note Driving with an insufficient oil level is likely to cause severe damage to the engine. (Di Tips - The oil pressure warning display. is not an indicato r of the oil level. Do not rely on it. Instead , check the oil level in your engine at regular intervals, preferably each time you refuel , and always befo re going on a long trip. - If you have the impression your engi ne consumes excessive amounts of oil, we recommend tha t you consult an authorized Aud i dealer t o have the ca use of your con ce rn properly d iagnosed . Keep in mind that the accurate measurement of oil consumpt ion requires great care and may take some time. An authorized Audi dealer has instruc tions about how to measure oil consumption acc urately . 0 You must add o il. After adding oil, t he level shou ld be in the @ area. ® You may add oil. After adding oil, the level shou ld be in the @ area . @ Do not add any oil. The engine oil consumption may be up to 0.5 quart per 600 miles (0.5 liter/ 1,000 km) , depending on d riving sty le and operating conditions . Consumption may be higher dur ing the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Because of th is, the engine oil level m ust be checked regularly . It would be best t o check each time you refuel your vehicle and before long drives . Adding engine oil ~ Checking the engine oil level Fig. 186 Engine compa rtment: engine oil fi lle r opening cover Fig. 185 Guide for det erm ining l evels on t he oil dipst ick Determining the oi l level .,. Park you r vehicle on a level surface. .,. Let the eng ine run in id le br iefly whi le it is at operating temperatu re and then shut the engine off . .,.Wait approx ima t ely two m inu t es. 240 .,. Turn the engine off . .,. Unscrew the engine oi l filler opening cap~ r:!> fig.186, r:!> page238 , fig.184 . .,. Carefully add 0 .5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct oil ¢ page 239 . .,. Check the oil level again after two minutes ¢ page 240, Checking the engine oil level. .,.Add more o il if necessary . .,. Close the eng ine oi l filler cap and push the d ipstic k all the way in. .,.. Ch e c k ing an d Filling ,~A WARNING - When adding oil, do not let oil d rip onto hot engin e components. There could be ris k of a fire. - You must secure the cap on the oil filler o pening correctly so that oil does not leak out onto the hot eng ine and exhaus t system when the eng ine is running, because this is a fire hazard. - Always clean skin thorough ly if it comes into contact with engine oil. CDNote - The oil level must not be above the 0 range, because th is can cause damage to the catalyt ic converter or the eng ine. Contact an authorized Audi dea ler or author ized Audi Service Facility to have excess oil extracted if necessary. - Do not mix any additional lub ricants into the engine oil. Damage cause by such additives is not covered by the war ranty. @ For the sake of the environment - Oil should never ente r the sewer system o r come into contac t with the gro und. - Pay attention to legal requirements when dispos ing of empty oil containers. Changing the engine oil We recommend that have your oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service station. Before you check anyth ing in the eng ine compartment, alw ays read and heed all WARNINGS ~page 236. The engine oil must be changed accord ing to the intervals specified in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet. This is very important be cause the lub ricat ing propert ies of oil d iminish gradually d uring normal vehi cle use. stop-and -go traffic conditions, or have your veh icle where temperatures remain be low freezing for extended periods. Detergent add itives in the look dark after the engine short time . This is normal change the oi l more often oi l w ill make fresh oil has been running for a and is not a reason to than recommended . Beca use of the problem of prope r disposa l, along with the specia l tools and necessary expertise re quired, we strongly recommend that you have your oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or a q ualified service stat ion. If you choo se to change your oil your se lf, please note the following important information: A - WARNING To reduce the risk of persona l injury if you must change the eng ine oil in your vehicle yourself: - Wear eye protection. - To reduce the risk of burns from hot engine oil, let the engine cool down to the touch. - When remov ing the oil drain plug w ith your f ingers, stay as far away as possible. Always keep your forearm parallel to the ground to he lp prevent hot oil from running down your arm. - Drain the oil into a container designed for this purpose, one large enough to hold at least the tota l amount of oil in your engine. - Engine oil is poisonous. Keep it well out of the reach of children. - Continuous contact with used engine oil is harmful to your skin. Always protect your skin by washing oil off thoroughly with soap and water . CDNote Never mix oil additives with your engine oil. These additives can damage your engine and adverse ly affect your Audi limited New Vehicle Warranty. Unde r some circumstances the eng ine o il should be changed more frequently . Change oil mo re often if you d rive mostly short distances , ope rate the vehicle in dusty areas or under predominant ly 241 Checking @ and Filling For the sake of the environment - Before changing your oil, first make sure you know where you can properly dispose of the used oil. - Always dispose of used engine oil properly. Do not dump it on garden soil, wooded areas, into open streams or down sewage drains. - Recycle used engine oil by taking it to a used engine oil collection facility in your area, or contact a service station. Cooling system Coolant The engine coolant performs two functions: it keeps the engine from overheating and it protects the engine from freezing in the winter. The cooling system is sealed and generally requires little attention . The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a permanent coolant which does not need to be changed. The coolant consists of a mixture of specially conditioned water and the manufacturer's glycol-based coolant additive G13 antifreeze with anticorrosion additives (50% for USA models · 60% for Canadian models). This mixture ' both assures th e necessary frost protection and protects metal components in the engine's cooling system from corrosion a nd scaling. It also raises the boiling point of the coolant . Do not reduce the concentration of the coolant in the summer by adding plain water. The proportion of coolant additive must be at least 50% but not more than 60%, to maintain antifreeze protection and cooling efficiency . If the coolant frost protection is too low, the coolant could freeze and damage the vehicle heating and engine cooling system. If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water and coolant additive. Mixing the coolant additive with distilled water is recommended. _& WARNING Before you check anything in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS Q page 236. (D Note - Before winter sets in, have the coolant checked to see if the coolant additive in your vehicle is sufficient to meet the climate conditions . This is especially important if you live in a region where the winter is extremely cold . If necessary, increase the proportion of coolant additive to 60%. - When adding coolant additive to your cooling system, remember : - We recommend using only coolant additive G12++ or G13 (check the label) for your vehicle. This coolant additive is available at authorized Audi dealers. Other types of antifreeze can significantly reduce corrosion protection . The resulting corrosion can cause a loss of coolant and serious engine damage . - Do not add any type of radiator leak sealant to your vehicle's engine coolant . Adding radiator repair fluid may adversely affect the function and performance of your cooling system and could result in damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Adding coolant For year-round driving, antifreeze is added at the factory for temperatures down to: - - 31 °F ( - 3 5 °C) USA - - 40 °F ( - 40 °C) Canada. Fig. 187 Engine compart ment : coolant expansion tank cover 242 Ch e c k ing an d Filling Read and foll ow the WARNINGS before checking anything in the engine compartment c::> page236. Checking th e engine coolant level .,.Park your vehicle on a level surface . .,.switch the ignition off. .,.Read the coolant leve l on the coo lant expansion tank c::> page 238, fig . 184. The coo lant level must be between the markings when the en gine in cold. When the engine is warm it can be slightly above the upper marking. Adding coolant Requirement: there must be a residual amount of coolant in the expansion tank c::> (D. .,.Let the engine coo l down. .,.Place a cloth over the coolant expansion tank cap and unscrew the cap counterclockwise c::> A . .,.Add coolant mixed in the correct ratio ¢ page 242 up to the upper marking. .,.Make sure that t he fluid level rema ins stable . Add more coolant if necessary. .,.Close the cap securely . A coolant loss suggests a leak. Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility and have the cooling system inspected. If the cooling system is not leaki ng, a loss can come from the coolant bo iling through ove rheating and being pushed out of the cooling system . A WARNING - The cooling system is pressurized and can become very hot. To reduce the risk of burns from hot coolant : - Do not open the coo lant expansion tank cap with the engine hot. There is a risk of burns . - Stop the engine and allow it to coo l. - Protect your face, hands and arms from escaping coolant and steam by cove ring the coolant tank cap with a large, thick cloth . - Turn the coo lant tank cap counterclockwise slowly and keep light pressure on the cap. - To reduce the risk of burns , do not a llow any antifreeze or coolant to drip onto the exhaust system or hot engine components. The ethy lene glycol in engine coolant can catch fire under certain circumstances. - The coolant additive and the coolant can be dangerous to your health . For th is reason, keep the coolant in the original container away from children . There is a risk of poisoning . - When working in the engine compartment, remember that the radiator fan can switch on even if the ignition is switched off, wh ich increases the risk of persona l injury. (D Note Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is empty . Air could enter the cooling system and damage the eng ine . If this is the case, do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dea le r o r autho rized Audi Serv ice Facility for ass istance . Radiator fan The radiator fan switches on automatically by itself . An auxiliary e lectr ic radiator fan switches on and off depend ing o n coo lant temperature and other vehicle ope rating conditions. After you switch the eng ine off, the auxiliary fan can continue running for up to 10 m inutes - even with the ignition off. It can even switch on aga in later by itself¢ ,&., if - the temperature of the engine coolant rises due to the heat build-up from the engine in the engine compa rtment, or - the engine compa rtme nt heats up because the veh icle is parked in intense sunlight. .&_WARNING - - To redu ce the ris k of persona l injury never touch the radiato r fan . - The a uxiliary e lectr ic fan is temperatu re controlled and can switch on s uddenly even when the engine is not running. 243 Che ck ing and Filling - The auxiliary radiator fan switches on automatically when the engine coolant reaches a certain temperature and will cont inue to run until the coolant temperat ure drops . Brake fluid Checking brake fluid level Changing brake fluid Have the brake fluid changed by an experienced technician . Brake flu id absorbs moist ure from the air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, corrosion in the brake system may result after aperiod of time . The boiling point of the brake fluid will also decrease considerably and dec rease bra king performance. Therefore , the brake fluid must be changed every two years . Always use new brake f luid which confo rms to Federa l Moto r Vehicle Standard "FMVSS 116 DOT 4 ". Fig. 18 8 Engine compartment: cover on t he brake fl uid reservoir Before you check anything in the engine compartment, alway s read and heed all WARNINGS c:::> page236. ...Read the brake fluid level from the brake fluid fig. 188, c:::> page 238, fig . 184. The reservoir c:::> brake fluid level must be between the "MIN" and "MAX"markings. The location of the brake fluid reservoir can be seen in the engi ne compartment illustratio n c:::> page 238 . The fluid level may drop slightly after some time due to the automatic adjustment of the brake pads . This is not cause for alarm. If the brake fluid level fa lls considerably be low the "MIN" mark, the brake wa rning/ind icator (U.5. mode ls)/ . (Canadian mode ls) light page 11 . Do not contin ue to operwill come on c:::> ate the vehicle. The comp lete brake system should be thoroughly checked by an authori zed Audi deale r or other qualified facility and the cause corrected . If the brake fluid level is too low, the brake warning/ind icator light will illuminate. Cont act an aut horized Audi dealer immediately . 1111 244 The bra ke fluid reservoir can be difficult to reach , the refore, we recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by your author ized Audi dealer . Your dealer has t he correct tools, t he right brake fluid and the know-how to do t his for you. A WARNING - Brake fluid is poisonous. It must be store d only in the closed original container out of the reach of children! - Brake fai lure can result from old or inappropriate brake fluid . Observe these precautions: - Use only brake fluid that mee t s SAEspecification J 1703 and conforms to Federa l Motor Vehicle St andard 116. Always check wit h your authorized Audi dea ler to make sure you are using the correct brake f luid. The correct type of brake f luid is also indicated on the brake fluid reservo ir. - The brake fluid must be new . Heavy use of the brakes can cause a vapor lock if the brake fluid is left in the system too long . This can seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes as well as you r safety. This could result in an accident. (D Note Brake flu id will damage the paint of your vehicle . lilJJ, Checking @ For the sake of the environment Because of the prob lem of proper disposal of brake fluid as we ll as the special toots required and the necessary expertise, we recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by your authorized Audi dealer . Battery General information The battery in your Audi does not need any maintenance under normal operating conditions. Audi recommends having the e lectrolyte level check by an authori zed Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility when there are high outs ide temperatures or when driving all day . The electrolyte level should a lso be checked each time the battery is charged ¢ page 247. Have the battery checked when you bring your vehicle in for an inspection . It is a good idea to replace the battery if it is more than 5 years old . Sometimes when the airbags deploy, the battery will be disconnected from the vehicle electrical system for safety reasons ¢ .&.in Repair, care and disposal of the airbags on page 203 . Disconnecting the battery The battery shou ld not be disconnected. Several vehicle functions (power windows, for example) will be lost when the battery is disconnected . The functions must be reprogrammed after connecting the battery. To avoid th is, the battery shou ld only be disco nn ected from the vehicle e lectr ica l system when it is abso lutely necessary. Not running the vehicle for long periods of time If you do not drive your vehicle for several days or weeks, electrica l consumers are gradua lly scaled back or switched off . This reduces ene rgy use and ensures the vehicle will be able to start after long periods of time ¢ page 92. Some convenience functions, such as int erior lighting or pow er seat adjustment, may not be available under certain circumstances. These convenience functions will be available again once you switch the ign ition on and start the engine . and Filling Winter operation A lot of stress is placed on the battery during cold weather, which resu lts in reduced starting ability. Have the battery checked and recharged if necessary before the cold weather begins. A WARNING - - Work on the battery requires expert knowledge. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for information regarding the vehicle battery . There is a risk for chemical burns or explosions. - Never open the vehicle battery. Do not try to change the battery electrolyte level. Other· wise explosive gas will escape from the battery and increase the risk of an exp losion . Working on the battery Be especially careful when working on or near the battery. The battery is located in the luggage compartment under the floor . Before you check anything in the luggage compartment, read and heed all WARNINGS ¢ &, . Always heed the safety warnings, when working on the vehicle battery or the veh icle electrical system to prevent injury . The following WARNINGS are very important when working on the battery : Always heed the follow ing WARNING SYM· BOLSand safety precautions when working on the battery. ® Always wear eye protection. A Battery acid contains sulfuric acid. Al· ways wear gloves and eye protection. @ No · sparks • flames · smoking. 245 Ch e ck ing and Filling ~ Wh en a batt ery is charged, it produces hyd rogen gas whi ch is explo sive and could cause personal inju ry. ® A Alw ays keep th e batte ry well out of WARNING Whenever work ing on t he battery or on the electrical system, there is the risk of injury, accident and even fire . Read and heed the following WARNINGS: - Always wear eye protection. Do not let battery acid or any lead particles get on your sk in or cloth ing . Shield your eyes. Explosive gases ca n cause blindness or other injury. - Battery acid contains su lfuric acid. Sulfur ic acid can cause blindness and severe burns. - - - - Always wear gloves and eye protection . Do not tilt the battery because acid could leak out of the ventilat ion open ings. - If you get battery acid in your eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with cold water for several minutes and get medical attention . - If you should ingest any battery acid, seek medical attention immediately. Do not expose the battery to an open flame, electric sparks or an open light . Do not smoke. Do not interchange the positive and negative cables. When working on the battery, be sure not to short-circuit the terminals with tools or other metal objects. This would cause the battery to heat up very quickly, which could lead to damage or explosion and personal injury. When a battery is charged, it produces hydrogen gas which is explosive and could cause personal injury . Always keep the battery well out of the reach of children. Before work is done on the electrical system, disconnect the negative ground cable . Before performing any work on the electrical system, switch off the eng ine and ignit ion as well as any electrical equipment. The 246 - reach of childr en. - - - - - negat ive cab le on the battery must be disconnected. If you are just going to replace a light bulb, then it is enough to switch off the lights . Before d isconnecting the battery, switch off the anti-theft alarm system! Otherwise you will set off the alarm . When disconnecting the battery, first disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable . Before reconnect ing the battery, make sure all electr ical consumers are switched off . Reconnect the positive cable first and then the negative cable . Never interchange the cables - this could sta rt a fire! Never charge a frozen or a thawed-out battery. It cou ld explode! If a batte ry has fro zen, then it must be replaced. A discharged battery can freeze over at 32 °F (0 °C). Make sure the vent hose is always attached to the opening on the s ide of the batte ry. Never use batteries which a re damaged . There is t he danger of an exp losion! Always replace a damaged battery. A WARNING Califo rnia Proposition 65 Warning : - Batte ry posts, te rm inals and related accessories contain lead a nd lead compounds, chemicals known t o the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive problems . Wash hands after handling . (D Note - Do not disconnect t he vehicle battery when the ignition is on or when the engine is running, otherwise , you w ill damage e lectronic components in the e lectrical system. - If your veh icle is go ing to stand for a long period of time without being driven, protect the battery from "freezing" , otherwise it will be damaged and will then have to be replaced . Checking Charging the battery Battery charging connections are located in the engine compartment. and Filling It is not necessary to remove the battery from the luggage compartment, and it is a lso not necessary to disconnect the cables. Fast charging the battery (charging rate above 14.8 Volt s) For technical reasons do not use a battery charger that uses voltage greater than 14.8 Volts to charge your vehicle's battery. A = Fig. 18 9 Engine compartment: con hectors for a charger and jump sta rt cables • Read the warnings ¢ tery on page 246 and A in Working on the bat¢ ,&.. • Switch off the ign ition and all elec t rica l equipment. • Open t he hood ¢ page 23 7. • Open t he red cover on t he posit ive te rminal ¢ fig. 189 . • Clamp the charge r terminal clamps to the jump start pins according to the instructions. (pin under the red cover= "positive", pin with hexagonal head= "negative"). • Now insert the powe r cable for the charging device into the socket and switch the device on. • At the end of the charging process, switch the charge r off and pull t he power cab le out of t he socket. • Now remove the charg ing device termina l clamps. • Close the red cover on the positive terminal. • Close the hood ¢ page 237. A drained battery can freeze at temperatures around 32 QF(0 QC).A frozen or thawed out battery must no longer be used. The battery housing could be cracked by the formation of ice, which could cause battery acid to leak out ¢ .&.. Battery charging {Maximum charging rate of 30 amps / 14 .8 Volt) .... When charging at low voltages (e.g. with a trickN a: CX) le charger ), the battery cables do not have to be .... d isconnected first . The battery caps should not I.Cl .... be opened when charging a batte ry . I.Cl .... WARNING Charg ing a battery can be dangerous. - Always follow the operating instructions provided by the battery charger manufacturer when charging your battery. - Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a froze n battery to thaw out first. - Do not reuse batter ies which were frozen. The battery hous ing may have cracked and weakened when the battery froze . - Charge the battery in a well ventilated area. Keep away from open flame or electrical spark. Do not smoke. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explos ive. - To reduce the danger of explosion, never connect or d isconnect charger cables while the charge r is ope rating. - Fast charg ing a battery is dange rous and should only be at tempted by a competent technicia n with the prope r equipment. - Battery acid that may spill duri ng charging should be washed off with a so lution of warm wat er and baking soda to neutra lize t he acid. (D Note Never use a fast charge r as a booster to start the engine . This will se riously damage sensitive elec tr onic components, such as control units, re lays, radio, etc., as well as the battery cha rge r. (D Tips Only cha rge the battery th rough the connections in t he engine comp artment. U"I 247 Ch e ck ing and Filling Battery replacement The new battery must have the same specifications and dimensions as the original equipment battery. Intell igent energy management in your vehicle is responsible for distributing the electrical energy througho ut your vehicle ¢ page 92 . The intell igent ene rgy ma nagement system will keep the eng ine ba tte ry charged better tha n ve hicles with ou t th is system . To make su re the add it ional e lectrica l energy is avai lab le once again after you have changed the battery, we recommend that you insta ll batteries of the same type and manufacture only (the same as those insta lled at the time your ve hicle was delivered). Specificat ions are listed on the battery housing. Your authorized dealer must code the battery in the e nergy management system t o enable you to use the ene rgy management functions cor rectly after replacing the ba t tery. The new battery must have the same ca pacity, voltage (12-volts), ampe rage, construct ion and plug sealing. When insta lling the battery, make sure the ignition and all electrical consumers are sw itched off. CDNote Make sure the ventilation hose on the side of t he bat te ry is connected, ot he rw ise fumes or battery acid can leak out. @ For the sake of the environment Because of the prob lem of proper disposal of a ba t tery, we recommend your author ized Audi dea le r change t he battery fo r you . Batt er ies contain s ulfuric ac id a nd lead a nd must a lways be dis posed of prope rly in comp lia nce wit h a ll environmen t al regu lat ions. Dis posi ng of vehicle batteries impro perly is very dange rous to the e nvironment . 248 Windshield system washer Fig. 1 90 Engine compar tmen t: was he r f luid rese rvoir cap The windshield washer reservoir W contains t he cleaning so lution for the windshie ld and the headlight washer system * ¢ page 238, fig. 184 . The rese rvoir capacity is found in ¢ page 299 . To reduce the risk of lime scale depos its on the spray nozzles, use clean water with low amo unts of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the water. When the outside temperatures are cold, an anti-freez ing agent shou ld be added to the water so tha t it does not freeze . CDNote - The concentration of ant i-freez ing agent must be adjusted to the ve hicle operat ing conditions in the respective climate . A concen tr ation t hat is too high can lead to vehicle damag e . - Never add radia t or an t i-freeze or other addi t ives to the washer fluid. - Do not use a glass cleaner t hat contains pai nt so lvents, because t his can damage the pai nt . Checking Service interval and Filling display The service interval display detects when your vehicle is due for service. Fig. 191 Inst rument cluster display: se rvice interval d isplay (example) The service interva l display works in two stages: - Inspection or oil change reminder: after a certa in distance driven, a message appears in the Infotainment system display each time the ignition is switched on or off ¢ fig. 191 . The remain ing distance or time is displayed briefly. - Inspection or oil change due : if your vehicle has reached an inspection or oil change interval or both intervals at the same time, the message In spection due! or Oil change due! or Oil change and inspection due! appears briefly afte r switching the ignition on/off . Checking service inte rvals You can check the rema ining distance or time until the next oil change or next inspection. Select in the Infotainment system: the !MENU ! button> Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Service inte rvals. (D .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Note - Follow ing the service intervals is critical to maintain ing the service life and value of your vehicle, especia lly the engine . Even if the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not exceed the time for t he next service. - Calculating the t ime to the next o il change is interrupted when the vehi cle bat t ery is disco nnected. If the veh icle is not dr iven fo r a long period of time, check the ma inte nance sched ule so that you can follow t he maintenance intervals . 249 Wheels Wheels Whee l s a nd Ti r es General information .,.Check your tires regularly for damage (punctures, cuts, cracks and bulges). Remove foreign ob jects from the tire tread. .,.If driving over curbs or similar obstacles, drive slowly and approach the curb at an angle. .,.Have faulty tires or rims replaced immediately. .,.Protect your tires from oil, grease and fuel. .,.Mark tires before removing them so that the same running direction can be maintained if they are reinstalled . .,.Lay tires flat when storing and store them in a cool, dry location with as little exposure to light as possible. (D Tire designations Not e -Please note that summer and winter tires are designed for the conditions that are typical in those seasons . Audi recommends using winter tires during the winter months . Low temperatures significantly decrease the elasticity of summer tires, which affects traction 250 and braking ability. If summer tires are used in very cold temperatures, cracks can form on the tread bars, resulting in permanent tire damage that can cause loud driving noise and unbalanced tires. -Burnished, polished or chromed rims must not be used in winter driving conditions. The surface of the rims does not have sufficient corrosion protection for this and could be permanently damaged by road salt or similar substances. Fig. 19 2 Tire designat ion on the sidewall Wheels (D Tires for passenger vehicles (if applicable) P indicat es a tir e for a passenger vehi cle. T indi cates a t ire designated for tempor ary use. @ Nominal width Nominal width of the tire between the sidew alls in millimeters. In general: the larger the number, the wider the tire. @ Aspect ratio Height / width ratio expressed as a percentage. @ Tire construction Speed rating Maximum permitted speed R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) s up t o 110 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) u up to 124 mph (200 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)al z above 149 mph (240 km/h)al w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)al y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)al a) For tir es above 149 mph (24 0 km/h), t ir e man ufact ure rs sometimes use t he code " ZR". (j) US DOT number (TIN) and manufacture date The manufac t ure date is listed on the tire sidewall (it may only ap- R indicates a radial tire. pear on the inner side of the tire): ® Rim diameter DOT ... 2214 ... Size of the rim diameter in inches. @ Load index and speed rating The load ind ex indi cates the tire' s lo ad-ca rry ing capacity. The speed rating indicates the maximum permitted speed ¢ .& in W inter tires on page 265 . " EXTRA LOAD", "xl" or "RF" indicate s that the t ire is reinfor ced or is an Extra Load tire. Speed rating Maximum permitted speed p up t o 93 mph (150 km/h) Q up to 99 mph (160 km/ h) means, for example , that the tire was produced in the 22nd week of the year 2014. @ Audi Original equipment tires Audi Original equipment tire s with th e designation " AO" or " RO" have been specially matched to your Audi. When used correct ly, these t ires meet th e highest standar ds of safety and handling. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will 251 "" Wheels be happy to provide more information . @ Running direction ® Mud and snow capability inflation pressure "M/S" or "M+S" indicates the tire has characteristics that make it suitab le for driving on mud and snow. & indicates a winter t ire. This number indicates the maxi mum pressure to wh ich a t ire can be inflated unde r normal operating condit ions . @ Composition of the tire cord and materials Glossary of tire and loading terminology The number of plies indicates the number of rubberized fabric layers in the tire . In general: the more layers, the more weight a tire can carry. Tire manufacturers must also specify the materia ls used in the tire. These include steel, nylon, polyester and other materials . Accessoryweight @ Maximum permitted load This number indicates the maxi mum load in kilograms and pounds that the tire can carry. @ Uniform tire quality grade standards for treadwear, traction and temperature resistance Tread wear, t raction and temper ature ranges c:>page 266 . ~ Maximum permitted means the combined we ight (in excess of those standard items wh ich may be replaced) of automatic t ransmission , power steering , power brakes , power windows, power seats , radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as fac t ory-installed equipment (whet her installed or not ). Aspect ratio means the rat io of the height to the width of the tire in pe rcent. Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a low sidewall fo r imp roved steering response and better overa ll handling on dry pavement . Bead means the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or ... 252 Wheels reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim. "xl" , "EXTRALOAD", or "RF" on the sidewal l. Bead separation Gross Axle Weight Rating ("GAWR") means a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead . Cord means the st rands forming the plies in the tire. Cold tire inflation pressure means the tire pressure recommended by the vehicle man ufacturer for a tire of a designated size that has not been driven for more than a couple of miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the three ho ur period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted. Curb weight means the weight of a motor vehic le with standard equipment includ ing the maximum capac ity of fuel, oil, and coolant, a ir conditioning and add it ional weigh t of optional equ ipment . Extra load ti re means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire . Extra load tires may be ident ified as "XL", means the load-carrying capacity of a single axle system, measured at the tire-ground int erfaces. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR ") means the maxim um total loaded weight of the vehic le. Groove means the space between two ad jacent tread ribs . Load rating (code) means the max im um load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressu re. You may not find this informat ion on all tires beca use it is not requ ired by law. Maximum load rating means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for t hat tire . Maximum loaded vehicle weight means the sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory we ight ... 253 Wh e el s (c) Vehicle capacity weight, and (d) Production options weight Maximum (permissible) inflation pressure means the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated . Also called "max imum inflation pressure ." Normal occupant weight means 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants seated in the vehicle up to the to t al seat ing capacity of your vehicle . Occupant distribution means distribution of occupants in a vehicle. Outer diameter means the overall diameter of an inflated new tire . Overall width means the linear distance between the exteriors of the side walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to label ing, decorations, or protective bands or ribs . Ply means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords . 254 Production options weight means the combined weight of those installed regular product ion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes , ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. Radial ply tire means a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords t hat extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 deg rees to the centerline of the tread. Recommended inflation pressure see ¢ page 253 , Cold tire inflation pressure. Reinforced tire means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire . Reinforced tires may be identified as "XL","xl", "EXTRALOAD",or "RF" on the sidewall. ... Wheels Rim means a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Rim diamet er means nominal diameter bead seat. If you change wheel size, you will have chase new tires to match rim diameter. of the your to purthe new maximum permissible road speeds ¢ A in Winter tires on page 265. Tire pressure mon itoring system* means a system that detects when one or more of a vehicle's tires are underinflated and illuminates a low tire pressure warning telltale. Rim size designation Tread means rim diameter and width . means that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road . Rim width means nominal distance between rim flanges. Tread separation means pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass. Sidewall means that portion of a tire between the tread and bead. Speed rating (l etter code) means the speed at wh ich a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time . The ratings range from 93 mph (150 km/h) to 186 mph (298 km/h) ¢ table on page 251. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. The speed rating letter code, where applicable, is molded on the tire sidewall and indicates the Treadwear indicators (TWI ) means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. See ¢ page 259, Treadwear indicator for more information on measuring tire wear . Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a tire information system developed by the United States Nation a l Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) that is designed to help buyers make relative 255 .. Wheels comparisons among tires . The UTQG is not a safety rating and not a guarantee that a tire will last for a prescribed number of miles (kilometers) or perform in a certain way. It simply gives tire buyers additional information to combine with other considera tions, such as price, brand loyalty and dealer recommendations. Under UTQG, tires are graded by t he tire manufacturers in three areas: treadwear, traction, and tempera ture resistance. The UTQG information on the t ires, molded into the sidewalls . U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) This is the tire's "serial number". It begins with the letters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The nex t two numbers or letters indicate the plant where it was manufactured, and the last four numbers represent the week and year of manufacture. For example, DOT ... 2214 ... means that the tire was produced in the 22nd wee k of 2014. The other numbers are marketing codes that may or may not be used 2 56 by the t ire manufacturer . This information is used to contact consumers if a tire defect requ ires a recall. Vehicle capacity weight means the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the veh icle's designated seating capacity. Vehicle maximum load on the tire means that load on an individual tire that is determined by distrib uting to each axle its sha re of the maximum loaded vehic le we ight and dividing by two. Vehicle normal load on the tire means that load on an individual tire that is determined by d istribut ing to each axle its share of t he curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupan t weight (distr ibuted in accordance with ¢ table on page 262) and d ividing by two. ~ Wheels Occupant loading and distr ibut ion for vehicle normal load for various design ated seating capacit ies Refer to the tire inflation pressure label for the number of seating positions. Refer to the table ¢ table on page 262 for the number of people that correspond to the vehicle normal load. New tires or wheels Audi recommends having all work on tires or wheels performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. These facilities have the proper knowledge and are equipped with the required tools and replacement parts. ...New ti res do not yet have the optimum adhesion properties. Drive carefully and at moderate speeds for the first 350 miles (500 km) with new tires. ...Use ti res of the same construction, size (rolling circumference) and as close to the same tread pattern as possible on all four wheels. 11> D0 not replace tires individually . At least replace both tires on the same axle at the same time. 11> Audi recommends that you use Audi Original equipment tires. If you would like to use different tires, please note that the tires may perform differently even if they are the same size ¢ A .. If you would like to equip your vehicle with a tire/rim combination that is different from what was installed at the factory, consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before making a pur chase c:::> AThe spare tire* is different from the regular tires installed on the vehicle -for example, if winter tires or wide tires are installed then only use the spare tire* temporarily in case of emergency and drive carefully while it is in use. It should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as possible. On all w hee l drive vehicles, all four wheels must be equipped with tires that are the same brand and have the same construction and tread pattern so that the drive system is not damaged by different tire speeds. For this reason, in case of emergency, only use a spare tire* that is the same .,. 257 Wheels circumference as the regular tires. A_ WARNING - -Only use tire/rim combinations and suitable wheel bolts that have been approved by Audi. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and an accident could result. -For technical reasons, it is not possible to use tires from other vehicles - in some cases, you cannot even use tires from the same vehicle model. -Make sure that the tires you select have enough clearance to the vehicle. Replacement tires should not be chosen simply based on the nominal size, because tires with a different construction can differ greatly even if they are the same size. If there is not enough clearance, the tires or the vehicle can be damaged and this can reduce driving safety and increase the risk of an accident. - Only use tires that are more than 6 years old when absolutely necessary and drive carefully when doing so. 258 -Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle. Using them when not permitted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents . -If you install wheel covers on the vehicle, make sure they allow enough air circulation to cool the brake system. If they do not, this could increase the risk of an accident. Tire wear/damage Fig. 193 Tire profile : treadwear indicator Tire wear Check the tires regularly for wear. -Inflation pressure that is too low or high can increase tire wear considerably. -Driving quickly through curves, rapid acceleration and heavy braking increase tire wear. -Hav e an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check the wheel alignment if there is unusual wear . .. Wheels - Have the wheels rebalanced if an imbalance is causing noticeable vibration in the steering wheel. If you do not, the tires and other vehicle components could wear more quickly. Treadwear indicator Original equipment tires contain treadwear indicators in the tread pattern, which are bars that are 1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are spaced even ly around the tire per pendicular to the running direction¢ fig. 193. The letters "TWI" or triangles on the tire sidewall indicate the location of the treadwear indicators. The tires have reached the mini mum tread depth l) when they have worn down to the tread wear indicators. Replace the tires with new ones ¢ .&. Wheel rotation Rotating the wheels regularly is recommended to ensure the tires wear evenly. To rotate wheels, install the wheels from the rear axle on the front axle and vice versa. This will allow the tires to have approximately the same length of service life. For unidirectional tires, make sure the tires are installed according to the running direction indicated on the tire sidewall ¢ page 282. Hidden damage Damage to tires and rims can often occur in locations that are hidden . Unusual vibrations in the vehicle or pulling to one side may indicate that there is tire damage. Reduce your speed immediately . Check the tires for damage. If no damage is visible from the outside, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest authorized Audi deal er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the vehicle inspected . .&_WARNING Tread that has worn too low or different tread depths on the tires can reduce driving safety. This can especially have a negative effect on handling, on the risk aquaplaning when driving through water, when driving .... N G'. ~ ~ :o .... l) Obey any applicable regulations in your country . 259 .. Wheels through curves and when braking, which increases the risk of an accident. Tire pressure Fig. 194 Driver's side 8-pillar: tire pr essure label ,_, KPA. PSI .::.. - KPA. j l~"' ==== === -=KPA. =·=PSI == ~~~ AVANT - PSI Fig. 195 Tire pressure label The correct tire pressure for tires mounted in the factory and for the spare tire* is indicated on a label. The label is located on the Bpillar ¢ fig. 194, ¢ fig. 195. Use the tire pressure specified for a normal vehicle load when the vehicle is partially loaded ¢ table on page 262. If driving the vehicle when fully loaded, you must 260 increase the tire pressure to the maximum specified pressure¢ ,&. Checking/correcting tire pressure •Check the tire pressure at least once per month and also check it before every long drive. •Always check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Do not reduce the pressure if it increases when the tires are warm. •Check the label ¢ fig. 195 for the correct tire pressure based on vehicle load. •Correct the tire pressure if nec essary . •Vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System*: store the modified tire pressure in the Infotainment system ¢ page 269. •Check the pressure in the emergency tire*/spare tire*. Always maintain the maximum temperature that is specified for the tire. A WARNING ~ Always adapt the t ire pressure to your driving style and vehicle load. -Overloading can lead to loss of vehicle control and increase .,. Wheels the risk of an accident. Read and follow the important safety precautions in c:::> page 262, Tires and vehicle load limits. -The tire must flex more if the tire pressure is too low or if the vehicle speed or load are too high . This heats the tire up too much . This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst and result in loss of vehicle control. - Incorrect tire pressure increases tire wear and has a negative effect on driving and braking behavior, which increases the risk of an accident. Replace lost valve caps to reduce the risk of damage to the tire valves. Tire pressure that is too low increases fuel consumption. Audi recommends using the tire pressure specified for a normal load c:::> table on page 262 or for a full load when the vehicle is partially loaded . Tire pressure table Please note that the information contained in the following table was correct at the time of printing , and the information is subject to change . If there are differences between this information and the tire pressures specified on the label on the driver's side Bpillar, always follow the specification on the B-pillar label ~ page 260, fig. 194. Make sure that the tire designation on your tire matches the designation on the tire pressure label and the tire pressure table . The following table lists recom mended tire pressures in cold tires according to the load and the size of the tires installed . 26 1 Wheels Model/ Engine Tire designation Tire pressure Normal load (up to 2 people) front TT: 245/45 R17 95H 2.0L All Season 4-Cylinder 245/40 R18 93H All Season 245/35 R19 93Y XL High Performance A rear front rear PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA 32 220 29 200 33 230 30 210 32 220 29 200 33 230 30 210 35 240 32 220 35 240 32 220 WARNING Please note the important safety precautions regarding tire pressure ¢ page 260 and load limits ¢page 262. Tires and vehicle load limits There are limits to the amount of load or weight that any vehicle and any tire can carry. A vehicle that is overloaded will not handle well and is more difficult to stop. Overloading can not only lead to loss of vehicle control, but can also damage important parts of the vehicle and can lead to sudden tire failure, including a blowout and sudden deflation that can cause the vehicle to crash. Your safety and that of your passengers also depends on making sure that load limits are not exceeded. Vehicle load includes everybody and everything in and on 262 Maximum load the vehicle. These load limits are technically referred to as the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR"). The "GVWR"includes the weight of the basic vehicle , all factory installed accessories , a full tank of fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids plus maximum load. The maximum load includes the number of passengers that the vehicle is intended to carry ("seating capacity") with an assumed weight of 150 lbs (68 kg) for each passenger at a designated seating position and the total weight of any luggage in the vehicle. The Gross Axle Weight Rating ("GAWR")is the maximum load that can be applied at each of the vehicle's two axles. Wheels The fact that there is an upper limit to your vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating means that the total weight of whatever is be ing carried in the vehicle is limited . The more passengers in the vehicle or passengers who are heavier than the standard weights assumed mean that less weight can be carried as luggage . The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating are listed on the safety compli ance sticker label located on the driver 's side 8-pillar ¢ page 260, fig. 194 . _&.WARNING Overloading a vehicle can cause loss of vehicle control, a crash or other accident, serious personal injury, and even death . - Carrying more weight than your vehicle was designed to carry will prevent the vehicle from handling properly and increase the risk of the loss of vehicle control. -The brakes on a vehicle that has been overloaded may not be able to stop the vehicle within a safe distance. - Tires on a vehicle that has been overloaded can fail suddenly, including a blowout and sudden deflation, causing loss of control and a crash. -Always make sure that the total load being transported does not make the vehicle heavier than the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. Determining correct load limit Use the examp le below to calculate the total weight of the passengers and luggage or other things that you plan to transport so that you can make sure that your vehicle will not be overload ed . Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "THE COMBINEDWEIGHTOF OCCUPANTSANDCARGOSHOULD NEVEREXCEEDXXXKGOR XXX LBS"onyour vehicle's placard (tire inflation pressure label) ¢ page 260, fig. 194. .,. 263 Wheels 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from "XXX" kilograms or "XXX" pounds shown on the sticker ¢ page 260, fig. 194. 4 . The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 1 SO lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. ~check the tire sidewall (c>page 250, fig. 192) to determine the designated load rating for a specific tire. Wheel bolts and rims Wheel bolts Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten easily. Rims Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel covers* consist of multiple pieces. These components were bolted together using special bolts and a special procedure. You must not repair or disassemble them c::>.&.. _&.WARNING Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired incorrectly can become loose and result in loss of vehicle control, which increases the risk of an accident. For the correct tightening specifipage 2 78, After changing a cation, refer to c::> wheel . - Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads in the wheel hub clean and free of grease . - Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim. - Always have damaged rims repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility . Never repair or disassemble rims yourself, because this increases the risk of an accident. · Winter tires Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's handling when driving in winter conditions. Because of their construction (width, compound, tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction on ice and snow . .,.Use winter tires on all four wheels. 264 Wh e el s ~ Only use winter tires that are approved for your vehicle. ~ Please note that the maximum permitted speed may be lower with winter tires q ,&.. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Aud i Service Facility can inform you about the maximum permitted speed for your tires. ~ Check the t ire pressure after installing wheels q page 260. The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great ly when the t read is worn down to a dept h of 0 .157 in (4 mm). The character istics of winter tires also decrease great ly as t he t ire ages, regardless of t he remaining tread. A ,- WARNING - - Never drive faste r than the maxim um permitted speed for your tires. This could cause the tires to heat up too much . This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst. - Always adapt your dr iving to the road and t raff ic conditions. Drive carefully and red uce your speed on icy or slippery roads. Even winter tires can lose traction on black ice. @ For the sake of the environment Reinstall summe r ti res at the approp riate time, because they provide better handling when roads are free of snow and ice. Summe r tires cause less road noise, t ire wear and fuel consumption. (D Tips You can also use all season tires instead of w inter t ires. Please note that in some countries where w inter t ires are required, only w inte r t ires with the & symbol may be perm itted. Snow chains Snow chains not only imp rove the driving in w inter road conditions, but also the braking. ~ Only insta ll snow chains on the fro nt wheels. This app lies also to vehicles w it h all wheel drive*. ~ ~ Check and correct the seating of the snow chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Follow the instruct ions from the manufacturer. Note the maximum speed of 30 mph (SO km/ h). Note the local regulations. Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain rim/tire comb inations due to technical reasons. Check with an authori zed Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use snow chains. You m ust remove the snow chains on roads without snow . Otherwise, you could impair driving ability and damage the t ires. A WARNING Using incor rect snow chains or inst alli ng snow chains incor rect ly can result in loss of veh icle control, which increases the risk of an accident. {Q) Note - Snow chains can damage t he rims/wheel covers* if the chainscome into direct contact w ith the m . Remove the wheel covers* first. Use coat ed snow chains. - Using snow chains that add more tha n 0 .53 in (0.53 in) of height can severely damage t he whee l housing s and ot her vehicle components. (D Tips When using snow chains, it may be usefu l to switc h on sport mode ~ page 88. Low aspect ratio tires Your Audi is factory -equ ipped with low aspect ratio tires. These tires have been thorough ly tested and been selected specifica lly for your mode l for their superb performance, road fee l and handling under a var iety of dr iving condit ions. Ask your authorized Audi dealer for more details . The low aspect rat io of these tires is indicated by a numeral of 55 or less in the tire's size designation. The numeral represents the ratio of the tire's sidewa ll height in relation to its tread width ..,. 265 Wh e els expressed in pe rcentage. Conventional tires have a height/widt h ratio of 60 or more . Reduced performance in winter / cold season conditions The performan ce of low-aspect-ratio tire s is particularly sensitive to impr oper infla t ion pressure. It is therefore important that low aspect ratio ti res are inflated to the specified pressure and that the inflation pressure is regularl y checked and mai ntained. Tire pressures should be checked at least once a month and always before a long trip c:>page 260 . All tires are designed for certain purposes . The low aspect ratio, ultra high performance tires origina lly installed on your vehicle are intended for maximum dry and wet road performance and handling. They are not suitable for cold, snowy or icy weather conditions . If you drive under those circumstances, you should equip you r vehicle wit h all-season or wi nter tires, whi ch offer better tract ion unde r those condi t ions. We suggest yo u use the recommended snow or a ll-season tires specified for your vehicle, or the ir equivalent. What you can do to avoid tir e and rim damage Low aspect rat io tires can be damaged more easily by impact with potholes, curbs, gullies or ridges on the road, part icularly if the t ire is underinflated . In order to minimize the occurrence of impact damage to the t ires of your ve hicle, we recom mend that you observe the follow ing precautions: - Always maintain recommended inflation pressures . Check your tire pressure every 2,000 miles (3,000 km) and add air if necessary . - Drive carefully on roads with potholes, deep gull ies or ridges . The impact from driving th rough or over suc h obstacles can damage you r tires . Impact with a cu rb may also cause damage to you r ti res. - Aft er any impact, immediately inspect your ti res or have them inspected by the nea rest authorized Audi de al e r. Repla ce a damaged tire as soon as possib le. - Inspect yo ur t ires every 2,000 miles (3,000 km) fo r damage and wear. Da mage is not always easy to see . Damage can lead to loss of air and underinflation, which cou ld eventually ca use ti re failure . If you believe that a tire may have been damaged, rep lace the t ire as soon as pos s ible. - These tires may wear more q uickly than othe rs. - Please a lso remember that, w hile these tires deliver responsive handling, they may ride less comfortably and make more no ise than other cho ices. Refer to c:>page 264 for more detailed information regard ing winter tires. Uniform tire quality grading - Tread wear - Tract ion AAABC - Tempe ratur e ABC Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire side wall between tread shou lder and page 250, fig . 192. max imum section width c:> For example: Tread wear 200 , Traction AA, Temperature A. All passenger car t ires must conform to Fede ral Safety Req uirements in addit ion to these grades. Tread wear The tread wear g rade is a compa rat ive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled cond itions on a specif ied government test course. For example, a t ire g raded 15 0 wou ld wear one and one ha lf (1 1/2) times as we ll on the govern ment course as a ti re graded 100. The re lat ive pe rformance of tires depends upon the ac t ual cond itions of the ir use, however, and may depa rt significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road character istics and climate. Traction The traction grades , from highest t o lowest , a re AA, A, Ba nd C. Those g rades rep resent t he tire 's .,. 266 Wh e el s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under contro lled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance ¢ &,. Temperatur e The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excess ive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure ¢ &,. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. &, WARNING - The traction grade ass igned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking t raction t ests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak tract ion characteristics . A WARNING - The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded . Excessive speed, underinflation, or excess ive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. A WARNING Temperat ure grades apply to tires that are properly inflated and not over or underinflated. - Tire pressure system ill General monitoring notes Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shou ld be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflat ion pressure label, you should dete rmine the proper t ire inflat ion press ure for t hose tires). As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure mon itor ing system (TPMS)that illuminates a low ti re pressure tellta le when one or more of your tires is significant ly unde r-inflated. According ly, when the low t ire pressure telltale illum inates, you sho uld st op and check your tires as soon as possib le, and inflate them to the proper pressure . Driving on a significant ly under-inflated tire causes the t ire to overheat and can lead to tire fa ilure . Under-inflation also reduces fue l efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMSis not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's respons ibility to maintain correct t ire pressure, even if under- inflat ion has not reached t he level to t rigge r illumination of the TPMS low t ire pressure te lltale . Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfu nction indicato r to indicate when the system is not ope rating properly . The TPMS malfunct ion indicato r is combined with the low t ire pressure tell t ale. When the system detec t s a malfunction, the tellta le will flash for app roximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will cont inue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunct ion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the .,. 267 Wheels installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function proper ly. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator appears The tire pressure indicator in the instrument cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low or if there is a system malfunction. Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure mon itor ing system compares the tire tread circumference and vib rat ion characteristics of the individual tires. If the pressure changes in one or more tires, this is indicated in the Infotainment system disp lay with an indicator light and a message. If only one tire is affected , the location of that tire will be indicated. RR The tire pressures must be stored in the Infotainment system again each time the pressures change (switching between partial and full load pressure) or after changing or replacing a tire on your veh icle ¢ page 269. The t ire pressure monitoring system only monitors the tire pressure you have stored. Refer to the tire pressure label for the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle ¢ page 260, fig.195. Tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics can change and cause a tire pressure warning if: - the tire pressure in one or more tires is too low. - the tire has structural damage . - the tire was replaced or the tire pressure was changed and it was not stored ¢ page 269. - the spare tire* is installed. Indicator lights RR -Loss of pressure in at least one ti re ¢ ,& . Check the tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check/correct the pressures of all four tires and store the pressure again in the I nfotainment system ¢ page 269 . 268 mm (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's manual - if mm appears after switching on the ignit ion or RR while driving and then the indicator light in the instrument cluster also starts to blink for about one minute and then stays on permanently, there is a system malfunction. Try to store the correct tire pressures¢ page 269 . If the indicator light does turn off or turns on again after a short period of time , drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi ate ly to have the ma lfunction corrected. _& WARNING - If the tire pressure indicator appears in the disp lay, reduce your speed immediately and avoid any hard steering or brak ing maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible and check the tires and their pressure . - The driver is responsible for maintain ing the correct tire pressures . You must check the tire pressures regularly . - Under certain cond it ions (such as a sporty driving style, w inter condit ions or unpaved roads), the pressure monitor indicator may be delayed. - Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle . Using them when not perm itted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents. (D Tips - The tire pressure monitoring system can also stop working when there is an ESCmalfunction. - Using snow chains may result in a system ma lfunction. - The tires w ith the identification "AO" or "RO" ¢ page 2 5 7 have been matched w ith your Audi t ire pressu re monitoring system . We recom mend that you use these tires. Wh e el s Storing tire pressures If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced, it must be confirmed in the Infotainment system . .,.Make sure before storing that the tire pressures of all four t ires meet the spec ified values and are adapted to the load ~ page 258 . .,.Switch on the ignition . .,.Select in the Info t ainment system: the IM ENU I bu tton > Vehi cle > left contro l bu t ton > Service & checks > Tire pressure monitor . @ Tips Do not store the t ire press ures if snow chains are insta lled . 269 Care and cleaning Care and cleaning General information Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehicle's value. It can also be a requirement when submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage and paint defects on the body. The necessary care products can be obtained from your authorized Audi dealer . Read and follow the instructions for use on the packaging. A WARNING - Using cleaning and care products incorrectly can be dangerous to your health. -Always store cleaning and care products out of reach of children to reduce the risk of poisoning . @ For the sake of the environment - Preferably use environmentally-friendly products when buying cleaning agents. - Do not dispose of leftover cleaning and care products with household trash. Car washes The longer that deposits remain on the vehicle, the more the surface may be damaged. High temperatures such as those caused by sunlight increase the damaging effect. Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with plenty of water. Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree sap are best removed with plenty of water and a microfiber cloth. Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once road sa lt stops being used for the season. Pressure washers When washing your vehicles with a pressure washer, always follow the operating instructions provided with the pressure washer. This is especially important in regard to the pressure and spraying distance . Do not direct the stream of cleaning solution directly onto the side window seals, doors, luggage compartment lid or hood, 270 tires, rubber hoses, insulating material or sensors*. Keep a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm) . Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure washe r. Never use rotary nozzles or high pressure nozzles. The water temperature (60 °(). must not be above 140 °F Automatic car washes Spray off the vehicle before washing. Make sure that the windows are closed and the windshield wipers are off. Follow instructions from the car wash operator, especially if there are accessories attached to your vehicle. If possible, use car washes that do not have brushes. Washing by hand Clean the vehicle starting from the top and working down using a soft sponge or cleaning brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products . Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by hand To avoid damaging the paint when washing, first remove dust and large part icles from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots and fingerprints are best removed with a special cleaner for matte finish paint. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To avo id damaging the pa int surface, do not use too much pressure. Rinse the veh icle thoroughly with water. Then clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft microfiber cloth . Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air dry. Remove any water residue using a sham my . A WARNING - Only wash the vehicle when the ign ition is off and follow the instructions from the car wash operator to reduce the risk of accidents. - Ca r e and c leaning - To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself from sharp metal components when washing t he underbody or the inside of the wheel housings . - After washing the vehicle, the brak ing effect may be delayed due to mo isture on the brake rotors or ice in the w inte r. The brakes must be d ried first with a few careful brake applications. (I) Note - If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash, yo u must retract the extendable rear spo iler* if necessary, and fold the ext er ior mir rors in to red uce the risk of damage. Power folding exte rior m irrors* mus t on ly be fo lded in an d ou t us ing t he power folding funct ion . - To preve nt paint damage, do not wash the vehicle in d irect sunlight. Cleaning - To red uce t he risk of damage to the surface, do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen sponges or similar items . - Matte finish painted veh icle components: - To reduce the risk of damage to the surface, do not use po lishing agents or hard wax. - Never use protective wax. It can destroy the matte finish effect . - Do not place any stickers or magnetic signs on vehicle parts painted with matte finish paint. The paint could be damaged when the stickers or magnets are removed . @ For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle in facilities s pec ially des igned for that pu rpose. This will reduce the risk of dirty wate r contam ina ted with oil from en t e ring the sewe r sys t em. and care information When clean ing and ca ring for individua l vehicle components, refer t o t he follow ing tables. The information conta ined there is simp ly recom mendations. For q uestions or for components t hat are not listed, cons ult an autho rized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Se rvice Facility. Also follow the informa t ion fo und in ~ ,& . Exterior cleaning Component Situation Windshield wiper Deposits blades Solut ion ~ poge42 Headlight s/ Tail light s Deposits Soft spo nge with a mild soap solutiona) Sensors Deposits soft cloth with solvent-free clean ing solution Snow/ice Hand br ush/solven t -free de-icing spray Road salt Water Brake dust Acid-free special clean ing so lut ion Wheels Exhaust tail pipes Road salt Decorative parts/ t rim Deposits Wate r, clean ing solution su itab le for stainless stee l, if neeessary Mild soap solution al, a cleaning so lution suitable for stainless stee l, if necessary 271 Care and cleaning Component Paint Situation Solut ion Paint damage Refer to the paint number on the vehicle data label, repair with touch up paint¢ page 298 Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately Surface rust Rust remover, then protect with hard wax; for questions, consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dea ler or a uthorized Audi Service Facility. Water no longer beads on the surface of clean pa int Protect with hard wax (at least tw ice pe r year) No shine even though paint has been protected/pa int looks poor Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if the polish that was used does not contain any protectant Deposits such as inDampen with water immediately and remove w ith a microsects, bird dropp ings, fiber cloth tree sap and road salt Grease -based conRemove immedia t ely with a mild soap so lution al and a taminants such as soft cloth cosmetics or sunb lock Carbon parts a) Deposits clean the same way as painted parts¢ page 2 70 Mild soap solut ion: maxim um two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water Int ernal cleaning Component Situation Solution Windows Deposits Glass cleaner, the n w ipe dry Decorative parts/ trim Deposits Mild soap solutiona> Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth Heavier depos its Mild soap solution a), detergent-free ing solution, if necessary Displays/i nstrument cluste r Deposits Soft cloth with LCDcleaner; dust deposits in the lower area of the instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush. Controls Deposits Soft br ush, then a soft cloth w ith a mi ld soap solutim,al Safety be lts Deposits Mild soap solution al, allow to dry before lett ing them retract 272 plast ic clean- Ca r e and c leaning Component Textil es artificial leat her, Alcantara Situation Solut ion Deposits adhering to the surface Vacuum cleaner Water-based deposits such as coffee, tea, blood, etc. Absorbent cloth and mild soap solutiona) Oil-based depos its such as oil, make -up, etc. Apply a mild soap solut ion a), blot away the dissolved oil or dye, treat afterward with water, if neeessary Special deposits such as ink, Special stain remover, blot with absorbent materinail polish, latex paint, shoe al, treat afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary a) polish, etc. Natural leather Fresh sta ins Wool cloth w ith a mi ld soap solutiona ) Water-based deposits such as coffee, tea, blood, etc . fresh stains: absorbent cloth dr ied stains: stain remover suitable for leather Oil-based deposits such as oil, make-up, etc. Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable for leather Dried stains: grease dissolving spray Specia l deposits such as ink, Spot remover suitable for leather na il polish, latex paint, shoe polish, etc. Carbon parts Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from light and penetrates into the mater ial. Use specially-colored conditioning cream, if necessary . Deposits clean the same way as plastic parts al Mild soap so lut ion: max imum two ta blesp oons of neut ra l soap in 1 quar t(! lite r) of wate r A WARNING The windshield may not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Unfavorable conditions such as wetness, darkness, o r low sun can result in increased glare. Wipe r blade chatte r is also possib le. (D Note - Headlights / tail lights - Never clean headlights or tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. - Do not use any cleaning product that contains a lcohol, beca use they cou ld cause cracks to form . -Wheel s - Never use any paint polish or other abrasive mater ials. - - Damage to the protective layer on the rims such as stone chips or scratches must be repaired immediately. - Doo r window s - Remove snow and ice on windows and exterio r mirrors w ith a plast ic scraper . To avoid scratches, move the scraper only in one direct ion a nd not back and forth. - Never remove snow or ice from door w indows and mir rors us ing warm o r hot wate r beca use this could cause cracks t o form. - To avoid damage to the rear window defogger, do not apply any stickers on the heat ing wires on the inside of the w indow. - Deco rative parts/ trim - Never use chrome care or cleaning products. - Paint 27 3 Care and cleaning - To red uce the risk of scratches, the vehicle must be free of dirt and dust before polishing or waxing . - To prevent pa int damage, do not polish or wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. - To red uce the risk of pa int damage, do not polish away rust spots. - Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immediately- these could damage the paint. - Instrument cluster - Make sure that the instrument cluster is switched off and has cooled off before cleaning it. - The instrument cluster and the trim surround ing it must not be cleaned with dry cleaning methods because they could get scratched . - Make sure no fluids enter the spaces between the instrument cluster and the trim, because that could cause damage. - Controls - Make sure tha t no fluids enter t he controls, because t his could cause damage . - Safety belt s - Do not remove the safety belts to clean them. - Never clean safety belts or their components chemically or with corrosive flu ids or so lvents and never allow sharp objects to come into contact with the safety belts . This could cause damage to the belt webbing. - If there is damage to the webbing, the connect ions, the retractors or the buckles, have them replaced by an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility. - Textiles / artificial leather / Alcantara - Never treat artificia l leather/ Alcant ara with leather care products, so lvents, floor polish, shoe polish, spot remove or similar prod ucts. - Have a specialist remove stubborn stains to prevent damage. - Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. - Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat . 274 - Objects with sharp edges such as zippers, rivets on clothing or be lts can cause damage to the surface . - Open hook and loop fasteners, for example on clothing, can damage seat covers. Make sure hook and loop fasteners are closed. - Natural leather - Never treat leather with solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, spot remover or sim ilar products. - Objects with sharp edges such as zippers, rivets on clothing or be lts ca n cause damage to the surfa ce. - Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. - Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat. - To he lp prevent the leather from fad ing, do not leave the vehicle in d irect sunlight for long periods of time. If leav ing the vehicle parked fo r long pe riods of time, you should cover the leather t o prot ect it from direct sunlight . (D Tips - Insects are easie r to remove from paint that has been freshly waxed. - Regular waxing can prevent rus t spots from forming. Placing your of service vehicle out If you would like to take your vehicle out of service for a longer time, contact your authorized Audi dealer or qualified repair facility. They will advise you of important measures, such as corros ion protection, maintenance and storage proce dures . Also follow the info rmation about the batpage 245. tery <=> Em er gen cy a ss istanc e Emergency General assistance information "' Park the vehicle as far as poss ible from moving traffic in the event of a flat tire. In the event of a flat tire, park the vehicle on a level surface. It you are on a steep incline, be especially careful. "' Set the parking brake. "' Place the selector lever in the P position. "' Switch the emergency flashers on. "' Have the passengers exit the veh icle . They shou ld move to a safe place, for example behind a guard rail. _& WARNING Follow the steps given above. This is for your protection and the for the safety of other d rivers . - Never use the screw driver hex head to tighten wheel bolts, since the bolts cannot attain the necessary tightening torque if you use the hex head, potentially causing an accide nt. - The factory-supplied jack is intended only for your veh icle mode l. Under no circumstances shou ld it be used to lift heavy veh icles or othe r loads; you risk injuring yourse lf. - Never start the engine when the ve hicle is raised, which could cause an accident. - Support the vehicle securely with a ppropriate stands if wo rk is to be pe rformed undernea t h the vehicle; otherwise, there is a potential risk fo r injury. - Never use t he ja ck supp lied with your Aud i on ano t her veh icle, particularly on a heavier one. The jack is only s uit ab le for use on the veh icle it came with. Equipment Vehicle tool kit/tire mobility kit/ compressor (D Tips The vehicle ja ck* in your vehicle is ma intenan ce-free. Tire mobility kit Preparation Applies to : vehicles with tire mobility kit Fig. 196 Luggage compartment: cargo floor closed The vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit and compressor are sto red in the luggage compartment u nder the ca rgo floor cover. "' Read and follow the important safety precaupage 2 75, General information . tions <=> "' Select the P position . "' Check if a repair with the tire mob ility kit is possible ¢ page 275. Using the tire mobility kit Applies to: vehicles with t ire mob ility kit "' Push on the plast ic handle and lift up the cargo floor . "' Open the cargo floor . Completely ret ract the vehicle jack arm before storing the vehicle jack* . .... N a: _& WARNING CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Improper use of the vehicle jack can cause serious personal inju ries . Fig. 1 9 7 Tire : t ir e damage that cannot be repaired 275 Emergency assistance The tire repair is only meant for temporary use . Change the spare t ire as soon as possible ¢ .&. Repairing tires Applies to: vehicles with t ire mo bility kit If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail, do not remove the object from the tire . The tire mobility kit is able to be used at temperatures as low as - 4 °F (- 20 °C). The tire mobility kit may not be used: - If the t ire has cuts or punctures that are larger than 0 .1 6 in (4 mm) @ ¢ fig. 197. - if the rim is damaged @ . - if you drove with very low tire pressure or without air in the tire @ . Fig. 198 Components of th e t ire mobility kit See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance in these situations. ,& WARNING - Please note that the tire mob ility kit cannot be used in all situations, and that it may only be used temporari ly. - The tire sealant must not come in contact with skin, eyes, or clothes. - If tire sealant gets in your eyes or on your skin, thoroughly rinse the affected area immediately with clean water. - Do not inhale the fumes . - If you swallow any of the t ire sealant, thoroughly rins e your mouth immediately and dr ink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. - Change your clothes immed iate ly if they get tire sealant on them. - If an allerg ic reaction occurs, see k immediate medical attention. - Keep the tire sealant away from children . (D Tips - If sealan t lea ks, allow it to dry in place. You can then pee l it off like a sticker. - Note the expiration date on the sealant bottle . Replace the tire sealant at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. - Radio reception can be interrupted when operating the compressor *. - Obey all laws. 276 Fig. 199 Tire mobility kit connection Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid out and ready for use ¢ page 2 75 . Installing the tire mobility kit .,.Open the cover @ on the compressor ¢fig . 198. .,. Remove the connector © and pressure hose ® with pressure gauge from the housing. .,.Install the compressor pressure hose ® onto the flange @ of tire sealant bottle @ . .,.Insert the sea lant bottle with the flange at the bottom into the open ing @ on the compressor cover . .,.Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire . .,.Insta ll t he filler hose @ onto the valve (j) ¢ fig. 199. .,.Connect the p lug © c>fig. 198 to a socket in the vehicle . .,.Switch on the ignition . Inflating a tire .,.Move the switch @ ¢ fig. 199 on the compressor into position I. ..,. Em er g e nc y a ss is tanc e • Inflate the t ire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on the gauge. • If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 ft (10m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant can be distr ibuted in the tire. Pump up the t ire again QA . .&, WARNING Pay attention to the following after repairing the tire: - Do not dr ive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) . - Avoid hard acceleration, braking sharply, and fast cornering. - The vehicle may become more difficult to control. - If the tire is too severely damaged, see an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility f or assistance. .&, WARNING - Read and follow the manufacture r's safety precautions on the compressor and in the instructions on the bottle of sealant. - If a tire pressu re of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot reached after infla t ing for 6 minutes, then the tire is too severely damaged . Do not contin ue driving . - If the t ire cannot be repaired with the tire sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance . (D @ You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for disposal. {D Completing Appl ies to: vehicles with tire m obility kit • Adhere the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. 80 km/h)" that is provided w ith t he t ire mobility kit within the dr iver's field of vision . • Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 m inutes and check the tire pressure. • If the t ire pressu re is lower tha n 19 psi (130 kPA), then the ti re is too severely damaged. Do not contin ue driving . .&, WARNING If the tire pressure is less than 19 psi (130 kPA) after 10 min utes of driving, then the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue dr iving . See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. Tips Remember to obtain a new bott le of sealant from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire. Tips Do not operate the compressor for mo re t han 6 minutes continuously, or it can overheat. Once the compressor has cooled, you can continue to use it . For the sake of the environment Replacing wheels Before changing a wheel Observe the following precautions for your own and your passenger's safety when changing a wheel . • After you experience a t ire failure, pull the car well away from moving traffic and try to reach leve l ground before you stop Q ,A . • All passengers should leave the car and move to a safe location (for instance , behind t he guardrail) Q ,A . • Engage the parking brake to prevent your veh icle from rolling unintentiona lly Q ,A . • Move sele ctor lever to position P Q ,A . • Take the jack Qpage 275 and the spa re tire ¢ page 283 out of the luggage compartment. '- .&, WARNING You or your passengers could be injured while changing a whee l if you do not follow these safety precaut ions: 277 ~ Em e rg e n cy assis t a n ce - If you have a f lat tire, move a safe distance off the road. Turn off the engine, turn the emergency flashers on and use other warning devices to alert other motorists. - Make sure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic. - To help prevent the vehicle from moving suddenly and possibly slipping off the jack, always fully set the parking brake and block the wheel diagonally oppos ite the wheel being changed. When one front wheel is lifted off the g round, plac ing the Automatic Transmission in P (Park) will not prevent the vehicle from moving. - Before you cha nge a wheel, be sure the ground is level and firm . If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack. - Always store the veh icle tool kit, the jack and the replaced tire in the luggage com partment¢ page 176. Changing a wheel When you change a wheel, follow the sequence described below step-by-step and in exactly that order. 1. Remove the decorative whe e l cover*. For more det ails see also¢ page 2 78, Decorative wheel covers or ¢ page 2 79, Wheels with wheel bolt caps. 2. 3. Loosen the wh eel bolts ¢ page 2 79. Locate the proper mounting point for the jack and align the jack below that point c:> page280. 4 . Raise the car w ith the jack ¢ page 280 . S. Remove the wheel with the flat tire and then install the s pare ¢ page 281 . 6. Tighten all wheel bo lts light ly. 7. Lower the veh icle with the jack . 8. Use the wheel bolt wrench and firmly tighten all wheel bolts ¢ page 279. 9 . Replace the decorative wheel cover*. A WARNING Always read and follow all WARNINGS and information ¢ .& in Raising the vehicle on page 280 and ¢ page 282. After changing a wheel A wheel change is not complete without the doing the following. .. Always store the vehicle tool kit, the jack* and the replaced tire in the luggage compartment ¢page 176 . .. Check the tire pres su re on the spare wheel immediately after mounting it. "' As soon as poss ible, have the tightening torques on a ll wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench. The correct ti ghteni ng torque is 90 ft lb (120 Nm). .. Have the flat t ire replace d as soon as poss ible . (D Tips - If you not ice t ha t the wheel bo lt s are corroded a nd difficult to turn while changing a t ire, they shou ld be replaced before you check the tightening torque . - Drive at reduced speed until yo u have the t ightening torques checked. - After changing a wheel, t he tire pressure in all four tires must be checked/corrected and the tire pressure monitoring indicator must be stored in the Infotainment c:>page 269 . Decorative wheel covers Gilt fur: with decorative wheel covers The decorative wheel covers must be removed first to access the wheel bolts. Fig. 200 Changing a w heel: Removing t he w heel cover 278 Emergency Removing • Inser t the hook (provided wit h the vehicle tool kit) in the hole in the whee l hub cover . • Pull off the decorative wheel cover¢ fig. 200. assistance Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle. Wheels with wheel bolt caps Gilt fur: wit h wheel bolts with caps The caps must be removed first from the wheel bolts before the bolts can be unscrewed . Fig. 202 Changing a whee l: loosening the wheel bolts Loosening Fig. 201 Changing a wheel: removing the whee l bolt caps Removing • Push the plastic clip (provided with the veh icle tool kit) over the wheel bolt cap unt il the inner retainers on the clip align with the edge of the cover. • Remove the cap with the plastic clip (vehicle tool kit) ¢ fig. 201 . Refitting • Place the caps over the wheel bo lts and push them back on. The caps are to protect and keep the wheel bolts clean. • Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go. • Take tight hold of the end of the wrench hand le and turn the wheel bolts counter-clockwise about one single turn in the direction of arrow ¢fig. 202. Tightening • Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go. • Take tight hold of the end of the wrench hand le and turn each wheel bolt clockwise until it is seated. A - - Do not use force or hurry when changing a wheel - you can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack and cause ser ious persona l inju ries. - Do not loosen the wheel bolts more than one turn before you raise the veh icle with the jack. - You risk an injury. (D .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl WARNING Tips - Never use the hexagonal socket in the handle of the screwdr iver to loosen or tighten the whee l bolts. - If a wheel bolt is very tight, you may find it easier to loo sen by carefully pushing dow n on the end of the whee l bolt wrench with one foot only. As you do so, hold on to the U"I 279 Emergency assistance car to keep your balance and take care not to slip. Raising the vehicle The vehicle must be lifted with the jack first before the wheel can be removed. --- ,tr---Fig. 203 Sill panels: markings ground. The base @ must be vertical under the lifting point @ . "Wind the jack up further until the flat tire . comes off the ground i=>/.1. Position the vehicle jack only under the designated lifting points on the sill r::!;>fig. 203. There is exactly one location for each wheel. The jack must not be positioned at any other location i=>,&. i=>Q) . An unstable surface under the jack can cause the vehicle to slip off the j ack . Always prov ide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary place a sturdy board or sim ilar support under the jack. On hard, slippery surfaces (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping i=>,&. . .&_WARNING - You or your passengers could be injured while changing a wheel if you do not follow these safety precautions: Fig. 204 Sill: positio ning t he vehicle jack " Engage the parking brake to prevent your vehi cle from rolling unintentionally . " Move the selector lever to position P. " Find the marking (imprint) on the sill that is nearest the whee l that will be changed. Behind the marking, there is a lifting point on the sill for the vehicle jack. "V ehicles with a sill: note the position of the sill when positioning the vehicle jack i=>fig. 204. " Place the vehicle jack (vehicle tool kit) on a firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if necessary. On a slippery surface such as tile, you should use a non-slip pad (such as a rubber mat) i=>.&.. " Turn the vehicle jack located under the lifting point on the sill to raise the jack until its arm @ i=>fig. 204 is located under the designated plastic mount i=>/.1. , i=>(D. "Align the jack so that its arm @ i=>fig. 204 engages in the designated lifting point in the door s ill and the movable base ® lies flat on the 280 - - Position the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points and align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack could slip and cause an injury if it does not have sufficient hold on the vehicle . -A soft or unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack . Always provide a firm base for the jack on the ground . If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack . - On hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping. - Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle jack for another vehicle, your vehicle can slide and cause injury. - Changes in temperature or load can affect the height of the vehicle. - Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised, which could cause an accident. - Support the vehicle securely with appropriate stands if work is to be performed und erneath the vehicle; otherwise, there is a potential risk of injury. IJJ,,, Emergency - To help prevent injury to yourself and your passengers: - Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. - Passengers must not remain in the vehicle when it is jacked up. - Make sure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic. - Make sure jack position is correct, adjust as necessary and then continue to raise the jack. - Changes in temperature or load can affect the height of the vehicle. CDNote Do not lift the vehicle by the sill . Position the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points on the sill. Otherwise, your vehicle will be damaged. Taking the wheel off/installing the spare Follow these instructions step-by-step for changing the wheel . assistance After you have loos ened all wheel bolts and raised the vehicle off the ground, remove and replace the wheel as follows: Removing the wheel .,..Use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to completely remove the topmost wheel bolt and set it aside on a clean surface qfig . 205. .,..Screw the threaded end of the alignment pin from the too l kit hand-tight into the empty bolt hole q fig. 206. .,.Then remove the other wheel bolts as described above . .,.Take off the wheel leaving the alignment pin in (0 . the bolt hole c:> Putting on the compact spare wheel .,.Lift the spare wheel and carefully slide it over the alignment pin to guide it in place q (j). .,.Use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to screw in and tighten all wheel bolts slightly . .,. Remove the alignment pin and insert and tighten th e remaining wheel bolt slightly like the rest . .,..Turn the jack handle counter-clockwise to lower the vehicle until the jack is fully released . .,..Use the wheel bolt wrench to tighten a ll wheel page 279 . Tighten them crossbolts firmly r=:> wise, from one bolt to the (approximately) opposite one, to keep the wheel centered . CDNote Fig. 205 Chang ing a wheel: us ing the screwdr iver handle (with the blade remo ved) to turn the bolts When removing or installing the wheel, the rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the rotor . Work carefully and have a second person help you. 0) Never use the hexagonal socket in the handle of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts. - Pull the reversible blade from the screwdriver before you use the hexagonal socket in the handle to turn the wheel bolts. .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I Tips Fig. 206 Changing a whee l: alignme nt pin inside the top hole 281 Emergency a s sistance - When mounting tires with unidirectional tread design make sure the t read pattern is pointed the right way ¢ page 282 . - The wheel bolts should be clean and easy to turn . Check for dirt and corrosion on t he mating surfaces of both the wheel and the hub. Remove all dirt from these surfaces before remo unt ing t he wheel. Tires with unidirectional tread design Tires with unidirectional tread design must be mounted with their tread pattern pointed in the right direction. Using a spare tire with a tread pattern intended for use in a specific direction When using a spare tire with a tread pattern intended for use in a spec ific direction, please note the following: - The direct ion of rotat ion is marked by an arrow on the side of the tire. - If the spare tire has to be installed in the incorrect direction, use the spare tire only temporarily since the tire will not be ab le to achieve its optimum performance charac t eristics wit h regar d to aquaplaning, noise and wea r. - We recommend t hat you pay particular attention t o this fact during wet weathe r and t hat you adjust your speed to match road conditio ns. - Replace the flat t ire with a new one and have it inst alled on your vehicle as soon as possibl e to resto re th e handling advantages of a unidirectio nal tire. Notes on wheel changing Please read the information ¢ page 25 7 if you are going to use a spare tire which is different from the tires on your vehicle. Aft er you change a t ire: - Check the tire pressure on the spare immediately after installation. - Have the wheel bolt tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as pos - 282 sible by your authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service station. - With steel and alloy wheel rims, the wheel bolts are correctly tightened at a torque of 90 ft lb (120 Nm) . - If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn while changing a tire, they should be replaced before you check the t ightening torque. - Replace the flat tire with a new one and have it installed on your vehicle as soon as possi ble. Remount the wheel cover. Until then , drive with extra care and at reduced speeds. & WARNING - If you are going to equip your vehicle with tires or rims which differ from those which were facto ry insta lled, then be sure to read t he informa t ion ¢ page 257. - Always make sure the damaged wheel or even a flat tire and the jack and tool kit are properly sec ured in t he luggage compartment and are not loose in the passeng er compart me nt . - In an accident or sudde n maneuver they could fly forward, injuri ng anyone in the vehicle. - Always store damaged wheel, jack and tools secure ly in t he luggage compart ment. Otherwise, in an accident or sudde n maneuver t hey could fly forward, causing injury t o passengers in the vehicle. - Em er gen cy a ss istanc e Spare Snow chains tire General information Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire) For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on the compact spare tire is not permitted. If you have to dr ive with snow chains and a front t ire fails, mo unt the spare wheel in place of a rear tire. Install the snow chains on the rea r ti re that you removed, and install that in place of t he front t ire that fai led . _& WARNING Fig. 207 Luggage compartment: spare tire Fig. 208 Spare tire (example) The spare tire is intended for short-term use only. Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible. There are some restrictions on the use of the compact spare tire . The compact spare tire has been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from another type of vehicle. Removing th e spare t ire • Turn the handle c:::>fig . 207 (D counter -clockwise. • Remove the spare tire. Removing th e vehicle ja ck ..... N a: CX) ..... I.Cl • Lift up the cover on the right side of the luggage compartment and remove the vehicle jack . - - After insta lling a spare tire, the tire pressure must be checked as soon as possible. The tire pressure is availab le on c>page 260, fig . 195. - If the spare tire is more than 6 years old, use it only in an emergency and with extreme caut ion and careful driving. - The spare tire is intended only for temporary and short-term use. It should be replaced as soon as poss ible with the normal wheel and tire . - After mounting the compact spare tire, the tire pressure must be checked as soon as possible. The tire p ress ure of the compact spa re ti re must be 61 ps i (4 20 kPA); otherwise, you risk having an accident. - Do not dr ive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). You risk having an accident. - Avoid full-throttle acceleration, heavy braking, and fast co rnering . You ris k havi ng an accident. - Never d rive using more than one spare wheel and tire . You risk having an accident. - Normal summer or winter t ires must not be mounted on the compact spare wheel rim. - For technical reasons, the use of tire chains on the spare tire is not permitted. If it is necessa ry to drive wit h t ire chains, t he spare wheel must be mounted on the front axle in the event of a flat in a rear t ire. The newly avai lable front wheel must then be installed in place of the rear wheel wit h the flat tire . Installing the tire chain before mounting the wheel and tire is recommended . - Loose items in the passenger compartment can cause serious personal injury during U"I ..... I.Cl ..... 283 Emergency a s sistance hard braking or in an accident . Never store the inflatable spare t ire or jack and too ls in the passenger compartment. - Norma l summer or winter tires must not be mounted on the compact spare wheel rim. 284 Fuses and bulbs Fuses and bulbs Fuses in the engine compartment Electrical "S witch the ignition and all electrical equ ipment off . .. Check the following table to see which fuse belongs to the equipment ¢ page 287. .. Remove the fuse panel cover ¢ fig. 210. " Remove the plastic clip from the fuse panel cover ¢ fig. 210 . " Remove the fuse using the clamp . .. Rep lace the blown fuse only with an identical new one. fuses Replacing fuses A fuse that has blown will have metal strips tha t have burned through . Fuse color identification Fig. 209 St eer ing column area : cover Color Current rating in amps Black 1 Purpl e Brown 3 5 7.5 Red 10 Blue 15 20 Light brown Yellow White or transparent g reen orange 25 30 40 Fig. 210 Left side of the e ngin e compartment : fus e cover The individual circuits are protected by safety fuses. The fuses are located in the interior and in the engine compartment. Fuses in the interior .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I "S witch the ign ition and all electr ical equipment off . "C heck the following table to see which fuse be longs to the equipment ¢ page 286. "R emove the cover ¢ fig. 209. " Remove the plastic clip from the fuse panel cover in the engine compartment¢ fig. 210 . "Remove the fuse using the clamp . " Replace the blown fuse only with an identical new one . "Install the cover . WARNING -&, Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown fuse with one that has a higher amp rat ing. This can cause damage to the e lectrica l system and a fire . (D Note If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you have ins tal led it, have the elec t rical system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. © Tips - The following table does not list fuse locations that are not used . - Some of the equipment listed in the following tables applies only to certain model versions or certain optional equipment . 285 Fuses and bulbs Interior fuse assignment No. Equipment F17 Instrument cluster F18 Rearview camera F19 Convenience key system control module F20 Power lumbar support adjustment F22 Front passenger's side upper cabin heating (Roadster) F23 Right exterior lighting, on-board compute r (right) F25 Door/driver's side doors (for example power windows) F26 Seat heating F28 AMI High med ia port F29 On-board computer F31 Left on-board computer F32 Driver assistance systems F33 Airbag Fig. 211 Vehicle inter ior: fuse assignme nt No. Equipment Socket relay, interior sound, back-up light F34 switch, temperature sensor, oil level sensor F2 Power top control module (Roadster) Diagnosis, headlight range control system, F35 air quality sensor, automatic dimming rearview mirror F3 ESCcontrol module F36 Right cornering light/ right LED-headlight F4 Central computer processor (MIB-2) F37 Left cornering light/ Fl Power top control modu le (Roadster) FS Gateway F6 Anti-theft alarm system Climate control system, selector lever (auF7 tomatic transmission), parking heater, rear window heater relay coil Diagnosis, electrical parking brake switch, F8 light switc h, rain/light sensor, interior lighting F9 Steering column switch module Fl0 Fll F38 Engine control module, ESCcontrol module F39 Door/front passenger's side doors (for example, power windows) F40 Cigarette lighter, sockets F41 SCRrelay and delivery unit F42 Central locking area F43 On-board computer F45 Power adjustable driver's side seat Display Haldex clutch left LED-headlight F46 Driver's side upper cabin heating (Roadster) F12 MMI area F49 Starter, clutch sensor F13 Adaptive dampers control module FS0 ESC valves F14 Climate control system blower F53 Rear window defogger FlS Electronic steering column lock MMI components, safety belt microphone F16 (Roadster) 286 The power seats* are protected via circuit breakers that automatically switch on after a few seconds after the overload has been reduced. Fuses and bulbs Left engine compartment fuse assignment No. Equipment Fl9 Windshield wipers F20 Horn F22 Terminal SO diagnos is F23 Starter F24 Auxiliary heater heating element 1 F32 LED headlights Bulbs Message Your vehicle is equ ipp ed with maintenance-free headlights and tail lights . However, if a light bulb needs to be replaced, please contact yo ur authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. Fig. 212 Engine compartment: fuse assignment No. Equipment Fl ESC control module F2 ESC control module F3 Engine control module Engine cooling, engine components, auxili F4 ary heater coil re lay (1+2), secondary air injection pump relay FS Engine components, F6 Brake light sensor F7 Engine components tank system F8 Oxygen sensor F9 Engine components, exhaust door, glow time control module FlO Fuel injectors, fuel control module Fll Auxiliary heater heating element 2 F12 Auxiliary heater heating e lement 3 F13 Automatic transmission FlS .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I cont rol module Horn F16 Ignition coil F17 ESC control module , engine control module F18 Term inal 30 (reference voltage) 287 Emergency situations Emergency situations General - This chapter is intended for trained emergency crews and working personnel who have the necessary tools and equipment to perform these operations. - Starting towing by pushing or - CDNote - Vehicles with an automatic transmission not be started by pushing or towing. Starting cables with can- jumper If necessary, the engine con be started by connecting it to the battery of another vehicle. - If the engine should fail to start because of a discharged or weak battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle, using a pair of jumper cables to start the engine. - - Jumper cables Use only jumper cables of sufficiently large cross section to carry the starter current safely. Refer to the manufacturer's specifications. Use only jumper cables with insulated terminal clamps which are distinctly marked : plus(+) cable in most cases colored red minus(-) cable in most cases colored black . A WARNING Batteries contain electricity, acid, and gas. Any of these can cause very serious or fatal injury. Follow the instructions below for safe hand Lingof your vehicle's battery . -Always shield your eyes and avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. -A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures just below 32 °F (0 °C). Before connecting a jumper cable, you must thaw the 288 - frozen battery completely, otherwise it could explode . Do not allow battery acid to contact eyes or skin. Flush any contacted area with water immediately. Improper use of a booster battery to start a vehicle may cause an explosion. Vehicle batteries generate explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame and lighted cigarettes away from batteries. Do not try to jump start any vehicle with a low acid level in the battery . The voltage of the booster battery must also have a 12-volt rating. The capacity (Ah) of the booster battery should not be lower than that of the discharged battery. Use of batteries of different voltage or substantially different "Ah" rating may cause an explosion and personal injury . Never charge a frozen battery. Gas trapped in the ice may cause an explosion . Never charge or use a battery that has been frozen . The battery case may have be weakened . Use of batteries of different voltage or substantially different capacity (Ah) rating may cause an explosion and injury. The capacity (Ah) of the booster battery should not be lower than that of the discharged battery. Before you check anything in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS ~page 236. CDNote -Applying a higher voltage booster battery will cause expensive damage to sensitive electronic components, such as control units, relays, radio, etc. - There must be no electrical contact between the vehicles as otherwise current could already start to flow as soon as the positive (+) terminals are connected. @ Tips The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicle's electrical system. .,.. Emergency When jump starting or charging the battery, never connect the negative ground cable to the battery negative post because the battery manager system must be able to detect the battery's state of charge . Always connect the negative ground cable to the negat ive ground post of the battery manager control unit . Use of jumper cables Make sure to connect the jumper cable clamps in exactly the order described below! situations 1. Connect one end of the red positive cab le on the jump start bolt ~ fig. 214 (D (bo lt under the red cover = "posit ive") of the veh icle to be started @ . 2. Connect the other end to the positive terminal @ of the booster battery @ . Connect NEGATIVE (-) to NEGATIVE (- ) (black) 3. Connect one end of the black negative cable to the negative terminal @ of the booster battery @ . 4 . Connect the other end to the jump start pin @ ("negative") of the vehicle to be started @. Starting the engine Fig. 213 Engine compa rtment:: connecto rs for jum p start cables and cha rger Fig. 214 Jump start ing with the battery of another vehicle :: A - discharged vehicle bat tery, B - booster battery The procedure described be low for connecting jumper cables is intended to provide a jump start for your vehicle. Vehicle with discharged battery: .. Turn off lights and accessories, move lever of automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or P (Park) and set parking brake . Connect POSITIVE (+) to POSITIVE(+) (red) .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I .,. Open the red cover on the positive terminal ~fig . 213 . .. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery @ . Run the eng ine at a moderate speed . .,.Start engine w it h discharged vehicle battery @ in the usual manner. .,.If the engine fails to start, do not keep the starter cranking for longer than 10 seconds. Wait for about 30 seconds and then try again . .. With engine running, remove jumper cables from both vehicles in the exact reverse order . .. Close the red cover on the positive terminal. The battery is vented to the outside to prevent gases from entering the vehicle interior . Make sure that the jumper clamps are well connected with their metal parts in full contact with the battery term inals . A WARNING To avoid ser ious personal injury and damage to the veh icle, heed all warnings and instructions of the jumper cable manufacturer. If in doubt, call for road service. - Jumper cables must be long enough so that the vehicles do not touch . - When connecting jumper cables, make s ure that they cannot get caug ht in any moving parts in the engine compartment. - Before you check anyth ing in the engine compa rt ment, always read and heed all WARNINGS~ page 236. 289 Emergency (D situations A Note Impro per hook -up of ju m per cables can ruin the generato r. - Always con nect POSITIVE(+) to POSITIVE (+), and NEGATIVE( - ) to NEGATIVE(- ) ground post of t he battery manage r contro l unit . - Check that a ll sc rew p lugs on the battery cells are screwed in firmly . If not, t ighten plugs p rior to connect ing clamp o n negat ive bat tery t e rminal. - Please note t hat the procedure fo r con nect ing a jumper cable as desc ribed above ap plies specifica lly to the case of yo ur vehicle being jum p st arte d . When you a re giving a ju mp sta rt to anothe r vehicle , do not conne ct t he neg at ive( -) cab le t o t he neg ative (- ) termin a l o n t he dis cha rged batt e ry @ ¢ fig . 21 4 . In ste ad , securely connec t the negative (-) cab le to either a so lid metal compo nent that is f irm ly bolted to the en gine block or to the engine bloc k itself. If the battery that is bei ng cha rged does not vent to the outside, escap ing battery gas could ignite an d exp lode! Towing with a tow truck General hints Your Audi requires special handling for towing. The fo llow ing informa t ion is to be used by commercial tow truck operators who know how to opera t e the ir equipmen t safe ly. - Never tow your Audi. Towing will cause damage to the engine and transmi ssion. - Never wrap the safety chains or winch cables around the brake lines. - To prevent unnecessary damage, your Audi must be transported with a flat bed truck. - To load the vehicle on to the flat bed, use the towing loop found in the vehicle tools and attach to the front or rear anchorage ¢ page 290 and ¢ page 291 . 290 WARNING A veh icle being towed is not safe for passe nge rs . Never allow a nyone to ride in a vehicle be ing towed, fo r any reason . Front towing loop Fig. 21 5 Fro nt bumpe r: cover Fig. 216 Front bumpe r: install ing t he towing loop The thre aded open ing for t he towing loop is located behind a cover on the rig ht side of t he front bumper . .. Remove the towing loop f rom the vehicle too l kit ¢ page 275 . .. Press inward on the upper left side of t he cap to remove it from the bumper ¢ fig. 215 . .,.Tigh ten the towing loop in the threaded o pening until it st ops ¢ fig. 216 a nd then tig ht en it wit h a wheel wre nch. .,.After usi ng, place th e tow ing loop back in the veh icle tool kit. A WARNING If t he t owing loop is not tig htened unt il it stops when installing, the threads may be pu lled out when towing the vehicle and that could cause an accident . - Emergency Rear towing loop situations Loading the vehicle onto a flat bed truck .. N ~ m Fig. 217 Rear bumper: cover Fig. 219 Vehicle on flat bed truck Front hook up • Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car carrier ramp. • Attach the winch hook to the front towline eye previously installed . Rear hook up Fig. 218 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop There are threads located beh ind the right side of the rear bumper where a towing loop can be installed . • Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool kit ¢ page275 . • To remove from the bumper, push the cap inward in the lower area -arrow- and lift it up in the upper area ~ fig. 217 . • Tighten the towing loop in the threaded opening until it stops ~ fig . 218 and then tighten it with a whee l wrench. • After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit . .&_WARNING • Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car carrier ramp. • Attach the winch hook to the rear towline eye previously installed . @ Tips Check carefully to make sure the hook-up is secure before moving the car up the flatbed truck ramp . - If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when tow ing the veh icle and that could cause an accident . .... N a: CX) .... .... I.Cl .... I.Cl U"I 291 Emergency situations Raising the vehicle Lifting with workshop hoist and with floor jack The vehicle may only be lift ed at the lifting poin ts illust rated. Rear lifting point The lifti ng point is locate d on th e vert ical rein forcement of t he lower sill for t he on -boar d ja ck ¢ fig. 221 . Lifting with vehicle jack Refer to ¢ page 28 0. Ln.,WARNING - To reduc e t he risk of se rious injury and vehicle dam ag e. Fig. 220 Front lift ing point Fig. 221 Rear lifti ng point .,.Read and heed WARNING¢ A .,. Locate lifti ng po ints ¢ fig . 220 and ¢ fig. 221 . .,.Adjust lifting arms of wo rkshop hoist or floor jack to match veh icle lifting points. .,. Inse rt a rubb er pad between t he floor jack/ wor kshop hoist a nd the lift ing poin t s. The vehicle jack mode * must be activated so that the au t omatic adju stment of the Adaptive Air Suspens ion * does no t mak e it more difficult to raise the ve hicle wit h t he floo r ja ck. If you must lift your vehicle with a floor jack to work underneath, be sure the vehicle is safely supported on stands intended for this purpose . Front lifting point The lift ing po int is located on the floor pan re inforcement about at the same leve l as the jack mo unt ing po int ¢ fig . 220 . Do not lift the vehicle at the vertical sill reinforcement. 292 - Always lift the vehicle on ly at the special wor ksh op hoist an d f loor jack lift points illustrated ¢ f ig. 220 and ¢ fig . 221. - Failure to lift t he ve hicle at these points could cause th e veh icle to t ilt o r fall from a lift if t he re is a cha nge in vehi cle we ight dist ribution and balanc e . This mig ht happen, fo r example , whe n he avy com ponents such as t he engi ne block or tr ansmis sion a re removed . - Wh en removing heavy comp onent s like t hese, anchor veh icle t o hoi st or add correspond ing weights t o maint ain the center of gravi ty. Ot he rwise, the vehicle mig ht til t or slip off t he hoist, causi ng serious pe rsona l injur y. (D Note - Be aware of th e fo llow ing poin ts bef or e lifting t he vehicle: - The vehicle should never be lifted or jacked up from underneath the engine oil pan, the transmission housing, the front or rear axle or the body side members . This could lead to serious damage . - To avoid damage to the underbody or chassis frame, a rubber pad must be inserted between the floor jack and the lift points . - Before driving over a workshop hoist , check that the vehicle weight does not exceed the permissible lifting capacity of the hoist. ..,. Emergency situations - Before driving over a workshop hoist, ensure that there is sufficient clearance between the hoist and low parts of the vehicle. 293 Consumer information Consumer Warranty information (D coverages Audi cannot be responsib le for mechanical damage that could result from inadequate fuel, service or parts ava ilability. Your Audi is covered by the following warranties: - New Vehicle Limited Warranty - Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation - Emissions Control System Warranty - Emissions Performance Warranty - California Emissions Control Warranty (USA vehicles only) - California Emissions Performance Warranty (USA vehicles only) Note Audi Service Repair Manuals and Literature Audi Official Factory Service Manuals and Litera ture are published as soon as poss ible after model introd uction . Service manuals and literature are available to order from the Audi Technical Lit erature Ordering Center at : www.audi .techliterature .com Detailed information regarding your warranties can be found in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet . Maintenance General ' Operating your vehicle outside the U.S.A. or Canada Government reg ulati ons in the United States and Canada require that automobi les meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for the U.S.A. and Cana da differ from vehicles sold in other countries. Your vehicle has been designed to he lp keep maintenance requirements to a min imum. However, a certain amount of regular maintenance is still necessary to assure your vehicle's safety, economy and reliability . For detailed vehicle mai ntena nce consult your Warranty & Maintenance booklet . If you plan to take your vehicle outside the continenta l limits of the United States or Canada, there is the poss ibility that: Under difficult operating conditions, for exam ple at extremely low outside temperatures, in very dusty regions, etc., some se rvice work should be performed between the intervals specified. This applies particularly to: - un leaded fue ls for vehicles with catalytic converter may not be available; - oil changes, and - cleaning or replac ing the a ir filter . - fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating . Improper fuel may cause eng ine damage; - service may be inadequate due to lack of proper service facilities, tools or testing equ ipment; - rep lacement parts may not be readily available. - Navigation systems for veh icles built for the U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in Europe, and may not wo rk in other count ries outside North America. @ For the sake of the environment By regularly maintaining your vehicle, you help make sure that emission standards are maintained, thus min imizing adverse effects on the environment. Important considerations for you and your vehicle The increas ing use of elect ronics, soph ist icat ed fuel injection and emission control systems, and the genera lly increasing technica l complexity of today's automobiles, have stead ily reduced the 294 ..,_ Consumer scope of maintenance and repairs which can be carried out by vehicle owners. Also, safety and environmental concerns place very strict limits on the nature of repairs and adjustments to engine and transm ission parts which an owner can perform . Maintenance, adjustments and repairs usually re quire special tools, testing devices and other equipment available to specially trained workshop personnel in order to assure proper per formance, reliability and safety of the vehicle and its many systems. Improper maintenance, adjustments and repairs can impair the operation and reliability of your vehicle and even void your vehicle warranty. Therefore, proof of servicing in accordance with the maintenance schedule may be a condition for upholding a possible warranty claim made within the warranty period. Above all , operational safety can be adversely affected, creating unnecessary risks for you and your passengers. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your authorized Audi dealer or any other properly equipped and qualified workshop. We strongly urge you to give your authorized Audi dealer the opportunity to perform all scheduled maintenance and necessary repairs . Your dealer has the facilities, original parts and trained specialists to keep your vehicle running properly . Performing limited maintenance yourself The following pages describe a limited number of procedures which can be performed on your vehicle with ordinary tools, should the need arise and trained personnel be unavailable. Before performing any of these procedures, always thoroughly read all of the app licab le text and carefu lly follow the instructions given . Always rigorously observe the WARNINGS provided . ..... N c;: Before you check anything in the engine com· partment, always read and heed all WARNINGS c:>&. and c:>&. in Working in the engine compartment on page 236. A information WARNING - Serious personal injury may occur as a result of improperly performed maintenance, ad justments or repairs . - Always be extremely careful when working on the vehicle. Always follow commonly accepted safety practices and general common sense. Never risk personal injury . - Do not attempt any of the maintenance, checks or repairs described on the following pages if you are not fully familiar with these or other procedures with respect to the vehicle, or are uncertain how to proceed. - Do not do any work without the proper tools and equipment. Have the necessary work done by your authorized Audi dealer or another properly equipped and qualified workshop. - The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area. Never reach into the area around or touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and can switch on suddenly - even when the engine is off . The radiator fan switches on au tomatically when the coolant reaches a certain temperature and will continue to run until the coolant temperature drops. - Always switch off the ignition before anyone gets under the vehicle . -Always support your vehicle with safety stands if it is necessary to work underneath the vehicle . The jack supplied with the vehicle is not adequate for this purpose and could collapse causing serious personal injury. - If you must work underneath the vehicle with the wheels on the ground, always make sure the vehicle is on level ground, that the wheels are always securely blocked and that the engine cannot be started. - Always make sure the transmission selector lever (automatic transmission) is in P (Park position) and the park brake is applied . co ..... <J:) Lil ..... ..... <J:) 295 II> Con s umer @ inf o rm a tion A - For the sake of the env ironment - Changing the engine settings will adversely affect emission levels. This is detrimental to the environment and increases fuel consumption. - Always observe environmental regu lations when disposing of old engine oil, used brake fluid, dirty engine coolant, spent batteries or worn out tires. - Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners might be classified as Perchlorate Material -special handl ing may apply, see www.dtsc .ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modu les safety be lts wit h pretensioners are scrapped, all applicab le laws and regulations must be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you. WARNING Using the wrong spare parts or using non-approved accessories can cause damage to the vehicle and serious personal injury. - Use only accessories expressly approved by Audi and genuine Audi spare parts - These parts and accessor ies have been specially designed to be used on your vehicle. - Never install accessor ies such as telephone cradles or beverage holders on airbag covers or with in the airbag deployment zones. Doing so will increase the risk of injury if airbags are triggered in an accident! - Before you check anything in the eng ine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGSQpage 236. (D Note - If items other than genu ine Audi spare parts, add-on equipment and accessory items are used or if repair work is not performed according to specified methods, this can result in severe damage to your vehicle's eng ine and body (such as corrosion) and adversely affect your vehicle's warranty. - If emergency repai rs must be performed elsewhere, have the vehicle exam ined by an authorized Audi dealer as soon as possib le. - The manuf acture r cannot be held liable for damage which occurs due to failure to comply with these stipulations. Accessories and technical changes Additional accessories and parts replacement Always consult an authorized Audi dealer before purchasing accessories. Your vehicle incorporates the latest safety design features ensuring a high standard of active and passive safety. Technical Modifications This safety could be comp romised by non-approved changes to the vehicle. For this reason, if parts have to be replaced, please observe the following points when insta lling addit ional accessories: ' Our guidelines must be complied with when tech nical modifications are made . Always consu lt an authorized Audi dealer before sta rt ing work on any modificat ions. Approved Audi accessories and genuine Audi parts are available from author ized Audi dealers. This will help ensure that vehicle function, performance and safety are not impaired Q ,& . These dealers also have the necessary facilities, too ls and trained specialists to install the parts and accessories properly. Attempting to work on electronic components and the software used with them can cause malfunct ions. Because of the way elect ronic component s are interconnected with each othe r, such malfunc t ions can also have an adverse affect on othe r systems t hat are not directly involved. This ..,. 296 Con s umer inf o rmation means that you risk both a substant ial reduction in the operationa l safety of your vehicle and an increased wear of vehicle parts¢ A . (2) this device must accept any inte rference received, incl uding interference that may cause undesired ope ration. Author ized Audi dealers will perf orm this wor k in a professional and competent manner or, in special cases, refer you to a professional company that specializes in such modifications. FCC Part 15.21 A WARNING Improper repairs and mod ificat ions can change the way veh icle systems work and cause damage to the veh icle and serious personal injury. CAUTI ON: Changes or mod ificat ions not expressly approved by the party responsible fo r compliance could void the user' s aut hority to operate the equipme nt. RSS-Gen Issue 1 Operat ion is subject to the following two cond it ions: (1) this device may not cause inte rfe rence, and If emergency repairs must be performed elsewhere, have the vehicle examined by an authorized Audi dealer as soon as possib le. (2) this device must accept any inte rference, including inte rfe rence that may cause undesired operation of the device. Declaration of Compliance, Telecommunication and Electronic Systems Radio Frequency Devices and Radiocommunication Equipment User Manual Notic e. The manufacturer is not respons ible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthor ized modi fications to this equipment. Devices The fo ll ow ing devices each comp ly w ith FCCPart 15.19, FCC15.21 and RSS-GenIssue 1: - Audi side assist* Cell phone package* Convenience key* Electron ic immobilizer Garage door opener (Homelink) * - Remote contro l key FCC Part 15.19 This device comp li es with part 15 of t he FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions : ,.... (1) This device may not cause harmfu l interfe r- it ence, and N co ..... <J:) Lil ..... ..... <J:) 297 Technical data Technical Vehicle (D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) @ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission data identification @ Engine and transmission code @ Paint number and interior ® Optional equipment numbers The information of the vehicle identification label can also be found in your Warranty & Mainte· nance booklet. Safety compliance sticker Fig. 222 Vehicle Ident if ication Numbe r (VlN) plate : loca· tion on driver's side dash panel XXXXX XX- X- XXXX XXX XX @-+~J:~t::1 ::: xxxxxxxx xxx xxxx xxxx XXXXXX IYPlf'VPE xx xxxxxxx xx xx xx ®i ©-+ XXX KW XXX xxxx XXXXXX IAC KIIR . / tN NENAIJSSt PAI NTNO./WT£Jldl XXXX I XXXXXXXI XX II.- AUSST . / OPTIO NS MOIOlll<B ./CUR. KB. EM: . COil / fAANS , COOE E0A 7D5 4UB 6XM SSG lAS JOZ lLB 3FC SMU 7X1 F0A 9G3 0G7 0YH TL 6 3 KA 8EH Ul A X9B 1XW 803 908 824 7T6 CV7 7K0 4X3 2K2 3L4 4KC 3Y0 413 lS A 7GB 01 A 2EH XX X XX X XX X SRW lB A 0JF QZ7 020 502 4G0 xxxx Fig. 223 Ins ide t he luggage compart ment: veh icle identifi - catio n labe l Vehicle Identification Number (VlN) The Vehicle Id entification Number is located in different places : - under the windshield on the driver's side . - in the Infotainment - on the vehicle identification label. Vehicle identification label The vehicle identification label is located in the luggage compartment in the spare wheel well. The label shows t he following vehicle data: 298 The safety compliance sticker is your assurance that your new vehicle complies with all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufactured . You can find this sticker on the door jamb on the driver's s ide . It shows the month and year of production and the veh icle identification number of your vehicle (perforation) as well as the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). High voltage warning label The high voltage warning label is located in the engine compartment next to the engine hood release. The spark ignition system comp lies w ith the Canadian standard ICES-002. Weights Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The Gross Vehicle We ight Rating (GVWR), and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for front and rear are listed on a sticker on the door jamb on the dr iver's side. The Gross Vehicle We ight Rating includes the weight of the basic vehicle plus fu ll fuel tank, oil and coolant, plus maximum load, which incl udes passenger weight (150 lbs/68 kg per des ignated seating position) and luggage weight ¢ & . Gross Axle Weight Rating The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum load that can be applied at each axle of the veh icle ¢ & . IJll> Techn ical data Vehicle capacity weight The vehicle capacity we ight (max. load) is listed eithe r on the driver's side B-pillar or inside the fuel filler flap . & WARNING - The actual Gross Axle Weight Rating at the front and rear axles shou ld not exceed the permissible weights, and their comb ination must not exceed the Gross Vehicle We ight Rating . - Exceeding perm issible weight ratings can result in vehicle damage, accidents and personal injury . (D Note - The vehicle capacity weight figures apply when the load is distributed evenly in the vehicle (passengers and luggage) . When transport ing a heavy load in the luggage compartment, carry the load as near to the rear axle as possible so that the vehicle's handling is not impa ired . - Do not exceed the maximum perm issible axle loads or the maximum gross vehicle we ight . Always remember that the vehicle's handling will be affected by the extra load. Therefore, adjust your speed accordingly. - Always observe local regulations. Dimensions The dimens ions can vary depending on the model and equipment. Length in (mm) 164.7 (4,184) Width in (mm) 72 .1 (1832) Width across the mirrors in (mm) 77.4 (1966) Height at curb we ight in (mm) 53.3 (1353) When driving on poor roads, by curbs and on steep ramps, make sure that low-lying components such as the spoil er and exhaust system do not come into contact with these or they could be damaged . This applies especially when the vehicle is fully loaded. Capacities Fuel tank gal (l) approx. 14 .5 (55) Windsh ield and headlight washer system* gal (l) approx. 2.4 (9.0) 299 Te c h nical data Gasoline engines TT Coupe 2.0, 4 cylinder Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpm 220 @ 4500 - 6200 Maximum torq ue SAE net lb -ft@ rpm 350@ 1600 - 4400 Displacement CID (cm 3) Fuel q page231 300 121 (1984) Index Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 A A/C (climate control system) ....... . ... . . 53 Accessing media . ... . ... .. . . . ... . . . . . . 159 Accessories 296 Active lane assist . . . . . . . . . . Activating vibration warn ing Adjusting steering time . . . . Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switching on and off . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 74 Alarm system refer to Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . 25 , 30 76 76 Alignment pin (tire changing) . . . . . . . . . . . 275 75 75 75 Adapt ive dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Adaptive light (indicator light) . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Adjusting air distribution (Climate control system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 54 Adjusting the center console lighting . . . . . . 39 Adjusting the sound (tone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Adjusting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the temperature (climate control system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Adjusting the volume Multifunction steering wheel .... 21 , 22, 104 Advanced Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . ............ .. Componen t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How the components work together .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 213 . 195 . 193 . 197 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Airbag-System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care · · · . . . . . ................ . . ... . Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components (front airbags) . . . . . . . . . . . Danger of fitting a child safety seat on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How do the front airbags work? . . . . . . . . How many airbags does my vehicle have? I mportant information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important safety instructions on the knee airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light . . . . . . . . . Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Warning/Ind icator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 When must the system be inspected? . . . 199 207 192 202 214 195 189 202 192 197 195 188 205 204 199 200 202 202 All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 36 All wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 AMI All weather lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . refer to Aud i music interface . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Announcements (settings) refer to Voice guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Anti-freeze Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 87 Anti -slip regulat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Aspect (video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ............. Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preview · · ·.... . . . . ................ Requirements. . . . . . ................ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 123, 162 121 121 126 121 167 127 129 123 134 . . 128 . . . . . . 125 . 123 . 121 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Audi connect services Media .... . ... . . . . . .............. Navigation . . . . . . . . ................ Telephone ......... . ............... Audi music interface . . ................. Audi music stream refer to Wi-Fi audio player Audio files . . 125 . 125 . 125 ........ .. . . . . . . . . ................ Audio player Bl uetooth aud io player ........... Wi-Fi audio player . . . .............. 155 .... 153 . 159 .... .. 152 153 301 Index Audio track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi phone box. . . ................ 162 . . . . 111 Audi Service Repair Manuals and Literature Audi virtual cockpit (instrument cluster) 294 .... 8 Not running for long periods of Replacing the battery . . . . . . . Winter operat ion . . . . . . . . . . . Working on the battery . . . . . . time ..... ..... ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 245 248 245 24S Before dr iving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 143 AUTO Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . Automatic headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 36 Better route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Lock (central locking) 25 Blocked route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Blocking roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 7 Blower (climate control system) . . . . . . . . . . 53 Automatic belt retractor .............. Automatic climate control system refer to Climate control system (automatic) .53 Automatic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Automatic post-collision brak ing system . . . 87 Automatic transm ission . . . . . . . . . Driving t ips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill descent contro l . . . . . . . . . . . Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Launch Control-Program . . . . . . . malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector lever emergency release Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . Shifting manually . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel with shift paddles tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 64 . . 66 . . 70 . . 68 . . 69 . . 69 . . 65 . . 71 . . 65 . . 64 . . 68 . . 68 . . 68 Automatic wipe/wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Automatic zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Auto Safety Hotline ................... 178 AUX input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Avoid damaging the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Blended gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Bluetooth Audio player . . . . . . . . . Connecting a cell phone Device search . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... ...... ....... ....... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 152 110 119 119 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Brake fluid Changing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 244 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake assist system . Brake booster . . . . . . New brake pads . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Brake system Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid specifications for refill and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worn brake pads symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 87 89 89 61 244 244 244 . lS Braking Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 B Break-in period Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balance (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Break-in security feature Bass (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Breaking in New tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charge level . . . . . . . . . . . Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting/connecting Energy management . . . . Important warnings . . . . Indicator light . . . . . . . . . Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .... 13, ... .... ... .... ... ... 245 92 247 245 92 245 13 288 245 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Browser refer to Media center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Bul b failure (indicator light) ............. 16 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Buttons Multifunction steering whee l . . . . . . . . 20, 22 Index C Cable (USB adapter/AUX connection cable) 155 California Proposition 65 Warn ing . . . . . . . 237 Battery specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 111 110 152 110 Child restraint system anchors . . . . . . . . . . 226 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Important safety instructions for us ing child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Tether anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Child safety seat Unused safety belts on the rear seat 217 Child safety seats Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Convertible child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 How do I properly install a child safety seat in my vehicle? . . . . . . ................. 215 Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Installing a ch ild restraint using the LATCH system ... . ... . . . . . .............. . . 227 LATCHsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Lower anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Mounting and releasing the anchorage hook ..... . . . . . . . . ................ . 227 Safety instructions................... 215 . . . ... . 111 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Call Accepting/rejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Holding/resuming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Call waiting (telephone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Canceling route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Capacities Fue l tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Cargo area refer to Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 176 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 CD ... . . . . . . . . . . . .......... Cell phone Audi phone box . . . . . . . . Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing music . . . . . . . . . . also refer to Telephone . . . . . . . 150, 151 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Cell phone compartment refer to Audi phone box........ Central locking . . . . . . . . . . Central locking switch . . . Convenience key . . . . . . . . Emergency locking . . . . . . Luggage compartment lid Power windows . . . . . . . . Remote control key . . . . . Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Child restraints Where can I get additional information about child restraints and their use? . . . . 230 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 25 29 28 30 30 32 27 29 297 Changing engine o il . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Changing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Changing the scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Characters Map. . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . ... . 139 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Charging the battery . . ...... . ..... 111, 155 Child restraint Danger of using child restraints in the front seat. . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . ... . 189 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 City events (Audi connect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Cleaning/removing ice from windows . . . . . 272 Cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Cleaning art ificial leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Cleaning carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 273 Cleaning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Cleaning decorative parts and trim ... 271,272 Cleaning displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Cleaning exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Cleaning rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Cleaning seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Cleaning tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Cleaning textiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Cleaning the Audi virtual cockpit . . . . . . . . . 272 Cleaning the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . 272 303 Index Climate control system (automatic) Adjusting air vents . . . . . . Adjusting the air vents . . . Adjusting the temperature Air distribution, air vents . AUTO (automatic mode) . Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defrosting the windows . Drive select . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defogger . . . Recirculation mode . . . . . ........ ........ ....... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 53 54 53 53 53 53 53 54 80 54 53 Climate control system (manual) Adjusting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Closing Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Closing/opening by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . 29 with the convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Closing and opening With the door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cockpit (overview) 30 ...................... 6 Importing/exporting ........ Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending as text message . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 118 133 117 118 Contacting NHT5A .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 178 Control knob with joystick funct ion . . . . . . . . 98 Controls Multifunction steering whee l . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience key Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the engine (STARTENGINE STOP button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unlocking/locking .................... 20 60 59 28 Convenience opening/clos ing 32 Convertible child safety seats 219 Convertible locking retractor Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22S Using to secure a child safety seat . . . . . . 22S Cooling mode (climate control system) .... 53 Cooling system Adding coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Coolant level checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 38 Coolant temperature ind icator . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Command (voice recognition system) . . . . . 104 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Compartments Crash data recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Compass in the mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Compl iance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Connection manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi MMI connect app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM PIN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 167 168 167 168 168 168 168 Cruise control system Changing speed . . . . Preselecting speed . . Switching off . . . . . . switching on . . . . . . . ......... ......... ......... ......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 73 . 73 . 73 . 72 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Current consumption 23 D Consumer information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Data connection Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Data encryption 166 Data protection Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 149 Connections refer to Media drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Consumpt ion (fuel) Contact Deleting . Displaying Editing . . Favorites . 304 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .................... ................. ................ . ................. ................. .. .. .. .. 23 . 119 . 118 . 118 . 114 127 168 Data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 166 daylight saving t im e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Index Daytime running light .................. Declarat ion of compliance Aud i side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell phone package . . . . . . . . . Convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic immobilizer. . . . . . . Garage door opener (Home link) .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . 36 297 297 297 297 297 Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Exterior temperature display Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-board computer . . . . . . . . Service interval display . . . . . Switching displays . . . . . . . . . .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . 19 .... 9 .... 9 . . . 23 . . 249 20, 22 Drives refer to Media drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Defrosting the windshie ld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Drive select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Defrosting (windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Driving economically 57 DEF (instrument cluster) 23 Driving safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ Driving through water Deleting Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call l ist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact. . . . . . ................ . . ... . Favorites . . . . . ................ . . 114, Home address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 119 119 137 136 Deluxe automatic climate control refer to Climate control system (automatic) .S3 Demo mode refer to Presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Destination on the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Determining correct load limit . . . . . . . . . . 263 Digital compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Dimming the rearview mirror Directory . . . . . . . .............. Connection settings . . . . . Free text search . . ... .... Memory capacity . . . . . . . Navigation destination . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sort order . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing a destination . . . . Symbo ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 117, ..... . ... . ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ................... 133 167 117 119 133 119 119 13 7 133 Directory entry refer to Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Display Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . 20, 22 Navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 also refer to Infotainment system display 166 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Door/rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD/radio d isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door/rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 19 19 Driving time 171 .................. 56 .......................... 23 Dust filter refer to Pollutant filter ................ DVD .. . ..... . . . . . . . .......... Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parental control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognit ion system . . . . . . .. .. .. 52 ...... ...... ...... ...... 150 150 162 108 Dynamic volume refer to Entertainment volume . . . . . . . . . 169 E E-mail 115 Economy route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Electromechanical parking brake refer to Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Electronic differentia l lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Electronic immobilizer .................. 25 ................. 72 Electronic speed limiter Electronic stabilization control (ESC) . . . . . Automatic post-collision braking system . Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency assistance . 87 . 87 . 14 . 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Emergency call (911) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Emergency flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency fueling 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Emergency locking the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Emergency locking the front passenger door 30 Emergency operation Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency braking function . Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment lid . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 30 62 235 . 31 305 Index Emergency release Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency starting Energy management 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ................... 92 Exterior temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting with jumper cables Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 242 S8, 60 . 288 . . S9 Engine compartment Closing the hood . Opening the hood Overview . . . . . . . . Safety precautions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Engine control (indicator light) . . . . . . . . . . . 237 237 238 236 15 Engine coolan t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the oil level . . . . Consumption . . . . . . . . . . I ndicator light . . . . . . . . . Oil consumption . . . . . . . . Specification and viscosity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Engine speed limitation (indicator light) Entering a destination . . . . Geocoordinates . . . . . . . . Last destination . . . . . . . . Stopover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system .. .. .. .. .. Exterior mirro rs Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Dimming ..... . . . . . . . . ............... 40 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . . 239 240 241 240 240 13 239 239 ... 15 .. .. .. .. .. . 131 . 135 . 132 . 135 . 107 External speech dialog system .......... Facebook (Audi connect) 124 Factory settings ...................... 166 Fader (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Fastening Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Convertible child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . 219 Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Fast forwarding/rewindi ng (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Fast forwarding (audio/v ideo file) . . . . . . . . 159 Fast route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Favorite Editing Storing 137 137 Favorites Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone ....... . . . . ............... 161 133 114 File formats (med ia drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Flight inform at ion (Audi connect) . . . . . . . . 123 Floormats ..... 175 . . . . . . . ............... Fog lights/rear fog light(s) .............. 36 Folding the rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 134 Entering letters (speller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Footwell lighting Enter ing numbers/symbols (speller ) . . . . . . . 99 For the sake of the environm ent Environmentally-f riend ly driving . . . . . Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaks..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... Roof rack . . .. . . . . . . . . ... ........ . Environment Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposing of your vehicle batte ry . . . . Proper disposal of drained brake fluid Proper disposal of drained engine oil . Unleaded gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What should I do with an old battery? Exporting/importing Exterior lighting 306 (contacts)... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . 235 248 244 241 231 248 . . . . . . . 118 ....................... 36 109 F Entering destination Point of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entertainment volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 19 Foot pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free text search . Directory..... . Media . . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . ...................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 175 38 . . . 57 . . 233 . . 237 ... 49 ............... ............... ............... ............... 102 117 161 132 Frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 146 Front airbags Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How they work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 197 Index Frontal collis ions and the laws of physics . . 181 Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Front seats Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraints in the front seat . Fue l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blended gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank capac ity . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 173 . 189 . 231 . 23 1 . 231 . . 23 . 231 . 232 ... 8 . 299 . 232 . . 16 57, 80 Fueling Fuel filler door emergency release . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank capac ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . With reserve canister (emergency fueling) 235 . 8 299 233 234 Fuses Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Replac ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 G Garage door opener (Home Link) . . . . . . . . . . 33 Garment hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Octane rating . ................ . . ... . 231 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Gas station message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Generator (indicator light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Global commands (voice recognition system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Head light range control system (indicator light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight range control system . . Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Heated exter ior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear w indow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats... . . . . . .................... Washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating and ventilation system Adjust ing air vents . . . . . . . . . . . Help Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency call (911) ................. Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognit ion system . . . . . .. .. .. .. 16 . 37 271 . 36 . 41 ... ... . .. ... 39 54 54 41 . . . . . . . . . 54 . . . . . . . . 130 117 . . . . . . . . 164 . . . . . . . . 144 . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . 120 . . . . . . . . 105 Hexagonal socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 High voltage warning label Hill descent control Home address . . . Editing . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . Stor ing . . . . . . . Homelink (garage Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ........... ........... ........... ........... door opener) ........... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 133 136 136 136 . 33 .. 6 How are ch ild restraint system anchors related to child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 How many airbags does my vehicle have? . . 195 How safety belt pretensioners wo rk 186 I Glossary of tire and load ing terminology .. 252 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 GPS (time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Ign it ion (ind icator light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Imbalance (wheels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Immobilize r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 25 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . 298 Important th ings to do before dr iving . . . . 171 Importing/exporting (contacts) . . . . . . . . . 118 H Imprope rly worn safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Ind icator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Handsfree refer to Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Headlight range control system . . . . . . . . . . 36 Individual speech training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Inflation pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 307 Index I nformation Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1 Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . 110 Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 I nfo t ainment syst em disp lay Navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Online map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 I nput Using t he spelle r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Using t he voice recog nit ion syst em . . . . . 104 Input level (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Inspection interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 I nst allin g child safety seat s Safety belt s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Installi ng the upper tethe r strap on the anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Inst rument cluste r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 I nst ruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Adju sting the lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 In t erior lighting Intermittent ....................... (windshield wipers) 38 . . . . . . . . . 41 I nt ernet refer to Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 In t ernet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1S3 iPod refer to Audi music interface . . . . . . . . . . . 155 iTunes t agging 145 l Join confe rence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Jumpe r cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . ... Key fob with PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key not recognized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key rep lacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . un locking/ locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, Unlo cking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 25 25 60 25 26 60 27 28 30 Key fob w ith PI N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Key recognit ion (climate cont rol system) 52 Kick-down Automat ic transmission 69 ............... Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How they wor k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important safety instructions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 4 204 205 205 L Lane assist refer to Active lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Installing a child restraint. . . . .... . . . . . 227 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Mounting and releasing the anchorage hoo k .............................. 227 Launch Control-Prog ram (autom atic transm ission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Leat her care/clean ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Left cont rol but t on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Licensing agreements ................. 21 170 Lifting jac k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Light Coming/Leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headli ght fl asher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior/ reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low beam headlig hts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switc hing daytime running lights on and off 38 37 37 38 36 37 Light/ra in sensor Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Intermittent (windshie ld wipers) . . . . . . . . 41 Light ing Exte rior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Interio r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Lights Dayt ime running lights . . . . . . . Fog l ights/rea r fog light(s) . . . . Headlight range cont rol syst em Parking lig ht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 36 . 36 . 36 . 36 Loading the luggage compa rtment . . . . . . . 176 Index Locking/un locking by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with the centra l locking switch . . . . . . . . . . with the convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 29 28 Locking and unlocking On the door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Loss of reception (rad io) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Low beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Lower universal anchor ages (Canada) . . . . . 226 Luggage compartment Cover . . . . . . . . . . ...... .. . . . ... . . . . . . . 50 I ncreasing the size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Luggage compartment lid Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening/clos ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 30 Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Lum bar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5 M Maint enance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 249 Maintenance interva ls Map Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 0 Changing the scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Onli ne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Opt ions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Sett ing as desti nation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Using crosshairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 , 139 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 14 1 Zoom ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 139 Map contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Map funct ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Maxim um speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Genres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sources overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troub leshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Videos.. . . . . . . . . . . . ............ Voice recog nit ion syst em . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 7 160 162 161 160 159 160 164 160 108 Media center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Media drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Media drives Audi music inte rface . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth audio player . . . . . . . . . CD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . Online media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . Troub leshooting . . . . ................ Wi-Fi audio player . . . .............. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 155 152 151 150 151 154 149 150 157 164 153 Memory capacity Directory.. . . . . . . . . . ... . . .... . . . . . . . Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 151 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . 150, 157 Menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Audi music interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 also refer to E-mail . ... . ...... . ... . . . 115 olsoreferto Textmessage ........ 114,115 Microphone on/off .................... 113 Mir ror dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 40 Vanity mir ror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Mir ror compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26 Mir rors Adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . Media Albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Art ists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection settings . . . . . Displaying the DVD men u Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI Restarting . . . . Settings . . . . . . Switching on/off System settings System update . Volume settings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 160 . 160 . 167 . 162 . 16 1 . 160 .... .... ... .... .... .... . . . . . . ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 39 . . 170 . . 166 . . . 95 . . 166 . . 168 . . 169 309 Index MMI search refer to Free text search . . . . . . . . . . 102, 161 199 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System Multifunction steering wheel Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . .... Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching d isplays . . . . . . . . Switching tabs . . . . . . . . . . . Voice guidance . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system . . .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. 20, 21, 20, 20, .. .. Multi Med ia I nterface (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 20 22 22 22 22 21 21 95 Music collection refer to Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Mute (muting) . . . .............. Muting (mute) . . . . . . . . . ...... 21, 22, 169 . . 21, 22, 169 myAudi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Audi connect services ... . . . Finding a destination . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . Loggmg . m . m . th eve h'rcl e .... . . . . . . . . . . PIN ...... . . . . . . . .......... ....... ' 121 122 135 122 122 CD/DVD ..... . . . . . . . ............... Data protection (media drives) . . . . . . . . . Media drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 149 149 170 Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 0 172 Octane rating (gasoline) . . ............ . . 231 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Occupant seating positions Oil Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 , 16 also refer to Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 240 Oil change interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Oil dipstick On-board computer 273 . . . . . . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . 132 . . 139, 141, 0 . . . . . . . 131 . ... . . . 131 . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . 144 . . . . . . . . . 107 . . . . . . . . . 139 Network connection (Wi-Fi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Network select ion (telephone mode) . . . . . 119 Network settings 119 NHTSA Contacting 178 310 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD) Data Link Connector (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . ... . . . ........... . 18 72 142 . 154 Online news (Audi connect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Online media .... . . . ................. Natural leather care/cleaning Nav,ga . t',on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling route guidance . . . . Deleting a destination . . . . . . . Entering an address . . . . . . . . . Last destination . . . . . . . . . . . . Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map preview . . ... . . . .......... MMI control panel ............ MMI touch ' .. . . ................ Point of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . Search area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system . . . . also refer to Map . . . . . . . . . . . Notes Aud i connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 On-Board-Diagnostic System (OBD) System indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . onrrne map N ............. . . . . ... ..... .... . .. 12 1, 128 Online services refer to Aud i connect . . . . . ........... 121 Online traffic information (Audi connect) . . 143 Opening Fuel filler door . . . . . . . .............. Hood ........ . . . . . . . .............. Windows ..... . . . . . . . ............ . . 233 . 237 . . . 32 Opening/closing with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . with the convenience key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 28 Opening and closing On the door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Opening the menu (operating) 95 Operating Multifunction steering whee l . . . . . . . . 20, 22 Operat ing the MMI Control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Free text search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Letter and number speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Menus/symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Index Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Voice recognition system Options Navigation 97 96 104 ......................... .......... .......... . . . ... ... .......... .......... .......... . . . ... . .. . . . .. . . 136 168 21 119 140 162 97 147 119 Overview Menus and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Overview (Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Paint damage 272 159 Pausing (audio/video files) .............. 21 Pausing (audio/v ideo file) ............... 22 175 Periphera l display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone book refer to Directory . . .............. 83 .... 117 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 112 112 112 112 ... 181 ..................... 159 Point of interest Entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 134 Point of interest search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Phone number Call list . . . . . Dialing . . . . . Directory . . . . Favorites . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . ........ ........ ........ ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Physical principles of a frontal collision Playback (media) Pollen fi lter refer to Pollutant filter ................ 52 ........................ 52 Paint No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Pollutant filter Parental control (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 162 Parking aids Cleaning sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency braking function I ndicator light . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 12, .. 61 62 61 62 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 61 61 62 61 Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Power supply failure Releasing/setting . Starting from a stop also refer to Parking ...... ....... ...... brake . Parking system Adjusting the disp lay/warning tone Cleaning the rearview camera . . . . . Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . also refer to Parking systems . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 83, 86 84 86 83 83 84 84 a: co Parking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 82 ~ Parking (automatic transmission) 66 :;;: ..... Parts replacement ..... Pause (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 p ..... . . . . . . . . . . 200 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options menu Connection manager . . . . . . Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directory. . . . . . .............. Map .. . . . ... . .................. Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . Radio settings . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . .............. r--1 PASSENGERAI R BAG OFF light ......... Power windows Convenience opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 33 Pregnant women Special considerat ions when wearing a safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Presets Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Presets list refer to Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Programming a button (multifunction steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Prompt (voice recognition system) . . . . . . . 104 Proper occupant seating positions ....... 172 Proper safety belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 311 Index Proper seating position Recuperation Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Occupants . . . . . . ................ . . . . 172 Rear passengers.............. . ... . .. 174 Protecting 272 Q quattro (all wheel drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Question What happens to unbelted occupants? . . 182 ......................... Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 119 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Remote control refer to Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Remote control key . . LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal izing . . . . . . Replacing the battery unlocking/locking .. 25 27 25 27 27 .. .. .. . .. . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . Repair manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Repairs Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 R Radiator fan 243 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Additional station information . . . . . . . . . 146 Free text search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Frequency band . . . . . . . . . . Menu.... . . . . . ... . .......... MMI control panel . . . . . . . . Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program guide . . . . . . . . . . . Radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... . . . . . 146 146 145 147 146 146 Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Replacement key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . 42 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rerouting .... . . . . . . . . . . . ........ Reset button (trip odometer) ............ 23 Resetting the trip odometer ............. 23 Reset (restart) ....................... 170 Restart (reset) ....................... 170 Retract New brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system Right control button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio sett ings Addit ional stat ion information Reverse (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . Rewinding (audio/v ideo file) . . . . . . . . . . . . Rims ......... . . . . . . . . . 147 Rain/light sensor Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Intermittent (windshield wipers) . . . . . . . . 41 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Range (fuel level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Reading aloud Possible commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Rear lid 178 137, 142 Stat ion list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Updating stations (station list) . . . . . . . . . 145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 25 . . . . . . . ............... Ringtone settings ... . . . ........... 184 64 159 21 264 119, 169 Road noise compensation (SDVC) . . . . . . . . 169 Roaming refer to Data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Route criteria ........................ 13 7 Route guidance refer to Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Route information .................... 141 Route list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 refer to Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . 30 Rear spoiler . . . . . . . . . .... .. .... ........ 91 s Rearview camera refer to Parking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 84 Safe driving ....... Rearview mirror dimming Safe drivi ng habits . . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Recirculation mode (climate contro l system) 53 312 . . . . ............... 171 .. 171 Index Safety Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Correct seating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Safety belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Safety belts worn by pregnant women . . . 185 Safety belt pretensioner Service and d isposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Danger to passengers who do not wear a safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Improperly worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator light (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . Special considerations for pregnant wom en . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unfasten ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worn properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety compliance sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety equipment . . . . . . . . Safety features for occupant protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety guidelines Seat adjustment . . . . . . . 187 184 272 182 184 186 13 17 182 185 186 183 223 185 186 180 182 180 298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 restraint and . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Safety instructions for side curta in airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for using child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . For using safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring th e Advanced Airbag System . . . . 211 215 183 202 Safety systems (indicator light) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Saving fuel Recuperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Screen refer to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 22 Screwdr iver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7 5 SD card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Search function refer to Free text search . . . . . . . . . . 102, 161 Searching for a destination online . . . . . . . . 134 Seat adjustment Driver's seat . . . Front passenger's Safety gu idelines Seat heating . . . . Seating capacity ............... seat . . . . . . . . . . .............. ............... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . 44 44 44 54 180 Seating position Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to adjust the front seats . . . . . . Incorrect seat position . . . . . . . . . . . Occupants. . . . . . . . . . .............. Rear passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct seating position . . . . . . . . . . Easy seat entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of seats Security Audi connect . . . . . . ................ Data protection (media drives) ..... Navigation . . . . . . . . . ...... .. ...... Telephone . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ..... Voice recognition system ............ Selecting a source (media) ............. Selection menu Mult ifunct ion steering wheel . . . . . . Open ing/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective wheel torque control . . . . . . Selector lever (automatic transmission) Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial number (telephone) . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. 172 173 173 17 4 172 17 4 .. .. .. .. . 45 172 . 46 . 50 180 . .... .. .. . . 126 149 131 110 104 159 . . . . . 21 . . . . . 96 . . . . . 87 . . . . . 71 . . . . . 64 . . . . 119 Service and disposal Safety belt pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Service interva l display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directory.. . . . . . . . . ................ Map....... . . . . . . . ................ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone. . ... . . . . . .............. Voice recognition system . . . . . . . Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . ...... ...... .. ...... ...... 166 119 141 162 166 119 166 166 Shift paddles (automatic transm iss ion) . . . . 68 313 Index Showing on map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shuffle 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Side airbags Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 How they work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the brightness . Sensor range . . . . . . . . . . switching on and off . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How they work . . ................ . . .. Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 79 77 79 209 209 210 211 SIM card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Software licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Sources of information about child restraints and their use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Speed-dependent volume control (SDVC) . . 169 Speed limit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Stored stations refer to Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Storing current location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Street view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 S tronic transmission refer to Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 64 S tronic (automatic transmission) 64 ......... Subtitles (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Subwoofer (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Swapping ........................... 113 Switching daytime running lights on and off 37 Switching tabs refer to Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . .......... 20, 21, 22 Switch ing the ignition on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Directory . . . . . . . . . . Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . Route criteria . . . . . . Traffic information . also refer to Indicator ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... lights ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 58 . . . . 133 . . . . 139 . . . . 139 . . . . 138 . . . . 143 ...... 9 ......................... 72 System indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . 15, 17 Speed warn ing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 System settings ...................... 166 Speller.... 99 System update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 System (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 STARTEngine STOPbutton 58 Speed limiter . . . . . .................. . ... .............. Starting from a stop Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T 62 Starting point (presentation mode) . . . . . . 137 Starting (engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station list (radio) .................... 58 145 Steering Electromechanical steer ing ..... . ... . . 90, 0 I ndicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 also refer to Electromechanical steering 90 Steering whee l adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . also refer to Multifunction steering whee l . . ............... S8 68 20, 21, 22 Steps for determining correct load limit . . . 263 Stopover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Stopping (eng ine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 S9 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 19, 23 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options during a phone call . . . . . Replacing a call . . . . . . . . . .......... Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch ing the microphone on/off . Troub leshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... ...... ...... 110 110 167 114 112 113 113 119 113 120 Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 also refer to Cell phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Index Temperature disp lay Exterior temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Temperature ind icator Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Tether anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Text message . . . . .......... . ..... 114 , 115 Sending a contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Text messages refer to Text message . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115 ..... ...... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... . 26 7, ..... ..... ..... ..... 250 91 265 275 277 258 260 268 261 258 252 266 TMC/TMCpro refer to Traffic information (TMC) . . . . . . 143 Tone (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Lil ..... <J:) ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 130 164 144 148 120 37 124 u Units of measurement 68 .. .. .. .. .. Tw itter (Audi connect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tip t ronic (automatic transmission) ........ .... .... .... .... .... .......................... Uniform ti re quality grading Tool .. . . . . . . . . . . . .......... ..... <J:) ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 , 166 Tires and wheels Glossary of tire and loading terminology . 252 Tires and vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . 262 a: co .. .. .. .. .. Unfastening safety belts Tires . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... .. . . . ... . All wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low aspect ratio tires . . . . . . . . . . . Repair set . . . . . ... . . .. ....... .. Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pr essure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure monitoring system . . Tire pressure ta ble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . Unidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . r-.1 Turn signals .. .. .. .. .. Tie-downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Tire Mobility System (tire repair set) . . . . . . 275 ..... Troub leshooting Audi connect . . Media drives . . . Navigation . . . . Radio . . . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 166 Unlocking/locking by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . with the convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 29 28 Unlocking and locking On the doo r lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Updating station (radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 USB adapter (Audi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15S USB stick refer to Audi mu sic int erface . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Using Audi connect services MMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system 121 106 V Vanity mir ror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . . 275 Vehicle Care/cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Towing Tow trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Vehicle identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Towing loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Vehicl e Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . 298 TPMS (tire pressure mon itoring system) . . . 268 Vehicle jack . . . . . . . . ....... Traffic information (TMC) . Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading aloud . . . . . . . . . Showing on the map . . . . Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 142 . 143 . 143 . 143 . 169 Transmission malfunction (indicator light) . . 70 Transport Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Treb le (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Version information View (multifunction .. . 275, 280, 283 ................... 166 steering wheel) . . . . 20, 22 Voice guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 also refer to Multifunct ion steering wheel . . . .............. 20, 21, 22 Voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 315 Index Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individ ual speech training . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inpu t assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchi ng on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume . . . . . . . . . ... . ...... . . . ... Voice recognition system commands Global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enterta inment volume . . MMI to uch . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking system . . . . . . . . . Syst em volume . . . . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. . . . 2 1, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .... .... .... .... .... .... . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . 2 1, 104 166 105 104 21 104 166 104 104 105 108 108 105 169 169 169 169 169 169 104 vv 15 Warni ng/Indicator lights Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light . . . . . . . . . 200 Warning lights refer to Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Wa rranty coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 16 Washing matte f inish paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Washer fluid level (indicator lig ht) . . . . . . . . Weath er (Audi conne ct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Web radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 W hat happens if you wear you r safety belt too loose? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 182 What impairs driving saf ety? . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2 W hat happens to unbelted occupants? . . . . Wheel bol t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 316 When must t he airbag system be inspect ed? l99 Where are lower anchorages located? . . . . 227 Why safety belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Wi -Fi Audi music stream Audio player . . . . . Hot spot . . . . . . . . Online media . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . also refer to Wi -Fi 153 153 12 6 15 4 126 153 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 153 Window regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Wi-Fi audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows Cleaning/removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Window washer syst em Reservoir capacity 299 Windshie ld cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 also refer to Windsh ield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Windshie ld washer system . . . . . . . . . . 41, 248 Wa rni ng/ind icator lights Syst em indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary of tire and load ing terminology Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires and veh icle load lim its . . . . . . . . . . Wheel wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . . . . . 250 271 252 277 262 Windsh ield wipers Cleaning w iper blades . . . . . . . . . . Folding up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing windshield wiper blades Switc hing on and off . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... . . . . . 42 42 16 42 41 Win t er dr iving Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Win t er operat ion Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defrost the w indows . . . . . . . . . Windshie ld washer system . . . . 245 242 . 54 248 Winter tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Winter use Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Removing ice from windows . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Writing a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 X Xenon headlights ...................... 36 Index z Zoom ing on t he map Mul tifunction steeri ng wheel . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom (map) 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 317 © 2015 AUDI AG It has always been Aud i's pol icy to cont inuously improve its products. Audi, therefore, reserves the r ight to make changes in design and specifications, and to make additions or improvements in its products w ithout incurring any obligation to install them on products previous ly manufactured. Text, illustrations and specifications in this book are based on the most up-to-date information available at the time of printing . These instructions may not be reproduced or translated in who le or in part without written consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI AG. Subject to alteration or amendment. Printed in Germany. Editorial deadline: 03/05/2015 @ For the sake of the environment Printed on environmentally friendly paper (bleached without chlorine, recyclab le) Owner's Manual 2016 Audi n Coupe Englisch Nordamerika 161 .561 .BFV.21 04.2015 111 Ill 1111 16 15618FV 2 1 I www.audi.com

Audi 2016 TT Coupe Owner Manual

Related manuals

Audi

2016 TT / TTS Coupe

Audi

2016 Q3

Audi

2015 RS5 Coupe

Audi

2016 RS 7 Sportback

Audi

2018 Q3

Audi

2015 A3

Audi

2015 A3

Audi

2016 A3

Audi

2017 R8 Coupe

Audi

2016 S5 Coupe

Audi

2016 A4 / S4

Audi

2016 A8 / S8